Delta PLC Applications Programmig (1).pdf
-
Upload
arvind-kumar -
Category
Documents
-
view
449 -
download
73
description
Transcript of Delta PLC Applications Programmig (1).pdf
DVP-PLC Application Manual【Programming】
Table of Contents Chapter 1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram
Preface-The Background and Functions of PLC ...................................................... 1-1
1.1 The Working Principles of Ladder Diagram........................................................ 1-1
1.2 The Difference between Traditional Ladder Diagram and PLC Ladder Diagram ... 1-2
1.3 Edition Explanation of Ladder Diagram ............................................................. 1-4
1.4 The Edition of PLC Ladder Diagram .................................................................. 1-8
1.5 The Conversion of PLC Command and Each Diagram Structure ......................... 1-11
1.6 The Simplification of Ladder Diagram ............................................................... 1-14
1.7 The Example for Designing Basic Program........................................................ 1-16
Chapter 2 DVP-PLC Function 2.1 Summary of DVP-PLC Device Number .............................................................. 2-1
2.2 Value, constant [K] / [H] ................................................................................... 2-7
2.3 The Numbering and Function of External Input/Output Contact [X] / [Y] .............. 2-9
2.4 The Numbering and Function of Auxiliary Relay [M] ........................................... 2-11
2.5 The Numbering and Function of Step Relay [S] ................................................. 2-12
2.6 The Numbering and Function of Timer [T] ......................................................... 2-13
2.7 The Numbering and Function of Counter [C]...................................................... 2-16
2.8 Register Number and Function [D], [E], [F] ........................................................ 2-28
2.8.1 Data register [D] ........................................................................................ 2-28
2.8.2 Index Register [E], [F] ................................................................................ 2-29
2.8.3 File Register Function and Characteristics .................................................. 2-30
2.9 Nest Level Pointer[N], Pointer[P], Interrupt Pointer [I] ........................................ 2-30
2.10 Special Auxiliary Relay and Special Register ................................................... 2-33
2.11 Special Auxiliary Relay and Special Register Functions.................................... 2-53
2.12 Fault Code Information ................................................................................... 2-84
Chapter 3 Basic Commands 3.1 Summary of Basic Command and Step Ladder Command .................................. 3-1
3.2 Basic Commands Explanations ......................................................................... 3-3
Chapter 4 Step Ladder Commands 4.1 Step Ladder Command [STL], [RET] ................................................................. 4-1
4.2 Sequential Function Chart (SFC) ...................................................................... 4-1
4.3 Step Ladder Command Explanation .................................................................. 4-2
4.4 Reminder of Design on the Step Ladder Program .............................................. 4-7
4.5 Categories of Procedures ................................................................................. 4-8
4.6 IST command .................................................................................................. 4-18
Chapter 5 Application Commands 5.1 Summary of Parameters ................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Application Command Structure ........................................................................ 5-7
5.3 Handling of Numeric Values ............................................................................. 5-12
5.4 Index register E, F ........................................................................................... 5-15
5.5 Index for Commands ........................................................................................ 5-17
Chapter 6 Application Commands API 00-49........................................... 6-1 Chapter 7 Application Commands API 50-99........................................... 7-1 Chapter 8 Application Commands API 100-149 ....................................... 8-1 Chapter 9 Application Commands API 150-199 ....................................... 9-1 Chapter 10 Application Commands API 215-246 ..................................... 10-1
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram
DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-1
Preface----The Background and Functions of PLC PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) is one of electronic equipments. It was called “Sequence Controller”
before. It was named “Programmable Logic Controller (PLC)” by NEMA (National Electrical Manufacture Association)
in 1978 and defined as electronic equipment. The operation of PLC is in the following:
Step 1. Read the external input signal, such as the status of keypad, sensor, switch and pulse.
Step 2. Using microprocessor to execute the calculations of logic, sequence, timer, counter and formula according to
the status and the value of the input signal read in the step 1 and pre-write programs saved inner to get the
corresponding output signal, such as open or close of relay, operation of controlled machine or procedure to control
automatic machine or procedure of manufacture. PLC also can be used to maintain and adjust of production program
by editing or modifying the peripheral equipments (personal computer/handheld programming panel). The common
program language of PLC is ladder diagram.
There are stronger functions in PLC with the development and application requirements of electronic technology,
such as position control, network and etc. Output/Input signals are DI (Digital Input), AI (Analog Input), PI (Pulse
Input), DO (Digital Output), AO (Analog Output) and PO (Pulse Output). Thus PLC plays an important role in the
feature industry.
1.1 The Working Principles of Ladder Diagram
Ladder diagram is an automatic control diagram language that developed during World War II. At first, it just has
basic components, such as A contact (normally open), B contact (normally close), output coil, timer counter and etc.
(The power panel is made up of these basic components) It has more functions, differential contact, latched coil and
the application commands, add, minus, multiply and divide calculation, that traditional power panel can’t make since
PLC is developed.
The working principles of the traditional Ladder Diagram and the PLC Ladder Diagram are similar to each other;
the only difference is that the symbols for the traditional ladder diagram are expressed in the format that are close to
its original substance, while those for the PLC ladder diagram employ the symbols that are more explicit when being
used in computers or data sheets. In the Ladder Diagram Logics, it could be divided into the Combination Logics
and the Sequential Logics, and is described as follows:
1. Combination Logics:
The following example is the combination logics that show in traditional diagram and PLC ladder diagram
separately.
Traditional Ladder Diagram PLC Ladder Diagram
X4
X0
X2
X3
X1
Y0
Y2
Y1
X0Y0
X1Y1
Y2X2
X3
X4
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram
DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-2
Example 1: Circuit 1 utilizes one X0 (NO: Normally Open) switch, which is normally known as the “A” switch or
contact, and its characteristic is that the contact is in the OFF condition at regular time (not pressed); the
output point Y0 is thus in OFF condition. However, once the switch motion (the button is pressed) is
conducted, the contact will be ON, and the output point Y0 will be in ON condition.
Example 2: Similarly, Circuit 2 utilizes the X1 (NC: Normally Close) switch, which is normally known as the “B” switch
or contact, and its characteristic is that the contact is in the ON condition at regular time; the output point
Y0 is thus in ON condition. While the switch motion is conducted (which is in the OFF condition), the
output point Y0 is in OFF condition.
Example 3: This is an example of combination logics output, which has more than one input equipment. The output
point Y2 will be in ON condition when X2 is in OFF condition or X3 and X4 are in ON condition.
2. Sequential logics:
The sequential logics are a type of circuit that possesses the “Draw-Back” structure, which is to draw back the
circuit’s output result and has it serve as the input condition. Thus, under the same input condition, different
output results will be generated in accordance with previous conditions and motions with different orders.
The following example is the sequential logics that show in traditional diagram and PLC ladder diagram
separately.
Traditional Ladder Diagram PLC Ladder Diagram
X5 X6 Y3
Y3
Y3X5
Y3
X6
When the above circuit is just supplied with power, although the X6 switch is ON, the X5 switch is still OFF, thus,
the output relay Y3 will be in OFF condition; output of the relay will only be ON after X5 is ON. Once the output relay
Y3 is in ON condition, there will be a feedback signal containing the ON condition from Y3 to connect in parallel with
the A contact of X5; this circuit is thus also known as the self-latched circuit. The circuit motion is showed in the
following chart: Device status Step X5 X6 Y3
1 N N OFF 2 Y N ON 3 N N ON 4 N Y OFF 5 N N OFF
N: is in OFF condition Y: is in ON condition
From above chart, you can find that the same input may get different result. For example, in the step 1 and 3, the
status of X5 and X6 are in OFF condition but Y3 is in OFF condition in step 1 and in ON condition in step3. That is due
to the self-latched circuit feedback input. In this example, it explains with contact A, contact B and output coil. The
usage of other equipments is the same with this. Please refer to the chapter 3 for the detail.
1.2 The Difference between Traditional Ladder Diagram and PLC Ladder Diagram
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram
DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-3
Although the working principles are in accordance with each other for the traditional ladder diagram and the PLC
ladder diagram, PLC is indeed utilizing the microcomputer chip (MCU) to simulate the motion of the traditional ladder
diagram, which is to use the scan method to look over one by one the conditions of all input devices and output coils,
and afterwards, with the conditions in consideration, to calculate and generate the same output result as that of the
traditional ladder diagram based on the logics of the combination status of the ladder diagram. However, since that
there is only one MCU, the only way to examine the circuits is to look it over one after another within the ladder
diagram program, then calculate the output result in compliance with the program and the input/output status, and
finally, output the results to the external interface; thereafter, start over with the readout of the input status, the
calculation, output, and repeatedly go over the above-mentioned motions again; the time needed to complete the
whole set of cyclic motion is called one Scan Time. The scan time will become longer in accordance with the
increment of the program. With this scan time, it will incur repeated input detections, and thus, result in delay in the
output responses; and the longer the delay time, the greater the error towards the control, and what’s worse, is that
the condition might be unqualified for the control requests. By then, PLC (with faster Scan Time) would be chosen to
do the job; the scan speed is thus an essential specification to PLC. Thanks to the advanced technique of ASIC (IC
with specific functions) within the microcomputer, PLC of the present has made greater progress in the scan speed,
and what follows is the scanning chart of the PLC Ladder Diagram Program.
Calculate the result by ladder diagram algorithm (it doesn’t sent to the outer output point but the inner equipment will output immediately.)
Y0
X0 X1Y0Start
M100 X3Y1
X10
::
X100 M505Y126End
Send the result to the output point
Read input state from outside
Execute in cycles
In addition to the difference of scan time, PLC ladder diagram and traditional ladder diagram also has difference
in “reverse current”. In the following chart of traditional ladder diagram, if X0, X1, X4 and X6 are in ON condition and
the others are in OFF condition, output point Y0 will be in ON condition as shown as dotted line in the following
diagram. But in the PLC ladder diagram will have error in the peripheral equipment—WPLSoft due to scan method of
MCU is from up to down and from left to right.
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram
DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-4
Reverse current of traditional ladder diagram
X6
X0 X1 X2
X3 X4 X5a b
Y0
Reverse current of PLC ladder diagram
X6
X0Y0
X1 X2 Y0
X3 X4 X5a b
There is a fault in the 3rd row of ladder diagram.
1.3 Edition Explanation of Ladder Diagram
Ladder diagram is a diagram language that applied on the automatic control and it is also a diagram that made
up of the symbols of electric control circuit. PLC procedures are finished after ladder diagram editor edits the ladder
diagram. It is easy to understand the control flow that indicated with diagram and also accept by technical staff of
electric control circuit. Many basic symbols and motions of ladder diagram are the same as mechanical and electrical
equipments of traditional automatic power panel, such as button, switch, relay, timer, counter and etc.
The kinds and amounts of PLC internal equipment will be different with brands. Although internal equipment has
the name of traditional electric control circuit, such as relay, coil and contact. It doesn’t have the real components in it.
In PLC, it just has a basic unit of internal memory. If this bit is 1, it means the coil is ON and if this bit is 0, it means the
coil is OFF. You should read the corresponding value of that bit when using contact (Normally Open, NO or contact a).
Otherwise, you should read the opposite sate of corresponding value of that bit when using contact (Normally Close,
NC or contact b). Many relays will need many bits, 8-bits makes up a byte. 2 bytes can make up a word. 2 words
makes up double word. When using many relays to do calculation, such as add/ subtraction or shift, you could use
byte, word or double word. Furthermore, the two equipments, timer and counter, in PLC not only have coil but also
value of counting time and times.
In conclusion, each internal storage unit occupies fixed storage unit. When using these equipments, the
corresponding content will be read by bit, byte or word.
Basic introduction of the inner equipment of PLC: (Refer to Chapter 2 for detail)
Input relay
Input relay is the basic storage unit of internal memory that corresponds to external input
point (it is the terminal that used to connect to external input switch and receive external input
signal). Input signal from external will decide it to display 0 or 1. You couldn’t change the state of
input relay by program design or forced ON/OFF via HPP. The contacts (contact a, b) can be
used unlimitedly. If there is no input signal, the corresponding input relay could be empty and
can’t be used with other functions.
Equipment indication method: X0, X1,…X7, X10, X11,…. The symbol of equipment is X
and the number uses octal. There are numeric indications of input point on MPU and
expansion unit.
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram
DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-5
Output relay
Output relay is the basic storage unit of internal memory that corresponds to external output
point (it is used to connect to external load). It can be driven by input relay contact, the contact of
other internal equipment and itself contact. It uses a normally open contact to connect to external
load and other contacts can be used unlimitedly as input contacts. It doesn’t have the
corresponding output relay, if need, it can be used as internal relay.
Equipment indication: Y0, Y1,…Y7, Y10, Y11,…. . The symbol of equipment is Y and the
number uses octal. There are numeric indications of output point on MPU and expansion
unit.
Internal relay The internal relay doesn’t connect directly to outside. It is an auxiliary relay in PLC. Its
function is the same as the auxiliary relay in electric control circuit. Each auxiliary relay has the
corresponding basic unit. It can be driven by the contact of input relay, output relay or other
internal equipment. Its contacts can be used unlimitedly. Internal auxiliary relay can’t output
directly, it should output with output point.
Equipment indication: M0, M1,…, M4, M5. The symbol of equipment is M and the number
uses decimal number system.
STEP DVP PLC provides input method for controlling program of step actions. It is very easy to
write control program by using the conversion of control step S of command STL. If there is no
step program in the program, step point S could be used as internal relay M or alarm point.
Equipment indication: S0, S1,…S1023. The symbol of equipment is S and the number
uses decimal.
Timer Timer is used to control time. There are coil, contact and timer storage. When coil is ON, its
contact will act (contact a is close, contact b is open) when attaining desired time. The time value
of timer is set by settings and each timer has its regular period. User sets the timer value and
each timer has its timing period. Once the coil is OFF, the contact won’t act (contact a is open
and contact b is close) and the timer will be set to zero.
Equipment indication: T0, T1,…,T255. The symbol of equipment is T and the number uses
decimal system. The different number range corresponds with the different timing period.
Counter Counter is used to count. It needs to set counter before using counter (i.e. the pulse of
counter). There are coil, contacts and storage unit of counter in counter. When coil is form OFF
to ON, that means input a pulse in counter and the counter should add 1. There are 16-bit, 32-bit
and high-speed counter for user to use.
Equipment indication: C0, C1,…,C255. The symbol of equipment is C and the number
uses decimal.
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram
DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-6
Data register PLC needs to handle data and operation when controlling each order, timer value and
counter value. The data register is used to store data or parameters. It stores 16-bit binary
number, i.e. a word, in each register. It uses two continuous number of data register to store
double words.
Equipment indication: D0, D1,…,D9,999. The symbol of equipment is D and the number
uses decimal.
File register The file register can be used to store data or parameter when the register that PLC needs is
not enough during handling data and parameter. It can store 16-bit binary number, i.e. a word, in
each file register. It uses two continuous number of file register to handle double word. There are
1600 file registers for EP series and 10000 file registers for EH series. There is not the real
equipment number for file register, thus it needs to execute READ/WRITE of file register via
commands API147 MEMR, API148 MEMW or the peripheral equipment HPP and WPLSoft.
Equipment indication: K0~K9,999. There is no equipment symbol and uses decimal
number for number.
Index register Index register E and F are 16-bit data register just the same as general data register. It can
be wrote and read freely and has the function of index indication to use for character device, bit
device and constants.
Equipment indication: E0~E7, F0~F7. The symbols of equipment are E, F and the number
uses decimal.
The structure and explanation of ladder diagram:
Ladder Diagram Structure Explanation Command Equipment
Normally open, contact a LD X, Y, M, S, T, C
Normally close, contact b LDI X, Y, M, S, T, C
Serial normally open AND X, Y, M, S, T, C
Parallel normally open OR X, Y, M, S, T, C
Parallel normally close ORI X, Y, M, S, T, C
Rising-edge trigger switch LDP X, Y, M, S, T, C
Falling-edge trigger switch LDF X, Y, M, S, T, C
Rising-edge trigger in serial ANDP X, Y, M, S, T, C
Falling-edge trigger in serial ANDF X, Y, M, S, T, C
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram
DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-7
Ladder Diagram Structure Explanation Command Equipment
Rising-edge trigger in parallel ORP X, Y, M, S, T, C
Falling-edge trigger in parallel ORF X, Y, M, S, T, C
Block in serial ANB none
Block in parallel ORB none
Multiple output MPS MRD MPP
none
Output command of coil drive OUT Y, M, S
S
Step ladder STL S
Basic command, Application command
Application command
Please refer chapter 3 basic command and chapter 5 application command
Inverse logic INV none
Block: The block is the ladder diagram that made up of the serial or parallel calculation of two or above equipments. It
will get the result of parallel block or serial block according to operation character.
Serial block
Parallel block
Divergent line and combinative line: the vertical line is usually a separation for devices. This line is combination line
for the left device (it means that there are at least two columns or above circuit at
the left connect to this vertical line) this line is the divergent line for the right
device (it means that there are at least two rows or above circuit connect to this
line.
1 2
combinative line of block 1divergent line of block 2
combinative line of block 2
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram
DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-8
Network: this is the complete network that made up of devices and blocks. The vertical line or continuous line and the
block or device that line can connect to is the same network.
Independent network: Network1
Network2
Incomplete network:
1.4 The Edition of PLC Ladder Diagram
The program edited method is from left power line to right power line. (the right power line will be omitted during
the edited of DPLSoft and WPLSoft.) After editing a row, go to editing the next row. The maximum contacts in a row
are 11 contacts. If you need more than 11 contacts, you could have the new row and start with continuous line to
continue more input devices. The continuous number will be produced automatically and the same input point can be
used repeatedly. The drawing is shown as follows.
Y100000
00000X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10 C0 C1
X11 X12 X13
The operation of ladder diagram is to scan from left upper corner to right lower corner. The output handling,
including the operation frame of coil and application command, at the most right side in ladder diagram.
Take the following diagram for example; we analyze the process step by step. The number at the right corner is
the explanation order.
TMR T0 K10
Y1X0 X1 Y1 X4
M3T0M0
X3 M1
122
34
55
567
8
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram
DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-9
The explanation of command order:
1 LD X0 2 OR M0 3 AND X1 4 LD X3 AND M1 ORB 5 LD Y1 AND X4 6 LD T0 AND M3 ORB 7 ANB 8 OUT Y1 TMR T0 K10
The detail explanation of basic structure of ladder diagram
1. LD (LDI) command: give the command LD or LDI in the start of a block.
LD command
AND Block
LD command
OR Block The structures of command LDP and LDF are similar to the command LD. The difference is that command LDP
and LDF will act in the rising-edge or falling-edge when contact is ON as shown in the following.
X0
OFF ON OFFTime
Rising-edge
X0
OFF ON OFFTime
Falling-edge
2. AND (ANI) command: single device connects to a device or a block in series.
AND command
AND command
The structures of ANDP and ANDF are the same but the action is in rising-edge or falling-edge.
3. OR (ORI) command: single device connects to a device or a block.
OR command
OR command
OR command
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram
DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-10
The structures of ORP and ORF are the same but the action is in rising-edge or falling-edge.
4. ANB command: a block connects to a device or a block in series.
ANB command
5. ORB command: a block connects to a device or a block in parallel.
ORBcommand
If there are several blocks when operate ANB or ORB, they should be combined to blocks or network from up to
down or from left to right.
6. MPS, MRD, MPP commands: Divergent memory of multi-output. It can produce many various outputs.
The command MPS is the start of divergent point. The divergent point means the connection place between
horizontal line and vertical line. We should determine to have contact memory command or not according to the
contacts status in the same vertical line. Basically, each contact could have memory command but in some places of
ladder diagram conversion will be omitted due to the PLC operation convenience and capacity limit. MPS command
can be used for 8 continuous times and you can recognize this command by the symbol “┬”.
MRD command is used to read memory of divergent point. Because the logical status is the same in the same
horizontal line, it needs to read the status of original contact to keep on analyzing other ladder diagram. You can
recognize the command MRD by the symbol “├”.
MPP command is used to read the start status of the top level and pop it out from stack. Because it is the last
item of the horizontal line, it means the status of this horizontal line is ending.
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram
DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-11
You can recognize this command by the symbol “└”.
Basically, that is all right to use the above method to
analyze but sometimes compiler will omit the same
outputs as shown at the right.
MPS
MRD
MPPMPP
MPS
7. STL command: this command is used in the syntax design for the Sequential Function Chart (SFC). This
command helps the programmer to have clearer ideas on the program procedure, and thus the procedure will
be more readable. As shown in the following diagrams, we can get clear procedure, and original step point will
have the action of “power loss” after each step point S transfer to the next step point. In this way, we could
transfer to our procedure diagram from the left diagram to the PLC structure diagram below.
e
S0
S21
S22
M1002initialpulse
M1002SET S0
SET S21SS0
SET S22SS21
SS22
S0
RET
8. RET command: you should add RET command after finishing step ladder program and RET command should
add after STL command as shown in the following.
eSS20
RET
eSS20
RET
Refer to chapter 4 for the structure of step ladder [ STL ] , [ RET ].
1.5 The Conversion of PLC Command and Each Diagram Structure
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram
DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-12
Ladder Diagram
X0 X2 X1
X1
M1
C0Y0
SET S0
M2 Y0
M0
X10Y10
SET S10
S0S
X11Y11
SET S11
S10S
SET S12
SET S13
X12Y12
SET S20
S11S
X13S0
RET
S20S
S12S
S13S
X0CNT C0 K10
X1M0
C0
X1
M2
RST C0
M1
M2
END
LD X0OR X1LDOR
X2M0
ORI M1ANBLDAND
M2Y0
5
1 ORblock
2 ORblock
Serial block3
ANDblock
Serial block4 ANI
ORBANIOUTANDSETSTLLD
X1Y0C0S0S0X10
Multipleoutputs
Step ladder Start
State working item andstep point transfer
Output state will keep onhandling according to program scan state
7
8
8
910
1213
11
14
Y10S10S10
OUTSETSTLLD X11OUTSETSETSETSTLLDOUT
Y11S11S12S13S11X12Y12
S10 state take outTake out X11 state
State working item andstep point transfer
S11 state take outTake out X12 state
State working item andstep point transferSET
STLSTLSTLLDOUTRET
S20S20S12S13X13S0
15
LD S0CNTLD C0
C0K10 17
18
Simultaneous divergence
State working itemand step point transfer
End of step ladder
Return
Read C0
Multiple outputs
MPSAND X1OUT M0MRDANI X1OUT M1MPPANIOUTEND
M2M2
Program End
Syntax Fuzzy Structure
The analytic process of correct ladder diagram should be from left to right or from up to down. But there are some
exceptions as shown in the following.
Example 1: there are two methods to use command to show the following ladder diagram but the result is the same.
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram
DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-13
Good method Bad method
LD X0 LD X0 OR X1 OR X1 LD X2 LD X2 OR X3 OR X3 ANB LD X4 LD X4 OR X5 OR X5 ANB
X0 X2 X4
X5X3X1
ANB ANB
The results for the above two programs to convert to ladder diagram are the same. Why one is better than the
other? That is due to operation of MPU. The operation of the program in the left side is one block merges to another
one. Although the length of the program at the right side is the same as the left one, the operation of the program in
the right side is merged at the last. (command ANB is used to merge, it can’t use more than 8 continuous times). In
this program, it just needs to use continuous two times of command ANB and MPU allows that. But when the program
needs to use more than continuous 8 times of command ANB, MPU won’t allow. So the best method is to merge once
the block is established and in this way the logic of programmer will be in order.
Example 2: there are two methods to use command to show the following ladder diagram but the result is the same.
Good method Bad method
LD X0 LD X0 OR X1 LD X1 OR X2 LD X2 OR X3 LD X3 ORB ORB
X0
X1
X2
X3
ORB
The difference is very clear in these two programs. In the bad method, the more program code it needs and the
operation memory of MPU also needs to increase. So that is better to decode in the order of the definition.
The error figures of ladder diagram
When editing ladder diagram, you can use all ladder symbols to make up all kinds of figures. When drawing
ladder diagram, you should start from left power line and end with the right power line (the right power line will be
omitted when using DPLSoft ladder diagram) due to the principle for PLC to handle figure program is from up to down
and from left to right (it is drew from left to right and draw the next new row after finishing drawing a row). They are the
common error figure in the following.
It can’t do OR operation upward.
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram
DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-14
reverse flow power
There is reverse power flow during the circuit that is from input to output signal.
The correct is output from right upper corner.
If you want to merge or edit, the order should be from left upper corner to right lower corner. The block of dot line should move up.
It can’t do parallel operation with empty device.
Empty device can’t do operation with other device.
There is no device in the middle block.
.
The device in series should be arranged in parallel with the block that it connects in series.
The position of Label P should be in the first row of the complete network.
The block that is connected in series should be arranged in parallel with the upper horizontal line.
1.6 The Simplification of Ladder Diagram
To put the block in the front of ladder diagram can omit command ANB when series block and parallel block
connect in series.
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram
DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-15
Command
LD X0
LD X1
OR X2
X0 X1
X2
ANB
Command
LD X1
OR X2
X0X1
X2
AND X0
To put the block in the front of ladder diagram can omit command ORB when single equipment and block are
connected in parallel.
Command
LD T0
LD X1
AND X2
T0
X1 X2
ORB
Command
LD X1
AND X2 T0
X1 X2
OR T0
In figure a of ladder diagram, it does not illegal due to the reverse power flow. In figure a, the upper block is
shorter than lower block, you could make it legal by switching them.
command
LD X0
OR X1
AND X2
LD X3
AND X4
X0
X1 X2
X3 X4
Fig. a ORB
command
LD X3
AND X4
LD X1
OR X0
AND X2
X0
X1 X2
X3 X4
Fig. b ORB
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram
DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-16
You can omit commands MPS, MPP when the multiple outputs in the same horizontal line don’t need to operate
with other input device.
command MPS AND X0 OUT Y1 MPP
X0Y1
Y0
OUT Y0
command OUT Y0 AND X0
Y0
Y1X0
OUT Y1
Correct the circuit of reverse flow power
In the following examples, the figure at the left is the ladder diagram that is draw by our definition but there is
reverse flow power in it. Therefore, we correct it and show it at the right side.
Example 1:
X0
X3
X6
X1
X4
X7
X2
X5
X10 LOOP1
reverse flow power
X0 X1 X2
X3 X4 X5
X10
X6 X7 X5
X10 LOOP1
Example 2:
X0
X3
X6
X1
X4
X7
X2
X5
X10 LOOP1
reverse flow power
X0
X3
X6
X1
X4
X7
X2
X5
X10
reverse flow power
LOOP1
X0 X1 X2
X3 X4 X5
X6
X3 X7 X10
X6
X0 X1 X7 X10
LOOP2
X4
1.7 The Example for Designing Basic Program
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram
DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-17
Start, Stop and Latching
In the same occasions, it needs transient close button and transient open button to be start and stop switch.
Therefore, if you want to keep the action, you should design latching circuit. There are several latching circuits in the
following:
Example 1: the latching circuit for priority of stop
When start normally open contact X1=On, stop normally
contact X2=Off, and Y1=On are set at the same time, if
X2=On, the coil Y1 will stop acting. Therefore, it calls priority of
stop.
X2Y1
X1
Y1
Example 2: the latching circuit for priority of start
When start normally open contact X1=On, stop normally
contact X2=Off and Y1=On (coil Y1 will be active and
latching) are valid at the same time, if X2=On, coil Y1 will be
active due to latched contact. Therefore, it calls priority of start.
X2Y1
X1
Y1
Example 3: the latching circuit of SET and RST commands
SET Y1
RST Y1
X1
X2
Top priority of stop
The figure at the right side is latching circuit that made up
of RST and SET command.
It is top priority of stop when RST command is set behind
SET command. When executing PLC from up to down, The
coil Y1 is ON and coil Y1 will be OFF when X1 and X2 act at
the same time, therefore it calls priority of stop.
It is top priority of start when SET command is set after
RST command. When X1 and X2 act at the same time, Y1 is
ON so it calls top priority of start. SET
Y1RST
Y1
X2
X1
Top priority of start
Example 4: latched
Auxiliary relay M512 is latched at the right side. (refer to
PLC user manual) the circuit at the right side will be latched
when power is on and it will be also latched once the power
loss and power on again. Therefore the latched is continuous.
X2
M512X1
SET
RST M512
Y1M512
The common control circuit
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram
DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-18
Example 5: condition control
X3Y1
X1
Y1
X4Y2
X2
Y2
Y1
X1
X3
X2
X4
Y1
Y2
X1 and X3 can start/stop Y1 separately, X2 and X4 can start/stop Y2 separately and they are all self latched
circuit. Y1 is an element for Y2 to do AND function due to the normally open contact connects to Y2 in series.
Therefore, Y1 is the input of Y2 and Y2 is also the input of Y1.
Example 6: Interlock control
X3Y1
X1
Y1
X4Y2
X2
Y2
Y1
Y2
X1
X3
X2
X4
Y1
Y2
The figure above is the circuit of interlock control. Y1 and Y2 will act according to the start contact X1 and X2.
Y1 and Y2 will act not at the same time, once one of them acts and the other won’t act. (This is called interlock.)
Even if X1 and X2 are valid at the same time, Y1 and Y2 won’t act at the same time due to up-to-down scan of
ladder diagram. For this ladder diagram, Y1 has higher priority than Y2.
Example 7: Sequential Control
X3Y1
X1
Y1
X4Y2
X2
Y2
Y1
Y2
If add normally close contact Y2 into Y1 circuit to be
an input for Y1 to do AND function. (as shown in the left
side) Y1 is an input of Y2 and Y2 can stop Y1 after
acting. In this way, Y1 and Y2 can execute in sequential.
Example 8: Oscillating Circuit
The period of oscillating circuit is ΔT+ΔT
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram
DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-19
Y1Y1
Y1
T T
The figure above is a very simple ladder step diagram. When starting to scan Y1 normally close contact, Y1
normally close contact is close due to the coil Y1 is OFF. Then it will scan Y1 and the coil Y1 will be ON and output 1.
In the next scan period to scan normally close contact Y1, Y1 normally close contact will be open due to Y1 is ON.
Finally, coil Y1 will be OFF and output 0. Scan repeatedly, the period of oscillating circuit is nT+ΔT.
T0X0
TMR
Y1
Y1
T0
Kn
Y1
T Tn
X0
The figure above uses timer T0 to control coil Y1 to be ON. After Y1 is ON, timer T0 will be closed at the next
scan period and output Y1. The oscillating circuit will be shown as above. (n is the setting of timer and it is decimal
number. T is the base of timer. (clock period))
Example 9: Blinking Circuit
T2TMR Kn2
T1X0
TMR
Y1
T2
T1
Kn1
X0 T1
Y1
Tn1
X0Tn2
The figure above is common used oscillating circuit for indication light blinks or buzzer alarms. It uses two
timers to control On/OFF time of Y1 coil. If figure, n1 and n2 are timer setting of T1 and T2. T is the base of timer
(clock period)
Example 10: Triggered Circuit
Y1
M0X0
Y1Y1
M0
M0
X0
M0
Y1
T
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram
DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-20
In figure above, the rising-edge differential command of X0 will make coil M0 to have a single pulse of ΔT (a
scan time). Y1 will be ON during this scan time. In the next scan time, coil M0 will be OFF and normally close M0
and normally close Y1 are all closed. However, coil Y1 will keep on being ON and it will make coil Y1 to be OFF once
a rising-edge comes after input X0 and coil M0 is ON for a scan time. The timing chart is as shown above. This
circuit usually executes alternate two actions with an input. From above timing: when input X0 is a square wave of a
period T, output coil Y1 is square wave of a period 2T.
Example 11: Delay Circuit
T10X0
TMR
Y1T10
K1000
TB = 0.1 sec
X0
Y1
100 seconds
When input X0 is ON, output coil Y1 will be ON at the same time due to the corresponding normally close
contact OFF makes timer T10 to be OFF. Output coil Y1 will be OFF after delay 100 seconds once input X0 is OFF
and T10 is ON. Please refer to timing chart above.
Example 12: Output delay circuit, in the following example, the circuit is made up of two timers. No matter input X0 is
ON or OFF, output Y4 will be delay.
T5
T5
TMR
Y4T6
X0K50
Y4
T6Y4
TMRX0
K30
X0
T5
Y0
T6
5 seconds
3 seconds
Example13: Extend Timer Circuit
T12TMR Kn2
T11X0
TMR
Y1
T11
Kn1
T12
In this circuit, the total delay time from input X0 is
close and output Y1 is ON= (n1+n2)* T. where T is
clock period.
Example 14: The method of enlarge counter range
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram
DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-21
C6CNT Kn2
C5X13
CNT
RST
C5Kn1
X14C5RST
Y1C6
C6
The range of 16-bit counter is 0~32,767. If using
two counters as figure in left side, the counter range
can be enlarge to n1*n2. When counter C5 attains n1,
counter C6 will counts one time and reset itself. Then
counter C6 will count the pulse of X13. When counter
C6 attains n2, the pulse of X13 will be n1*n2.
Example 15: Traffic light control (by using step ladder command)
Vertical Light
HorizontalLight
Traffic light control
Red light Yellow light
Green light
Green blink light
Vertical light Y0 Y1 Y2 Y2
Horizontal light Y10 Y11 Y12 Y12
Light Time 35 Sec 5 Sec 25 Sec 5 Sec
Timing chart:
25 Sec
5 Sec 5 Sec
5 Sec 5 Sec25 Sec
Y0
Y1
Y2
Y10
Y11
Y12
Vertical Light
Red
Yellow
Green
Horizontal Light
Red
Yellow
Green
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram
DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-22
SFC Figure:
S0
S20
S21
S22
S0
M1002
T0
T1
T13
Y0
S23
T2
TMR T0 K350
Y2
TMR T1 K250
Y2
TMR T2 K50M1013
Y1
S30
S31
S32
T10
T11
S33
T12
Y12
TMR T10 K250
Y11
TMR T12 K50
Y12
TMR T11 K50M1013
Y10
TMR T13 K350
Ladder Diagram: M1002
ZRST S0 S127
SET S0
SET S20
Y2
END
S0S
S21S
Y1S23S
Y12S30
S
T13S23S
S33S
SET S30S20
S
TMR T0
SET S21T0
Y0
K350
TMR T1
SET S22T1
K250
Y2
S22S TMR T2
SET S23T2
K50M1013
TMR T10
SET S31T10
K250
Y12
S31S TMR T11
SET S32T11
K50M1013
Y11S32
S
TMR T12
SET S33T12
K50
Y10S33
S
TMR T13 K350
S0
RET
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram
DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-23
Drawing by SFC Editor (WPLSoft )
Drawing by SFC Internal Ladder Diagram View
LAD-0
S0ZRST S127M1002
S0SET
Transferred condition 1
TRANS*T0
S22
Y2
T2TMR K50M1013
Transferred condition 4
TRANS*T13
TRANS*T13
TRANS*T13
TRANS*T13
TRANS*T13
TRANS*T13
TRANS*T13
0
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
LAD-0
S0
S20
S21
S22
S23
S30
S31
S32
S33
S0
Transferred condition 7
TRANS*T12
TRANS*T12
TRANS*T12
TRANS*T12
TRANS*T12
TRANS*T12
TRANS*T12
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-1
2.1 Summary of DVP-PLC Device Number ES, EX, SS Models: Type Device Item Usage Range Function
X External input relay X0~X177, 128 points, octal number system
Correspond to external input point
Y External output relay Y0~Y177, 128 points, octal number system
Total is 256
points Correspond to external output point
For general M0~M511, M768~M999, 744 points
For latched * M512~M767, 256 points M Auxiliary
For special M1000~M1279, 280 points(some are latched)
Total is 1280 points
Contacts can switch to On/Off in program (some is latched)
100ms timer T0~T63, 64 points
10ms counter T64~T126, 63 points (when M1028=On, it is 10ms, M1028=Off, it is 100ms)
T Timer
1ms timer T127, 1 points
Total is 128
points
When the timer indicated by TMR command attains the setting, the T contact with the same number will be ON.
16-bit count up for general C0~C111, 112 points
16-bit count up for latched * C112~C127, 16 points
Total is 128
points
1-phase input C235~C238, C241, C242, C244, 7 points
1-phase 2 inputs C246, C247, C249, 3 points
C Counter 32-bit count up/down high-speed counter for latched* 2-phase 2 inputs C251, C252, C254, 3 points
Total is 13
points
When the counter indicated by CNT (DCNT) command attains the setting, the C contact with the same number will be ON.
Initial step point latched * S0~S9, 10 points
Zero point return latched * S10~S19, 10 points (use with IST command)
Rel
ay b
it m
ode
S Step point
latched * S20~S127, 108 points
Total is 128
points
Usage device of step ladder diagram (SFC)
T Present value of timer T0~T127, 128 points When timer attains, the contact of timer will be ON.
C Present value of counter C0~C127, 16-bit counter, 128 C235~C254, 32-bit counter, 13 points
When timer attains, the contact of timer will be ON.
For general D0~D407, 408 points For latched * D408~D599, 192 points
Total is 600 points
For special
D1000~D1311, 312 points (for V4.9 and above) D1000~D1143, 144 points (for V4.8 and below)
Reg
iste
r WO
RD
dat
a
D Data register
For index indication E(=D1028), F(=D1029), 2points
Total is 312 points
(144 points)
It can be memory area for storing data. E and F can be used as the special purpose of index indication
N For master control nested loop N0~N7, 8 points Control point of master control nested loop
P For CJ, CALL commands P0~P63, 64 points Location pointer of CJ, CALL
Time interrupt I6□□, 1 point (□□=10~99ms) (for Version 5.7)
External interrupt I001, I101, I201, I301, 4 points
Poin
ter
I Interrupt
Communication interrupt I150
Location pointer of interrupt subroutine
K Decimal K-32,768 ~ K32,767 (16-bit operation) K-2,147,483,648 ~ K2,147,483,647 (32-bit operation)
Con
stan
t
H Hexadecimal H0000 ~ HFFFF (16-bit operation) H00000000 ~ HFFFFFFFF (32-bit operation)
* latched area is fixed, it can’t be changed.
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-2
EP/SA models:
Type Device Item Range Function
X External input relay X0~X177, 128 points, octal number
system
Correspond to
external input point
Y External output relay Y0~Y177, 128 points, octal number
system
Total is
256 points
Correspond to
external output point
For general M0~M511, 512 points (*1)
For latched * M512~M999, 488 points (*3)
M2000~M4095, 2096 points (*3) M Auxiliary
Relay
For special M1000~M1999, 1000 points (some
are latched)
Total is
4096points
Contacts can be
switched during
ON/OFF in the
program (some is
latched)
100ms
T0~T199, 200 points (*1)
T192~T199 for subroutine
T250~T255, 6 points (accumulative
type) (*4)
10ms
T200~T239, 40 points (*1)
T240~T245, 6 points (accumulative
type) (*4)
T Timer
1ms T246~T249, 4 points (accumulative
type) (*4)
Total is
256 points
When the timer that
TMR command
indicates attains the
setting, the T contact
with the same
number will be On.
C0~C95, 96 points (*1) 16-bit count up
C96~C199, 104 points (*3)
C200~C215, 16 points (*1) 32-bit count up/down
C216~C234, 19 points (*3)
C235~C244, 1-phase 1 input, 9
points (*3)
C246, C247, C249, 1-phase 2
inputs, 3 points (*3)
C Counter
32-bit high-speed
counter
C251, C252, C254, 2-phase 2
inputs, 3 points (*3)
Total is
250 points
When the timer that
CNT(DCNT)
command indicates
attains, the contact C
with the same
number will be On.
Initial step point S0~S9, 10 points (*1)
Zero point return S10~S19, 10 points (use with IST
command) (*1)
For general S20~S512, 492 points (*1)
For latched * S512~S895, 384 points (*3)
Rel
ay b
it m
ode
S Step
point
For alarm S896~S1023, 128 points (*3)
Total is
1024 points
Usage device of step
ladder diagram
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-3
Type Device Item Range Function
T Present value of timer T0~T255, 256 points
When timer attains,
the contact will be
On.
C Present value of counter
C0~C199, 16-bit counter, 200 points
C200~C254, 16-bit counter, 50 points
When timer attains,
the contact will be On.
For general D0~D199, 200 points (*1)
For latched*
D200~D999, 800 points (*3)
D2000~D4999, 3000 points
(*3)
For special D1000~D1999, 1000 points
D Data
register
For index indication E0~E3, F0~F3, 8 points (*1)
Total is 5000 points
It is the memory area
for storing data. E and
F can be used as
special purpose of
index indication
Reg
iste
r WO
RD
dat
a
None File register * K0~K1599 (1600 points) (*4)
It is expansion
register for storing
data
N Master control nested N0~N7, 8 points The control point of
master control nested
P For CJ, CALL commands P0~P255, 256 points The location point of
CJ, CALL
External interrupt I001, I101, I201, I301, I401, I501, total is 6
points
Time interrupt I6□□, I7□□, 2 points (□□=1~99ms,
time base=0.1ms)
High-speed counter
reaches interrupt I010, I020, I030, I040, I050, I060, 6 points
Poin
ter
I For
interrupt
Communication interrupt I150
The location point of
interrupt subroutine.
K Decimal number system K-32,768 ~ K32,767 (16-bit operation)
K-2,147,483,648 ~ K2,147,483,647 (32-bit operation)
Con
stan
t
H Hexadecimal number system H0000 ~ HFFFF (16-bit operation)
H00000000 ~ HFFFFFFFF (32-bit operation)
*1: non-latched area is fixed, it can’t be changed.
*2: non-latched area can be changed to latched area by parameter setting.
*3: latched area can be changed to non-latched area by parameter setting.
*4: latched area is fixed, it can’t be modified. (the area marked with【】can’t be changed)
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-4
Latched setting for each EP/SA model: For general For latched Special auxiliary relay Latched
M0~M511 M512~M999 M1000~M1999 M2000~M4095 Factory setting is
latched Factory setting is latchedM Auxiliary relay It is fixed to be
non-latched Start: D1200(K512) End: D1201(K999)
Some are latched and can’t be changed Start: D1202(K2000)
End: D1203(K4095)
100 ms 10 ms 10ms 1 ms 100 ms
T0 ~T199 T200~T239 T240~T245 T246~T249 T250~T255 T Timer
It is fixed to be non-latched
It is fixed to be non-latched
Accumulative type It is fixed to be latched
16 bits count up 32 bits count up/down 32 bits count up/down high speed counter
C0~C95 C96~C199 C200~C215 C216~C234 C235~C255 It is fixed to be
latched It is fixed to be
latched Factory setting is latched C Counter
It is fixed to be non-latched
Start: D1208(K96)
End: D1209(K199)
It is fixed to be
non-latched
Start: D1210(K216)
End: D1211(K234)
Start: D1212(K235) End: D1213(K255)
For general Latched Special
register Latched For general
S0~S9 S10~S19 S20~S511 S512~S895 S896~S1023 Factory setting is latched
S Step relay
It is fixed to be non-latched Start: D1214(K512) End: D1215(K895)
It is fixed to be latched
For general Latched Special register Latched D0~D199 D200~D999 D1000~D1999 D2000~D9999
Factory setting is latched Factory setting is latchedD
Register It is fixed to be non-latched Start: D1216 (K200)
End: D1217 (K999)
Some are latched and can’t be changed Start: D1218 (K2000)
End: D1219 (K4999)
K0~K1599 Data Register
It is fixed to be latched
EH model:
Type Device Item Range Function
X External input relay X0~X377, 256 points, octal number system Corresponds to external input point
Y External output relay Y0~Y377, 256 points, octal number system
Total is
512 points
Corresponds to external output point
For general M0~M499, 500 points (*2)
For latched M500~M999, 500 points (*3) M2000~M4095, 2096 points (*3) M Auxiliary
relay For special M1000~M1999, 1000 points (some are
latched)
Total is
4096 points
Contacts can be switched between On/Off in the program (some is latched)
100ms T0~T199, 200 points (*2) T192~T199 is for subroutine 【T250~T255】, 6-point Accumulative type (*4)
10ms T200~T239, 40 points (*2) 【T240~T245】, 6-point Accumulative type (*4)
Rel
ay b
it m
ode
T Timer
1ms 【T246~T249】, 4-point Accumulative type (*4)
Total is
256 points
When the timer that set by TMR command attains, the T contact with the same number will be On.
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-5
Type Device Item Range Function
16-bit count up C0~C99, 100 points (*2) C100~C199, 100 points (*3)
32-bit count up/down
C200~C219, 20 points (*2) C220~C234, 15 points (*3) C Counter
High-speed counter
C235~C244, 1-phase 1 input, 10 points (*3) C246~C249, 1-phase 2 inputs, 4 points(*3) C251~C254, 2-phases 2 inputs, 4 points (*3)
Total is
253 points
When the timer that set by CNT(DCNT) command attains, the contact C will be On.
Initial step point S0~S9, 10 points (*2)
For zero point return
S10~S19, 10 points (use with IST command) (*2)
For general S20~S499, 480 points (*2) For latched S500~S899, 400 points (*3)
S Step points
For alarm S900~S1023, 124 points (*3)
Total is
1024 points
Usage device of step ladder diagram (SFC)
T Present value of timer T0~T255, 256 points When timer attains, the contact of timer will be On.
C Present value of counter C0~C199, 16-bit counter, 200 points C200~C254, 132-bit counter, 53 points
When timer attains, the contact of timer will be On.
For general D0~D199, 200 points, (*2)
For latched D200~D999, 800 points (*3) D2000~D9999, 8000 points (*3)
For special D1000~D1999, 1000 points D Data
register
For index E0~E7, F0~F7, 16 points (*1)
Total is 10000 points
It is the memory area for storing data. E and F can be used as special purpose of index indication R
egis
ter W
OR
D d
ata
None File register K0~K9999(10000 points) (*4) Expansion register for storing data
N Master control nested N0~N7, 8 points Master control nested control point
P For CJ, CALL commands P0~P255, 256 points The location pointer of CJ, CALL
External interrupt
I00□(X0), I10□(X1), I20□(X2), I30□(X3), I40□(X4), I50□(X5), 6 points (□=1, rising-edge trigger , □=0, falling-edge trigger )
Time interrupt I6□□, I7□□, I8□□, 3 points(□□=1~99ms) time base=1ms I8□□, 1 point (□□=1~99, time base=0.1ms)
High-speed counter attained interrupt I010, I020, I030, I040, I050, I060, 6 points
Pulse interrupt I110, I120, I130, I140, 4 points
Poin
ter
I
Inte
rrupt
Communication interrrupt I150
The location pointer of interrupt subroutine
K Decimal system K-32,768 ~ K32,767 (16-bit operation) K-2,147,483,648 ~ K2,147,483,647 (32-bit operation)
Con
stan
t
H Hexadecimal system H0000 ~ HFFFF (16-bit operation) H00000000 ~ HFFFFFFFF (32-bit operation)
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-6
*1: the area of non-latched is fixed, it can’t be changed.
*2: the area of non-latched, it can be changed to latched area by parameter setting.
*3: latched area can be changed to non-latched area by parameter setting.
*4: latched area is fixed, it can’t be modified. (the area marked with【】can’t be changed)
Latched setting for each EH model:
* 1: HFFFF means factory setting is non-latched.
When switching between power On/Off or MPU RUN/STOP mode, the memory type of version 5.5 and higher of ES,
ES/EX/SS series will be as following:
Memory type Power Off=>On STOP=>RUN RUN=>STOP
Clear all M1031Non-latched
area
Clear all M1032 latched area
Factory setting
When M1033=Off, clear Non-latched Clear
When M1033=On, unchangedClear Unchanged 0
Latched Unchanged Unchanged Clear UnchangedSpecial M, Special D, index register
Initial Unchanged Unchanged Initial setting
For general For latched Special auxiliary relay Latched
M0~M499 M500~M999 M1000~M1999 M2000~M4095 M Auxiliary relay Start: D1200(K500)
End: D1201(K999) Some are latched and they can’t be changed.
Start: D1202(K2000) End: D1203(K4095)
100 ms 10 ms 10ms 1 ms 100 ms T0 ~T199 T200~T239 T240~T245 T246~T249 T250~T255
Factory setting is non-latched
Factory setting is non-latched
T Timer
Start: D1204 (HFFFF)*1 End: D1205 (HFFFF)*1
Start: D1206 (HFFFF)*1End: D1207 (HFFFF)*1
Accumulative type Fixed latched
16-bit count up 32-bit count up/down 32-bit high-speed count up/downC0~C99 C100~C199 C200~C219 C220~C234 C235~C245 C246~C255
Non-latched (default) Latched (default) Non-latched
(default) Latched (default) Latched (default) C
Counter Start: D1208 (K100) End: D1209 (K199)
Start: D1210 (K220) End: D1211 (K234)
Start: D1212 (K235) End: D1213 (K255)
Initial Zero point return For general Latched Step point for alarm
S0~S9 S10~S19 S20~S499 S500~S899 S900~S1023 Non-latched (default) Latched (default)
S Step relay
Start: D1214 (K500) End: D1215 (K899)
Always is latched
For general Latched Special register Latched
D0~D199 D200~D999 D1000~D1999 D2000~D9999
Non-latched (default) Latched (default) Latched (default) D Register
Start: D1216 (K200) End: D1217 (K999)
Some is latched, it can’t be changed Start: D1218 (K2000)
End: D1219 (K9999)
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-7
The memory type of EP/SA/EH models will be as following:
Memory type Power Off=>On STOP=>RUN RUN=>STOP
Clear all M1031 Non-latched
area
Clear all M1032 latched area
Factory setting
When M1033=Off, clear Non-latched Clear
When M1033=On, No changeClear Unchanged 0
Latched Unchanged Unchanged Clear 0 Special M, Special D, index register
Initial Unchanged Unchanged Initial setting
File Register Unchanged 0
2.2 Value, constant [K] / [H]
K Decimal K-32,768 ~ K32,767 (16-bit operation) K-2,147,483,648 ~ K2,147,483,647 (32-bit operation)
Constant H Hexadecimal H0 ~ HFFFF (16-bit operation)
H0 ~ HFFFFFFFF (32-bit operation)
There are five value types for DVP-PLC to use by the different control destination. The following is the
explanation of value types.
1. Binary Number (BIN)
It uses binary system for the PLC internal operation or storage. The relative information of binary system is in the
following. Bit : Bit is the basic unit of binary system, the status are 1 or 0.
Nibble : It is made up of continuous 4 bits, such as b3~b0. It can be used to represent number 0~9 of decimal or 0~F of hexadecimal.
Byte : It is made up of continuous 2 nibbles, i.e. 8 bits, b7~b0). It can used to represent 00~FF of hexadecimal system.
Word : It is made up of continuous 2 bytes, i.e. 16 bits, b15~b0. It can used to represent 0000~FFFF of hexadecimal system.
Double Word : It is made up of continuous 2 words, i.e. 32 bits, b31~b0. It can used to represent 00000000~FFFFFFFF of hexadecimal.
The relations among bit, nibble, byte, word, and double word of binary number are shown as follows.
NB0NB1NB2NB3NB4NB5NB6NB7
BY3 BY2 BY1 BY0
W1
DW
W0
Double Word
Word
Byte
Nibble
Bit
2. Octal Number (OCT)
The numbers of external input and output terminal of DVP-PLC use octal number.
Example:
External input: X0~X7, X10~X17…(device number)
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-8
External output: Y0~Y7, Y10~Y17…(device number)
3. Decimal Number (DEC)
The suitable time for decimal number to use in DVP-PLC system.
To be the setting value of timer T or counter C, such as TMR C0 K50. (K constant)
To be the device number of S, M, T, C, D, E, F, P, I. For example: M10, T30. (device number)
To be operand in application command, such as MOV K123 D0. (K constant)
4. BCD (Binary Code Decimal, BCD)
It shows a decimal number by a unit number or four bits so continuous 16 bits can use to represent the
four numbers of decimal number. BCD code is usually used to read the input value of DIP switch or output
value to 7-segment display to be display.
5. Hexadecimal Number (HEX)
The suitable time for hexadecimal number to use in DVP-PLC system.
To be operand in application command. For example: MOV H1A2B D0. (constant H)
Constant K:
In PLC, it is usually have K before constant to mean decimal number. For example, K100 means 100 in
decimal number.
Exception: The value that is made up of K and bit equipment X, Y, M, S will be bit, byte, word or double word. For example, K2Y10, K4M100. K1 means a 4-bit data and K2~K4 can be 8, 12 and 16-bit data separately.
Constant H:
In PLC, it is usually have H before constant to mean hexadecimal number. For example, H100 means 100 in
hexadecimal number. Reference Chart:
Binary (BIN)
Octal (OCT)
Decimal (DEC)
BCD (Binary Code Decimal)
Hexadecimal(HEX)
For PLC internal operation Equipment X, Y number
Constant K, equipment M, S, T, C, D, E, F, P, I number
For DIP Switch and 7-segment display Constant H
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 3 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 4 4 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 5 5 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 5 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 6 6 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 7 7 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 7 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 10 8 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 11 9 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 9 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 12 10 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 A 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 13 11 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 B 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 14 12 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 C 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 15 13 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 D
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-9
Binary (BIN)
Octal (OCT)
Decimal (DEC)
BCD (Binary Code Decimal)
Hexadecimal(HEX)
For PLC internal operation EquipmentX, Y number
Constant K, equipment M, S, T, C, D, E, F, P, I number
For DIP Switch and 7-segment display Constant H
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 16 14 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 E 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 17 15 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 F 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 20 16 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 10 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 21 17 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 11
: : :
: : :
: : :
: : :
: : :
0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 143 99 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 63
2.3 The Numbering and Function of External Input/Output Contact [X] / [Y]
Input/output contact number:(octal number)
For MPU, the number of input and output contact will be counted from X0 and Y0. The number will be changed
with points of MPU. For I/O expansion unit, the number of input / output terminal is counted with the connection
sequence of MPU.
For ES, EX, SS Models:
Model no DVP-14ES DVP-14SS DVP-20EX DVP-24ES DVP-32ES DVP-60ES Expansion I/O
Input X X0~X7
(8 Points) X0~X7
(8 Points) X0~X7
(8 Points)X0~X17
(16 Points) X0~X17
(16 Points) X0~X43
(36 Points) X20(X50)~X177
(Note)
Output Y Y0~Y5
(6 Points) Y0~Y5
(6 Points) Y0~Y5
(6 Points)Y0~Y7
(8 Points) Y0~Y17
(16 Points) Y0~Y27
(24 Points) Y20(Y30)~Y177
(Note)
Note: Besides DVP-60ES, the started input number of expansion unit is from X20 and the started output
number of expansion unit from Y20. The started input number of DVP-60ES is X50 and the started
output number of DVP-60ES is Y30. The number of expansion I/O is increased by 8 times and if it is
less than 8 points, it will count with 8 points.
EP/SA model:
Model no DVP-12SA (Note1) DVP-14EP DVP-32EP Expansion I/O
Input X X0~X7 (8 points) X0~X7 (8 points) X0~X17 (16 points) X20~X177 (note 2)
Output Y Y0~Y3 (4 points) Y0~Y7 (8 points) Y0~Y17 (16 points) Y20~Y177 (note 2)
Note 1: All SA functions are the same as EP except function expansion card. All SA expansion units share
with SS series.
Note 2: The started input number of expansion unit is from X20 and the started output number of
expansion unit from Y20. The number of expansion I/O is increased by 8 times and if it is less than
8 points, it will count with 8 points.
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-10
EH model:
Model no DVP-16EH DVP-20EH DVP-32EH DVP-48EH DVP-64EH DVP-80EH Expansion I/O
Input X X0~X7
(8 points) X0~X13(12
points) X0~X17
(16 points)X0~X27
(24 points)X0~X37
(32 points)X0~X47
(40 points) X20~X377
(note)
Output Y Y0~Y7
(8 points) Y0~Y7(8 points)
Y0~Y17 (16 points)
Y0~Y27 (24 points)
Y0~Y37 (32 points)
Y0~Y47 (40 points)
Y20~Y377 (note)
Note: Besides DVP-16EH and DVP-20EH, the started input/output number of expansion unit starts with
the last number of MPU. The started input number of DVP-60EH is X20 and the started output
number of DVP-60EH is Y20. The numbers of expansion I/O are sequential numbers. The input
number can be up to X377 and output number can be up to Y377.
Input relay: X0~X377
The number of input relay (or called input terminal) uses octal number. The points of EH model can be up
to 256 points, the range as follows: X0~X7, X10~X17, ……, X370~X377.
Output relay: Y0~Y377
The number of output relay (or called output terminal) uses octal number. The points of EH model can be
up to 256 points, the range as follows: Y0~Y7, Y10~Y17, ……, Y370~Y377.
Input/output contact Function:
The function of input contact X: input contact X reads input signal and enter PLC by connecting with input
equipment. It is unlimited usage times for A contact or B contact of each input contact X in program. The
On/Off of input contact X can be changed with the On/Off of input equipment but can’t be changed by using
peripheral equipment (HPP or WPLSoft).
(※ There is a special relay M1304 in EH model to force input contact X On/Off by peripheral equipment
HPP or WPLSoft, but PLC won’t receive any external input signal at this time.)
Output contact Y Function:
The mission of output contact Y is to drive the load that connects to output contact Y by sending On/Off
signal. There are two kinds of output contact: one is relay and the other is transistor. It is unlimited usage
times for A or B contact of each output contact Y in program. But there is number for output coil Y and it is
recommended to use one time in program. Otherwise, the output result will be decided by the circuit of last
output Y with PLC program scan method.
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-11
X0
X10
Y0
Y0
1
2
Y0 is repeated
The output of Y0 will be decided by circuit ○2 , i.e.
decided by On/Off of X10.
The Handling Process of PLC Program (Batch I/O)
X0
Y0
Y0
M0
input X
input terminal
read in memory
Input signal memory
Device
Mem
oryread X0 state from memory
Write Y0 state into
read Y0 state from memory
Write M0 state into
Output
Program
Input signal
output
Y output
output terminal
output latched memory
Input signal:
1. PLC will read the On/Off of input signal into the
memory of input signal before executing
program.
2. The input signal state in memory won’t change
if On/Off of the input signal changes during
executing. The new On/Off state will be read
into memory in the next scan.
3. The delay time from the changes of external
signal On→Off or Off→On to the contact will be
10ms.
Program:
PLC executes each command in program from
address 0 after reading On/Off state of input
signal in input signal memory and save each
On/Off of output coil into each equipment
memory.
Output:
1. When executing END command, send On/Off
state of Y in memory to output latched memory.
In fact, this memory is the coil of output relay.
2. The delay time from the change of On→Off or
Off→On of relay coil to contact On/Off.
2.4 The Numbering and Function of Auxiliary Relay [M]
The number of auxiliary relay:(decimal number)
ES, EX, SS models:
For general M0~M511, M768~M999, 744 points. It is fixed to be non-latched area.
For latched M512~M767, 256 points. It is fixed to be latched area. Auxiliary relay M
For special M1000~M1279, 280 points. Some are latched.
Total is 1280 points
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-12
EP/SA models:
For general M0~M511, 512 points. It is fixed to be non-latched area.
For latched M512~M999, M2000~M4095, 2584 points. It can be changed to non-latched area by parameters.
Auxiliary relay M
For special M1000~M1999, 1000 points.
Total is 4096 points
EH models:
For general M0~M499, 500 points. It can be changed to latched area by setting parameters.
For latched M500~M999, M2000~M4095, 2596 points. It can be changed to non-latched area by setting parameters.
Auxiliary relay M
For special M1000~M1999, 1000 points. Some are latched.
Total is 4096 points
Auxiliary Relay Function
There are output coil and A, B contacts in auxiliary relay M and output relay Y. It is unlimited usage times in
program. User can control loop by using auxiliary relay, but can’t drive external load directly. There are three types
divided by its characteristics. 1. Auxiliary relay for general : It will reset to OFF when power loss during running. Its state will be OFF when
power on after power loss. 2. Auxiliary relay for latched : The state will be saved when power loss during running and the state when
power on after power loss will be the same as the state before power loss. 3. Auxiliary relay for special : Each special auxiliary relay has its special function. Please don’t use undefined
auxiliary relay. Please refer to 2.10 Special relay and special register for each special auxiliary relay and 2.11 Functions of special auxiliary relay and special registers.
2.5 The Numbering and Function of Step Relay [S]
The numbering of auxiliary relay (by decimal number):
ES, EX, SS models:
Initial latched S0~S9, 10 points. It is fixed to be latched area.
Zero point
return latched
S10~S19, 10 points. (use with IST command) It is fixed to be
latched area. Step relay S
Latched S20~S127, 108 points. It is fixed to be latched area.
Total is128
points
EP/SA Models:
For initial S0~S9, 10 points. It is fixed to be non-latched area.
For zero point
return
S10~S19, 10 points. (use with IST command) It is fixed to be
non-latched area.
For general S20~S511, 492 points. It is fixed to be non-latched area.
For latched S512~S895, 384 points. It can be changed to be non-latched area
by parameters.
Step relay S
For alarm S896~S1023, 128 points. It is fixed to be latched area.
Total is1024 points
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-13
EH Models:
For initial S0~S9, 10 points. It can be latched area by setting parameters.
For zero point
return S10~S19, 10 points. (use with IST command). It can be latched area by setting parameters.
For general S20~S499, 480 points. It can be latched area by setting parameters.
For latched S500~S899, 400 points. It can be non-latched area by setting
parameters.
Step relay S
For alarm S900~S1023, 124 points. It can be latched area by setting
parameters.
Total is1024 points
The function of step relay:
Step relay S is the basic equipment of step ladder diagram and it can set process easily in PLC. In step ladder
diagram (or call Sequential Function Chart, SFC), it should be used with command STL, REL and etc.
There are 1024 points, S0~S1023, in step relay S. Like output relay Y, there are output coil and A, B contacts in
each step relay S and unlimited usage times in program. But it can’t drive external load directly. Step relay (S) can be
used as general auxiliary relay when not use with step command. There are four types divided by its characteristics. 1. Initial step relay : S0~S9, 10 points.
In Sequential Function Chart (SFC), it is the step point for initiating.
2. Zero point return step relay
: S10~S19, 10 points. S10 – S19 are for zero point return when using API 60 IST in program. If it can’t use IST command, they will be used as general step relay.
3. General step relay : EP/SA model: S20~S511, 492 points. EH mode: S20~S499, 480 points. Those step points that are used as general in sequential function chart (SFC). They will be cleared when power loss after running.
4. Latched step relay : ES, EX, SS models: S20~S127, 108 points. EP models: S512~S895, 384points. EH models: S500~S899, 400 points. In sequential function chart (SFC), latched step relay will be saved when power loss after running. The state of power on after power loss will be the same as the sate before power loss.
5. Step relay for alarm : EP/SA models: S896~S1023, 128 points. EH models: S900~S1023, 124 points. The step relay for alarm uses with alarm drive command API 46 ANS to be the contact for alarm. It is used to record warning and eliminate external malfunction.
2.6 The Numbering and Function of Timer [T]
The numbering of timer (by decimal number):
ES, EX, SS models:
100ms for general T0~T63, 64 points
10ms for general T64~T126, 63 points (when M1028=On, it is 10ms. when M1028=Off, it
is 100ms) Timer T
1ms for general T127, 1 points
Total is
128
points
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-14
EP/SA model:
100ms for general T0~T199, 200 points. (T192~T199 are the timers for subroutine.) 100ms for accumulative T250~T255, 6 points. It is fixed to be latched area.
10ms for general T200~T239, 40 points. 10ms for accumulative T240~T245, 6 points. It is fixed to be latched area.
Timer T
1ms for accumulative T246~T249, 4 points. It is fixed to be latched area.
Total is 256
points
EH model:
100ms for general T0~T199, 200 points. It can be latched area by setting parameters. (T192~T199 are the timers for subroutine.)
100ms for accumulative T250~T255, 6 points. It is fixed to be latched area.
10ms for general T200~T239, 40 points. It can be latched area by setting parameters. 10ms for accumulative T240~T245, 6 points. It is fixed to be latched area.
Timer T
1ms for accumulative T246~T249, 4 points. It is fixed to be latched area.
Total is256
points
Timer function:
The unit of timer is 1ms, 10ms and 100ms. The count method is count up. The output coil will be ON when the
present value of timer equals to the settings. The setting is K in decimal number. Data register D can be also used as
settings.
The real setting time of timer = unit of timer * settings
There are three types divided by these characteristics as follows.
1. General timer:
ES/EP/SA Series
Models :
General timer will count once when executing command END. Output coil will be On if
timer attains when executing command TMR.
EH Series Models : General timer will count once when executing command TMR. Output coil will be On if
timer attains when executing command TMR.
T0Y0
X0TMR T0 K100
X0
T0
Y0
K100
10 sec
presentvalue
When X0=On, timer T0 is counted up with
100ms. The output coil T0=On, when the present
value of timer equals to setting (K100).
When X0=Off or power off, timer T0 will be
cleared to 0 and output coil T0 will be OFF.
2. Accumulative timer:
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-15
ES/EP Series Models : General timer will count once when executing command END. Output coil will be On if timer attains when executing command TMR.
EH Series Models : General timer will count once when executing command TMR. Output coil will be On if timer attains when executing command TMR.
T250Y0
X0TMR T250 K100
X0
T2
Y0
K100
T1+T2=10sec
T250
T1
present value
When X0=On, timer T250 is counted up with 100ms. The output coil T0=On, when the present value of timer equals to settings (K100).
If X0=Off or power off during counting, timer T250 pauses and keep on counting after X0=On. The present value counts up till the present value of timer equals to settings (K100), output coil T0=On.
3. Timer for subroutine
If timer is used in subroutine or have interrupt in subroutine, use timer T192~T194 for it.
ES/EP Series Models : General timer will count once when executing command END. Output coil will be On if
timer attains when executing command TMR.
EH Series Models : General timer will count once when executing command TMR. Output coil will be On if
timer attains when executing command TMR.
If general timer is used in subroutine or interrupt to insert in subroutine and the subroutine won’t be executed,
timer can’t count correctly.
Designate method of settings: actual setting time of timer = unit * settings.
1. Designate constant K: Settings designates constant K directly
2. Designate indirectly D: Settings use data register D to be indirect designation
The detail of timer:
Beside timer used for subroutine, the flow chart of general timer is in the following:
T0Y0
X0T0 K100TMR
input reflash
When X0=On,it starts to count.
1st scan 2nd scan Nth scan (N+1)th scan
contact Y0=On
contact T0 is OnT0 counts to 10sec now, but contactisn On.
Timer will start when executing TMR command.If scan time is longer, same scan will count withplural timing pulse automatically.
From action above, the action since the coil is started to be ON in detail are in the following: +T0 T -α
α : 1ms timer is 0.001 second, 10ms timer is 0.01 second, 100ms timer is 0.1 second T : Setting time of timer (second) T0 : Scan time (second)
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-16
If contact is wrote prior to TMR command in program, it needs to add 2*T0 (two times scan time) in the worst
situation.
If timer setting is 0, output contact will be ON when TMR command is executed in the next time.
2.7 The Numbering and Function of Counter [C]
The numbering of counter (by decimal number):
ES, EX, SS model:
16 bits count up for general C0~C111, 112 points
Counter C 16 bits count up for latched C112~C127, 16 points. it is always latched area
1-phase input C235~C238, C241, C242, C244, 7 points. It is always latched area
1-phase 2 inputs C246, C247, C249, 3 points. It is always latched area 32 bits count up/down High speed counters C
2-phase inputs C251, C252, C254, 3 points. It is always latched area
Total is141
points
EP/SA models:
16 bits count up for general C0~C95, 96 points. It is fixed to be non-latched area.
16 bits count up for latched
C96~C199, 104 points. It can be non-latched area by setting parameters.
32 bits count up/down for general
C200~C215, 15 points. It is fixed to be non-latched area. Counter C
32 bits count up/down for latched
C216~C234, 19 points. It can be changed to be non-latched area by setting parameters.
1-phase input for latched
C235~C242, C244, 9 points. It can be changed to benon-latched area by setting parameters.
1-phase 2 inputs for latched
C246, C247, C249, 3 points. It can be changed to benon-latched area by setting parameters.
32 bits count up/down High speed counters C
2-phase 2 inputs for latched
C251, C252, C254, 3 points. It can be changed to benon-latched area by setting parameters.
Total is250
points
EH models:
16-bit count up for general
C0~C99, 100 points. It can be changed to be latched area by parameters.
16-bit count up for latched
C100~C199, 100 points. It can be changed to be non-latched area by parameters.
32-bit count up/down for general
C200~C219, 20 points. It can be changed to be latched area by parameters.
Counter C
32-bit count up/down for latched
C220~C234, 15 points. It can be changed to be non-latched area by parameters.
Software 1-phase 1 input
C235~C240, 6 points. It can be changed to be non-latched area by parameters.
Hardware 1-phase 1 input
C241~C244, 4 points. It can be changed to be non-latched area by parameters.
Hardware 1-phase 2 inputs
C246~C249, 4 points. It can be changed to be non-latched area by parameters.
32 bits count up/down High-speed counters C
Hardware 1-phase 2 inputs
C251~C254, 4 points. It can be changed to be non-latched area by parameters.
Total is 253
points
Features:
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-17
Item 16 bits counters 32 bits counters
Type General General High speed Count direction Count up Count up/down
Settings 0~32,767 -2,147,483,648~+2,147,483,647 Designate for constant
Constant K or data register D Constant K or data register D (2 for designated)
Present value change
Counter will stop when attaining settings
Counter will keep on counting when attaining settings
Output contact
When count attains settings, contact will be ON and latched.
When count up attains settings, contact will be ON and latched.When count down attains settings, contact will reset to OFF.
Reset action The present value will reset to 0 when RST command is executed and contact will reset to OFF.Present register 16 bits 32 bits
Contact action
After scanning, act together. After scanning, act together.
Act immediately when count attains. It has no relation with scan period.
Functions:
When pulse input signal of counter is from OFF to ON, the present value of counter equals to settings and output
coil is ON. Settings are decimal system and data register D can also be used as settings.
16-bit counters C0~C199:
1. Setting range of 16-bit counter is K0~K32,767. (K0 is the same as K1. output contact will be ON
immediately at the first count.
2. General counter will be clear when PLC is power loss. If counter is latched, it will remember the value
before power loss and keep on counting when power on after power loss.
3. If using MOV command, WPLSoft or HPP to send a value, which is large than setting to C0, register, at
the next time that X1 is from Off to On, C0 counter contact will be On and present value will be set to the
same as settings.
4. The setting of counter can use constant K or register D (not includes special data register D1000~D1999)
to be indirect setting.
5. If using constant K to be setting, it can only be positive number but if setting is data register D, it can be
positive/negative number. The next number that counter counts up from 32,767 is -32,768.
Example:
LD X0
RST C0
LD X1
CNT C0 K5
LD C0
OUT Y0
C0Y0
X1C0 K5CNT
X0C0RST
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-18
1. When X0=On, RST command is executed, C0 reset to 0 and output contact reset to OFF.
2. When X1 is from Off to On, counter will count up (add 1).
3. When counter C0 attains settings K5, C0 contact is ON and C0 = setting =K5. C0 won’t accept X1 trigger signal and C0 remains K5.
X0
X1
01
23
45
0
Contacts Y0, C0
C0 present value
settings
32-bit general addition/subtraction counters C200~C234:
1. The setting range of general 32-bit counter is K-2,147,483,648~K2,147,483,647. (not for DVP ES, EX and SS
MPU)
2. Special auxiliary relay used to switch count up/down of general 32-bit addition/subtraction counters decided by
M1200~M123. For example: When M1200=Off, C200 is for addition. When M1200=On, C200 is for
subtraction.
3. Settings can be constant K or data register D (special data register D1000~D1999 is not included) and also can
be positive/negative number. If using data register D, it will occupy two continuous data register.
4. General counter will be clear when PLC is power loss. If it is latched counter, counter will save the present
value and the contacts state and keep on counting when power is on after power loss.
5. The next number will be -2,147,483,648 for counter to count up after 2,147,483,647. By the same way, once
counter counts down to -2,147,483,648 the next value will be 2,147,483,647.
Example:
LD X10
OUT M1200
LD X11
RST C200
LD X12
CNT C200 K-5
LD C200
OUT Y0
C200Y0
X12C200 K-5DCNT
X11C200RST
X10M1200
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-19
1. X10 drives M1200 to decide C200 is
addition or subtraction.
2. When X11 is from Off to ON and RST
command is executed, C200 will be clear
to 0 and contact will be off.
3. When X12 is from Off to On, counter
will add one (count up) or subtract 1 (count
down).
4. When counter C200 is from K-6 to K-5,
the contact of C200 is from Off to On.
When counter C200 is from K-5 to K-6, the
contact of C200 will be from On to Off.
X10
X11
X12
01
23
45
43
21
0-1
-2-3
-4-5
-6-7
-8
0
-7-6
-5-4
-3
contacts Y0, C0
C200 present value
output contactis On before.
gradualincrease
gradualincreasegradual decrease
5. If using MOV command, WPLSoft or HPP to send a value, which is large than setting to C0, register, at the
next time that X1 is from Off to On, C0 counter contact will be On and present value will be set to the same
as settings.
32-bit high-speed addition/subtraction counter C235~C254:
1. Setting range of 32-bit high-speed addition/subtraction counter is : K-2,147,483,648~K2,147,483,647.
2. The operation of 32-bit high-speed addition/subtraction counter C235~C244 is decided by the On/Off of
special auxiliary relay M1235~M1244. For example: if M1235=Off, C235 is addition and if M1235=On,
C235 is subtraction.
3. The operation of 32-bit high-speed addition/subtraction counter C246~C254 is decided by the On/Off of
special auxiliary relay M1246~M1254. For example: if M1246=Off, C246 is addition and if M1246=On,
C246 is subtraction.
4. The settings can be positive / negative numbers by using constant K or data register D (special data
register D1000~D1999 is not included). If using data register D, the setting will occupy two continuous data
register.
5. If using DMOV command, WPLSoft or HPP to send a value which is large than setting to any high-speed
counter, at the next time that input point X of counter is from Off to On, this contact doesn’t have any
change and it will do addition and subtraction with present value.
6. The next number will be -2,147,483,648 for counter to count up after 2,147,483,647. By the same way,
once counter counts down to -2,147,483,648, the next value will be 2,147,483,647.
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-20
High-speed counter for ES / EX / SS series, 1-phase high-speed counter: 5KHz, total frequency: 40KHz.
1-phase input 1-phase 2 inputs 2-phase inputs Type Input C235 C236 C237 C238 C241 C242 C244 C246 C247 C249 C251 C252 C254
X0 U/D U/D U/D U U U A A A X1 U/D R R D D D B B B X2 U/D U/D R R R R X3 U/D R S S S
U: Increasing A: A phase input S: Start input
D: Decreasing B: B phase input R: Clear input
Input points X0 and X1 can be used as high-speed counter and 1-phase can be up to 40KHz.
High-speed counter for EP/SA series, 1-phase high-speed counter: 10KHz, total frequency: 40KHz.
1-phase input 1-phase 2 inputs 2-phase inputs Type Input C235 C236 C237 C238 C239 C240 C241 C242 C244 C246 C247 C249 C251 C252 C254
X0 U/D U/D U/D U U U A A A X1 U/D R R D D D B B B X2 U/D U/D R R R R X3 U/D R S S S X4 U/D X5 U/D
U: Increasing A: A phase input S: Start input
D: Decreasing B: B phase input R: Clear input
1. Input point X0, X1 can be used as high-speed counter and 1-phase can be up to 20KHz
2. There are two functions for input points X5
When M1260=Off, C240 is general U/D high-speed counter.
When M1260=On, it is Global reset for C235~C239.
C235~C240 are high-speed counters for EH series and they are program interrupted 1-phase high-speed
counter (10KHz) and total frequency is 20KHz. C241~ C254 are Hardware High Speed Counter, is called HHSC.
pulse input frequency of HHSC0 and HHSC 1 can up to 100 KHz; HHSC2 and HHSC3 can up to 30KHz (both of
single phase and AB phase).
C241, C246, C251 share HHSC0
C242, C247, C252 share HHSC1
C243, C248, C253 share HHSC2
C244, C249, C254 share HHSC3
1. Each HHSC can be used for a number one time and it uses command DCNT to designate.
2. There are three modes for each HHSC:
A. 1-phase input, it is called Pulse/Direction mode
B. 1-phase 2 inputs, it is called CW/CCW mode
C. 2-phase inputs, it is called AB phase mode
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-21
Type Program-interrupted 1-phase
High-speed Counter Hardware High-speed Counter
1-phase input 1-phase input 1-phase 2 inputs 2-phase inputs Type
Input C235 C236 C237 C238 C239 C240 C241 C242 C243 C244 C246 C247 C248 C249 C251 C252 C253 C254
X0 U/D U/D U A X1 U/D D B X2 U/D R R R X3 U/D S S S X4 U/D U/D U A X5 U/D D B X6 R R R X7 S S S X10 U/D U A X11 D B X12 R R R X13 S S S X14 U/D U A X15 D B X16 R R R X17 S S S
U: Increasing A: A phase input S: Start input
D: Decreasing B: B phase input R: Clear input
3. System structure of hardware high-speed counter:
A. There are Reset signal and Start signal of external inputs in HHSC0~3. It also can be Reset signal
by setting special M, M1272 (HHSC0), M1274 (HHSC1), M1276 (HHSC2) and M1278 (HHSC3).
And it can be Start signal by setting special M, M1273 (HHSC0), M1275 (HHSC1), M1277
(HHSC2) and M1279 (HHSC3).
B. If input external control signals of R and S aren’t used when using high-speed counter, the
function of input signal can be closed by setting M1264/ M1266/ M1268/ M1270 and M1265 /
M1267/ M1269/ M1271 to True. The corresponding external input can be used as general inputs.
Please refer following for using.
C. When using special M to be high-speed counter, control input with START and TRSET and the
action will be affected with scan time.
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-22
HHSC0
HHSC1
HHSC2
HHSC3
M1265
M1273
M1267
M1275
M1269
M1277
M1271
M1279
X3 X7 X17X13
M1272 M1274 M1276 M1278
M1264 M1266 M1268 M1270X2 X6 X12 X16
M1241 M1242 M1243 M1244C241 C242 C243 C244
D1225 D1226 D1227 D1228
X1 X5 X11 X15
X14X10X4X0
HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3
HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3
HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3
HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3
HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3
HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3
M1246
M1247
M1248
M1249 M1254
M1253
M1252
M1251
DHSCS
DHSCR
DHSCZ
SET/RESETI 060 interruptcounting value reset010 ~ I
I 010I 020I 030I 040I 050I 060
M1289M1290M1291M1292M1293M1294M1294
HHSC0
HHSC1
HHSC2
HHSC3
DHSCS occupies one group setting valueDHSCR occupies one group setting valueDHSCZ occupies two groups setting value
ANDOR
Reset signal R
ANDOR
U/D mode setting flag
Counting modeselection
U/DUA
BD
Counting up/down flag
Setting value:0~3 respectivelyrepresent Mode 1~4(1~4 ) frequency mode
Counting pulse
Counting pulse
Comparator
Current valueof counter
Start signal S
Interrupt inhibit flag
High speedcompar isoncommand
Comparison valuereached operation
Comparison valuereached output
Comparison valuereached setting
4. Counting mode selection
ES/EX/SS/EP high-speed counter uses special D1022 in 2-phase inputs counting mode to select
double frequency mode. D1022 content will be loaded in at the first scan time when PLC switches
from STOP to RUN. (ES/EX/SS series MPU (V5.5 and higher) supports this function.
Device No. Functions
D1022 Double frequency setting of counter counting method
D1022=K1 Normal frequency mode
D1022=K2 Double frequency mode (factory setting)
D1022=K4 Four times frequency mode
Double frequency mode (↑,↓ means the action of counting)
Counting mode
Wave for counting mode
2-phase inputs
1(normal frequency)
A-phase
B-phasecounting up
counting down
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-23
Counting mode
Wave for counting mode
2 (double frequency)
B-phase
counting up counting down
A-phase
4 (four times
frequency)
A-phase
B-phase
counting upcounting down
There are 1 to 4 times frequency for EH hardware high-speed counter (HHSC0~3) and set by Special D1225~D1228.
Facotry setting is double frequency.
Type Special D(settings)
Count up (+1) Count down (-1)
1(normal frequency)
U/D
U/D FLAG 1-phase input
2(double frequency)
U/D
U/D FLAG
1(normal frequency)
U
D 1-phase 2 inputs 2(double
frequency)
U
D
1(normal frequency)
A
B
2(double frequency)
A
B
3(three times frequency)
A
B
2-phase 2 inputs
4(four times frequency)
A
B
5. Device number and special registers for high-speed counter
Device number Functions
M1150 Declare DHSZ command to be used for multi-group setting comparison modeM1151 Multi-group setting comparison finishes to execute a cycle M1152 Declare DHSZ command to be used in frequency control mode
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-24
Device number Functions
M1153 Frequency control finishes executing.
M1235 ~ M1244 C235 ~ C244 are count direction of high-speed counters. When M12□□=Off, C2□□ is count up. When M12□□=On, C2□□ is count down.
M1246 ~ M1249 M1251 ~ M1254
C246 ~ C249, C251 ~ C254 are monitor count direction of high-speed counters. When C2□□ counts up, M12□□=Off. When C2□□ count down, M12□□
=On. M1264 Disable external control input contact of Reset signal of HHSC0 M1265 Disable external control input contact of Start signal of HHSC0 M1266 Disable external control input contact of Reset signal of HHSC1 M1267 Disable external control input contact of Start signal of HHSC1 M1268 Disable external control input contact of Reset signal of HHSC2 M1269 Disable external control input contact of Start signal of HHSC2 M1270 Disable external control input contact of Reset signal of HHSC3 M1271 Disable external control input contact of Start signal of HHSC3 M1272 External control input contact of Start signal of HHSC0 M1273 External control input contact of Start signal of HHSC0 M1274 External control input contact of Reset signal of HHSC1 M1275 External control input contact of Start signal of HHSC1 M1276 External control input contact of Reset signal of HHSC2 M1277 External control input contact of Start signal of HHSC2 M1278 External control input contact of Reset signal of HHSC3 M1279 External control input contact of Start signal of HHSC3 M1289 Disable high-speed counter interrupt insert I010~I060 M1290 Disable EH series high-speed counter interrupt insert I010 M1291 Disable EH series high-speed counter interrupt insert I020 M1292 Disable EH series high-speed counter interrupt insert I030 M1293 Disable EH series high-speed counter interrupt insert I040 M1294 Disable EH series high-speed counter interrupt insert I050 M1312 C235 Start input point control M1313 C236 Start input point control M1314 C237 Start input point control M1315 C238 Start input point control M1316 C239 Start input point control M1317 C240 Start input point control M1320 C235 Reset input point control M1321 C236 Reset input point control M1322 C237 Reset input point control M1323 C238 Reset input point control M1324 C239 Reset input point control M1325 C240 Reset input point control M1326 C235 Start/Reset enable control M1327 C236 Start/Reset enable control M1328 C237 Start/Reset enable control M1329 C235 Start input point control M1330 C236 Start input point control M1331 C238 Start/Reset enable control
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-25
Device number Functions
M1332 C239 Start/Reset enable control M1333 C240 Start/Reset enable control D1022 ES/EX/SS/EP/SA models double frequency selection of AB phase counter
D1150 The register to record the comparison item of settings comparison mode of multi-group
D1151 The register to record the comparison item of frequency control mode
D1152 Executing DHSZ command in frequency control mode, the high word of pulse output frequency.
D1153 Executing DHSZ command in frequency control mode, the low word of pulse output frequency.
D1225 First group counter setting, C241, C246 and C251 counting mode D1226 Second group counter setting, C242, C247 and C252 counting mode D1227 Third group counter setting, C243, C248 and C253 counting mode D1228 4th group counter setting, C244, C249 and C254 counting mode
D1225 ~ D1228
HHSC0~ HHSC3 counting mode of EH hardware high-speed counter When setting to 1, it is normal frequency. Setting to 2 is double frequency.(Factory setting) Setting to 3 is three times frequency and setting to 4 is four times frequency.
1-phase inputs high-speed counter:
Example:
LD X10 RST C241 LD X11 OUT M1241 LD X12 DCNT C241 K5 LD C241 OUT Y0
C241Y0
X12C241 K5DCNT
X11C241RST
X10
M1241
1. X11 drives M1241 to decide C241 is
addition or subtraction. 2. When X10=On and RST command is
executed, clear C241 to 0 and reset output contact to off.
3. When X12=On, C241 receives count signal from X0 and counter will count up (+1) or count down (-1).
4. When counter C241 attains settings K5, C241 will be ON. If there is still signal input for X0, it will keep on counting.
X12
X0
01
23
45
0
X10
X11,M1241 contact
67
65
43
counting upcounting down
C241 present value
Y0, C241 contact
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-26
5. C241 for ES, EX, SS, EP series has external input Reset X1 signal.
6. C241 for EH series has external input Reset signal (X2), Start signal (X3).
7. EH series external input contact of clear signal of C241 (HHSC0) is disabled by M1264. External input contact
of start signal is disabled by M1265.
8. EH series internal input contact of clear signal of C241 (HHSC0) is disabled by M1272. Internal input contact of
start signal is disabled by M1273.
9. Counting mode (normal frequency or double frequency) of C246 (HHSC0) of EH series can be set by D1225.
Factory setting is double frequency.
1-phase 2 inputs high-speed counters:
Example:
LD X10 RST C246 LD X11 DCNT C246 K5 LD C246 OUT Y0
C246Y0
X11C246 K5DCNT
C246RSTX10
1. When X10=On and RST command is executed,
clear C246 to 0 and reset output contact to off.
2. When X11=On, C246 receives count signal
from X0 input terminal and counter will count up
(+1) or receive count signal from X1 input
terminal and counter will count down (-1).
3. When C246 attains settings K5, C246 will be
on. After C246 is ON, if there is counter pulse
input, C246 will keep on counting.
X11
01
23
45
0
X10
67
65
43
X1count upX0
count down
C246presentvalue
Y0, C246 contact
4. C246 for EH series has external input Reset signal X2 or Start signal X3.
5. C246 (HHSC0) of EH series can be normal frequency or double frequency by setting D1225. Factory setting
is double frequency.
6. EH series external input contact of clear signal ( R ) of C246 (HHSC0) is disabled by M1264. External input
contact of start signal ( S ) is disabled by M1265.
7. EH series internal input contact of clear signal ( R ) of C246 (HHSC0) is disabled by M1272. Internal input
contact of start signal ( S ) is disabled by M1273.
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-27
2-phase AB input high-speed counter:
Example:
LD X10 RST C251 LD X11 DCNT C251 K5 LD C251 OUT Y0
C251Y0
X11C251 K5DCNT
C251RSTX10
1. When X11=On, RST command is executed and reset C251 to 0, output contact is reset to off.
2. C251 receives A phase counting signal of X0 input terminal and B phase counting signal of X1 input
terminal to execute add 1 (count up) or subtract 1 (count down) when X12=on. EH series can set different
frequency for counting mode.
3. When counter C251 attains settings K5, C251 contact will be ON. After C251 is On, if there is counter
pulse input, C251 will keep on counting.
4. For ES/EP/SA series, it can be set to normal frequency, double frequency or four times frequency by
D1022 (counting mode setting). Factory setting is double frequency.
5. EH series C251 has external input reset signal X2 and start signal X3.
6. The counting mode (normal frequency, double frequency, third times frequency, four times frequency) of
EH series C251 (HHSC0) can be set by D1225. Factory setting is double frequency.
7. EH series external input contact of clear signal of C246 (HHSC0) is disabled by M1264. External input
contact of start signal is disabled by M1265.
8. EH series internal input contact of clear signal of C246 (HHSC0) is disabled by M1272. Internal input
contact of start signal is disabled by M1273. ES/EX/SS, EP/SA series:
01
23
45
X11
X10
6
3
01
23
45
A-phase X0
B-phase X1
C251 present value
Y0, C251 contact
Counting up Counting down
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-28
EH series:(double frequency)
01
23
45
X11
X10
6
2
01
23
45
A-phase X0B-phaseX1
C251present value
Y0. C251 contact
counting up counting down
2.8 Register Number and Function [D], [E], [F]
2.8.1 Data register [D]
It is used to store numerical data and data length is 16-bit (-32,768~+32,767). The left-most bit is sign bit. Two
16-bit registers also can be combined to a 32-bit register (The number for each 32-bit register will be (D0, D1), (D2,
D3) …..and the number for upper bit will be greater than low bit.) The left-most bit sign bit and the store range is
-2,147,483,648~+2,147,483,647.
ES, EX, SS model:
For general D0~D407, 408 points
For latched * D408~D599, 192 points. (It is fixed to be latched area)
Special D1000~D1143, 144 points. (Some are latched area) Data register D
Index register E, F E(=D1028), F(=D1029), 2 points
Total is744
points
EP/SA model:
For general D0~D199, 200 points. (It is fixed to be unlatched area)
For latched D200~D999, D2000~D4999, 3800 points. (It can be used to
be unlatched area by setting parameter.)
Special D1000~D1999, 1000 points. (Some are latched area)
Data register D
Index register E, F E0~E3, F0~F3, 8 points
Total is5000 points
File register K0~K1599, MPU 1600 points. (It is fixed to be latched area)
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-29
EH model:
For general D0~D199, 200 points. It can be latched area by setting
parameter
For latched D200~D999, D2000~D9999, 8800points. It can be
non-latched area by setting parameter
For special D1000~D1999, 1000 pints. Some are latched.
Data register D
Index register E, F E0~E7, F0~F7, 16 points.
Total is10000 points
File register K0~K9999, MPU is 1000 points. (It is fixed to be latched area)
There are five types of register which sorts by characters in the following:
1. General register : The data in register will be cleared to 0 when PLC switches from RUN to STOP or
power is off. If M1033=On when PLC switches from Run to STOP, data won’t be
cleared but the data will be cleared to 0 when power is off.
2. Latched register : The data is the latched register won’t be cleared when PLC is power off. If you want
to clear the data in this register, you should use RST or ZRST command.
3. Special register : Each special register has the special definition and purpose. It is used to save system
status, error messages, monitor state. Please refer to chapter 2.11 for detail.
4. Index register [E], [F] : Index registers are 16-bit registers. There are 2 points, E and F, for ES/EX/SS
models. There are 8 points, E0~E3 and F0~F3, for EP models. There are 16 points,
E0~E7 and F0~F7, for EH models. If you want to use index register to be 32-bit
register, you should indicate E and at this moment F can’t be used.
5. File register : There are 1600 file registers (K0~K1599) for EP/SA MPU and 10000 file registers
(K0~K9,999) for EH MPU. There is no real device number for file register, you should
execute read/write of file register by command API 147 MEMR, API 148 MEMW,
peripheral device HPP or WPLSoft.
2.8.2 Index Register [E], [F]
E0 F0
F0E0
16-bit 16-bit
32-bit
upper 16-bit lower 16-bit
Index registers E, F are 16-bit data register, just the same as general
data register. It can be wrote/read.
It can be used as 32-bit register. But at this time, this register should
be indicated to E and F can’t be used. Otherwise, the data will be
error. (It is recommend to use command DMOVP K0 E and clear E
and F to 0 when power on.
The combination of E and F when using as 32-bit register are:
(E0, F0) , (E1, F1) (E2, F2) ….(E7, F7)
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-30
K14 F0
X0K8 E0MOV
D5E0 D10F0
MOV
MOV
When X0=On and E0=8, F0=14, D5E0=D(5+8)=D13, D10F0
=D(10+14) = D24, the content in D13 will be moved to D24.
The function of Index register is the same as general operand. It can be used to move or compare and used to
be index for byte device (KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D) and bit device (X, Y, M, S). For ES/EP/SA series, it can’t be
used for constant (K, H). But for EH series, it can be used for constant (K, H).
ES/EX/SS models: E0, F0 2 points
EP model: E0~E3, F0~F3, total is 8 points
EH model: E0~E7, F0~F7, total is 16 points
※ some commands don’t support index function, please refer to chapter 5.4 for using index register E and F.
※ When using command mode of WPLSoft to use constant (K,H) to be index register, it needs to use symbol “@”:
Example: ”MOV K10@E0 D0F0”
2.8.3 File Register Function and Characteristics
EP/SA/EH series will check following when PLC is power on or change from STOP→RUN.
1. M1101 (if it starts file register function)
2. D1101 (the start number of file register of EP/SA series (K0~K1599), for EH series is K0~K9999)
3. D1102 (item number for reading, EP/SA series is K0~K1600 and EH series is K0~K10000)
4. D1103 (the address to save the reading data, the start address of designated file register D
(K2000~K9999). It is used to decide if transferring file to designated register automatically.
Note:
The action which read from file register to data register D won’t be executed when D1101 for EP/SA model
is greater than 1600, D1101 for EH model is greater than 8,000 or the value of D1103 is less than 2,000 or
greater than 9,999.
When starting executing the action to read data from file register to data register, PLC will stop reading
once the address of file register or data register D exceeds usage range.
There are 1600 file registers for EP/SA models and 10000 file registers for EH models. There is no actual
number for file register, therefore it should use command API 147 MEMR, API 148 MEMW or peripheral
HPP02 and WPLSoft to execute the read/write of file register. If the address of file register for reading
exceeds useful range, the data for reading will be 0.
2.9 Nest Level Pointer[N], Pointer[P], Interrupt Pointer [I]
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-31
ES, EX, SS models:
N For master control nested N0~N7, 8 points Control point of master control nested
P For CJ, CALL commands P0~P63, 64 points Location pointer of CJ, CALL
Insert timer interrupt I6□□, 1 point (□□=10~99ms, time base=1ms) (for Version 5.7)
Insert external interrupt I001, I101, I201, I301, 4 points
Pointer
I Interrupt
Insert communication interrupt I150
Location pointer of interrupt subroutine
EP/SA models:
N Master control nested N0~N7, 8 points The control point of master control nested
P For CJ, CALL commands P0~P255, 256 points The location point of CJ, CALL
Insert external interrupt
I001, I101, I201, I301, I401, I501, total is 6 points
Insert time interrupt I6□□, I7□□, 2 points (□□=10~99ms, time base=1ms)
Insert high-speed counter attained interrupt
I010, I020, I030, I040, I050, I060, 6 points
Pointer
I For interrupt
Insert communication interrupt
I150
The location point of
interrupt subroutine.
EH models:
N Master control nested N0~N7, 8 points Master control nested control point
P For CJ, CALL commands P0~P255, 256 points The location pointer of CJ, CALL
Insert external interrupt
I00□(X0), I10□(X1), I20□(X2), I30□(X3), I40□(X4), I50□(X5), 6 points (□=1, rising-edge trigger , □=0, falling-edge trigger )
Insert time interrupt
I6□□ , I7□□ , I8□□ , 2 points (□□=
1~99ms, time base=1ms) I8□□ , 1 points (□□=0.1~9.9ms, time base=0.1ms)
Insert high-speed counter attained interrupt
I010, I020, I030, I040, I050, I060, 6 points
Insert pulse interrupt I110, I120, I130, I140, 4 points
Pointer
I Interrupt
Insert communication interrupt
I150
The location pointer of
interrupt subroutine
Nest Level Pointer N: used with command MC and MCR. MC is master start command. When MC command is
executed, the commands between MC and MCR will be executed normally. MC-MCR master
command supports nested program structure and the maximum is 8 levels, which is
numbered from N0 to N7. Refer to chapter3.7 for detail information.
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-32
Pointer P: use with application commands API 00 CJ, API 01 CALL, API 02 SRET. Refer to chapter 5.5 commands CJ,
CALL, SRET usage method for more information.
CJ condition jump:
X2Y2
X1
P1CJX0
Y1
P**
0
P1 N
When X0=On, program will jump from 0 to N
(designated label P1) and keep on executing
without executing the address between 0 and
N.
When X0=Off, program will execute from 0 and
keep on executing the followings. CJ command
won’t be executed at this time.
CALL subroutine, SRET subroutine END:
Y0
X1
P2CALLX0
Y1
P**
20
P2
FEND
Y0
SRET
24
(subroutine P2) subroutine
Call subroutine P**
subroutine return
When X0 is On, it will jump
to P2 to execute the
designated subroutine as
executing CALL
command. When
executing SRET
command, return to
address 24 to go on
executing.
Interrupt pointer I:
It is used with application command API 04 EI, API 05DI, API 03 IRET. Refer to chapter 5.5 for more information.
There are five functions below. Interrupt insert should be used with EI, interrupt insert enable, interrupt insert disable
and IRET interrupt insert return, etc. 1. External interrupt insert : When input signal of input terminal X0~X5 is triggered on rising-edge or
falling-edge, it will interrupt present program and jump to the designated interrupt insert subroutine pointer I00□(X0), I10□(X1), I20□(X2), I30□(X3), I40□(X4), I50□(X5) to execute and return to previous address to execute when executing IRET command. That is due to special hardware circuit design of PLC MPU and is not affected by scan period.
2. Timer interrupt insert : It is special hardware circuit design in PLC MPU. It will stop present program and jump to the designated interrupt insert subroutine to execute automatically every a period time (can be set to 10ms~99ms).
3. Counter attained interrupt insert : The comparison command API 53 DHSCS of high-speed counter can designate to interrupt present program and jump to the designated interrupt insert subroutine to execute interrupt pointer I010, I020, I030, I040, I050, I060 when comparison attained.
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-33
4. Pulse interrupt insert : Using pulse output command API 57 PLSY to send interrupt vector I130(corresponds to M1342) and I140(corresponds to M1343) at the same time when pulse output the first pulse. But it should start flag M1342 and M1343 first. And it also can set to send interrupt vector I110 (corresponds to M1340) and I120(corresponds to M1341) once pulse finishes to output the last pulse.
5. Communication interrupt insert : When using communication command RS, it can be set to have interrupt request when receiving specific charcters. Interrupt number is I150 and specific characters is set to low byte of D1168. When PLC connects to communication device and received data length is not the same, setting end character to D1168 and interrupt subroutine to I150. When PLC receives this end character, it will execute interrupt subroutine I150.
2.10 Special Auxiliary Relay and Special Register
The kinds and functions of special auxiliary relay (Special M) and special registers (special D) are as shown in
the following. Please notice that some equipment with the same number will be different to the different model. In the
following chart, the meaning of column “Attribute” are: “R” means can only read. “R/W” means can read/write.
“-“ means can do nothing. “#” means system setting, user can read the detail explanation of the setting in the manual.
“*” means can refer following for explanation.
Special M Function
ESEXSS
EPSA EH
Off
On
STOP
RUN
RUN
STOP Attribute Latched Factory
setting
M1000* Normally open contact (a contact). This contact is ON when running and it is ON when the status is set to RUN.
○ ○ ○ Off On Off R NO Off
M1001* Normally OFF contact (b contact). This contact is OFF in running and it is OFF when the status is set to RUN.
○ ○ ○ On Off On R NO On
M1002* ON only for 1 scan after RUN. Initial pulse is contact a. It will get positive pulse in the RUNmoment. Pulse width=scan period.
○ ○ ○ Off On Off R NO Off
M1003* OFF only for 1 scan after RUN. Initial pulse is contact a. It will get negative pulse in the RUNmoment. Pulse width=scan period.
○ ○ ○ On Off On R NO On
M1004* On when error occurs ○ ○ ○ Off Off - R NO Off
M1005 Password of data backup memory card and MPU password don’t match
╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R NO Off
M1006 Data backup memory card isn’t initial ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R NO OffM1008* Monitor timer flag (ON: PLC WDT time out) ○ ○ ○ Off Off - R NO OffM1009 System used - - - - - - - - -
M1010 ES/EX/SS and EP/SA: PLSY Y0 mode selection. It is continuous output when it is ON.EH:PULSE will be output at the END.
○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1011* 10ms clock pulse, 5ms On/5ms Off ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO OffM1012* 100ms clock pulse, 50ms On / 50ms Off ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO OffM1013* 1s clock pulse, 0.5s On / 0.5s Off ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO OffM1014* 1min clock pulse, 30s On / 30s Off ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO OffM1015* High-speed timer activates ╳ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1016* When it is Off, it will display two right-most bits. When it is On, it will display (two right-most bits + 2000).
╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1017* ±30 seconds adjustment ╳ ○ ╳ Off - - R/W NO OffM1018 Flag for Radian/Degree, On for degree ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO OffM1019* Cancle X0~X17 input delay ○ ╳ ╳ Off - - R/W NO Off
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-34
Special M Function
ESEXSS
EPSA EH
Off
On
STOP
RUN
RUN
STOP Attribute Latched Factory
setting
M1020 Zero flag ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R NO OffM1021 Borrow flag ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R NO OffM1022 Carry flag ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R NO Off
M1023 PLSY Y1 mode selection, it is continuous output when it is ON. ○ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1024 System used flag - - - - - - - - -
M1025 If PLC receive illegal communication request when HPP, PC or HMI connects to PLC, M1025 will be set and save the error code in D1025.
○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1026 EP/EH: Startup flag of RAMP module ╳ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1027 PR output flag ╳ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1028
10ms/100ms time switch flag. The base setting flag of T64~T126 is 100ms, when timer is OFF and the base setting flag is 10ms when it is ON.
○ ╳ ╳ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1029*
ES/EX/SS and EP/SA: Pulse output Y0 of PLSY and PLSR command execution completed or other relative command execution completed EH: The first group pulse CH0 (Y0, Y1) output complete executing or other relative command execution completed
○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R NO Off
M1030*
ES/EX/SS and EP/SA: Pulse output Y1 of PLSY and PLSR command execution completed EH: The second group pulse CH1 (Y2, Y3) output complete executing
○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R NO Off
M1031* Clear all non-latched memory ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO OffM1032* Clear all latched memory ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO OffM1033* Memory latched at STOP ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO OffM1034* All Y outputs disable ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1035* Start X input point to be RUN/STOP switch and correspond to D1035 (for EP/SA models, only X7 can be used)
╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W YES Off
M1039* Constant scan mode ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO OffM1040 Step transition inhibits ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1041 Step transition starts ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1042 Start pulse ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1043 Zero point return completed ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1044 Zero point condition ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1045 All outputs clear inhibit ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1046 STL state setting (On) ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO OffM1047 STL monitor enable ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1048 Flag for alarm point state ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R NO OffM1049 Monitor flag for alarm point ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO OffM1050 I001 masked ○ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1051 I101 masked ○ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1052 I201 masked ○ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1053 I301 masked ○ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1054 I401 masked ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1055 I501 masked ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1056 I6□□ masked ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1057 I7□□ masked ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-35
Special M Function
ESEXSS
EPSA EH
Off
On
STOP
RUN
RUN
STOP Attribute Latched Factory
setting
M1059 I010~I060 masked ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1060 System error message 1 ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO OffM1061 System error message 2 ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO OffM1062 System error message 3 ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO OffM1063 System error message 4 ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO OffM1064 Operator error ○ ○ ○ Off Off - R NO OffM1065 Syntax error ○ ○ ○ Off Off - R NO OffM1066 Program error ○ ○ ○ Off Off - R NO OffM1067* Program execution error ○ ○ ○ Off Off - R NO Off
M1068* Execution error locked (D1068) ○ ○ ○ Off Off - R NO Off
M1070
ES/EX/SS and EP/SA: time pulse unit switch of PWM command Y1. When it is ON, the time pulse unit is 100us and when it is OFF, the time pulse unit is 1ms. EH: Unit setting for PWM command of the 1st pulse CH0 (Y0, Y1). On is 100us and Off is 1ms.
○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1071 Unit setting for PWM command of the 2nd pulse CH1 (Y2, Y3). On is 100us and Off is 1ms. ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1072 Execute PLC RUN command ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO OffM1073 System used - - - - - - - - - M1074 System used - - - - - - - - - M1075* FLASH write error ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO OffM1076* Real time clock error ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R NO OffM1077 Battery voltage is too low or malfunction ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1078 PLSY command Y0 pulse output stop immediately flag ○ ○ ╳ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1079 PLSY command Y1 pulse output stop immediately flag ○ ○ ╳ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1080 System used - - - - - - - - - M1081 FLT command change direction flag ╳ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1083 Enable/Disable execute interrupt program in FROM/TO mode ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1088 Matrix compared flag. If the result is the same, M1088 = 1. If the result is different, M1088 = 0. ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R/W NO Off
M1089 Matrix search start flag. Compare from the first bit and M1090=1. ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R NO Off
M1090 Matrix search start flag. Compare from the first bit and M1090=1. ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R NO Off
M1091 Matrix finding bit flag. When find it, it will stop comparing and M1091=1. ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R NO Off
M1092 Matrix pointer error flag. When pointer Pr exceeds this range, M1092=1. ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R NO Off
M1093 Matrix pointer increases flag. It will add 1 to present pointer. ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R/W NO Off
M1094 Matrix pointer clears flag. It will clear present pointer to 0. ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R/W NO Off
M1095 Carry flag for matrix rotate/shift output ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R NO OffM1096 Complement flag for matric shift input ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R/W NO OffM1097 Direction flag for matrix rotate/shift ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R/W NO OffM1098 Matrix count bit 0 or 1 flag ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R/W NO OffM1099 It is On when matrix count result 0 ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R/W NO Off
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-36
Special M Function
ESEXSS
EPSA EH
Off
On
STOP
RUN
RUN
STOP Attribute Latched Factory
setting
M1100 A sampling flag of SPD command ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1101* To decide whether start file register or not ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W Yes OffM1104* DIP switch function card SW1 state ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R NO OffM1105* DIP switch function card SW2 state ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R NO OffM1106* DIP switch function card SW3 state ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R NO OffM1107* DIP switch function card SW4 state ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R NO OffM1108* DIP switch function card SW5 state ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R NO OffM1109* DIP switch function card SW6 state ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R NO OffM1110* DIP switch function card SW7 state ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R NO OffM1111* DIP switch function card SW8 state ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off - R NO OffM1112* TR1 transistor output ╳ ○ ○ Off Off - R NO OffM1113* TR2 transistor output ╳ ○ ○ Off Off - R NO OffM1115* Start switch for accel/decel pulse output ○ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1116* Acceleration flag for accel/decel pulse output ○ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1117* Target attained frequency flag ○ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1118* Deceleration flag for accel/decel pulse output ○ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1119* Completed function flag ○ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1120 Communication protocol holding ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO OffM1121 Transmission ready ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R NO OffM1122 Sending request ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1123 Receiving completed ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1124 Receiving wait ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1125 Communication reset ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1126 STX/ETX user/system selection ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1127 MODRD/RDST/MODRW commands. Data receivingcompleted. ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1128 Transmit/Receive Indication ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO OffM1129 Receiving time out ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1130 STX/ETX selection ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1131 MODRD/RDST/MODRW, M1131=On when data convert to HEX ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R NO Off
M1133* Special high-speed pulse (50KHz) output switch (On is start) ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1134* Special high-speed pulse (50KHz) output. On is continuous output switch ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off - R/W NO Off
M1135* Output pulse numbers attained flag ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO OffM1140 MODRD/MODWR/MODRW data received error ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R NO OffM1141 MODRD/MODWR/MODRW command error ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R NO OffM1142 VFD-A command data received error ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R NO Off
M1143 ASCII/RTU mode selections (use with MODRD / MODWR / MODRW) (it is Off when in ASCII mode and it is On when in RTU)
○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1144* Ouput start switch of accel/decel pulse output function of adjustable slope ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1145* Acceleration flag of accel/decel pulse output function of adjustable slope ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off - R NO Off
M1146* Target attained frequency flag of accel/decel pulse output function of adjustable slope ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off - R NO Off
M1147* Deceleration flag of accel/decel pulse output ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off - R NO Off
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-37
Special M Function
ESEXSS
EPSA EH
Off
On
STOP
RUN
RUN
STOP Attribute Latched Factory
setting
function of adjustable slope
M1148* Complete function flag of accel/decel pulse output function of adjustable slope ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1149* Stop counting temporality flag of accel/decel pulse output function of adjustable slope ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off - R/W NO Off
M1150 Declare DHSZ command used for multi-group settings comparison mode ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1151 Finish executing multi-group settings comparison mode ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R NO Off
M1152 Declare DHSZ command used to be frequency control mode ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1153 Finish executing frequency control mode ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R NO Off
M1154* Start designated deceleration function flag of accel/decel pulse output function of adjustable slope
╳ ○ ╳ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1161 8/16 bits mode (it is On when in 8 bits mode) ○ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1167 HKY input is 16 bits mode ╳ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1168 SMOV working mode indication ╳ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1170* Start executing single step ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1171* Execute single step ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1172* 2-phase pulse output switch (on is start) ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1173* On is continuous output switch ╳ ○ ╳ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1174* Output pulse number attained flag ╳ ○ ╳ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1178* VR0 potentiometer starts ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1179* VR1 potentiometer starts ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1196 System used - - - - - - - - -
M1197 System used - - - - - - - - -
M1198 System used - - - - - - - - -
M1199 System used - - - - - - - - -
M1200 C200 counting mode (on: count down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1201 C201 counting mode (on: count down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1202 C202 counting mode (on: count down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1203 C203 counting mode (on: count down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1204 C204 counting mode (on: count down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1205 C205 counting mode (on: count down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1206 C206 counting mode (on: count down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1207 C207 counting mode (on: count down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1208 C208 counting mode (on: count down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1209 C209 counting mode (on: count down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1210 C210 counting mode (on: count down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1211 C211 counting mode (on: count down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1212 C212 counting mode (on: count down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1213 C213 counting mode (on: count down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-38
Special M Function
ESEXSS
EPSA EH
Off
On
STOP
RUN
RUN
STOP Attribute Latched Factory
setting
M1214 C214 counting mode (on: count down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1215 C215 counting mode (on: count down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1216 C216 counting mode (on: count down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1217 C217 counting mode (on: count down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1218 C218 counting mode (on: count down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1219 C219 counting mode (on: count down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1220 C220 counting mode (on: count down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1221 C221 counting mode (on: count down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1222 C222 counting mode (on: count down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1223 C223 counting mode (on: count down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1224 C224 counting mode (on: count down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1225 C225 counting mode (on: count down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1226 C226 counting mode (on: count down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1227 C227 counting mode (on: count down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1228 C228 counting mode (on: count down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1229 C229 counting mode (on: count down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1230 C230 counting mode (on: count down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1231 C231 counting mode (on: count down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1232 C232 counting mode (on: count down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1233 C233 counting mode (on: count down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1234 C234 counting mode (on: count down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1235 C235 counting mode (on: count down) ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1236 C236 counting mode (on: count down) ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1237 C237 counting mode (on: count down) ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1238 C238 counting mode (on: count down) ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1239 C239 counter mode setting (on: count down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1240 C240 counter mode setting (on: count down) ╳ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1241 C241 counter mode setting (on: count down) ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1242 C242 counter mode setting (on: count down) ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1243 C243 counter mode setting (on: count down) ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1244 C244 counter mode setting (on: count down) ○ ○ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1246 C246 counter monitor (on: count down) ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1247 C247 counter monitor (on: count down) ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1248 C247 counter monitor (on: count down) ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1249 C249 counter monitor (on: count down) ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1251 C251 counter monitor (on: count down) ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1252 C252 counter monitor (on: count down) ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1253 C254 counter monitor (on: count down) ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-39
Special M Function
ESEXSS
EPSA EH
Off
On
STOP
RUN
RUN
STOP Attribute Latched Factory
setting
M1254 C254 counter monitor (on: count down) ○ ○ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1256 System used - - - - - - - - -
M1258 Swap Y0 and Y1 pulse output signal ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1259 Swap Y2 and Y3 pulse output signal ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1260 Let X5 be the reset input signal of all high-speed counter ╳ ○ ╳ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1261 DHSCR command High-speed comparison flag ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1264 HHSC0 Start function enable ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1265 HHSC0 Reset function enable ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1266 HHSC1 Start function enable ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1267 HHSC1 Reset function enable ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1268 HHSC2 Start function enable ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1269 HHSC2 Reset function enable ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1270 HHSC3 Start function enable ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1271 HHSC3 Reset function enable ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1272 HHSC0 Start control ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1273 HHSC0 Reset control ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1274 HHSC1 Start control ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1275 HHSC1 Reset control ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1276 HHSC2 Start control ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1277 HHSC2 Reset control ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1278 HHSC3 Start control ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1279 HHSC3 Reset control ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1280 I00□ flag disable ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1281 I10□ flag disable ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1282 I20□ flag disable ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1283 I30□ flag disable ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1284 I40□ flag disable ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1285 I50□ flag disable ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1286 I6□□ flag disable ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1287 I7□□ flag disable ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1288 I8□□ flag disable ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1289 I010 flag disable ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1290 I020 flag disable ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1291 I030 flag disable ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1292 I040 flag disable ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1293 I050 flag disable ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1294 I060 flag disable ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-40
Special M Function
ESEXSS
EPSA EH
Off
On
STOP
RUN
RUN
STOP Attribute Latched Factory
setting
M1303 Swap high and low byte ╳ ○ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1304* X input point can decide to be On-Off ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1305 Factory setting ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1312 C235 Start input point control ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1313 C236 Start input point control ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1314 C237 Start input point control ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1315 C238 Start input point control ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1316 C239 Start input point control ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1317 C240 Start input point control ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1320 C235 Reset input point control ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1321 C236 Reset input point control ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1322 C237 Reset input point control ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1323 C238 Reset input point control ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1324 C239 Reset input point control ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1325 C240 Reset input point control ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1328 C235 Start/Reset function enable ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1329 C236 Start/Reset function enable ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1330 C237 Start/Reset function enable ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1331 C238 Start/Reset function enable ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1332 C239 Start/Reset function enable ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1333 C240 Start/Reset function enable ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1334 Stop CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse output temporarily ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1335 Stop CH1 (Y2, Y3) pulse output temporarily ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1336 CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse send flag ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R NO Off
M1337 CH1 (Y2, Y3) pulse send flag ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R NO Off
M1338 Start CH0 (Y0, Y1) offset pulse flag ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1339 Start CH1 (Y2, Y3) offset pulse flag ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1340 To have interrupt (I110) after finishing sending CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1341 To have interrupt (I120) after finishing sending CH1 (Y2, Y3) pulse ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1342 To have interrupt (I130) at the same time that sending CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1343 To have interrupt (I140) at the same time that sending CH1 (Y2,Y3) pulse ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1344 Start CH0 (Y0, Y1) compensation pulse flag ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1345 Start CH1 (Y2, Y3) compensation pulse flag ╳ ╳ ○ Off Off Off R/W NO Off
M1350* PLC LINK start flag ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1351* Start PLC LINK automatically or by manual ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R/W NO Off
M1360* PLC LINK ID 1 exists ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1361* PLC LINK ID 2 exists ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-41
Special M Function
ESEXSS
EPSA EH
Off
On
STOP
RUN
RUN
STOP Attribute Latched Factory
setting
M1362* PLC LINK ID 3 exists ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1363* PLC LINK ID 4 exists ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1364* PLC LINK ID 5 exists ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1365* PLC LINK ID 6 exists ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1366* PLC LINK ID 7 exists ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1367* PLC LINK ID 8 exists ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1368* PLC LINK ID 9 exists ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1369* PLC LINK ID 10 exists ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1370* PLC LINK ID 11 exists ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1371* PLC LINK ID 12 exists ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1372* PLC LINK ID 13 exists ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1373* PLC LINK ID 14 exists ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1374* PLC LINK ID 15 exists ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1375* PLC LINK ID 16 exists ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1376* PLC LINK ID 1 acts ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1377* PLC LINK ID 2 acts ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1378* PLC LINK ID 3 acts ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1379* PLC LINK ID 4 acts ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1380* PLC LINK ID 5 acts ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1381* PLC LINK ID 6 acts ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1382* PLC LINK ID 7 acts ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1383* PLC LINK ID 8 acts ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1384* PLC LINK ID 9 acts ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1385* PLC LINK ID 10 acts ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1386* PLC LINK ID 11 acts ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1387* PLC LINK ID 12 acts ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1388* PLC LINK ID 13 acts ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1389* PLC LINK ID 14 acts ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1390* PLC LINK ID 15 acts ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1391* PLC LINK ID 16 acts ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1392* PLC LINK ID 1 ERROR ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1393* PLC LINK ID 2 ERROR ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1394* PLC LINK ID 3 ERROR ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1395* PLC LINK ID 4 ERROR ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1396* PLC LINK ID 5 ERROR ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1397* PLC LINK ID 6 ERROR ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1398* PLC LINK ID 7 ERROR ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1399* PLC LINK ID 8 ERROR ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-42
Special M Function
ESEXSS
EPSA EH
Off
On
STOP
RUN
RUN
STOP Attribute Latched Factory
setting
M1400* PLC LINK ID 9 ERROR ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1401* PLC LINK ID 10 ERROR ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1402* PLC LINK ID 11 ERROR ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1403* PLC LINK ID 12 ERROR ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1404* PLC LINK ID 13 ERROR ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1405* PLC LINK ID 14 ERROR ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1406* PLC LINK ID 15 ERROR ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1407* PLC LINK ID 16 ERROR ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1408* PLC LINK ID 1 read completed ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1409* PLC LINK ID 2 read completed ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1410* PLC LINK ID 3 read completed ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1411* PLC LINK ID 4 read completed ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1412* PLC LINK ID 5 read completed ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1413* PLC LINK ID 6 read completed ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1414* PLC LINK ID 7 read completed ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1415* PLC LINK ID 8 read completed ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1416* PLC LINK ID 9 read completed ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1417* PLC LINK ID 10 read completed ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1418* PLC LINK ID 11 read completed ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1419* PLC LINK ID 12 read completed ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1420* PLC LINK ID 13 read completed ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1421* PLC LINK ID 14 read completed ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1422* PLC LINK ID 15 read completed ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1423* PLC LINK ID 16 read completed ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1424* PLC LINK ID 1 write completed ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1425* PLC LINK ID 2 write completed ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1426* PLC LINK ID 3 write completed ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1427* PLC LINK ID 4 write completed ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1428* PLC LINK ID 5 write completed ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1429* PLC LINK ID 6 write completed ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1430* PLC LINK ID 7 write completed ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1431* PLC LINK ID 8 write completed ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1432* PLC LINK ID 9 write completed ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1433* PLC LINK ID 10 write completed ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1434* PLC LINK ID 11 write completed ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1435* PLC LINK ID 12 write completed ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1436* PLC LINK ID 13 write completed ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1437* PLC LINK ID 14 write completed ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-43
Special M Function
ESEXSS
EPSA EH
Off
On
STOP
RUN
RUN
STOP Attribute Latched Factory
setting
M1438* PLC LINK ID 15 write completed ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
M1439* PLC LINK ID 16 write completed ╳ ╳ ○ Off - - R NO Off
Special
D Function ESEXSS
EPSA EH
Off
On
STOP
RUN
RUN
STOP Attribute Latched Factory
setting
D1000* Watchdog timer (WDT) value (Unit: 1ms) ○ ○ ○ 200 - - R/W NO 200
D1001
DVP model number+memory capacity / type (user can read PLC program version from this register. For example, D1001 = H XX27 means version 2.7. When reading from HPP it will display Knnnnn and you can convert it to hexadecimal number by pressing <H> key.
○ ○ ○ - - - R NO #
D1002* Program capacity ○ ○ ○ - - - R NO #
D1003 Sum of program memory (sum of the PLC internal program memory. User can identify the content of PLC control program by this register)
○ ○ ○ - - - R NO #
D1004* Check code for grammar ○ ○ ○ 0 0 - R NO 0
D1005 System used - - - - - - - - -
D1008* STEP address when WDT timer is ON ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1010* Present scan time (Unit: 0.1ms) ○ ○ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0
D1011* Minimum scan time (Unit: 0.1ms) ○ ○ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0
D1012* Maximum scan time (Unit: 0.1ms) ○ ○ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0
D1015* 0~32,767(unit: 0.1ms) addition type of high-speed connection timer ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1018* πPI (Low byte) ╳ ○ ○ H’0FDB H’0FDB H’0FDB R/W NO H’0FDB
D1019* πPI(High byte) ╳ ○ ○ H’4049` H’4049` H’4049` R/W NO H’4049`
D1020* ES/EX/SS and EP/SA: X0~X7 input filter (unit: ms)EH: X0~X17 input filter (unit: ms) ○ ○ ○ 10 - - R/W NO 10
D1021* ES/EX/SS and EP/SA: X10~X17 input delaysetting (unit: ms) EH: X20~X377 input filter (unit: ms)
○ ○ ○ 10 - - R/W NO 10
D1022 Double frequency selection for AB phase counter of ES/EX/SS and EP/SA models ○ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1024 System used flag - - - - - - - - -
D1025* Communication error code ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1028 Index register E0 ○ ○ ○ 0 0 0 R/W NO 0
D1029 Index register F0 ○ ○ ○ 0 0 0 R/W NO 0
D1030 Output numbers of Y0 pulse (Low word) ○ ○ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D1031 Output numbers of Y0 pulse (High word) ○ ○ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D1032 Output numbers of Y1 pulse (Low word) ○ ○ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D1033 Output numbers of Y1 pulse (High word) ○ ○ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D1035* Set the number of X input point of RUN/STOP ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1037 HKY command scan time setting, unit: 1ms ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W YES 500
D1038* When PLC MPU is slave, the setting of data response delay time. Time unit is 0.1ms. ○ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-44
Special D Function
ESEXSS
EPSA EH
Off
On
STOP
RUN
RUN
STOP Attribute Latched Factory
setting
D1039* Constant scan time (ms) ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1040 On state number 1 of STEP point S ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1041 On state number 2 of STEP point S ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1042 On state number 3 of STEP point S ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1043 On state number 4 of STEP point S ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1044 On state number 5 of STEP point S ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1045 On state number 6 of STEP point S ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1046 On state number 7 of STEP point S ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1047 On state number 8 of STEP point S ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1049 On number of alarm point ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1050 ↓
D1055
PLC will automatically convert the ASCII data saved in D1070~D1085 to HEX. ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1056* Present value of EX MPU analog input channel 0 (CH0) and EP/EH MPU AD card channel 0 (CH0) ○ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D1057* Present value of EX MPU analog input channel 1 (CH1) and EP/EH MPU AD card channel 1(CH1) ○ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D1058* Present value of EX MPU analog input channel 2 (CH2) ○ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D1059* Present value of EX MPU analog input channel 3 (CH3) ○ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D1061 System used flag - - - - - - - - -
D1065 System used flag - - - - - - - - -
D1066 System used flag - - - - - - - - -
D1067* Algorithm error code ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1068* Lock the algorithm error address ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1069 Step number of errors associated with flags M1065~M1067 ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1070 ↓
D1085
When the PLC built-in RS-485 communication command receives feedback signals from receiver. The signals will be saved in the registers D1070~D1085. User can use the contents saved in the registers to check the feedback data.
○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1089 ↓
D1099
When the PLC built-in RS-485 communication command is executed, the transmitting signals will be stored in the registers D1089~D1099. User can use the contents saved in registers to check the feedback data.
○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1101* Start address of file register ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W Yes 0 D1102* Copy numbers of file register ╳ ○ ○ 1600 - - R/W Yes 1600
D1103* Set start D number for file register to store (the number should be large than 2000) ╳ ○ ○ 2000 - - R/W Yes 2000
D1104* Parameter index for Accel/Decel pulse output Y0 (corresponds to device D) ○ ○ ╳ 0 0 - R/W NO 0
D1110* Average of EX series analog input channel 0 (CH 0) and EP/EH series DA card channel 0 (CH0) ○ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D1111* Average of EX series analog input channel 1 (CH 1) and EP/EH series DA card channel 1 (CH1) ○ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-45
Special D Function
ESEXSS
EPSA EH
Off
On
STOP
RUN
RUN
STOP Attribute Latched Factory
setting
D1112* Average of EX series analog input channel 2 (CH 2) ○ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D1113* Average of EX series analog input channel 3 (CH 3) ○ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R NO 0
D1116* EX series analog output channel 0 (CH 0) and EP/EH series DA card channel 0 (CH0) ○ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1117* EX series analog output channel 1 (CH 1) and EP/EH series DA card channel 0 (CH0) ○ ╳ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1118*
For EX model only. It is the filter wave time setting between the A/D conversions, and with the default setting as 0 and the unit as 1ms, all will be regarded as 5ms if D1118<=5.
○ ╳ ╳ 5 - - R/W NO 5
D1119 System used - - - - - - - - -
D1120 RS-485 communication protocol ○ ○ ○ H’86 - - R/W NO H’86
D1121 PLC communication address (the address that save PLC communication address, it is latched) ○ ○ ○ - - - R/W Yes 1
D1122 Residual words of transmitting data ○ ○ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0
D1123 Residual words of receiving data ○ ○ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0
D1124 Start character definition (STX) ○ ○ ○ H’3A - - R/W NO H’3A
D1125 First ending character definition (EXT1) ○ ○ ○ H’0D - - R/W NO H’0D
D1126 Second ending character definition (EXT2) ○ ○ ○ H’0A - - R/W NO H’0A
D1129 RS-485 time-out setting (ms) ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1130 MODBUS return error code record ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1133* Special high-speed pulse output register (D) index ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1137* Address of operator error occurs ○ ○ ○ 0 0 - R NO 0
D1139* Connection number of BCD module expansionunit (the maximum is two units) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1140* Special expansion module number, maximum is 8 units ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1141 System used - - - - - - - - -
D1142 Input points (X) of expansion unit ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1143 Output points (Y) of expansion unit ○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1144* Parameter index for Accel/Decel pulse output of adjustable slope (corresponds to component D) ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1145* Connection number of KEY module expansion unit ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1146* Connection number of DISP module expansionunit ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1148 System used - - - - - - - - -
D1149
Memory card type: 0: no card, 1: RS-232, TS-01, RS-422, 4: potentiometer switch, 5: DIP switch, 6: transitor output card, 7: high-speed pulse output card, 8: 2AD card, 9: 2DA card
╳ ○ ○ - - - R NO 0
D1150 Table count register in multi-group setting comparison mode ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0
D1151 Table count register in frequency control mode ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0
D1152 The change value of high word of DHSZ D ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0
D1153 The change value of low word of DHSZ D ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-46
Special D Function
ESEXSS
EPSA EH
Off
On
STOP
RUN
RUN
STOP Attribute Latched Factory
setting
D1154* Recommended Interval of accelerated time (10~32767 ms) of Accel/Decel pulse output of adjustable slope
╳ ○ ╳ 200 - - R/W NO 200
D1155* Recommended Interval of decelerated time (-1~ -32700 ms) of Accel/Decel pulse output of adjustable slope
╳ ○ ╳ -1000 - - R/W NO -1000
D1156 ↓
D1165
Special D that indicated by RTMU command (K0~K9) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1170* PC value when executing single step ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0
D1172* 2-phase pulse output frequency (12Hz~20KHz) ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1173* 2-phase pulse output mode selection (K1and K2) ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1174* Target number for 2-phase pulse outputs (low 16-bit) ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1175* Target number for 2-phase pulse outputs (high 16-bit) ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1176* Present output number of 2-phase pulse (low 16-bit) ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1177* Present output number of 2-phase pulse (high 16-bit) ╳ ○ ╳ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1178* VR0 value ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1179* VR1 value ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1182 Pointer register E1 ╳ ○ ○ 0 0 0 R/W NO 0
D1183 Pointer register F1 ╳ ○ ○ 0 0 0 R/W NO 0
D1184 Pointer register E2 ╳ ○ ○ 0 0 0 R/W NO 0
D1185 Pointer register F2 ╳ ○ ○ 0 0 0 R/W NO 0
D1186 Pointer register E3 ╳ ○ ○ 0 0 0 R/W NO 0
D1187 Pointer register F3 ╳ ○ ○ 0 0 0 R/W NO 0
D1188 Pointer register E4 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R/W NO 0
D1189 Pointer register F4 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R/W NO 0
D1190 Pointer register E5 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R/W NO 0
D1191 Pointer register F5 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R/W NO 0
D1192 Pointer register E6 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R/W NO 0
D1193 Pointer register F6 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R/W NO 0
D1194 Pointer register E7 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R/W NO 0
D1195 Pointer register F7 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R/W NO 0
D1196 System used - - - - - - - - -
D1197 System used - - - - - - - - -
D1198 System used - - - - - - - - -
D1199 System used - - - - - - - - -
D1200* Start address of M0~M999 auxiliary relay latched ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W Yes #
D1201* End address of M0~M999 auxiliary relay latched ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W Yes 999
D1202* Start address of M2000~M4095 auxiliary relay latched ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W Yes 2000
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-47
Special D Function
ESEXSS
EPSA EH
Off
On
STOP
RUN
RUN
STOP Attribute Latched Factory
setting
D1203* End address of M2000~M4095 auxiliary relay latched ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W Yes 4095
D1204* Start latched address of 100ms timer T0~T199 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W Yes H’FFFF
D1205* End latched address of 100ms timer T0~T199 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W Yes H’FFFF
D1206* Start latched address of 10ms timer T200~T239 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W Yes H’FFFF
D1207* End latched address of 10ms timer T200~T239 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W Yes H’FFFF
D1208* Start latched address of 16-bit counter C0~C199 ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W Yes #
D1209* End latched address of 16-bit counter C0~C199 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W Yes 199
D1210* Start latched address of 32-bit counter C200~C234 ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W Yes #
D1211* End latched address of 32-bit counter C200~C234 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W Yes 234
D1212* Start latched address of 32-bit high-speed counter C235~C255 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W Yes 235
D1213* End latched address of 32-bit high-speed counter C235~C255 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W Yes 255
D1214* Start latched address of step point (S0~S1023) ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W Yes #
D1215* End latched address of step point (S0~S1023) ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W Yes #
D1216* Start latched address of register D0~D999 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W Yes 200
D1217* End latched address of register D0~D999 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W Yes 999
D1218* Start latched address of register D2000~D9999 ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W Yes 2000
D1219* End latched address of register D2000~D9999 ╳ ○ ○ - - - R/W Yes #
D1220 The first group of pulse output phase 00: 1-phase (Y0 output) 01:A Phase 02:B Phase ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1221 The second group of pulse output phase 00:1- phase (Y2 output) 01:A Phase 02:B Phase ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1225 The first group of the count setting of counter (HHSC0). It is the count mode of C241, C246, C251.
╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1226 The second group of the count setting of counter (HHSC1).. It is the count mode of C242, C247, C252.
╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1227 The third group of the count setting of counter (HHSC2).. It is the count mode of C243, C248, C253.
╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1228 The forth group of the count setting of counter (HHSC3).. It is the count mode of C244, C249, C254.
╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1256 ↓
D1295
MODRW command of RS-485 is built-in. The characters that sent during executing is saved in D1256~D1295. User can check according to the content of these registers.
○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1296 ↓
D1311
MODRW command of RS-485 is built-in. PLC system will convert ASCII in the content of the register that user indicates to HEX and save it in D1296 – D1311.
○ ○ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1313* Real time clock (RTC) second 00~59 ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1314* Real time clock (RTC) minute 00~59 ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1315* Real time clock (RTC) hour 00~23 ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1316* Real time clock (RTC) day 01~31 ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 1
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-48
Special D Function
ESEXSS
EPSA EH
Off
On
STOP
RUN
RUN
STOP Attribute Latched Factory
setting
D1317* Real time clock (RTC) month 01~12 ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 1
D1318* Real time clock (RTC) week 1~7 ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 6
D1319* Real time clock (RTC) year 00–99 ╳ ○ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1320* The 1st special expansion module ID ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1321* The 2nd special expansion module ID ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1322* The 3rd special expansion module ID ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1323* The 4th special expansion module ID ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1324* The 5th special expansion module ID ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1325* The 6th special expansion module ID ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1326* The 7th special expansion module ID ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1327* The 8th special expansion module ID ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1328 CH0 (Y0,Y1) offset pulse number (Low word) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1329 CH0 (Y0,Y1) offset pulse number (High word) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1330 CH1 (Y2,Y3) offset pulse number (Low word) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1331 CH1 (Y2,Y3) offset pulse number (High word) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1332 CH0 (Y0,Y1) residual pulse number (Low word) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1333 CH0 (Y0,Y1) residual pulse number (High word) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1334 CH1 (Y2,Y3) residual pulse number (Low word) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1335 CH1 (Y2,Y3) residual pulse number (High word) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1336 Present value of CH0 pulse (Low word) Y0, Y1 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0
D1337 Present value of CH0 pulse (High word) Y0, Y1 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0
D1338 Present value of CH1 pulse (Low word) Y2, Y3 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0
D1339 Present value of CH1 pulse (High word) Y2, Y3 ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 0 R NO 0
D1340 The 1st step acceleration frequency ╳ ╳ ○ 200 - - R/W Yes 200
D1341 Maximum output frequency (Low word) (it is fixed to 200KHz) ╳ ╳ ○ H’04D0 - - R Yes H’04D0
D1342 Maximum output frequency (High word) (it is fixed to 200KHz) ╳ ╳ ○ 3 - - R Yes 3
D1343 Acceleration /Deceleration time ╳ ╳ ○ 100 - - R/W Yes 100
D1344 CH0 (Y0,Y1) complement pulse number (Low word) ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W NO 0
D1345 CH0 (Y0,Y1) complement pulse number (High word) ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W NO 0
D1346 CH1 (Y2,Y3) complement pulse number (Low word) ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W NO 0
D1347 CH1 (Y2,Y3) complement pulse number (High word) ╳ ╳ ○ - - - R/W NO 0
D1355* Communication address that read by PLC LINK ID 1 ╳ ╳ ○ H1064 - - R/W NO H1064
D1356* Communication address that read by PLC LINK ID 2 ╳ ╳ ○ H1064 - - R/W NO H1064
D1357* Communication address that read by PLC LINK ID 3
╳ ╳ ○ H1064 - - R/W NO H1064
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-49
Special D Function
ESEXSS
EPSA EH
Off
On
STOP
RUN
RUN
STOP Attribute Latched Factory
setting
ID 3
D1358* Communication address that read by PLC LINK ID 4 ╳ ╳ ○ H1064 - - R/W NO H1064
D1359* Communication address that read by PLC LINK ID 5 ╳ ╳ ○ H1064 - - R/W NO H1064
D1360* Communication address that read by PLC LINK ID 6 ╳ ╳ ○ H1064 - - R/W NO H1064
D1361* Communication address that read by PLC LINK ID 7 ╳ ╳ ○ H1064 - - R/W NO H1064
D1362* Communication address that read by PLC LINK ID 8 ╳ ╳ ○ H1064 - - R/W NO H1064
D1363* Communication address that read by PLC LINK ID 9 ╳ ╳ ○ H1064 - - R/W NO H1064
D1364* Communication address that read by PLC LINK ID 10 ╳ ╳ ○ H1064 - - R/W NO H1064
D1365* Communication address that read by PLC LINK ID 11 ╳ ╳ ○ H1064 - - R/W NO H1064
D1366* Communication address that read by PLC LINK ID 12 ╳ ╳ ○ H1064 - - R/W NO H1064
D1367* Communication address that read by PLC LINK ID 13 ╳ ╳ ○ H1064 - - R/W NO H1064
D1368* Communication address that read by PLC LINK ID 14 ╳ ╳ ○ H1064 - - R/W NO H1064
D1369* Communication address that read by PLC LINK ID 15 ╳ ╳ ○ H1064 - - R/W NO H1064
D1370* Communication address that read by PLC LINK ID 16 ╳ ╳ ○ H1064 - - R/W NO H1064
D1375* The first KEY module X coordinate ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1376* The first KEY module Y coordinate ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1377* The first KEY module button number ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1378* The second KEY module X coordinate ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1379* The second KEY module Y coordinate ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1380* The second KEY module button number ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1381* The first BCD module (Low byte) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1382* The first BCD module (High byte) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1383* The second BCD module (Low byte) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1384* The second BCD module (High byte) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1385* The first DISP module (Low byte) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 H’FFFF - R/W NO 0
D1386* The first DISP module (High byte) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 H’FFFF - R/W NO 0
D1387* The decimal setting of first DISP module ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 - R/W NO 0
D1388* The second DISP module (High byte) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 H’FFFF - R/W NO 0
D1389* The second DISP module (Low byte) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 H’FFFF - R/W NO 0
D1390* The decimal setting of second DISP module ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 - R/W NO 0
D1391* The third DISP module (High byte) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 H’FFFF - R/W NO 0
D1392* The third DISP module (Low byte) ╳ ╳ ○ 0 H’FFFF - R/W NO 0
D1393* The decimal setting of third DISP module ╳ ╳ ○ 0 0 - R/W NO 0
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-50
Special D Function
ESEXSS
EPSA EH
Off
On
STOP
RUN
RUN
STOP Attribute Latched Factory
setting
D1415* Communication address that wrote by PLC LINK ID 1 ╳ ╳ ○ H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8
D1416* Communication address that wrote by PLC LINK ID 2 ╳ ╳ ○ H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8
D1417* Communication address that wrote by PLC LINK ID 3 ╳ ╳ ○ H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8
D1418* Communication address that wrote by PLC LINK ID 4 ╳ ╳ ○ H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8
D1419* Communication address that wrote by PLC LINK ID 5 ╳ ╳ ○ H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8
D1420* Communication address that wrote by PLC LINK ID 6 ╳ ╳ ○ H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8
D1421* Communication address that wrote by PLC LINK ID 7 ╳ ╳ ○ H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8
D1422* Communication address that wrote by PLC LINK ID 8 ╳ ╳ ○ H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8
D1423* Communication address that wrote by PLC LINK ID 9 ╳ ╳ ○ H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8
D1424* Communication address that wrote by PLC LINK ID 10 ╳ ╳ ○ H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8
D1425* Communication address that wrote by PLC LINK ID 11 ╳ ╳ ○ H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8
D1426* Communication address that wrote by PLC LINK ID 12 ╳ ╳ ○ H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8
D1427* Communication address that wrote by PLC LINK ID 13 ╳ ╳ ○ H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8
D1428* Communication address that wrote by PLC LINK ID 14 ╳ ╳ ○ H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8
D1429* Communication address that wrote by PLC LINK ID 15 ╳ ╳ ○ H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8
D1430* Communication address that wrote by PLC LINK ID 16 ╳ ╳ ○ H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8
D1431* PLC LINK times ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1432* PLC LINK counts ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1433* PLC LINK units ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1434* Read items of PLC LINK ID 1 ╳ ╳ ○ 16 - - R/W NO 16
D1435* Read items of PLC LINK ID 2 ╳ ╳ ○ 16 - - R/W NO 16
D1436* Read items of PLC LINK ID 3 ╳ ╳ ○ 16 - - R/W NO 16
D1437* Read items of PLC LINK ID 4 ╳ ╳ ○ 16 - - R/W NO 16
D1438* Read items of PLC LINK ID 5 ╳ ╳ ○ 16 - - R/W NO 16
D1439* Read items of PLC LINK ID 6 ╳ ╳ ○ 16 - - R/W NO 16
D1440* Read items of PLC LINK ID 7 ╳ ╳ ○ 16 - - R/W NO 16
D1441* Read items of PLC LINK ID 8 ╳ ╳ ○ 16 - - R/W NO 16
D1442* Read items of PLC LINK ID 9 ╳ ╳ ○ 16 - - R/W NO 16
D1443* Read items of PLC LINK ID 10 ╳ ╳ ○ 16 - - R/W NO 16
D1444* Read items of PLC LINK ID 11 ╳ ╳ ○ 16 - - R/W NO 16
D1445* Read items of PLC LINK ID 12 ╳ ╳ ○ 16 - - R/W NO 16
D1446* Read items of PLC LINK ID 13 ╳ ╳ ○ 16 - - R/W NO 16
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-51
Special D Function
ESEXSS
EPSA EH
Off
On
STOP
RUN
RUN
STOP Attribute Latched Factory
setting
D1447* Read items of PLC LINK ID 14 ╳ ╳ ○ 16 - - R/W NO 16
D1448* Read items of PLC LINK ID 15 ╳ ╳ ○ 16 - - R/W NO 16
D1449* Read items of PLC LINK ID 16 ╳ ╳ ○ 16 - - R/W NO 16
D1450* Wrote items of PLC LINK ID 1 ╳ ╳ ○ 16 - - R/W NO 16
D1451* Wrote items of PLC LINK ID 2 ╳ ╳ ○ 16 - - R/W NO 16
D1452* Wrote items of PLC LINK ID 3 ╳ ╳ ○ 16 - - R/W NO 16
D1453* Wrote items of PLC LINK ID 4 ╳ ╳ ○ 16 - - R/W NO 16
D1454* Wrote items of PLC LINK ID 5 ╳ ╳ ○ 16 - - R/W NO 16
D1455* Wrote items of PLC LINK ID 6 ╳ ╳ ○ 16 - - R/W NO 16
D1456* Wrote items of PLC LINK ID 7 ╳ ╳ ○ 16 - - R/W NO 16
D1457* Wrote items of PLC LINK ID 8 ╳ ╳ ○ 16 - - R/W NO 16
D1458* Wrote items of PLC LINK ID 9 ╳ ╳ ○ 16 - - R/W NO 16
D1459* Wrote items of PLC LINK ID 10 ╳ ╳ ○ 16 - - R/W NO 16
D1460* Wrote items of PLC LINK ID 11 ╳ ╳ ○ 16 - - R/W NO 16
D1461* Wrote items of PLC LINK ID 12 ╳ ╳ ○ 16 - - R/W NO 16
D1462* Wrote items of PLC LINK ID 13 ╳ ╳ ○ 16 - - R/W NO 16
D1463* Wrote items of PLC LINK ID 14 ╳ ╳ ○ 16 - - R/W NO 16
D1464* Wrote items of PLC LINK ID 15 ╳ ╳ ○ 16 - - R/W NO 16
D1465* Wrote items of PLC LINK ID 16 ╳ ╳ ○ 16 - - R/W NO 16 D1480*
↓ D1495*
ID 1 LINK PLC reads. Communication address for ID 1 reads is in D1355. The range is D100-D115 of ID 1 PLC.
╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1496* ↓
D1511*
ID 1 LINK PLC writes. Communication address for ID 1 writes is in D1415. The range is D200-D215 of ID 1 PLC.
╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1512* ↓
D1527*
ID 2 LINK PLC reads. Communication address for ID 2 reads is in D1356. The range is D100-D115 of ID 2 PLC.
╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1528* ↓
D1543*
ID 2 LINK PLC writes. Communication address for ID 2 writes is in D1416. The range is D200-D215 of ID 2 PLC.
╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1544* ↓
D1559*
ID 3 LINK PLC reads. Communication address for ID 3 reads is in D1357. The range is D100-D115 of ID 3 PLC.
╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1560* ↓
D1575*
ID 3 LINK PLC writes. Communication address for ID 3 writes is in D1417. The range is D200-D215 of ID 3 PLC.
╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1576* ↓
D1591*
ID 4 LINK PLC reads. Communication address for ID 4 reads is in D1358. The range is D100-D115 of ID 4 PLC.
╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1592* ↓
D1607*
ID 4 LINK PLC writes. Communication address for ID 4 writes is in D1418. The range is D200-D215 of ID 4 PLC.
╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1608* ↓
D1623*
ID 5 LINK PLC reads. Communication address for ID 5 reads is in D1359. The range is D100-D115 of ID 5 PLC.
╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-52
Special D Function
ESEXSS
EPSA EH
Off
On
STOP
RUN
RUN
STOP Attribute Latched Factory
setting
D1624* ↓
D1639*
ID 5 LINK PLC writes. Communication address for ID 5 writes is in D1419. The range is D200-D215 of ID 5 PLC.
╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1640* ↓
D1655*
ID 6 LINK PLC reads. Communication address for ID 6 reads is in D1360. The range is D100-D115 of ID 6 PLC.
╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1656* ↓
D1671*
ID 6 LINK PLC writes. Communication address for ID 6 writes is in D1420. The range is D200-D215 of ID 6 PLC.
╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1672* ↓
D1687*
ID 7 LINK PLC reads. Communication address for ID 7 reads is in D1361. The range is D100-D115 of ID 7 PLC.
╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1688* ↓
D1703*
ID 7 LINK PLC writes. Communication address for ID 7 writes is in D1421. The range is D200-D215 of ID 7 PLC.
╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1704* ↓
D1719*
ID 8 LINK PLC reads. Communication address for ID 8 reads is in D1362. The range is D100-D115 of ID 8 PLC.
╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1720* ↓
D1735*
ID 8 LINK PLC writes. Communication address for ID 8 writes is in D1422. The range is D200-D215 of ID 8 PLC.
╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1736* ↓
D1751*
ID 9 LINK PLC reads. Communication address for ID 9 reads is in D1363. The range is D100-D115 of ID 9 PLC.
╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1752* ↓
D1767*
ID 9 LINK PLC writes. Communication address for ID 9 writes is in D1423. The range is D200-D215 of ID 9 PLC.
╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1768* ↓
D1783*
ID 10 LINK PLC reads. Communication address for ID 10 reads is in D1364. The range is D100-D115 of ID 10 PLC.
╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1784* ↓
D1799*
ID 10 LINK PLC writes. Communication address for ID 10 writes is in D1424. The range is D200-D215 of ID 10 PLC.
╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1800* ↓
D1815*
ID 11 LINK PLC reads. Communication address for ID 11 reads is in D1365. The range is D100-D115 of ID 11 PLC.
╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1816* ↓
D1831*
ID 11 LINK PLC writes. Communication address for ID 11 writes is in D1425. The range is D200-D215 of ID 11 PLC.
╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1832* ↓
D1847*
ID 12 LINK PLC reads. Communication address for ID 12 reads is in D1366. The range is D100-D115 of ID 12 PLC.
╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1848* ↓
D1863*
ID 12 LINK PLC writes. Communication address for ID 12 writes is in D1426. The range is D200-D215 of ID 12 PLC.
╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1864* ↓
D1879*
ID 13 LINK PLC reads. Communication address for ID 13 reads is in D1367. The range is D100-D115 of ID 13 PLC.
╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1880* ↓
D1895*
ID 13 LINK PLC writes. Communication address for ID 13 writes is in D1427. The range is D200-D215 of ID 13 PLC.
╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1896* ↓
D1911*
ID 14 LINK PLC reads. Communication address for ID 14 reads is in D1368. The range is D100-D115 of ID 14 PLC.
╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1912* ID 14 LINK PLC writes. Communication address for ID 14 writes is in D1428. The range is ╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-53
Special D Function
ESEXSS
EPSA EH
Off
On
STOP
RUN
RUN
STOP Attribute Latched Factory
setting
↓ D1927*
D200-D215 of ID 14 PLC.
D1928* ↓
D1943*
ID 15 LINK PLC reads. Communication address for ID 15 reads is in D1369. The range is D100-D115 of ID 15 PLC.
╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1944* ↓
D1959*
ID 15 LINK PLC writes. Communication address for ID 15 writes is in D1429. The range is D200-D215 of ID 15 PLC.
╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
D1960* ↓
D1975*
ID 16 LINK PLC reads. Communication address for ID 16 reads is in D1370. The range is D100-D115 of ID 16 PLC.
╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R NO 0
D1976* ↓
D1991*
ID 16 LINK PLC writes. Communication address for ID 16 writes is in D1430. The range is D200-D215 of ID 16 PLC.
╳ ╳ ○ 0 - - R/W NO 0
2.11 Special Auxiliary Relay and Special Register Functions
PLC Operation
Flag
M1000~M1003
1. M1000: M1000 is On contact during runing, i.e. a normally open contact a. Using M1000 to
drive indicated lamp during running, you can know that PLC is in RUN state. M1000
is always on when PLC is RUN.
M1000Y0 PLC is running
always ONM1000 is On contact during operation
2. M1001: M1001 is Off contact during running, i.e. a normally close contact b. M1001 is
always Off when PLC is RUN.
3. M1002: M1002 will be ON at the first scan when PLC starts RUN and then is Off. M1002 can
be regarded as scan initial pulse and pulse width is a scan time. It can be used to
initial, i.e. start positive pulse (it is ON once it is RUN).
4. M1003: It is Off at the first scan when PLC is RUN and then is ON later, i.e. start negative
pulse (it is Off once it is RUN).
PLC RUN
M1000
M1001
M1002
M1003
scan time
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-54
MonitorTimer
D1000
1. Monitor timer is used to moitor PLC scan time. When scan time exceeds the setting time of
moitor timer, RED ERROR LED will be light and all outputs will be Off. 2. The initial value of monitor timer is 200ms. You can use command MOV to change the
setting of monitor timer in the program when program is long or calculation is complicated. Following example is set moinitor timer to 300ms.
M10020 MOV K300 D1000
Primary pulse 3. The maximum setting for monitor timer is 32,767ms. But please notice that if monitor timer
settings is too large, the detected time of calculation abnormal will be delay. Therefore, if it is
not the complicated calculateion makes scan time exceeds 200ms, it is better to set monitor
timer around 200ms.
4. Please monitor D1010~D1012 to check if scan time exceeds D1000 setting when
calculation is complicated or PLC MPU connects too many special module to cause scan
time too long. In this situation, besides modify D1000 setting, you can also use WDT
command (API 07) in PLC program. When CPU excutes WDT command, internal monitor
timer will be clear to 0 to make scan time not exceed monitor timer setting.
ProgramCapacity
D1002
It is different program capacity for different series:
1. ES, EX, SS series: 3792 Steps
2. EP, SA series: 7920 Steps
3. EH series: 15872 Steps
GrammarCheck
M1004
D1004, D1137
1. If there is grammar error, PLC ERROR LED will blinking and special relay M1004=On.
2. Time to check PLC grammar: When power is from Off→On. Other time:
Writing program into PLC by WPLSoft or HPP
Using On-line Programming function by EH series and WPLSoft
3. It will happen with illegal operand (device) or grammar error. You can get the fault by
checking special register D1004 with fault code information. Fault address is saved in data
register D1137 (if it is general circuit error, D1137 will be invalid).
4. Refer to chapter 2.1 Summary of DVP-PLC device number for each device usage range.
5. Refer to chapter 2.12 Troubleshooting and Fault Information for checking grammar.
Scan Time-outTimer
M1008, D1008
1. When scan time-out during executing, PLC ERROR LED will light and M1008=On.
2. Using WPLSoft or HPP to monitor D1008 which saves timeout STEP address as WDT timer
is ON.
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-55
Scan TimeMonitor
D1010~D1012
The present value, minimum value and maximum value of scan time are saved in
D1010~D1012.
1. D1010: the present scan time.
2. D1011: the minimum scan time.
3. D1012: the maximum scan time.
Internal ClockPulse
M1011~M1014
1. There are four following clock pulses in PLC. Once PLC is power on, these four clock pulse
will act automatically.
M1011 (10 ms)
M1012 (100 ms)
M1013 (1 sec)
M1014 (60 sec)
100 Hz
10 Hz
1 Hz
10 ms
100 ms
1 sec
1 min
2. When PLC is STOP, clock pulse will also act. The start timing of clock pulse and RUN are
not synchronized.
High-speedTimer
M1015, D1015
1. The steps for using special M and special D directly:
Only valid when PLC is RUN.
When M1015=On, it will start high-speed timer D1015 once PLC finish executing END
command of that scan period. The minimum unit of D1015 is 100us.
The range of D1015 is 0~32,767. When it counts to 32,767, it will start from 0.
When M1015=Off, D1015 will stop counting immediately.
2. There is high-speed timer command HST for EH series, refer command API 196 HST for
detail.
3. Example:
When X10 is On, set M1015=On to start high-speed timer and record in D1015.
When X10=Off, set M1015=Off to close high-speed timer.
X10M1015
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-56
RealTimeClock
M1016, M1017
M1076
D1313~D1319
1. The relative command special M and special D.
Device name Fuunction
M1016 Year display of real
time clock
Off: show the 2 right most bits
On: show the (2 right most bits + 2000)
M1017 ±30 seconds
adjustment
When Off→On, it is triggered to adjust
When it is during 0~29 seconds, minute won’t change
and second will be reset to 0.
When it is during 30~59 seconds, it will add 1 to
minute and reset second to 0.
M1076 Real time clock
malfunction
It will be ON when setting exceeds range or battery
has run down.
D1313 Second 0~59
D1314 Minute 0~59
D1315 Hour 0~23
D1316 Day 1~31
D1317 Month 1~12
D1318 Week 1~7
D1319 Year 0~99(2 right-most bit)
2. If real time clock setting is error, time will reset to Jan. 1, 2000. 00:00 Saturday when PLC is
power on again.
3. Adjust method of perpetual clock:
It can use specific command TWR to adjust for EP/EH mode built-in real time clock.
Refer to API 167 TWR for detail.
Using peripherial WPLSoft and digital setting display DU-01 to set.
π(PI)
D1018, D1019 1. It uses 32-bit data register which is combined with D1019 and D1018 to save floating point
value π(PI),
2. Floating point value = H 40490FDB
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-57
Response time adjustment ofinput terminal
M1019
D1020, D1021
1. Digital filter circuit is built-in input terminals X0~X17 can set response time of receive pulse
from input terminal by the content of D1020 and D1021. Unit is ms.
2. When PLC is from Off→On, the content of D1020 and D1021 will become to 10
automatically.
X0
X17
0ms
1ms
10ms
15ms
0
1
10
15
Terminal response time
state memory
input reflash
setting by D1020 (default is 10)
3. When setting X0~X17 response time to 0ms to execute following program, the faster
response time in input terminla will be 50µs due to input terminal connects to RC filter circuit
in series.
M1000MOV K0 D1020
normally ON contact
4. It is not necessary to adjust response time when using high-speed counter, interrupt insert
or fast pulse catch (M1056~M1059) in program.
5. It is the same to use command REFF (API 51) or change the content of D1020 and D1021.
ExecutionCompleted
Flag
M1029, M1030
Execution Completed Flag:
1. API 52 MTR, API 71 HKY, API 72 DSW, API 74 SEGL, API 77 PR:
M1029=On for a scan period once the command finish executing.
2. API 57 PLSY, API 59 PLSR:
For EP/SA/ES/EX/SS MPU, M1029 will be On after Y0 pulse finishes output and
M1030 will be On after Y1 pulse completes output. When commands PLSY and PLSR
are Off, M1029 and M1030 will be Off.
For EH MPU, M1029 will be On after Y0 and Y1 pulses complete output and M1030
will be On after Y2 and Y3 pulse complete output. When commands PLSY, PLSR are
Off, M1029 or M1030 will be Off.
It is needed to clear by user after executing M1029 and M1030.
3. API 63 INCD: M1029 will be On for a scan period when designated group finish comparison.
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-58
4. API 67 RAMP, API 69 SORT:
M1029= On after completing execution, M1029 is needed to clear by user.
If this command is Off, M1029 will be Off.
5. API 155 DABSR, API 156 ZRN, API 158 DRVI, API 158 DRVA:
M1029=On when the first output group Y0 and Y1 pulses complete sending and
M1030=On when the second output group Y2 and Y3 pulses complete sending.
M1029 or M1030 will be Off when execute this command in the next time and it will be
On after completing execution.
Communication Error Code
D1025
Error code when communication error:
01: illegal command.
02: illegal equipment address.
03: request data exceeds range.
07: checksum error
ClearCommand
M1031, M1032
1. M1031 (clear unlatched area) , M1032 (clear latched area)
Device The component that will be cleared
M1031
Clear unlatched
area
The contact state of Y, general M, general S
T contact for general and time coil
C contact for general, time coil reset coil
D present register for general
T present register for general
C present register for general
M1032
Clear latched area
The contact state of M and S for latched
Accumulative timer T contact and time coil
Latched C and hig-speed counter C contact, count coil
Present register D for latched
Present register of accumulative timer T
Latched C and present register of high-speed counter C
Output Latchedin STOP mode
M1033
When M1003 is On, the On/Off state of output will be held once PLC is from RUN to STOP. If
output contact load of PLC is heater, heater’s state will be held as PLC is from RUN to STOP
and RUN after program modification.
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-59
All Output Yare inhibited
M1034
When M1034 is drove to be On, all output Y will be Off.
M1034 all outputs inhibited
RUN/STOPSwitch
M1035, D1035
1. For EH series, when M1035 is drove to be On to start input point X0~X17 to be RUN/STOP
switch by the content of D1035 (0~17).
2. For EP/SA series, When M1035 is drove to be On to start input point X7 to be RUN/STOP
switch.
Communication Response Delay
D1038
For ES/EX/SS/EP/SA series, data response delay time can be set when PLC MPU is to be
Slave in RS-485 communication. Unit is 0.1ms.
Constant ScanTime
M1039, D1039
1. When M1039 is On, program scan time is determined by D1039. When program finishes
executing, it will execute the next scan as constant scan time attained. If D1039 is less than
program scan time, it will scan by program scan time.
M1000
normally ON contact MOV P K20 D1039
M1039 Constant scan time
Scan time is fixed to 20ms
2. The relative commands of scan time are RAMP(API 67), HKY(API 71), SEGL(API 74),
ARWS(API 75) and PR(API 77). They should be used with “constant scan time” or “constant
time insert interrupt”.
3. Especial for command HKY(API 71), scan time should be set to 20ms and above when it is
used 4×4 matrix to be 16 keys to operate.
4. Scan time D1010~D1012 display also include constant scan time.
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-60
AnalogFunction
D1056~D1059
D1110~D1113
D1116~D1118
1. For EX MPU, analog input channel resolution 10 bits (±10V or ±20mA)
2. For EX MPU, analog output channel resolution 8 bits (0~10V or 0~20mA)
3. It is analog digital converter filter time setting for EX series. The factory setting is 0 and unit
is 1ms. If D1118 ≦5, it will be regarded as 5ms.
4. Resolution of EP/EH analog input AD card: 12 bits (±10V or ±20mA)
5. Resolution of EP/EH analog input DA card: 12 bits (0~10Vor 0~20mA)
Device Function
D1056 Present value of EX MPU analog input channel 0 (CH0) and EP/EH MPU AD card channel 0 (CH0)
D1057 Present value of EX MPU analog input channel 1 (CH 1) and EP/EH MPU AD card channel 1 (CH1)
D1058 Present value of EX MPU analog input channel 2 (CH 2) D1059 Present value of EX MPU analog input channel 3 (CH 3)
D1110 Average value of EX MPU analog input channel 0 (CH 0) and EP/EH MPU AD card channel 0 (CH0)
D1111 Average value of EX MPU analog input channel 1 (CH 1) and EP/EH MPU AD card channel 1 (CH1)
D1112 Average value of EX MPU analog input channel 2 (CH 2) D1113 Average value of EX MPU analog input channel 3 (CH 3)
D1116 EX MPU analog output channel 0 (CH 0), EP/EH MPU DA card channel 0 (CH0)
D1117 EX MPU analog output channel 1 (CH 1), EP/EH MPU DA card channel 1 (CH1)
D1118 EX series analog input filter setting (ms)
AlgorithmError Flag
M1067~M1068
D1067~D1068
1. Algorithm error flag:
Component Explanation Latched STOP→RUN RUN→STOP
M1067 Algorithm error flag none clear latched
M1068 Algorithm error lock flag none unchanged latched
D1067 Algorithm error code none clear latched
D1068 STEP value of algorithm error none unchanged latched
2. Error code explanation:
D1067 error code Function
0E18 BCD conversion error
0E19 Divisor is 0
0E1A Usage exceeds limit (include E and F)
0E1B It is negative number after doing radical
0E1C FROM/TO communication error
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-61
FileRegister
M1101
D1101~D1103
1. For EP/EH series, When PLC is power on or from STOP to RUN, it will check start file
register function from M1101, the start number of file register from D1101 (file registers for
EP/SA series: K0~K1,599; for EH series: K0~K9,999), read item number of file register from
D1102(read items of file registers for EP/SA series: K0~K1,600; for EH series: K0~K8,000),
D1103(file registers for save and read, start number of designated data register D (for
EP/SA series: K2,000~K4,999, for EH series: K2,000~K9,999) to determine to send file
register to designated data register automatically or not).
2. Please refer to commands API 148 MEMR and API 149 MEMW explantion.
DIP Switch Function Card
M1104~M1111
1. When PLC is RUN with DIP switch card, 8 DIP switches correspond to M1104~M1111
separately.
2. Please refer to command API 109 SWRD for detail.
TransistorOutput Card
M1112, M1113
When PLC is RUN with transistor output card, M1112 and M1113 correspond to 2 points
transistors output TR1 and TR2 separately.
Pulse Outputwith
Acceleration/Deceleration
M1115~M1119
D1104
1. The definition of special D and special M which are used by pulse output with acceleration/
deceleration:
Device Function
M1115 Start switch for accel/decel pulse output M1116 Flag that is used in acceleration M1117 Target frequency attained flag M1118 Flag that is used in deceleration M1119 Complete function flag D1104 Using parameter index (correspond to D component)
2. Corresponding table for parameter (frequency range is 25Hz~10KHz)
index Function
+0 Start frequency (SF)
+1 Gap frequency (GF)
+2 Target frequency (TF)
+3 Total number of pulse output number (lower 16-bit of 32-bit)
+4 Total number of pulse output number (upper 16-bit of 32-bit) (TP)
+5 Output pulse number in acceleration area (lower 16-bit of 32-bit)
+6 Output pulse number in deceleration area (upper 16-bit of 32-bit) (AP)
3. It doesn’t need to use command, it just need to fill parameter chart and set M1115 to start.
This function can use Y0 output only, the timing is as following.
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-62
GF
GP
TF
SF
AP AP
Frequency
Pulse number
Acceleration/Deceleration step number= (TF-SF)/GF
Output pulse number for each step AP/(Acceleration or Deceleration step number)
GP=
AP is pulse number of acceleration/deceleration
4. Note:
This function should be executed under the following conditions all exist. Once a condition
doesn’t exist, this function can’t execute.
Start frequency must be less than target frequency.
Gap frequency must be less than (target frequency – start frequency)
Total number of pulse number must be greater than (accel/decel pulse number *2)
Start frequency and target frequency: the minimum is 25Hz and the maximum is
10KHz.
Accel/decel pulse number must be more than accel/decel step number
When M1115 is from On to Off, M1119 will be cleared and M1116, M1117 and M1118 aren
unchanged. When PLC is from STOP RUN or from RUN STOP, M1115~M1119 will be
cleared to Off. And D1104 will be cleared to 0 only when it is from Off On.
If the function “acceleration/deceleration pulse output” and command PLSY Y0 output
exist at the same time, it will execute one action which starts Y0 output first.
5. How to calculate action time of each section
If start frequency is set to 1KHz, gap frequency is set to 1KHz, target frequency is set to
5KHz, total pulse number is 100 and accel/decel pulse number is 40, timing chart of
accel/decel area is in the following.
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-63
50004000300020001000
t t t t1 2 3 4
Frequency (Hz)
Time (sec)
You can get accel/decel step = (5K – 1K) / 1K = 4 and output number of each pulse is
40 / 4 = 10. Therefore, you can get t1 = (1 / 1K) * 10 = 10ms, t2 = (1 / 2K) * 10 = 5ms, t3
= (1 / 3K) * 10 = 3.33ms and t4 = (1 / 4K) * 10 = 2.5ms from the following figure.
Example: Forward/Reverse accel/decel step motor control
K500MOVM1002
D1104
K1000MOV D500
K100MOV D501
MOV D502
K80000DMOV D503
K10000DMOV D505
K10000
M1115SET
Using D500-D506 to be parameter address
1KHz start frequency
100Hz gap frequency
10KHz target frequency
80000 pulses output
10000 pulses in acceleration/deceleration section
When PLC is RUN, it will save each parameter setting into the register that designated
by D1104.
When M1115=On, acceleration/deceleration pulse starts to output.
M1116=On during acceleration, M1117=On when speed attained, M1118=On in
deceleration and M1119=On after finishing executing.
M1115 won’t be reset automatically and it needs to be cleared by user.
Actual pulse output curve is in the following:
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-64
10K
1K
10000 90000 100000
Frequency (Hz)
Pulsenumber
SpecialHigh-speedpulse output
M1133~M1135
D1133
1. For EP series, the definition of special D and special M for special high-speed pulse (50KHz)
output function:
Device Function
M1133 Special high-speed pulse (50KHz) output switch (On is start executing)
M1134 On is continuous output switch
M1135 Output pulse number attained flag
D1133 Index for special high-speed pulse output register (D)
2. Corresponding table for D1133 parameter
Index Function
+0 Special high-speed pulse output frequency (lower 16-bit of 32 bits)
+1 Special high-speed pulse output frequency (upper 16-bit of 32 bits)
+2 Special high-speed pulse output number (lower 16-bit of 32 bits)
+3 Special high-speed pulse output number (upper 16-bit of 32 bits)
+4 Display present special high-speed pulse output number (lower
16-bit of 32 bits)
+5 Display present special high-speed pulse output number (upper
16-bit of 32 bits)
3. Function explanation:
Output frequency and output numbers above can be modified when M1133=On and
M1135=Off. It won’t affect present output pulse once output frequency or output target number
is changed. Present output pulse number will be displayed once a scan time update. It will be
cleared to 0 when M1133 is from Off On and it will keep that last output number when M1133
is from On Off.
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-65
4. Note:
This special high-speed pulse output function can use special Y1 output point in RUN. It
can exist with PLSY Y1 at the same time and PLSY (Y0) won’t be affected. If command PLSY
(Y1) is executed prior to this function, this function can’t be used and vice versa. When
executing this function, general Y1 output will be invalid and outputs point of Y0 and Y2~Y7
can be used.
The difference between this function and command PLSY is higher than output frequency.
The maximum output can up to 50KHz.
ExtensionConnectedDetection
D1139, D1140
D1142, D1143
D1145, D1146
1. D1139: connection number of BCD expansion module, the maximum is 2 connections to use
with KEY expansion module.
2. D1140: special expansion module (AD, DA, XA, PT, TC, RT, HC, PU) numbers, the
maximum is 8.
3. D1142: Digital expansion input X point number.
4. D1143: Digital expansion input Y point number.
5. D1145: connection number of KEY expansion module, the maximum is 2connects to use
with BCD expansion module.
6. D1146: connection number indication of DISP expansion module, the maximum is 3
connections.
BCD Module
D1139
D1381~D1384
1. For EH series, special D and special M definition of BCD module:
Device Function
D1139 connection number indication of BCD expansion module, the
maximum is 2 connections to use with KEY expansion module
D1381 Low byte of first BCD module
D1382 High byte of first BCD module
D1383 Low byte of second BCD module
D1384 High byte of second BCD module
2. Explanation:
PLC will update BCD module to read out BCD module value by each scan.
Special D above will be updated automatically when PLC is RUN.
The maximum number for a MPU is 2 connections, such as 2 KEY modules, a KEY
module and a BCD expansion unit or 2 BCD expansion units.
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-66
3. BCD module external wiring terminal:
DIP Switch
W1
W2
W4
W8
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
4. BCD module wiring example:
D7 D6 D5 D0
W8W4W2W1
DIP switch group
it needs to connect a diode in series (1N4148 is recommended)
KEY Module
D1145
D1375~D1380
1. For EH series, the definition of special D and special M of KEY module:
Device Function
D1145 Connection number indication of KEY expansion module, the
maximum is 2 connections to use with BCD expansion module
D1375 X coordinate of the first KEY module (1~8)
D1376 Y coordinate of the first KEY module (1~8)
D1377 Button number of the first KEY module (1~64)
D1378 X coordinate of the second KEY module (1~8)
D1379 Y coordinate of the second KEY module (1~8)
D1380 Button number of the second KEY module (1~64)
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-67
2. Explanation:
KEY module uses scan method to read data to PLC, it will just care the first button once
there are two more keys are pressed at the same time.
The maximum number for a MPU to connect is 2 connections, such as 2 KEY
modules, a KEY module and a BCD expansion unit or 2 BCD expansion units.
KEY module will be updated in each scan when PLC is RUN.
Calculated method of button number is: H+(V-1)*8. For coordinate (5,1) button, its
number is 5.
3. KEY module external wiring terminal:
H1H2
V1V2
Matrix Keypad
4. KEY module wiring example:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
1 (1,1) (2,1) (3,1) (4,1) (5,1) (6,1) (7,1) (8,1)
(1,1)
V1H1
V2
V3
V4
V5
V6
V7
V8
H1
V1
H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H 7 H8
(1,2) (2,2) (3,2) (4,2) (5,2) (6,2) (7,2) (8,2)
(1,3) (2,3) (3,3) (4,3) (5,3) (6,3) (7,3) (8,3)
(1,4) (2,4) (3,4) (4,4) (5,4) (6,4) (7,4) (8,4)
(1,5) (2,5) (3,5) (4,5) (5,5) (6,5) (7,5) (8,5)
(1,6) (2,6) (3,6) (4,6) (5,6) (6,6) (7,6) (8,6)
(1,7) (2,7) (3,7) (4,7) (5,7) (6,7) (7,7) (8,7)
(1,8) (2,8) (3,8) (4,8) (5,8) (6,8) (7,8) (8,8)
Button numberD1377(D1380)
Button coordinate(x,y)(D1375, D1376)(D1378, D1379)
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-68
DISP Module
D1146
D1385~D1393
1. For EH series, the definition of special D and special M definition of DISP module (7-segment
display):
Device Function
D1146 Connection number indication of DISP expansion module, the
maximum is 3 connections.
D1385 Low byte of first DISP module
D1386 High byte of first DISP module
D1387 The floating point and Pre-zero setting of the first DISP module
D1388 Low byte of the second DISP module
D1389 High byte of the second DISP module
D1390 The floating point and Pre-zero setting of the second DISP module
D1391 Low byte of the third DISP module
D1392 High byte of the third DISP module
D1393 The floating point and Pre-zero setting of the third DISP module
2. Explanation:
It needs to use common cathode 7-segment display.
The maximum DISP module expansion units that a PLC can connect are 3 DISP
module expansion units and each DISP module expansion unit has 8 7-segment
displays.
Each 7-segment display uses 4-BITS to display.
Dot setting: there are 8 7-segment displays on a 7-segment display expansion unit.
There is a dot in each 7-segment display and each dot setting can be filled in 1~8 to
display the dot of DISP1~DISP8. If the setting is out of range, no dot of 7-segment
display will light.
Pre-zero: this function is used to decide if it needs to display 0. It will check from the
left-most bit and display “0” after non-zero bit. For example: if the values of
DISP8~DISP1 are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and the 0 of DISP8 won’t be displayed.
First DISP D1385 D1386 D1387
BIT b12~b15 b8~b11 b4~b7 b0~b3 b12~b15 b8~b11 b4~b7 b0~b3 b15~b8 b7~b0
DISP number DISP4 DISP3 DISP2 DISP1 DISP8 DISP7 DISP6 DISP5 Pre- zero
dot
The value of STOP->RUN
F F F F F F F F 0 0
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-69
3. DISP module external wiring terminal:
abcdefg
dot
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
cathode 7-segment display (8-bit)
4. Example of DISP module wiring:
Common cathode 7-segment display circuit: the device from BCD to Common cathode
7-segment display.
Power Input
1. using external +24VDC to be driven
power of display module.
2. Using internal +24VDC to be driven
power of display module.
P
24VDC
OV
Shortcircuit
P
24VDC
OV24V
additional DC
Common cathode 7-segment display connection:
abcdefg
dot
7D6D5D4D3D2D1D0D
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-70
Adjustable Acceleration/Deceleration Pulse
Output FunctionExplanation
M1144~M1149,
M1154
D1032, D1033
D1144, D1154
D1155
1. For EP/SA series, the definition of special D and special M of adjustable accel/decel pulse
output function:
Device Function
M1144 Start switch of accel/decel pulse output
M1145 Flag that is used in acceleration
M1146 Target frequency attained flag
M1147 Flag that is used in deceleration
M1148 Completed function flag
M1149 stop counting temporarily flag
M1154 Start designated deceleration gap time flag and frequency flag
D1032 Lower 16-bit of 32-bit of Y1 pulse accumulative output numbers
D1033 Upper 16-bit of 32-bit of Y1 pulse accumulative output numbers
D1144 Using parameter index (correspond to D component)
D1154 Recommended value of designated deceleration gap time (10~32767 ms)
D1155 Recommended value of designated acceleration gap frequency (-1~ - 32700 Hz)
2. Corresponding table of parameter D1144
Index Function
+0 Total segment number (n) (the maximum number is 10)
+1 Present execution segment (read only)
+2 Start frequency of first segment (SF1)
+3 Interval time of first segment (GT1)
+4 Interval frequency of first segment (GF1)
+5 Target frequency of first segment (TF1)
+6 Lower 16-bit of 32-bit of target number of first segment output pulse
+7 Upper 16-bit of 32-bit of target number of first segment output pulse
+8 Start frequency of second segment (SF2)
+9 Interval time of second segment (GT2)
+10 Interval frequency of second segment (GF2)
+11 Target frequency of second segment (TF2)
+12 Lower 16-bit of 32-bit of target number of second segment output pulse
+13 Upper 16-bit of 32-bit of target number of second segment output pulse
: :
+n*6+2 Start frequency of nth segment (SFn)
+n*6+3 Interval time of nth segment (GTn)
+n*6+4 Interval frequency of nth segment (GFn)
+n*6+5 Target frequency of nth segment (TFn)
+n*6+6 Lower 16-bit of 32-bit of target number of nth segment output pulse
+n*6+7 Upper 16-bit of 32-bit of target number of nth segment output pulse
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-71
3. Function Explanation:
This function can only be used for Y1 output point and the timing will be as follows. After
filling parameter table, set M1144 to start (it should be used in RUN mode)
SF2
TF2
SF3TF3
TF4SF4TF1
SF1
GF
GT
GT
GFFrequency(Hz)
Time(ms)
1st sectionpulse number (SE1)
2nd sectionpulse number (SE2)
3rd sectionpulse number (SE3)
4th sectionpulse number (SE4)
4. Usage rule and restriction:
The minimum frequency of start frequency and target frequency should be equal to or
greater than 200Hz. If it is less than 200Hz, it means finish executing or not to execute.
The maximum frequency of start frequency of target frequency is 32700Hz. It will
execute in 32700Hz as it is greater than 32700Hz.
The interval time range is 1~32767ms and its unit is ms.
The interval frequency range in acceleration segment is 1Hz~32700Hz and in
deceleration segment is -1~-32700Hz. If it is set to 0Hz, the executed segment can’t be
up to target frequency, but it will tansfer to execute next segment after reaching target
number.
Target number of segment pulse output should be greater than ((GF*GT/1000)*
((TF-SF)/GF). Refer to example 1 for detail. Once Target number of segment pulse
output isn’t greater than ((GF*GT/1000)* ((TF-SF)/GF), this function can’t be used. The
improve method is to add interval time or add target number of pulse output.
If there is Y1 output designated by high-speed command in RUN mode, Y1 output
command will be started as high priority.
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-72
After starting to execute M1144, if M1148 outputs without attaining completed function
flag and M1144 is closed, this function will start deceleration function. If designated
acceleration function flag M1154 is Off, it will reduce 200Hz per 200ms and stop output
pulse till output frequency is less than 200Hz and set M1147 to deceleration flag. But if
designated deceleration flag M1154 is On, it will be executed by interval time and
frequency that defined by user. And interval time can’t be less than or equal to 0 (if it is
less than or equal to 0, factory setting will be set to 200ms). Interval frequency can’t be
greater than or equal to 0 (factory setting will be set to -1KHz when it is equal to 0 and
factory setting will be added negative sign automatically when it is greater than 0.)
When M1148 attains completed function flag and M1144 is closed, this function won’t
start deceleration function and it will clear M1148 flag. Once M1144 is closed, it will
clear M1149 flag.
The execution segment of this function will execute by total segment number. The
maximum segment is 10 segments.
The acceleration/deceleration of this function will execute by start frequency of the
next segment, i.e. when target frequency of execution segment is less than start
frequency of the next segment, the next segment is acceleration and the target
frequency of the next segment must be greater than start frequency of the next
segment. When target frequency of execution segment is greater than the next
segment frequency, the next segment is deceleration, therefore, target frequency of
the next segment must be less than start frequency of the next segment. If user can’t
set it by this way, we can’t ensure that you can get correct output pulse.
When STOP RUN, M1144~M1149 will be cleared to Off. When RUN STOP, M1144
will be cleared and M1145~M1149 won’t be cleared. D1144 will be cleared to 0 when it
is from Off On and unchanged in other case.
The usage parameter range of EP/SA series is D0~D999 and D2000~D4999. It won’t
execute this command and close M1144 if parameter is out of range (includes all
usage segment parameter).
5. Example 1: calculate output number of acceleration/deceleration of each segment and
target frequency
If setting start frequency of segment to 200Hz, segment interval time to 100ms, segment
gap frequency to 100Hz, segment target frequency to 500Hz and target number of segment
pulse is 1000 pulses. The calculation will be in the following:
Output pulse number at start acceleration/deceleration is 200*100/1000 = 20 pulses
Output pulse number of the first acceleration interval is 300*100/1000 = 30 pulses
Output pulse number of the second acceleration interval is 400*100/1000 = 40 pulses
Output pulse number of target frequency is 1000 − (40+30+20) = 910 pulses
(NOTE: it is recommended to set this number to be greater than 10)
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-73
Output time of target frequency is 1 / 500 * 910 = 1820 ms
Total time of this segment is 1820 + 3*100 = 2120 ms
6. Example 2: simple acceleration/deceleration pulse output program of a segment
acceleration and a segment deceleration
M1002
MOV K2 D200
MOV K200
MOV K250 D202
MOV K500 D203
MOV K250 D204
MOV D205
D206
MOV K750 D208
MOV K500 D209
MOV K-250 D210
MOV K250 D211
K200 D212
END
M0
7. Example 3: pulse output program of a segment acceleration/deceleration with direction
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-74
TF1
TF2
TF2
TF1
SF2
SF2
SF1
SF1X0=ON
Y7=OFF
Position
Zero point
Y7=On Explanation:
Acceleration/deceleration setting is as example 2.
Figure above is the example of position movement. When X0 contact is On, it will start
to move and it will stop when X0 contact is Off. (Y7 is for direction setting)
Program is shown in the following.
M1002RST M0
SET
END
RST M1
SET M0
ALT M1
Y7
RST
RST
X0
X0 M0
M1
M1
M1
M1148
M0
X0
8. Example 4: apply acceleration and deceleration of a segment to zero point return program.
Relative flag timing chart is shown in the following.
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-75
M1149
M1148
M1144
X0Stop returning to zero point
Stop pulse output
Acceleration for returning to zero point
Deceleration for returning to zero point
The relation between frequency and position are shown in the following.
Frequency(Hz)
Acceleration forreturning to zero point
Deceleration forreturning to zero point
zero point
Position
Number setting of acceleration/deceleration, frequency and pulse are shown in the
following. (correspond to component D)
Started number of D
+ index Settings
+0 2
+2 250(Hz)
+3 100(ms)
+4 500(Hz)
+5 10000(Hz)
+6, +7 10(pulse)
+8 9750(Hz)
+9 50(ms)
+10 -500(Hz)
+11 250(Hz)
+12, +13 30000(pulse)
Program is shown in the following: (it assumes contact X7 to be start reset trigger switch)
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-76
X7SET
END
SETX0
RSTX0
SET
RST
Explanation:
After contact X7 is triggered, M1144 will set to start acceleration and set M1149 not to
count pulse number. And it will send 10 pulses once deceleration switch X0 is
triggered and then enter deceleration segment.
To set M1148 to end pulse output by manual and close this function once X0 is closed.
Note: This example is just an application method that user should adjust parameters settings
used in acceleration/deceleration segment according to actual machine characteristics
and limitation.
Single StepExecutionFunction
M1170, M1171
D1170
1. The definition of special D and special M of EH series single step execution function
Device Function explanation
M1170 Start flag of single step function
M1171 Single step execution flag
D1170 STEP number of present PLC execution command
2. Function Explanation:
Execution time: this flag is valid when PLC is at RUN mode.
Action Steps:
A. Start M1170 to enter single step execution mode. PLC will stay at specific
command which the STEP is saved in D1170 and execute that command one
time.
B. When Forcing M1171 to be On, PLC will execute the next command and stop at
the next command, at the same time, PLC will force M1171 to be Off. D1170 will
display present STEP value.
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-77
3. Note:
Those commands that will be affected by scan time will be incorrect due to single STEP
execution. Example: when HKY command is executed, it needs 8 scan time to get a valid input
value of a button. Thus, single step execution will have faults.
Some commands like Pulse input/output, high-speed comparison command, won’t be
affected by single STEP due to hardware start.
2-phase PulseOutput Function
M1172~M1174
D1172~D1177
1. For EP/SA series, the definition of special D and special M of 2-phase output function:
Device Function Explanation
M1172 2-phase pulse output switch
M1173 On is continuous output switch
M1174 Output pulse number attained flag
D1172 2-phase output frequency (12Hz~20KHz)
D1173 2-phase output mode selection (k1and k2)
D1174 Lower bit of 32-bit of 2-phase output pulse target number
D1175 Upper bit of 32-bit of 2-phase output pulse target number
D1176 Lower bit of 32-bit of 2-phase present output pulse number
D1177 Upper bit of 32-bit of 2-phase present output pulse number
2. Function Explanation:
Output frequency = 1/T as shown in the figure below. There are two output modes, k1 and
k2, k1 means A phase gets ahead of B phase and k2 means B phase gets ahead of A phase.
Output number calculation adds 1 once there is a phase difference, such as figure below, there
are 8 output pulses. When output numbers attains, M1174 will be On and if you want to clear
M1174, you should close M1172.
1 2 7 8
Y0(A)
Y1(B)
T
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-78
Output frequency, output target number and mode selection can be modified when
M1172=On and M1174=Off. The modification of output frequency and output target number
won’t affect present output pulse number but mode selection modification will clear present
output pulse number to 0. Present output pulse number will be updated once scan time
updates and it will clear to 0 when M1172 is from Stop Run, and keep that last output number
when M1172 is from Run Stop.
3. Note:
This function just can be used at RUN mode and can exist in program with PLSY
command. But if command PLSY is executed first, this function can’t be used, and vice versa.
VR Potentiometer
M1178~M1179
D1178~D1179
1. For EH/EP/SA series, the definition of special D and special M of built-in 2 points VR
potentiometer function:
Device Function
M1178 Start potentiometer VR0 M1179 Start potentiometer VR1 D1178 VR0 value D1179 VR1 value
2. Function explanation:
This function only can be used at RUN mode. When M1178=On, the variational value of
VR 0 will be converted to digit 0~255 to save in D1178. When M1179=On, the variational value
of VR 1 will be converted to digit 0~255 to save in D1179.
3. Please refer to command API 85 VRRD for detail.
MODEMConnection
Function M1184~M1188
1. System connection
PC
WPLSoft is executing
DVP-EP/EH series MPU
DVP-F232 interface
MODEM
MODEM
telecommunication network
2. EP/EH series special M definition for MODEM connection:
Device Function Explanation Remark
M1184 Start-up MODEM When M1184=On, following actions are valid.
M1185 Start-up MODEM initialization
This flag will be Off after finishing initialization.
M1186 Fail to initial MODEM When M1185=On, M1186=Off. M1187 Succeed to initial MODEM When M1185=On, M1187=Off.
M1188 Display if MODEM is connected or not On means in connection
NOTE: special M is always valid no matter PLC is RUN or STOP.
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-79
3. Operation: (Please operate by following steps)
(a) Setting M1184=On on PLC side (start-up MODEM)
(b) STEP 2: Setting M1185=On (start-up PLC’s MODEM initialization)
(c) STEP 3: Check the result of MODEM initialization: M1186=On means succeed to
initial. M1187=On means fail to initial.
(d) STEP 4: After initialing successful, WPL software can be ready for connection on
remote PC side. WPL connection method: setting -> modem connection (you need to
install modem’s driver first) -> to get dial connection dialog box and then fill in dial
information as following.
4. Caution:
(a) It must use with RS-232 card when connecting MODEM on PLC side. If not, above
special M are invalid.
(b) You must set M1185=On to initial MODEM after MODEM start-up (M1184=On). If not,
it can’t start-up MODEM auto dial function on PLC side.
(c) MODEM will enter auto dial mode after initialization.
(d) MODEM will enter to ready for dial mode on PLC side after remote PC stops
connection. If user turn MODEM power off now, it should need to initial at the next time
when turning on MODEM.
(e) MODEM connection baud rate on PLC side is fixed to 9600bps and can’t be modified.
Besides, MODEM speed must be 9600bps and faster.
(f) The initial format that used to MODEM on PLC side are ATZ and ATS0=1.
Power LossLatched Range
Setting
D1200~D1219
1. For EH/EP/SA series to set latched range. The latched range will be from start address
number to end address number.
2. Please refer to chapter 2.1 for detail.
Input Point Xcan force to be
ON/OFF
M1304
1. For EP/SA series, When M1304=On, input point X (X0-X17) of MPU can force to be On-Off
by using peripheral WPLSoft and HPP.
2. For EH series, When M1304=On, input point X of MPU can force to be On-Off by using
peripheral WPLSoft and HPP.
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-80
Special ExtensionModule ID
D1320~D1327
For EH series, it will display expansion module ID in D1320~ D1327 by order when connecting to special expansion module. Special expansion module ID of EH series:
Expansion Module Name Expansion Module ID Expansion Module
Name Expansion Module ID
DVPEH04AD H’0400 DVPEH01PU H’0110 DVP04DA-H H’0401 DVPEH01HC H’0120 DVPEH04PT H’0402 DVPEH02HC H’0220 DVPEH04TC H’0403 DVPEH01DT H’0130 DVPEH06XA H’0604 DVPEH02DT H’0230 DVPEH06RT H’0405
Easy PLCLink
M1350-M1352
M1360-M1439
D1355-D1370
D1415-D1465
D1480-D1991
1. Explanation of Special D and special M explanation of EH series EASY PLC LINK ID1–ID8:
MASTER PLC SLAVE ID
1 SLAVE ID
2 SLAVE ID
3 SLAVE ID
4 SLAVE ID
5 SLAVE ID
6 SLAVE ID
7 SLAVE ID
8 readout
Write in
readout
Write in
readout
Write in
readout
Write in
readout
Write in
readout
Write in
readout
Write in
readout
Write in
D1480 │
D1495
D1496 │
D1511
D1512 │
D1527
D1528 │
D1543
D1544 │
D1559
D1560│
D1575
D1576│
D1591
D1592│
D1607
D1608│
D1623
D1624│
D1639
D1640│
D1655
D1656 │
D1671
D1672 │
D1687
D1688 │
D1703
D1704│
D1719
D1720│
D1735
Item number
Item number
Item number
Item number
Item number
Item number
Item number
Item number
Item number
Item number
Item number
Item number
Item number
Item number
Item number
Item number
D1434 D1450 D1435 D1451 D1436 D1452D1437 D1453 D1438 D1454 D1439 D1455 D1440 D1456 D1441 D1457
Device Communication Address
D1355 D1415 D1356 D1416 D1357 D1417 D1358 D1418 D1359 D1419 D1360 D1420 D1361 D1421 D1362 D1422
If there is LINK in SLAVE PLC M1360 M1361 M1362 M1363 M1364 M1365 M1366 M1367
Action indication flag for master PLC do to slave PLC
M1376 M1377 M1378 M1379 M1380 M1381 M1382 M1383
Read/write error flag
M1392 M1393 M1394 M1395 M1396 M1397 M1398 M1399
Read completed flag (Whenever finishing a PLC read/write, this flag will be Off automatically)
M1408 M1409 M1410 M1411 M1412 M1413 M1414 M1415
Write completed flag (whenever finishing a PLC read/write, this flag will be Off automatically)
M1424 M1425 M1426 M1427 M1428 M1429 M1430 M1431
SLAVE ID 1
SLAVE ID 2
SLAVE ID 3
SLAVE ID 4
SLAVE ID 5
SLAVE ID 6
SLAVE ID 7
SLAVE ID 8
read out
Write in
readout
Write in
readout
Write in
readout
Write in
readout
Write in
readout
Write in
readout
Write in
readout
Write in
D100 │
D115
D200 │
D215
D100 │
D115
D200 │
D215
D100 │
D115
D200│
D215
D100│
D115
D200│
D215
D100│
D115
D200│
D215
D100│
D115
D200 │
D215
D100 │
D115
D200 │
D215
D100│
D115
D200│
D215
Factory setting of Communication address for reading is H1064 (D100).
Factory setting of Communication address for writing is H10C8 (D200).
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-81
2. Explanation of Special D and special M explanation of EH series EASY PLC LINK ID9–ID16:
MASTER PLC SLAVE ID
9 SLAVE ID
10 SLAVE ID
11 SLAVE ID
12 SLAVE ID
13 SLAVE ID
14 SLAVE ID
15 SLAVE ID
16 readout
Write in
readout
Write in
readout
Write in
readout
Write in
readout
Write in
readout
Write in
readout
Write in
readout
Write in
D1736 │
D1751
D1752 │
D1767
D1768 │
D1783
D1784 │
D1799
D1800│
D1815
D1816│
D1831
D1832│
D1847
D1848│
D1863
D1864│
D1879
D1880│
D1895
D1896 │
D1911
D1912 │
D1927
D1928 │
D1943
D1944│
D1959
D1960│
D1975
D1976│
D1991
Item number
Item number
Item number
Item number
Item number
Item number
Item number
Item number
Item number
Item number
Item number
Item number
Item number
Item number
Item number
Item number
D1442 D1458 D1443 D1459 D1444 D1460 D1445 D1461 D1446 D1462 D1447 D1463 D1448 D1464 D1449 D1465
Device Communication Address
D1363 D1423 D1364 D1424 D1365 D1425 D1366 D1426 D1367 D1427 D1368 D1428 D1369 D1429 D1370 D1430
If there is LINK in SLAVE PLC M1368 M1369 M1370 M1371 M1372 M1373 M1374 M1375
Action indication flag for master PLC do to slave PLC
M1384 M1385 M1386 M1387 M1388 M1389 M1390 M1391
Read/write error flag
M1400 M1401 M1402 M1403 M1404 M1405 M1406 M1407
Read completed flag (Whenever finishing a PLC read/write, this flag will be Off automatically)
M1416 M1417 M1418 M1419 M1420 M1421 M1422 M1423
Write completed flag (whenever finishing a PLC read/write, this flag will be Off automatically)
M1432 M1433 M1434 M1435 M1436 M1437 M1438 M1439
SLAVE ID 9
SLAVE ID 10
SLAVE ID 11
SLAVE ID 12
SLAVE ID 13
SLAVE ID 14
SLAVE ID 15
SLAVE ID 16
read out
Write in
readout
Write in
readout
Write in
readout
Write in
readout
Write in
readout
Write in
readout
Write in
readout
Write in
D100 │
D115
D200 │
D215
D100 │
D115
D200 │
D215
D100│
D115
D200│
D215
D100│
D115
D200│
D215
D100│
D115
D200│
D215
D100 │
D115
D200 │
D215
D100 │
D115
D200│
D215
D100│
D115
D200│
D215
Factory setting of Communication address for reading is H1064 (D100).
Factory setting of Communication address for writing is H10C8 (D200).
3. Explanation:
The basic communication protocol for EASY PLC LINK is MODBUS
When connecting to RS-485, the baud rate for all slave peripheral and communication
format should be the same as master PLC, such as set D1120 for PLC. When EP MPU
is used to be slave, only ASCII mode can be used. When EH MPU is used to be slave,
ASCII mode and RTU mode can be used.
All communication format used to connect to PLC should be the same (set D1120 for
PLC) and it supports ASCII and RTU mode.
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-82
The maximum slave PLCs for a master PLC to connect is 16 slave PLCs.
The ID of slave PLC should be fixed to 1~16 and each slave ID can’t be repeated.
RS-232, RS-485 and RS-422 can be used in one-to-one connection. When slave PLC
uses RS-232, only ASCII mode can be used and communicatioin format is (7, E, 1).
One to multiple connection can connect to RS-485 in series
4. Operation:
Setting Master PLC ID by D1121 and slave ID first. ID can’t be repeated.
Setting read/write items of slave (the maximum is 16 items). (refer to special D for
detail)
Setting device communication address to read/write to slave. (refer to Special D
explanation above for special D setting. Factory setting of communication address for
reading is H1064 (D100) and writing is H10C8 (D200).
Setting PLC LINK automatically (M1351)
Setting PLC LINK manually (M1352)
Start MASTER PLC LINK (M1350)
5. Master PLC action explanation:
Slave ID detection: When M1350=On, Master PLC is started and then detect slave
number to record number in D1433.
You can see if there is slave PLC by M1360-M1375 which save slave ID 1-16
separately. On means exist.
If detection of slave PLC number is 0, M1350 will be Off and stop Link at the same
time. PLC will only detect slave PLC number only at start that M1350=On.
Read/write of master and slave PLC: After finishing detecting slave, master PLC will
read/write to each slave. The slave that master can do read/write is slave ID got after
detecting slave ID. Once slave PLC is added after detecting, master can’t do read/write
to it till the next detection.
Master PLC will read first and the maximum range is 16 slave PLCs start from D100.
After reading, PLC will write and the maximum range is 16 slave PLCs start from D200.
Master PLC will read/write to slave PLC in order, i.e. it will read/write to the next slave
after finishing a slave.
6. Automatic/ Manual model explanation:
Automatic mode: it should set M1351 to Off. Master PLC will read/write to slave till
M1350 is Off.
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-83
Manual mode: It needs to set times of read to D1431. One time means finish all Slave
read/write. When PLC starts Link, D1432 will start to count times of
Link. When D1431 = D1432, PLC will stop Link and force M1351 to be
Off at the same time. If M1351 is forced to be On, PLC will start to link
according to D1431 value automatically.
Caution:
1. Automation mode M1351 and manual mode M1352 can’t be On at the same
time.
2. For EH modes, it need to clear M1350 first befor switching auto/manual
mode. For EP modes, it is unnecessary.
3. Please clear M1350 first before switching automation/manual mode.
4. Communication time-out can be set by D1129. The setting range is from 300
to 3000. When it is out of range, it will be regarded as 300 when it is less
than 300 and regarded as 3000 when it is larger than 3000. Besides, this
setting is valid when it is set before linking.
5. PLC LINK function is only valid when baud rate is larger than 1200 bps.
When baud rate is less than 9600 bps, please set communication time-out to
more than 1 second.
6. It won’t communicate when write/read item is 0.
7. It doesn’t allow 32-bit counter read/write in.
2 DVP-PLC Function
DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-84
2.12 Fault Code Information
If the PLC ERROR LED is flashing or special relay M1004=On after writing program in PLC, the problem may be
an invalid operand or error grammar. You can get fault code saved in special register D1004 to check in following
table to get error message and error address is saved in D1137. (D1137 will be invalid if it is general loop error)
Please refer to chapter 2.1 for each model usage range. Fault Code Description Fault Code Description
0001 Operand bit device S exceeds the usage range 0F06 SFTR misuse operand
0002 Label P exceeds the usage range or duplicated 0F07 SFTL misuse operand
0003 Operand KnSm exceeds the usage range 0F08 REF misuse operand
0102 Interrupt pointer I exceeds the usage range or duplicated 1000 ZRST misuse operand
0202 Command MC exceeds the usage range C400 An unrecognized command code is being used
0302 Command MCR exceeds the usage range C401 Loop error
0401 Operand bit device X exceeds the usage range C402 LD / LDI continuously use more than 9
times 0403 Operand KnXm exceeds the usage range C403 MPS continuously use more than 9 times
0501 Operand bit device Y exceeds the usage range C404 FOR-NEXT exceeds 6 levels
0503 Operand KnYm exceeds the usage range C405 STL/RET used between FOR-NEXT SRET/IRET used between FOR-NEXT
0601 Operand bit device T exceeds the usage range MC/MCR used between FOR-NEXT
END / FEND used between FOR-NEXT
0604 Operand word device T register usage exceeds limit C407 STL continuously use more than 9 times
0801 Operand bit device M exceeds the usage range C408 Use command MC/MCR in STL
Use I/P in STL
0803 Operand KnMm exceeds the usage range C409 Use STL/RET in subroutine Use STL/RET in interrupt program
0D01 DECO misuse operand 0D02 ENCO misuse operand C40A Use MC/MCR in subroutine
Use MC/MCR in interrupt program 0D03 DHSCS misuse operand 0D04 DHSCR misuse operand C40B MC/MCR doesn’t start from N0 or
discontinuously 0D05 PLSY misuse operand 0D06 PWM misuse operand C40C MC/MCR corresponding value N is
different 0D07 FROM/TO misuse operand C40D Use I/P incorrectly 0D08 PID misuse operand
0E01 Operand bit device C exceeds the usage range
C40E IRET doesn’t follow by the last FEND command SRET doesn’t follow by the last FEND command
0E04 Operand word device C register usage exceeds limit
0E05 DCNT misuse operand CXXX C41C The number of input/output points of I/O
expansion unit exceeds usage range
0E18 BCD conversion error 0E19 Division error (divisor=0) C41D Special expansion module exceeds usage
range
0E1A Component exceeds usage range (includeE and F error) C41E Hardware setting of special expansion
module error
0E1B It is negative number after radical expression C41F Data write in memory failure
0E1C FROM/TO communication error C4FF Invalid command (no this command)
0F04 Operand word device D register usage exceeds limit C4EE No END command in program
0F05 DCNT misuse operand DXXX
3 Basic Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 3-1
3.1 Summary of Basic Command and Step Ladder Command
Basic Commands
Execution speed (us) Command Code Function Operands
ES/EX/SS/EP/SA EH STEP Page
LD Load contact A X, Y, M, S, T, C 5.6 0.24(0.56) 1~3 3-3
LDI Load contact B X, Y, M, S, T, C 5.68 0.24(0.56) 1~3 3-3
AND Series connection with A contact X, Y, M, S, T, C 4.8 0.24(0.56) 1~3 3-3
ANI Series connection with B contact X, Y, M, S, T, C 4.88 0.24(0.56) 1~3 3-4
OR Parallel connection with A contact X, Y, M, S, T, C 4.8 0.24(0.56) 1~3 3-4
ORI Parallel connection with B contact X, Y, M, S, T, C 4.88 0.24(0.56) 1~3 3-5
ANB Series connects the circuit block None 4.4 0.24 1~3 3-5
ORB Parallel connects the circuit block None 4.4 0.24 1~3 3-5
MPS Save the operation result None 4.64 0.24 1~3 3-6
MRD Read the operation result (the pointer not moving) None 4 0.24 1 3-6
MPP Read the result None 4.4 0.24 1 3-6
Output commands
Execution speed (us) Command Code Function Operands
ES/EX/SS/EP/SA EH STEP Page
OUT Drive coil Y, S, M 6.4 0.24(0.56) 1~3 3-7
SET Action latched (ON) Y, S, M 5.04 0.24(0.56) 1~3 3-7
RST Clear the contacts or the registers Y, M, S, T, C, D, E, F 7.6 0.24(0.56) 3 3-7
Timers, Counters
Execution speed (us) API Command
Code Function Operands ES/EX/SS/EP/SA EH
STEP Page
96 TMR 16-bit timer T-K or T-D 9.6 25 4 3-8
97 CNT 16-bit counter C-K or C-D(16 bits) 12.8 30 4 3-8
97 DCNT 32-bit counter C-K or C-D(32 bits) 14.32 50 6 3-9
Main control commands
Execution speed (us) Command Code Function Operands
ES/EX/SS/EP/SA EH STEP Page
MC Connect the common series connection contacts N0~N7 5.6 20 3 3-10
MCR Disconnect the common series connection contacts N0~N7 5.76 15 3 3-10
3 Basic Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 3-2
Rising-edge/falling-edge detection commands of contact
Execution speed (us) API Command
Code Function Operands ES/EX/SS/EP/SA EH
STEP Page
90 LDP Rising-edge detection operation starts S, X, Y, M, T, C 8.16 0.56(0.88) 3 3-11
91 LDF Falling-edge detection operation starts S, X, Y, M, T, C 8.32 0.56(0.88) 3 3-11
92 ANDP Rising-edge detection series connection S, X, Y, M, T, C 7.68 0.56(0.88) 3 3-11
93 ANDF Falling-edge detection series connection S, X, Y, M, T, C 7.76 0.56(0.88) 3 3-12
94 ORP Rising-edge detection parallel connection S, X, Y, M, T, C 7.68 0.56(0.88) 3 3-12
95 ORF Falling-edge detection parallel connection S, X, Y, M, T, C 7.76 0.56(0.88) 3 3-13
Rising-edge/falling-edge output commands
Execution speed (us) API Command
Code Function Operands ES/EX/SS/EP/SA EH
STEP P a g e
89 PLS Rising-edge output Y, M 9.92 0.56(0.88) 3 3-13
99 PLF Falling-edge output Y, M 10.16 0.56(0.88) 3 3-13
End command
Execution speed (us) Command Code Function Operands
ES/EX/SS/EP/SA EH STEP P a g e
END Program end none 7.44 0.24 1 3-14
Other commands
Execution speed (us) API Command
Code Function Operands ES/EX/SS/EP/SA EH
STEP P a g e
NOP No function none 3.52 0.16 1 3-14
98 INV Inverting operation none 3.92 0.24 1 3-15
P Pointer P0~P255 - - 1 3-15
I Interrupt pointer I□□□ - - 1 3-15
Step ladder commands
Command Code Function Operands STEP P a g e
STL Step transition ladder start command S 1 4-1
RET Step transition ladder return command none 1 4-1
Note: The value wrote in () in the column of execution speed of EH series is the execution speed of specific
operand M1536~M4095.
3 Basic Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 3-3
3.2 Basic Commands Explanations
Command Functions Adaptive model ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHLD Load A contact
X0~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999
Operand -
CommandExplanation
The LD command is used on the A contact that has its start from the left BUS or the A
contact that is the start of a contact circuit. Function of the command is to save present
contents, and at the same time, save the acquired contact status into the accumulative
register.
ProgramExample
Ladder Diagram:
X0 X1Y1
Command Code:
LD X0 AND X1 OUT Y1
Command code explanation:
Load contact A of X0 Connect to contact A of X1 in series Drive Y1 coil
Command Functions Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHLDI Load B contact
X0~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999Operand
-
CommandExplanation
The LDI command is used on the B contact that has its start from the left BUS or the B
contact that is the start of a contact circuit. Function of the command is to save present
contents, and at the same time, save the acquired contact status into the accumulative
register.
ProgramExample
Ladder Diagram:
X0 X1Y1
Command Code:
LDI X0 AND X1 OUT Y1
Command code explanation:
Load contact B of X0 Connect to contact A of X1 in seriesDrive Y1 coil
Command Functions Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHAND Series connection-a contact
X0~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999Operand
-
3 Basic Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 3-4
CommandExplanation
The AND command is used in the series connection of A contact. The function of the
command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts first,
and then to perform the “AND” calculation with the logic calculation result before the
contacts, thereafter, saving the result into the accumulative register.
ProgramExample
Ladder Diagram:
X0X1Y1
Command Code:
LDI X1 AND X0 OUT Y1
Command code explanation: Load contact B of X1 Connect to contact A of X0 in seriesDrive Y1 coil
Command Functions Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHANI Series connection-b contact
X0~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999Operand
-
CommandExplanation
The ANI command is used in the series connection of B contact. The function of the
command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts first,
and then to perform the “AND” calculation with the logic calculation result before the
contacts, thereafter, saving the result into the accumulative register.
ProgramExample
Ladder Diagram:
X0X1Y1
Command Code:
LD X1 ANI X0 OUT Y1
Command code explanation: Load contact A of X1 Connect to contact B of X0 in series Drive Y1 coil
Command Functions Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHOR Parallel connection-a contact
X0~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999Operand -
CommandExplanation
The OR command is used in the parallel connection of A contact. The function of the
command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts, and
then to perform the “OR” calculation with the logic calculation result before the contacts,
thereafter, saving the result into the accumulative register.
ProgramExample
Ladder Diagram:
X0
X1Y1
Command Code:
LD X0 OR X1 OUT Y1
Command code explanation: Load contact A of X0 Connect to contact A of X1 in parallel Drive Y1 coil
3 Basic Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 3-5
Command Functions Adaptive model ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHORI Parallel connection-b contact
X0~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999
Operand -
CommandExplanation
The ORI command is used in the parallel connection of B contact. The function of the
command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts, and
then to perform the “OR” calculation with the logic calculation result before the contacts,
thereafter, saving the result into the accumulative register.
ProgramExample
Ladder Diagram:
X0
X1Y1
Command Code:
LD X0 ORI X1 OUT Y1
Command code explanation: Load contact A of X0 Connect to contact B of X1 in parallel Drive Y1 coil
Command Functions Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHANB Series connection (Multiple Circuits)
Operand none
CommandExplanation
To perform the “AND” calculation between the previous reserved logic results and
contents of the accumulative register.
ProgramExample
Ladder Diagram:
X0
X2Y1
X1
X3
ANB
Block A Block B
Command Code:
LD X0 ORI X2 LDI X1 OR X3 ANB OUT Y1
Command code explanation: Load contact A of X0 Connect to contact B of X2 in parallel Load contact B of X1 Connect to contact A of X3 in parallel Connect circuit block in seriesDrive Y1 coil
Command Functions Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHORB Parallel connection (Multiple circuits)
Operand None
CommandExplanation
To perform the “OR” calculation between the previous reserved logic results and
contents of the accumulative register.
3 Basic Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 3-6
ProgramExample
Ladder Diagram:
X0
X2Y1
X1
X3ORB
Block A
Block B
Command Code:
LD X0 ANI X1 LDI X2 AND X3 ORB OUT Y1
Command code explanation: Load contact A of X0 Connect to contact B of X1 in series Load contact B of X2 Connect to contact A of X3 in series Connect circuit block in parallelDrive Y1 coil
Command Functions Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHMPS Store the operation result
Operand None
CommandExplanation
To save contents of the accumulative register into the operation result. (the result
operation pointer pulses 1)
Command Functions Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP EHMRD Reads the operation result
Operand None
CommandExplanation
Reading content of the operation result to the accumulative register. (the pointer of
operation result doesn’t move)
Command Functions Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHMPP Reads, then clears the operation result
Operand None
CommandExplanation
To retrieve the previous reserved logic calculation result from the operation result and
save it into the accumulative register. (the pointer of result operation minus 1)
ProgramExample
Ladder Diagram:
X0Y1
X1
M0X2
Y2
ENDMPP
MRD
MPS
Command Code:
LD X0 MPS AND X1 OUT Y1 MRD AND X2 OUT M0 MPP OUT Y2 END
Command code explanation: Load contact A of X0 Save to stack Connect to contact A of X1 in series Drive M0 coil Read from stack Drive Y2 coil Program end
3 Basic Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 3-7
Command Functions Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHOUT Output coil
X0~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999Operand
- - - -
CommandExplanation
Output the logic calculation result before the OUT command to specific device.
Motion of coil contact:
OUT command
Contact Operation result Coil
A contact (normally open) B contact (normally close)
FALSE OFF Non-continuity Continuity TRUE ON Continuity Non-continuity
ProgramExample
Ladder Diagram:
X0 X1Y1
Command Code:
LDI X0 AND X1 OUT Y1
Command code explanation: Load contact B of X0 Connect to contact A of X1 in series Drive Y1 coil
Command Functions Adaptive model ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHSET Latch(ON)
X0~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999
Operand - - - -
CommandExplanation
When the SET command is driven, its specific device is set to be “ON,” which will keep
“ON” whether the SET command is still driven. You can use the RST command to set
the device to “OFF”.
ProgramExample
Ladder Diagram:
X0 Y0Y1SET
Command Code:
LD X0 ANI Y0 SET Y1
Command code explanation: Load contact A of X0Connect to contact B of Y0 in series Y1 latch (ON)
Command Functions Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHRST Clear the contact or the register
X0~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999 E, FOperand
-
3 Basic Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 3-8
CommandExplanation
When the RST command is driven, motion of its specific device is as follows: Device Status
S, Y, M Coil and contact will be set to “OFF”.
T, C Present values of the timer or counter will be set to 0, and the coil and contact will be set to “OFF.”
D, E, F The content value will be set to 0.
If the RST command is not executed, status of specific device will not be changed.
ProgramExample
Ladder Diagram:
X0Y5RST
Command Code:
LD X0 RST Y5
Command code explanation:
Load contact A of X0
Clear contact Y5
Command Functions Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHTMR 16-bit timer
T-K T0~T255, K0~K32,767 Operand
T-D T0~T255, D0~D9,999
CommandExplanation
When TMR command is executed, the specific coil of timer is ON and timer will start to
count. When the setting value of timer is attained (counting value >= setting value), the
contact will be as following:
NO(Normally Open) contact Open collector NC(Normally Closed) contact Close collector
ProgramExample
Ladder Diagram:
X0T5TMR K1000
Command Code:
LD X0 TMR T5 K1000
Command code explanation:
Load contact A of X0T5 timer Setting is K1000
Footnote
Please refer to the specification of every model for the operand T usage.
Command Functions Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHCNT 16-bit counter
C-K C0~C199, K0~K32,767 Operand
C-D C0~C199, D0~D9,999
3 Basic Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 3-9
CommandExplanation
When the CNT command is executed from OFF ON, which means that the counter
coil is driven, and 1 should thus be added to the counter’s value; when the counter
achieved specific set value (value of counter = the setting value), motion of the contact
is as follows:
NO(Normally Open) contact Continuity NC(Normally Closed) contact Non-continuity
If there is counting pulse input after counting is attained, the conatcts and the counting
values will be un unchanged. To re-count or to conduct the CLEAR motion, please use
the RST command.
ProgramExample
Ladder Diagram:
X0C20CNT K100
Command Code:
LD X0 CNT C20 K100
Command code explanation: Load contact A of X0C20 counter Setting is K100
Command Functions Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHDCNT 32-bit counter
C-K C200~C254,K-2,147,483,648~K2,147,483,647 Operand
C-D C200~C254, D0~D9,999
CommandExplanation
DCNT is the startup command for the 32-bit high-speed counter that is utilized
especially in counters C232 to C255.
For general addition/subtraction counter C200~C234, the present value will count up
(add 1) or count down (subtract 1) when command DCNT is from Off→On.
When specific high-speed counter pulse input of high-speed addition/subtraction
counters C235~C254 is from Off→On, it will execute counting. If counter trigger input
keeps being On or Off, the counter value will be unchanged. See chapter 2.7 timer
number and function for high-speed pulse input terminals (X0~X17) and counting
(count up (add 1) and count down (subtract 1)).
When DCNT command is OFF, the counter will stop counting, but the counting values
will not be cleared. Users can use RST C2XX command to remove the counting values
and the contacts. High-speed addition/subtraction counters C235~C254 can use
external specific input point to remove the counting values and the contacts.
ProgramExample
LadderDiagram: M0
C254DCNT K1000
Command Code: LD M0 DCNT C254 K1000 LD M0 DCNT C254 K1000
Command code explanation: Load contact A of M0 and C254 counter Setting is K1000
3 Basic Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 3-10
Command Functions Adaptive model ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHMC / MCR Master control Start/Reset command
Operand N0~N7
CommandExplanation
MC is the main-control start command. When the MC command is executed, the
execution of commands between MC and MCR will not be interrupted. When MC
command is OFF, the motion of the commands that between MC and MCR is described
as follows:
Timer The counting value is set back to zero, the coil and the contact are both turned OFF
Accumulative timer The coil is OFF, and the timer value and the contact stay at their present condition
Counter The coil is OFF, and the counting value and the contact stay at their present condition
Coils driven up by the OUT command All turned OFF
Devices driven up by the SET and RST commands Stay at present condition
Application commands All of them are not acted
MCR is the main-control ending command that is placed at the end of the main-control
program and there should not be any contact commands prior to the MCR command.
Commands of the MC-MCR main-control program supports the nest program structure,
with 8 layers as its greatest. Please use the commands in order from N0~ N7, and refer
to the following:
ProgramExample
Ladder Diagram:
X0
Y0
MC N0
X1
X2
Y1
MC N1
X3
MCR N1
MCR N0X10
MC N0
Y10X11
MCR N0
Command Code Explanation LD X0 Load A contact of X0 MC N0 Enable N0 common series
connection contact LD X1 Load A contact of X1 OUT Y0 Drive Y0 coil
: LD X2 Load A contact of X2 MC N1 Enable N1 common series
connection contact LD X3 Load A contact of X3 OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil
: MCR N1 Disable N1 common series
connection contact :
MCR N0 Disable N0 common series connection contact
: LD X10 Load A contact of X10 MC N0 Enable N0 common series
connection contact LD X11 Load A contact of X11 OUT Y10 Drive Y10 coil
: MCR N0 Disable N0 common series
connection contact
3 Basic Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 3-11
Command Functions Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHLDP Rising-edge detection operation
X0~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999Operand -
CommandExplanation
Usage of the LDP command is the same as the LD command, but the motion is
different. It is used to reserve present contents and at the same time, saving the
detection status of the acquired contact rising-edge into the accumulative register.
ProgramExample
Ladder Diagram:
X0 X1Y1
Command code:
LDP X0 AND X1 OUT Y1
Command code explanation:
Start X0 rising-edge detection Series connection A contact of X1 Drive Y1 coil
Footnote
Please refer to the specification of every model for the operand usage.
If specific rising-edge contact state is On before PLC is power on, rising-dedge contact
will be True after PLC is power on.
Command Functions Adaptive model ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHLDF Falling-edge detection operation
X0~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999
Operand -
CommandExplanation
Usage of the LDF command is the same as the LD command, but the motion is
different. It is used to reserve present contents and at the same time, saving the
detection status of the acquired contact falling-edge into the accumulative register.
ProgramExample
Ladder Diagram:
X0 X1Y1
Command code:
LDF X0 AND X1 OUT Y1
Command code explanation:
Start X0 falling-edge detection Series connection A contact of X1 Drive Y1 coil
Command Functions Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHANDP Series connection command for the riding-edge detection operation
X0~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999Operand -
3 Basic Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 3-12
CommandExplanation
ANDP command is used in the series connection of the contacts’ rising-edge detection.
ProgramExample
Ladder Diagram:
X1X0Y1
Command Code:
LD X0 ANDP X1 OUT Y1
Command code explanation:
Load A contact of X0 X1 rising-edge detection in series connection Drive Y1 coil
Command Functions Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHANDF Series connection command for the falling-edge detection operation
X0~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999Operand
-
CommandExplanation
ANDF command is used in the series connection of the contacts’ falling-edge detection.
ProgramExample
Ladder Diagram:
X1X0Y1
Command Code:
LD X0 ANDF X1 OUT Y1
Command code explanation:
Load A contact of X0 X1 falling-edge detection in series connection Drive Y1 coil
Command Functions Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHORP Parallel connection command for the rising-edge detection operation
X0~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999Operand -
CommandExplanation
The ORP commands are used in the parallel connection of the contact’s rising-edge
detection.
ProgramExample
Ladder Diagram:
X0
X1Y1
Command Code:
LD X0 ORP X1 OUT Y1
Command code explanation: Load A contact of X0 X1 rising-edge detection in parallel connection Drive Y1 coil
3 Basic Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 3-13
Command Functions Adaptive model ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHORF Parallel connection command for the falling-edge detection operation
X0~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999
Operand -
CommandExplanation
The ORP commands are used in the parallel connection of the contact’s falling-edge
detection.
ProgramExample
Ladder Diagram:
X0
X1Y1
Command Code:
LD X0 ORF X1 OUT Y1
Command code explanation: Load A contact of X0 X1 falling-edge detection in parallel connection Drive Y1 coil
Command Functions Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHPLS Rising-edge output
X0~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999Operand
- - - - -
CommandExplanation
When X0=OFF→ON (rising-edge trigger), PLS command will be executed and M0 will
send the pulse of one time which the length is a scan time.
ProgramExample
Ladder Diagram: X0
M0PLSM0
Y0SET
Timing Diagram: X0
M0
Y0
a scan time
Command Code:
LD X0 PLS M0 LD M0 SET Y0
Command code explanation: Load A contact of X0M0 rising-edge outputLoad the contact A of M0
Y0 latched (ON)
Command Functions Adaptive model ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHPLF Falling-edge output
X0~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999
Operand - - - - -
3 Basic Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 3-14
CommandExplanation
When X0= ON→OFF (falling-edge trigger), PLF command will be executed and M0 will
send the pulse of one time which the length is the time for scan one time.
ProgramExample
Ladder Diagram: X0
M0PLFM0
Y0SET
Timing Diagram:
a scan time
X0
M0
Y0
Command Code:
LD X0 PLF M0 LD M0 SET Y0
Command code explanation: Load A contact of X0M0 falling-edge outputLoad the contact A of M0
Y0 latched (ON)
Command Functions Adaptive model ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHEND Program End
Operand None
CommandExplanation
It needs to add the END command at the end of ladder diagram program or command
program. PLC will scan from address o to END command, after executing it will return
to address 0 to scan again.
Command Functions Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHNOP No operation
Operand none
CommandExplanation
This is a no-operation command and has no effect on the previous operation. NOP is
used in the following cases: To delete a command without changing the number of
steps. (Overwrite with NOP)
ProgramExample
Ladder Diagram:
X0Y1NOP
Command NOP will be omittedwhen ladder diagram displays.
Command Code:
LD X0 NOP OUT Y1
Command code explanation: Load B contact of X0 No operation
Drive Y1 coil
3 Basic Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 3-15
Command Functions Adaptive model ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHINV Inverting Operation
Operand None
CommandExplanation
Inverting the operation result and use the new data as an operation result.
ProgramExample
Ladder Diagram: X0
Y1
Command Code:
LD X0 INV OUT Y1
Command code explanation: Load A contact of X0 Inverting the operation result Drive Y1 coil
Command Functions Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHP Pointer
Operand P0~P255
CommandExplanation
Pointers are used with the jump commands (CJ, CALL) in two different ways as follows.
But a number cannot be used repeatedly.
ProgramExample
Ladder Diagram:
X0
Y1
CJ P10
X1P10
Command Code:
LD X0 CJ P10
: P10 LD X1 OUT Y1
Command code explanation: Load A contact of X0 Jump from command CJ to P10
Pointer P10 Load a contact of X1 Drive Y1 coil
Command Functions Adaptive model ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHI Interrupt Pointers (I)
Operand I00□, I10□, I20□, I30□, I40□, I50□, I6□□, I7□□, I8□□ I010, I020, I030, I040, I050, I060, I110, I120, I130, I140
CommandExplanation
Interrupt programs should begin with interrupt pointer ( I□□□)and ends with
application command to be as interrupt end and return. It must use with application
commands API 03 IRET, API 04 EI, API 05 DI.
3 Basic Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 3-16
ProgramExample
Ladder Diagram:
Y1
EI
X1
I 001
DI
FEND
Y2X2
IRET
range for inserting program interrupt
program interrupt insert into subroutine
interruptServiceprogrampointer
Command Code: Command code explanation:
EI Interrupt Enable LD X1 Load A contact of X1 OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil
: DI Interrupt Disable
: FEND Program end I001 Insert point LD X2 Load A contact of X2 OUT Y2 Drive Y2 coil
: IRET Interrupt and return
Footnote
The number of interrupt pointer I of ES / EX / SS series:
There are four external interrupts (I001, X0), (I101, X1), (I201, X2) and (I301, X3).
The number of interrupt pointer I of EP series:
1. There are 6 external interrupt points: (I001, X0), (I101, X1), (I201, X2), (I301, X3),
(I401, X4) and (I501, X5). (□=1 means interrupt in rising-edge, □=0 means interrupt
in falling-edge)
2. There are two time interrupt points: I6□□, I7□□. (□□=10~99ms)
3. There are six high-speed counter attained interrupt points: I010 (use with C235,
C241, C244, C246, C247, C249, C251, C252, C254), I020(use with C236), I030 (use
with C237, C242), I040(use with C238), I050(use with C239), I060 (use with C240).
(use with command API 53 DHSCS to produce interrupt signal)
The number of interrupt pointer I of EH series:
1. There are six interrupt points of external interrupt: (I00□, X0), (I10□, X1), (I20□,
X2), (I30□, X3), (I40□, X4), (I50□, X5). (□=1 means interrupt in rising-edge, □=0
means interrupt in falling-edge)
2. There are three time interrupt points: I6□□, I7□□, I8□□. (□□=10~99ms)
3. There are six points of high-speed counter attained interrupt: I010, I020, I030, I040,
I050, I060. (use with API 53 DHSCS command to produce interrupt signal)
4. Pulse wave output interrupts I110, I120 (they are triggered at the end of pulse wave.
I130, I140 (they are triggered at the beginning of first pulse wave).
4 Step Ladder Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 4-1
4.1 Step Ladder Command [STL], [RET]
Common Function Operand Adaptive model ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHSTL Step Transition Ladder Start Command S0~S1023
CommandExplanation
The step ladder command, STL Sn, has constituted the stepping point, and when the
STL command showed up in the program, it implies that the program is now at the step
ladder diagram condition that is controlled by the step procedure. The step ladder
command RET represents the end of the step ladder diagram (from S0~S9) that is to
return to the BUS command. The SFC diagram is represented through the step ladder
diagram composed of STL/RET. The number of step point S can’t be repeated.
Common Function Operand Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EHRET Step Transition Ladder Return Command None
CommandExplanation
At the end of the step procedure, be sure to write in the RET command; the RET
command indicates the end of the step procedure. Maximum is 10 step procedures
(S0~S9) for a PLC program and it should have RET command at the end of each step
procedure.
ProgramExample
Ladder Diagram: M1002
ZRST S0 S127
SET S0
SET S20
Y0
SET S30
Y1
SET S40
Y2
S0
RET
END
X0S0S
S20S
X1
S30S
X2
S40S
X3
SFC:
S0
S20
S30
S40
S0
M1002
X0
X1
X2
X3
Y0
Y1
Y2
4.2 Sequential Function Chart (SFC)
In automatic control field, it often needs to cooperate with electric control and mechanical control to reach the
goal. SFC can be divided into several serial STEP (i.e. several phases). Each STEP should finish its actions. It
usually has transition to transfer from each step to the next step. That is the design concept of Sequential Function
Chart to have transition to end the action of the previous step and start the action of the next step (the previous step
will be clear at this time).
4 Step Ladder Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 4-2
Features:
1. You don’t need to do SFC design for constant state step. PLC will execute the
action of interlock and double output between each state. It is only needed do
simple SFC design for each state and make machine works.
2. The action is easy to understand and easy to adjust initial PLC start-up, detect
and maintain.
3. SFC edition theory is made by IEC1131-3. It is figure edition mode and the
structure looks like flow chart. Each PLC internal step relay S is used to be step
point and also equal to each step of flow chart. After finishing present step, it
will transfer to the next step, i.e. next step point S, by setting condition. By
repeating this way, it can reach the result that user needs.
4. Explanation of right side SFC figure: each step has its own transition condition
to move from one step to the next step. In this figure, primary step point S0 will
move to step point S21 once this transition condition X0 is established, and
S21 can move to S22 or S24 by transition condition X1 or X2 and S25 will
move to S0 to finish a whole procedure once transition condition X6 is
established. By this way, it can circulate control with repeat again and again.
SFC:
S0
S21
S24
S25
S0
X0
X1
X5
X6
X2S22
X4
X3
S24
It is used for ladder step mode. This figure means internal edition program is a general step ladder diagram not step ladder program.
It is for primary step point. This double-frame is used for SFC primary step point and the usage devices are S0~S9.
It is used for general step point and the usage devices are S10~S1023.
It is JUMP step point that used to move from step point to another which is not next to it. (it can be used to disconnected jump up or jump down in the same program procedure, return to primary step point or jump between different program procedure.
It is the transition condition of step point that used to move between each step point.
It is alternative divergence that used for a step point to move to different corresponding step point by different transition condition.
It is alternative convergence that used for two step points and above to move to the same step point according to transition condition.
It is simultaneous divergence that used for a step point move to two step points and above by the same transition condition.
It is simultaneous convergence that used for two step points and above to move to the same step point with the same transition condition when the condition is established at the same time.
4.3 Step Ladder Command Explanation
STL command: this command is used in the syntax design for the Sequential Function Chart (SFC). This
command helps the program designer to have clearer ideas on the program procedure, and thus the procedure will
be more readable. As shown in the following diagrams, we could switch our procedure diagram from the left
diagram to the right PLC structure diagram.
4 Step Ladder Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 4-3
At the end of the step procedure, be sure to write in the RET command; the RET command indicates the end of
the step procedure. Several step procedures could be written in to the same program, just make sure to write in the
RET command at the end of the step procedure. There is no limitation to the usage of the RET command, and this
command should match up with the usage of the step points (S0~S9).
If the RET command is not written in at the end of the step procedure, this error will be detected by the editing
device.
S0
S21
S22
S23
M1002S0
SET
SET S22
S0
RET
S21S
S22S
SET
S21S0S
S23S
SET S23
M1002 primary pulse
1. Step Ladder Action:
The step ladder is made up of numerous step points; each step point represents one control procedure action,
and each step point needs to execute following three missions:
A. drive output coil
B. specific transition condition
C. designate what step point is to be appointed to take over the control power of the present step point
Example:
SET Y1
Y0
SET S20
Y10
SET S30
S10S
X0
S20S
X1
SET Y1
Y0
SET S20
Y10
SET S30
S10S
X0
S20S
X1
When X0=ON,S20=On,S10=Off.
Explanation:
When S10=ON, Y0 and Y1 are ON. When X0=ON, S20=ON and Y10 is ON, too.
And when S10 is OFF, Y0 will be OFF, but Y1 is ON. (Since Y1 uses the SET command, it will keep in ON status)
2. Step ladder timing: when state contact Sn is On, circuit will be activated and circuit won’t be activated when
state contact Sn is Off. (Above action will be executed after delaying a scan time)
3. The repeated usage of the output coil:
4 Step Ladder Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 4-4
1. Output coils of the same number could be used in different step points.
2. Such as right diagram, there is the same output deviceY0 in the different state. No matter S10 or S20 is On, Y0 will be On.
3. Y0 will be close during the transition from S10 to S20 and output Y0 after S20 is On. Thus in this case, Y0 will be On no matter S10 or S20 is On.
4. For general ladder diagrams, repeated usages of the output coils should be avoided. Output coil number used in step point should be avoided to use after returning to general ladder diagram.
SET Y1
Y0
SET S20
SET S30
S10S
X0
S20S
X1Y0
4. Repeated usage of the timer:
Same as general output points, the timer could be used
repeatedly for different step points. (this is one feature of step
ladder diagram, but for general ladder diagrams, repeated
usages of the output coils should be avoided. Output coil
number used in step point should be avoided to use after
returning to general ladder diagram.)
Note: as right diagram, ES/EX/SS/EP/SA series timer only
used repeatedly in disconnected step point.
S20
S30
S40
X1
X2
TMR T1 K10
TMR T2 K20
TMR T1 K30
5. Transfer of the step point:
SET Sn and OUT Sn commands are both used to start (or to transfer to) another step point, and the occasions to
use these commands could be different: when the controlling power is transferred to another step point, the status of
the original step point S and the action of the output point would all be erased. Due to that numerous step control
procedures could exist at the same program simultaneously (take S0~S9 as the starting and ending points to lead the
step ladder diagram), the transfer of steps could thus be on the same step procedure or could be transferred to
different step procedures. And thus, the transfer commands, SET Sn and OUT Sn, of the step point might vary
somewhat in usage; please refer to the following explanations:
SET Sn Within the same procedure,
it is used to drive up the next
status step point, and after
the status is transferred,
outputs of previous action
status points will be clear.
Y10
SET S12
SET S14
S10S
X0
S12S
X1Y11
When executing ET S12? status step point moves from S12 to S10 and clear S10 andall outputs (Y10).
OUT Sn Within the same procedure, transfer of the simultaneous convergence point and different procedures
are used to drive up separate step points, and after the status is transferred, outputs of previous action
status points will be clear.
4 Step Ladder Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 4-5
Within the same
procedure, it is used to
return to primary step
point.
Within the same
procedure, it is used for
the step points to jump
up or down between
disconnected step point.
SFC diagram: Ladder diagram:
S0
S21
S24
S25X7
X2
OUT
OUT
S24
S21S
S0S
S23S
X2
S24S
S25S
S0X7
RET
Drive jump step point
return to primary step point
S25 uses OUT to returnto primary step point S0
Using OUT S24
Using OUT S0
At different procedures, it
is used to drive up
separate step points.
SFC figure: ladder diagram:
S0
S21
S23
X2OUT
OUTS1
S41
S43
OUT
S42
S42
S21S
S0S
S1S
X2
S42S
S43S
RET
S23S
RET
Drive separate step point
step procedureinducted by S0
step procedureinducted by S1
Using OUT S42
S0 and S1 two different step proceduresS23 return to primary step pointS0 by using OUT
S43 return to primary step pointS1 by using OUT
6. Notice of Driving Output Points:
As in the following left diagram, after the LD or LDI command is written in the second line of BUS beyond the step
point, output coil can’t be connected from BUS directly. There will be error when compiling. It is needed to modify to
following middle and left diagram to correct diagram.
Y0SS
Y1
Y2
M0
nY0
SS
Y2
Y1
n
M0
Y0SS
Y1
Y2
M0
n
M1000
BUS
modify position
or
normally open contactin RUN mode
7. Usage restrictions for partial commands:
Program of every step point is identical to the general ladder diagram, and every kind of series and parallel
connection circuits or application commands could all be utilized, however, part of the commands are under certain
restrictions, please refer to the following descriptions:
4 Step Ladder Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 4-6
Basic commands that are to be used within the step point
Basic command Step point
LD/LDI/LDP/LDF AND/ANI/ANDP/ANDF
OR/ORI/ORP/ORF INV/OUT/SET/RST
ANB/ORB MPS/MRD/MPP MC/MCR
Primary step point/ General step point Yes Yes No General output Yes Yes No Diverging step point/
Converging step point Step point transfer Yes No No
※ MC/MCR commands are not to be used within the step point.
※ The STL command could not be used in general sub-programs and the interruption service sub-program.
※ Use of the CJ command is not prohibited within the STL command, however, it will complicate the action and
should thus be avoided.
※ MPS/MRD/MPP command position:
Step Ladder Diagram:
Y1SS
M0
Y2
X2
n
X3
X1X0
MPP
MRD
MPS
BUS
LD X0
Command code:
STL Sn LD X0 MPS AND X1 OUT Y1 MRD AND X2 OUT M0 MPP AND X3 OUT Y2
Explanation:
The BUS of step point can’t use
commands MPS / MRD / MPP
directly. It needs to use command
LD or LDI before using
commands MPS / MRD / MPP.
8. Other Notice:
For general, commands (SET S□ or OUT S□) that used to transfer to next state are better to use after finishing
all relative outputs and actions.
In the following figure, they are the same after executing by PLC. If there are many conditions or actions in S10, it
is recommended to execute SET S20 after modifying from left figure to right figure and finishing all relative outputs
and actions. In this way, the procedure is clear and easy to maintain.
SET
Y0S10S
S20S Y2
S20
Y1 SET
Y0S10S
S20S Y2
S20
Y1
4 Step Ladder Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 4-7
It is needed to add RET command after finishing step
ladder program and RET command is also needed to add
after STL as shown in right figure.
S0S20S
RET
X1
S0S20S
RET
X1
4.4 Reminder of Design on the Step Ladder Program
1. The step point up front in SFC is called the primary step point, S0~S9. Utilize the primary step point to be the start
of the procedure, and use the RET command as the end to construct a complete procedure.
2. If the STL command is not in use, S could be served as general auxiliary relay.
3. The number for the step point, S, could not be used repeatedly.
4. Categories of procedures:
Single procedure: there is only a procedure in a program (the alternative diverge and converge, the simultaneous
diverge and converge aren’t included)
Complicated single procedure: there is only a procedure in a program and it includes alternative diverge,
alternative converge procedures, Simultaneous diverge and simultaneous converge procedures.
Combination procedure: there are numerous single procedures in a program and maximum is 10 (S0~S9)
procedures.
5. Procedure separation: it is allowed to write in numerous procedures within one step ladder diagram
There are two single procedures S0 and S1 at the right
diagram; procedure of the program is to write in S0 ~S30 first,
and then S1~S43.
Either one step point on the procedure could jump to any one
specified step point on other procedures.
Once the condition below S21 at the right diagram is held, it
could jump to the specified S42 step point on the S1 procedure;
this motion is called the separate step point.
S0
S21
S30
OUT
OUTS1
S41
S43
OUT
S42
6. Restrictions on the diverging procedure: (See following examples)
A. Up to 8 diverging step points could be used within a diverging procedure.
B. Up to 16 loops could be used in the combination of plural diverging or simultaneous converging procedures.
C. Either one step point on the procedure could jump to any one specified step point on other procedures.
7. Reset of the step point and the output prohibition:
A. Use the ZRST command to Reset a section f step points to be OFF.
4 Step Ladder Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 4-8
B. Use the output Y prohibition of PLC (M1034=ON).
8. Retaining step point:
When PLC encountered power failure, the retaining step point will memorize the ON/OFF status, and go on
with the execution before the power failure after the power is turned back on. S0~S127 are currently the retaining
step points.
9. Special auxiliary relay and special register: refer to chapter 4.6 IST command for detail.
Device Description
M1040 Step transition inhibits. When M1040 is On, all movement of step point are inhibited.
M1041 Step transition start. Flag for IST command.
M1042 Start pulse. Flag for IST command.
M1043 Origin reset completed. Flag for IST command.
M1044 Origin condition. Flag for IST command.
M1045 All outputs clear inhibit. Flag for IST command.
M1046 STL state setting. Once there is a step point On, M1046 is On.
M1047 STL monitor enable
D1040 ON state number 1 of step point S
D1041 ON state number 2 of step point S
D1042 ON state number 3 of step point S
D1043 ON state number 4 of step point S
D1044 ON state number 5 of step point S
D1045 ON state number 6 of step point S
D1046 ON state number 7 of step point S
D1047 ON state number 8 of step point S
4.5 Categories of Procedures
A. Single procedure: the basic step action is single procedure control action.
The first step point of step ladder diagram is called primary step point and the number is S0~S9. Those step points
after primary step point are called general step point and the number are S10~S1023. S10~S19 will be used as origin
reset step points once use command IST.
A-1 Single Procedure without Divergence and Convergence
After finishing a procedure, transferring control power of step point to primary step point.
4 Step Ladder Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 4-9
M1002ZRST S0 S127
SET S0
SET S20
Y0
SET S30
Y1
SET S40
Y4
S0
RET
END
X0S0S
S20S
X1
S30S
X2
S60S
X5
Y2
SET S50
S40S
X3
Y3
SET S60
S50S
X4
Step Ladder Diagram
S0
S20
S30
S40
S0
M1002
X0
X1
X2
X5
Y0
Y1
Y2
SFC diagram
S50
X3
Y3
S60
X4
Y4
4 Step Ladder Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 4-10
A-2 JUMP Procedure
1. Transfer control power of step
point to upper certain step
point.
2. Transfer control power of step
point to step point of other
procedure.
S0
S21
S42
S43
OUT
OUT
S0
S21
S41
OUT
OUTS1
S41
S43
OUT
S42
A-3 Reset Procedure
At the right diagram, S50 will Reset itself and end the
procedure when condition is held. S0
S21
S50RST
B. Complicated single procedure: it includes alternative diverge, alternative converge procedures,
Simultaneous diverge and simultaneous converge procedures.
B-1 Structure of simultaneous divergence
The situation that transfers to many states when present condition is held is called structure of simultaneous
divergence as shown in following. When X0=On, S20 will transfer to S21, S22, S23 and S24 at the same time.
Ladder diagram of simultaneous divergence:
4 Step Ladder Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 4-11
X0SET
SET S22
S21S
SET S23
S20
SET S24
SFC diagram of simultaneous divergence:
S20
S21 S22 S23 S24
B-2 Structure of the alternative divergence
The situation that transfers to individual state when individual condition of present state is held is called structure of
alternative divergence as shown in following. S20 will transfer to S30 when X0=On, S20 will transfer to S31 when
X1=On and S20 will transfer to S32 when X2=On.
Ladder diagram of alternative divergence:
X0SET
SET S31
S30S
SET S32
S20
X1
X2
SFC diagram of alternative divergence:
S20
S30 S31 S32
X0 X1 X2
B-3 Structure of the simultaneous convergence
The situation that transfers to next state when continuous states are held at the same time is called simultaneous
convergence.
4 Step Ladder Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 4-12
Ladder diagram of simultaneous convergence: X2
SET S50SS40
SS41
SS42
SFC diagram of simultaneous convergence:
S40
S50
S41 S42
X2
B-4 Structure of the alternative convergence
The following ladder diagram is alternative convergence. That means it will transfer to S60 once one of S30, S40 and
S50 is held.
Ladder diagram of alternative convergence: X0
SET
SET S60
S60S
SET S60
S30
X1
X2
SS40
SS50
SFC diagram of alternative convergence:
S30
S60
S40 S50X0 X1 X2
4 Step Ladder Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 4-13
Example of the alternative divergence and alternative convergence procedures
M1002ZRST S0 S127
SET S1
SET S20
Y0
SET S30
Y1
SET S40
Y2
END
X0S1S
S20S
X1
S30S
X2
S40S
X3
SET S31X4
SET S32X7
SET S50
Y3S31
SX5
SET S41
Y4S41
SX6
SET S50
Y5S32
SX10
SET S42
Y6S42
SX11
SET S50S50
ST1
SET S60
TMR T1 K10
Y7S60
SX12
RET
S1
S1
S20
S30
S40
S1
M1002
X0
X1
X2
X12
Y0
Y1
Y2
S50
X3
S60
T1
Y7
S31
S41
X4
X5
Y3
Y4
X6
TMR T1 K10
S32
S42
X7
X10
Y5
Y6
X11
4 Step Ladder Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 4-14
Example of the simultaneous divergence and simultaneous convergence procedures
M1002ZRST S0 S127
SET S3
SET S20
Y0
SET S30
Y1
SET S40
Y2
END
X0S3S
S20S
X1
S30S
X2
S40S
SET S31
SET S32
Y3S31
SX3
SET S41
Y4S41
S
Y5S32
SX4
SET S42
Y6S42
S
X5SET S50
S50S
T1SET S60
TMR T1 K10
Y7S60
SX6
RET
S3
S40S
S41S
S42S
S3
S20
S30
S40
S3
M1002
X0
X1
X2
X6
Y0
Y1
Y2
S50
X5
S60
T1
Y7
S31
S41
X3
Y3
Y4
TMR T1 K10
S32
S42
X4
Y5
Y6
4 Step Ladder Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 4-15
Example of the simultaneous divergence and alternative convergence procedures
S127
K10
M1002ZRST S0
SET S4
SET S20
Y0
SET S30
Y1
SET S40
Y2
END
X0S4S
S20S
X1
S30S
X2
S40S
X3
SET S31
SET S32
SET S50
Y3S31
SX4
SET S41
Y4S41
SX5
SET S50
Y5S32
SX6
SET S42
Y6S42
SX7
SET S50S50
ST1
SET S60
TMR T1
Y7S60
SX6
RET
S4
S4
S20
S30
S40
S4
M1002
X0
X1
X2
Y0
Y1
Y2
S50
X3
S60
T1
Y7
S31
S41
X4
Y3
Y4
TMR T1 K10
S32
S42
X6
Y5
Y6X5 X7
4 Step Ladder Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 4-16
Combination example 1: (includes the alternative divergence and convergence, the simultaneous divergence
and convergence)
S127M1002
ZRST S0
SET S0
Y1
SET S30
Y2
SET S40
Y3
SX1
S30S
X4
S31S
X5
SET S31
SET S32
SET S40
Y5S40
SX7
SET S50
Y7S50
SX11
SET S60
Y13S60
S
SET S51
X2
X3
S20
Y0
SET S20
SX0
S0
END
Y10S51
SX12
SET S61S61
SX15
SET S70
Y14
Y17S70
SX17
RET
S0
S60S
S61S
Y4S32
SX6
SET S41
Y6S41
SX10
SET S52
SET S53
Y12S63
SX14
SET S63
Y15S62
S
Y16S63
SX16
S0S62
SS63
S
Y11S52
SX13
SET S62
S0
S20
S30
S40
S0
M1002
X0
X1
X4
X17
Y1
Y2
Y5
S50
X7
S70 Y17
S51
S61
X12
Y10
Y14
S52
S62
X13
Y11
Y15
X11
X15
S60 Y13
Y0
Y7
S31 Y3
X5
X2
S32 Y4
X6
X3
S41 Y6
X10
X16
S53
S63
Y12
Y16
X14
S0
4 Step Ladder Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 4-17
Combination example 2: (includes the alternative divergence and convergence, the simultaneous divergence
and convergence)
S127M1002
ZRST S0
SET S0
SET S30
Y0
SET S31
Y1
SET S33
Y2
END
X0S0S
S30S
X1
S31S
X2
S32S
X3
SET S32
SET S33
Y3S33
SX4
SET S34
Y4S34
SX5
SET S35
Y6S36
SX6
SET S37
Y7S37
S
S0S35
S
RET
X1
SET S36
Y5S35
S
X7S37S
S0
S30
S31
S33
M1002
X0
X1
X2
Y0
Y1
Y3
S34
X4
S36
S37
X6
Y6
Y7
X5
S35 Y5
Y4
S32 Y2
X3
X1
S0
X7
Restrictions on the divergence procedure:
1. Up to 8 divergence step points could be used in a divergence procedure. In following diagram, maximum
divergence step points after step point S20 are 8 (S30 - S37).
2. Up to 16 loops could be used in the combination of plural divergence or simultaneous convergence procedures. In
following diagram, 4 step points after step point S40, 7 step points after step point S41 and 5 step points after step
point S42. In this procedure, maximum is 16 loops. 3. Either one step point on the procedure could jump to any one specified step point on other procedures.
Y26S60X26
X41
S0
S20
S30
S40
S0
M1002
X0
X1
X11
X51
Y0
Y1
Y11
S50
X20
S80 Y41
S51
S71
X33
Y15
Y33
S53
S73
X35
Y17
Y35
X32
X44
S70 Y32
Y14
S31 Y2
X12
X2
S32 Y4
X15
X4
S41 Y12
X21
X52
S54 Y20
S0SET
S32 Y3
X14
X3
S52
S72
X34
Y16
Y34
S0SETX13
S20OUT
S20OUT
S81
X45
Y42
SET
S34 Y5
X15
X5
S35
X15
X6
S55
S74
X36
X22
X46
Y27S61X27
X42
Y30S62X30
Y31S63X31
Y40S76X43
X50
Y6 S36
X16
X7
Y7
Y21
Y36
S56 Y22 S57 Y23 S20
X23OUT
RST
S36
Y10
Y13
Y25
Y37
S58
X37
X24
Y24
RST
S58
S37
S42
S59
S75
X40
X47
X10
X17
X25
SETS0 OUT
S42
4 Step Ladder Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 4-18
4.6 IST command
API Applicable models ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH60
IST Manual/Auto Control
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S D1 D2 Note: Operand S will occupy 8 continuous devices.
The usage range of operand D1 and D2 is S20~S899 and D2>D1. IST command only can be used one time in program. Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
IST Continuous execution - -
32-bit command
- - - - Flag: M1040~M1047.
Refer to following for detail.
CommandExplanation
: The starting input number of specific operation mode. : The smallest
number for the specific status step point under the auto mode. : The greatest number for the specific status step point under the auto mode.
The IST is a convenient command made specifically for the initial state of the step
ladder control procedure to accommodate the special auxiliary relay to the convenient
auto control command.
M1000IST X10 S20 S60
X10: Individual operation (Manual operation)
X11: Zero point return X12: Step operation X13: One cycle operation
X14: Continuous operation X15: Zero point return start switchX16: Start switch X17: Stop switch
When the IST command is executed, the following special auxiliary relay will switch
automatically.
M1040: Movement inhibited M1041: Movement start M1042: Status pulse M1047: STL monitor enable
S0: Manual operation/initial state step point S1: Zero point return/initial state step point S2: Auto operation/initial state step point
ProgramExample
1
When IST command is used, S10~S19 are for zero point return operation and the step
point of this state can’t be used as general step point. However, when using S0~S9 step
points, S0 initiates “manual operation”, S1 initiates “zero point return operation” and S2
initiates “auto operation”. Thus, there should be three circuits of these three initial state
step points first written in program.
When switching to S1 (zero point return mode), zero point return won’t have any actions
once one of S10~S19 is On.
When switching to S2 (auto operation mode), auto operation won’t have any actions
once one of between to is On or M1043=On
4 Step Ladder Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 4-19
ProgramExample
2
Example: the Robot arm control (use IST command):
Motion request: In the example, two kinds of balls (big and small) are separated and
moved to different boxes. Distribute the control panel for the control.
Motion of the Robot arm: lower robot arm, collect balls, raise robot arm, shift to right,
lower robot arm, release balls, raise robot arm, shift to left to finish motion in order.
I/O Device:
Y0
Y1Y2Y3
Left-limit X1
Upper-limit X4
Upper-limit X5
Right-limit X2(big balls)
Right-limit X3(small balls)
Big SmallBig/smallsensor X0
Control panel
X15 X16
X17
X20
X21
X22
X23
X24
X25
Step X12
One cycleoperation X13
Continuousoperation X14
Manualoperation X10
Zero return X11
Power start
Power stop
Zero return Auto start
Auto stop
Shiftto right
Shiftto left
Releaseballs
Collectballs
Lowerrobot arm
Raiserobot arm
Big/small sensor X0.
The left-limit of the robot arm X1, the right-limit X2 (big balls), the right-limit X3
(small balls), the upper-limit X4, and the lower-limit X5.
Raise robot arm Y0, lower robot arm Y1, shift to right Y2, shift to left Y3, and
collect balls Y4.
START circuit:
M1000IST X10 S20 S80
X0M1044
X1 Y4
4 Step Ladder Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 4-20
Manual operation mode:
X20SET
RST Y4
Y4SS0
X21
X22 Y1Y0
X23 Y0Y1
X24 X4Y2
Y3
X25 X4Y3
Y2
Collect balls
Release balls
Lower robot arm
Raise robot armCondition interlock
Shift to right
Shift to left
Condition interlockRaise robot arm to theupper-limit (X4 is ON)
Zero point return mode:
SFC figure:
S1
S10
X15
S11
X4
S12
X1
RST Y4
RST Y1
Y0
RST Y2
Y3
SET M1043
RST S12
Release balls
Stop lowering robot arm
Raise robot arm to theupper-limit (X4 is ON)
Stop shifting to right
Shift to left and shift tothe left-limit (X1 is On)
Start zero return completed flag
Zero return operation completed
4 Step Ladder Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 4-21
Ladder Diagram: X15
SET S10SS1
RST Y4SS10
RST Y1
Y0X4
SET S11
RST Y2SS11
Y3X1
SET S12
SET M1043SS12
RST S12
Enter zero return operation mode
Release balls
Stop lowering robot arm
Raise robot arm to theupper-limit (X4 is ON)
Stop shifting to right
Shift to left and shift tothe left-limit (X1 is On)
Start zero return completed flag
Zero return operation completed
Auto operation (step/one-cycle/continuous operation modes):
SFC figure:
S2
S20
S30
S31
M1044
X5
T0
Y1
SET
Y0
S32
X4
X2
S50 Y1
Y2
S2
X1
M1041
X0Y4
TMR T0 K30
S60 RSTX5
Y4
TMR T2 K30
S70
T2
Y0
S80
X4
Y3X1
S40
S41
X5
T1
SET
Y0
S42
X4
X3
Y2
X0Y4
TMR T1 K30
X3X2
4 Step Ladder Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 4-22
Ladder Diagram:
SET S20
SET S30
SET Y4
Y0
END
X5
S31S
X4
TMR T0
SET S32
S2S
M1041 M1044
S20S
S30S
Y1X0
SET S40X5 X0
SET S31T0
K30
Y2S32
SX2
SET S50
X2
SET Y4
TMR T1
S40S
SET S41T1
K30
Y0S41
SX4
SET S42
Y2S42
SX3
SET S50
X3
Y1S50
SX5
SET S60
RST Y4
TMR T2
S60S
SET S70T2
K30
Y0S70
SX4
SET S80
Y3S80
SX1
X1
RET
S2
Enter auto operation mode
Collect balls
Release balls
Lower robot arm
Shift to right
Raise robot arm to theupper-limit (X4 is ON)
Shift to left and shift tothe left-limit (X1 is On)
Collect balls
Raise robot arm to theupper-limit (X4 is ON)
Shift to right
Lower robot arm
Raise robot arm to theupper-limit (X4 is ON)
5 Application Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 5-1
5.1 Summary of Parameters
Mnemonic Codes Applicable models STEPS Classification AP I
16 bits 32 bits
P Command Function
ES EP EH 16-bit 32-bitPage
00 CJ – Conditional jump 3 – 6-1 01 CALL – Call subroutine 3 – 6-5 02 SRET – – Subroutine return 1 – 6-5 03 IRET – – Interrupt return 1 – 6-7 04 EI – – Enable interrupts 1 – 6-7 05 DI – – Disable interrupts 1 – 6-7 06 FEND – – First end 1 – 6-1107 WDT – Watchdog timer refresh 1 – 6-1208 FOR – – Start of FOR-NEXT loop 3 – 6-14
Loop
Con
trol
09 NEXT – – End of FOR-NEXT loop 1 – 6-1410 CMP DCMP Compare 7 13 6-1711 ZCP DZCP Zone compare 9 17 6-1812 MOV DMOV Data Move 5 9 6-1913 SMOV – Shift move – 11 – 6-2014 CML DCML Compliment 5 9 6-2215 BMOV – Block move 7 – 6-2316 FMOV DFMOV Fill move 7 13 6-2417 XCH DXCH Data exchange 5 9 6-2518 BCD DBCD Convert BIN data into BCD 5 9 6-26
Tran
smis
sion
C
ompa
rison
19 BIN DBIN Convert BCD data into BIN 5 9 6-2720 ADD DADD Perform the addition of BIN data 7 13 6-29
21 SUB DSUB Perform the subtraction of BIN data 7 13 6-30
22 MUL DMUL Perform the multiplication of BIN data 7 13 6-31
23 DIV DDIV Perform the division of BIN data 7 13 6-3224 INC DINC Perform the addition of 1 3 5 6-3425 DEC DDEC Perform the subtraction of 1 3 5 6-34
26 WAND DAND Perform the logical product (AND) operation 7 13 6-35
27 WOR DOR Perform the logical sum (OR) operation 7 13 6-36
28 WXOR DXOR Perform the exclusive logical add (XOR) operation 7 13 6-37Fo
ur F
unda
men
tal O
pera
tions
of
Arith
met
ic
29 NEG DNEG Negation 3 5 6-3830 ROR DROR Rotate to the right 5 9 6-4131 ROL DROL Rotate to the left 5 9 6-42
32 RCR DRCR Rotate to the right with the carry flag attached 5 9 6-43
33 RCL DRCL Rotate to the left with the carry flag attached 5 9 6-44
34 SFTR – Shift the data of device specified to the right 9 – 6-45
35 SFTL – Shift the data of device specified to the left – 9 – 6-46
36 WSFR – Shift the register to the right – 9 – 6-4737 WSFL – Shift the register to the left – 9 – 6-4838 SFWR – Shift register write – 7 – 6-49
Rot
atio
n an
d D
ispl
acem
ent
39 SFRD – Shift register read – 7 – 6-50
40 ZRST – Resets a range of device specified 5 – 6-51
41 DECO – 8 → 256 bits decoder 7 – 6-53
5 Application Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 5-2
Mnemonic Codes Applicable models STEPS Classification AP I
16 bits 32 bits
P Command Function
ES EP EH 16-bit 32-bitPage
42 ENCO – 256 → 8 bits encoder 7 – 6-5443 SUM DSUM Sum of ON bits 5 9 6-5644 BON DBON Check specified bit status 7 13 6-5645 MEAN DMEAN Mean value 7 13 6-5746 ANS – – Alarm device output – 7 – 6-5847 ANR – Alarm device reset – 1 – 6-5848 SQR DSQR Square root of BIN 5 9 6-60D
ata
Ope
ratio
n
49 FLT DFLT Convert BIN integer to binary floating point 5 9 6-61
50 REF – I/O refresh 5 – 7-1
51 REFF – Refresh and adjust the response time of input filter – 3 – 7-2
52 MTR – – Input matrix – 9 – 7-3
53 – DHSCS – High speed counter comparison SET – 13 7-6
54 – DHSCR – High speed counter comparison RESET – 13 7-15
55 – DHSZ – Zone comparison (High-speed counter) – – 17 7-17
56 SPD – – Speed detection – 7 – 7-2457 PLSY DPLSY – Pulse output 7 13 7-2558 PWM – – Pulse width modulation output 7 – 7-30
Hig
h Sp
eed
Proc
essi
ng
59 PLSR DPLSR – Pulse wave output with acceleration/deceleration speed 9 17 7-31
60 IST – – Manual/Auto control 7 – 7-3661 SER DSER Search a data stack – 9 17 7-4262 ABSD DABSD – Absolute drum sequencer – 9 17 7-4363 INCD – – Increment drum sequencer – 9 – 7-4464 TTMR – – Teaching timer – 5 – 7-4665 STMR – – Special timer – 7 – 7-4866 ALT – – On/Off alternate command 3 – 7-4967 RAMP – – Ramp signal – 9 – 7-50
Con
veni
ence
Com
man
d
69 SORT – – Data sort – 11 – 7-5270 TKY DTKY – 10-key keypad input – 7 13 7-5471 HKY DHKY – 16-key keypad input – 9 17 7-5672 DSW – – Digital Switch input – 9 – 7-5873 SEGD – Decode the 7-step display panel 5 – 7-6074 SEGL – – 7-step display scan output 7 – 7-6175 ARWS – – Arrow keypad input – 9 – 7-6576 ASC – – ASCII code conversion – 11 – 7-6677 PR – – Print – 5 – 7-6778 FROM DFROM Read special module CR data 9 17 7-69
Exte
rnal
I/O
Dis
play
79 TO DTO Special module CR data write in 9 17 7-6980 RS – – Serial data communication 9 – 7-74
81 PRUN DPRUN Octal number system transmission – 5 9 7-87
82 ASCII – Convert HEX to ASCII 7 – 7-8883 HEX – Convert ASCII to HEX 7 – 7-9284 CCD – Check code – 7 – 7-9585 VRRD – Potentiometer read – 5 – 7-97
Seria
l I/O
86 VRSC – Potentiometer scale – 5 – 7-9987 ABS DABS Absolute value 3 5 7-100
88 PID DPID – PID calculation 9 – 7-100
5 Application Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 5-3
Mnemonic Codes Applicable models STEPS Classification AP I
16 bits 32 bits
P Command Function
ES EP EH 16-bit 32-bitPage
89 PLS – – Rising-edge output 3 – 3-1390 LDP – – Rising-edge detection operation 3 – 3-1191 LDF – – Falling-edge detection operation 3 – 3-11
92 ANDP – – Series connection command for the rising-edge detection operation
3 – 3-11
93 ANDF – – Series connection command for the falling-edge detection operation
3 – 3-12
94 ORP – – Parallel connection command for the rising-edge detection operation
3 – 3-12
95 ORF – – Parallel connection command for the falling-edge detection operation
3 – 3-13
96 TMR – – Timer 4 – 3-8 97 CNT DCNT – Counter 4 6 3-8 98 INV – – Inverting operation 1 – 3-15
Basi
c C
omm
and
99 PLF – – Falling-edge output 3 – 3-13100 MODRD – – MODBUS data Read 7 – 8-1 101 MODWR – – MODBUS data write in 7 – 8-5
102 FWD – – VFD-A series drive forward command 7 – 8-8
103 REV – – VFD-A series drive reverse command 7 – 8-9
104 STOP – – VFD-A series drive stop command 7 – 8-9
105 RDST – – VFD-A series drive status read 5 – 8-11
106 RSTEF – – VFD-A series drive abnormal reset 5 – 8-13
107 LRC – LRC error check – 7 – 8-13Com
mun
icat
ion
com
man
d of
D
elta
AC
Mot
or D
rives
108 CRC – CRC error check – 7 – 8-15
109 SWRD – Digital switch read – 3 – 8-18110 – DECMP Binary floating point comparison – 13 8-19
111 – DEZCP Binary floating point zone comparison – 17 8-20
116 – DRAD Degree Radian – – 9 8-21117 – DDEG Radian Degree – – 9 8-21
118 – DEBCD Convert binary floating point to decimal floating point – 9 8-23
119 – DEBIN Convert decimal floating point to binary floating point – 9 8-23
120 – DEADD Binary floating point addition – 13 8-24121 – DESUB Binary floating point subtraction – 13 8-25
122 – DEMUL Binary floating point multiplication – 13 8-26
123 – DEDIV Binary floating point division – 13 8-27
124 – DEXP Perform exponent operation of binary floating point – 9 8-28
Floa
ting
Ope
ratio
n
125 – DLN Perform natural logarithm operation of binary floating point – 9 8-29
126 – DLOG Perform logarithm operation of binary floating point – 13 8-30
127 – DESQR Square root of binary floating point – 9 8-31
5 Application Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 5-4
Mnemonic Codes Applicable models STEPS Classification AP I
16 bits 32 bits
P Command Function
ES EP EH 16-bit 32-bitPage
128 – DPOW Perform power operation of binary floating point – 13 8-32
129 INT DINT Convert binary floating point to BIN integer 5 9 8-33
130 – DSIN Sine operation of binary floating point – 9 8-34
131 – DCOS Cosine operation of binary floating point – 9 8-36
132 – DTAN Tangent operation of binary floating point – 9 8-37
133 – DASIN Arcsine operation of binary floating point – – 9 8-39
134 – DACOS Arccosine operation of binary floating point – – 9 8-40
135 – DATAN Arctangent operation of binary floating point – – 9 8-41
136 – DSINH Hyperbolic sine operation of binary floating point – – 9 8-42
137 – DCOSH Hyperbolic cosine operation of binary floating point – – 9 8-42
Floa
ting
Ope
ratio
n
138 – DTANH Hyperbolic tangent operation of binary floating point – – 9 8-43
144 GPWM – – General pulse width modulation output – – 7 8-44
145 FTC – – Fuzzy temperature control – – 9 8-45147 SWAP DSWAP Swap high/low byte 3 5 8-48148 MEMR DMEMR Data backup MEMORY read – 7 13 8-49149 MEMW DMEMW Data backup MEMORY write in – 7 13 8-50150 MODRW – – MODBUS data read/write in 11 – 9-1 151 PWD – – Input pulse width detection – – 5 – 9-11
152 RTMU – – Start to measure the execution time of I interrupt – – 5 – 9-11Ad
ditio
nal C
omm
and
153 RTMD – – End to measure the execution time of I interrupt – – 3 – 9-12
154 RAND – – Random value – 9 – 9-13155 ABSR DABSR – ABS current value read – – 7 13 9-14156 ZRN DZRN – Zero point return – – 9 17 9-18157 PLSV DPLSV – Variable speed pulse output – – 7 13 9-21158 DRVI DDRVI – Drive to increment – – 9 17 9-22Po
sitio
ning
C
ontro
l
159 DRVA DDRVA – Drive to absolute – – 9 17 9-26160 TCMP – Time compare – 11 – 9-35161 TZCP – Time zone compare – 9 – 9-36162 TADD – Time addition – 7 – 9-37163 TSUB – Time subtraction – 7 – 9-38166 TRD – Time data read – 3 – 9-40167 TWR – Time data write in – 3 – 9-42
Perp
etua
l C
alen
dar
169 HOUR DHOUR – Hour meter – 7 13 9-44170 GRY DGRY Convert BIN to Gray code – 5 9 9-44
Gra
y C
ode
171 GBIN DGBIN Convert Gray code to BIN – 5 9 9-45180 MAND – Matrix AND – – 9 – 9-47181 MOR – Matrix OR – – 9 – 9-49182 MXOR – Matrix XOR – – 9 – 9-50183 MNOR – Matrix NOR – – 9 – 9-51
184 MINV – Matrix inverse – – 7 – 9-52
5 Application Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 5-5
Mnemonic Codes Applicable models STEPS Classification AP I
16 bits 32 bits
P Command Function
ES EP EH 16-bit 32-bitPage
185 MCMP – Matrix compare – – 9 – 9-52186 MBRD – Matrix bit read – – 7 – 9-54187 MBWR – Matrix bit write – – 7 – 9-55188 MBS – Matrix bit shift – – 7 – 9-56189 MBR – Matrix bit rotate – – 7 – 9-58
Mat
rix H
andl
ing
190 MBC – Matrix bit state count – – 7 – 9-59196 HST DHST High speed counter – – 3 – 9-60
197 PLST DPLST – Multi-frequency variable pulse output – – 9 9 6-8
198 PLSK DPLSK – Multi-frequency fixed pulse output – – 9 9 6-9
Hig
h-le
vel
Com
man
d
199 PLSA DPLSA – Multi-step pulse slope output – – 11 11 6-10
215 LD& DLD& – Comparison contact is ON when S1 & S2 is true – 5 9 10-1
216 LD| DLD| – Comparison contact is ON when S1 | S2 is true – 5 9 10-1
217 LD^ DLD^ – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ^ S2 is true – 5 9 10-1
218 AND& DAND& – Comparison contact is ON when S1 & S2 is true – 5 9 10-2
219 AND| DAND| – Comparison contact is ON when S1 | S2 is true – 5 9 10-2
220 AND^ DAND^ – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ^ S2 is true – 5 9 10-2
221 OR& DOR& – Comparison contact is ON when S1 & S2 is true – 5 9 10-3
222 OR| DOR| – Comparison contact is ON when S1 | S2 is true – 5 9 10-3
Con
tact
Typ
e Lo
gic
Ope
ratio
n
223 OR^ DOR^ – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ^ S2 is true – 5 9 10-3
224 LD= DLD= – Comparison contact is ON when S1 = S2 is true 5 9 10-4
225 LD> DLD> – Comparison contact is ON when S1 > S2 is true 5 9 10-4
226 LD< DLD< – Comparison contact is ON when S1 < S2 is true 5 9 10-4
228 LD<> DLD<> – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ≠ S2 is true 5 9 10-4
229 LD<= DLD<= – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ≦ S2 is true 5 9 10-4
230 LD>= DLD>= – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ≧ S2 is true 5 9 10-4
232 AND= DAND= – Comparison contact is ON when S1 = S2 is true 5 9 10-5
233 AND> DAND> – Comparison contact is ON when S1 > S2 is true 5 9 10-5
234 AND< DAND< – Comparison contact is ON when S1 < S2 is true 5 9 10-5
236 AND<> DAND<> – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ≠ S2 is true 5 9 10-5
237 AND<= DAND<= – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ≦ S2 is true 5 9 10-5
238 AND>= DAND>= – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ≧ S2 is true 5 9 10-5
Con
tact
Typ
e C
ompa
re C
omm
and
240 OR= DOR= – Comparison contact is ON when S1 = S2 is true 5 9 10-6
5 Application Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 5-6
Mnemonic Codes Applicable models STEPS Classification AP I
16 bits 32 bits
P Command Function
ES EP EH 16-bit 32-bitPage
241 OR> DOR> – Comparison contact is ON when S1 > S2 is true 5 9 10-6
242 OR< DOR< – Comparison contact is ON when S1 < S2 is true 5 9 10-6
244 OR<> DOR<> – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ≠ S2 is true 5 9 10-6
245 OR<= DOR<= – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ≦ S2 is true 5 9 10-6
246 OR>= DOR>= – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ≧ S2 is true 5 9 10-6
Note 1: Applicable models ES series above includes EX and SS series; EP includes SA series.
Note 2: Above commands for ES/EX/SS models don’t possess pulse execution command (P command).
5 Application Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 5-7
5.2 Application Command Structure
Many commands may be divided into an command and a operand as follows:
Command : Indicates the executive functions of the command
Operand : Indicates the device that calculates the operand
A command usually allows one step to be used and an operand usually allows two or four steps to be used based on the command is a 16-bit or 32-bit command.
Explanation of the format of application command:
41 PDECO 8 to 256 bit EncoderAPI
ES/EX/SS EP EH
SDn
X Y M S K H T C D E F
1
9
11
S D n
151413
12
2 3 4 5 6 7
8
10
Applicable models
Bit device Word device 16-bit command (7 STEPS)
DECO Continuousexecution DECOP Pulse
execution
32-bit command
Flag: NoneNote: When D is a bit device, n=1~8 When D is a word device, n=1~4 Please refer the general specifications of each seriesmodels to see the usage range of each device.
API number for application command Upper row indicates 16-bit command. If the border of the row is dotted line, it means it is not available
in 16-bit command. Lower row indicates 32-bit command. If the border of the row is dotted line, it means it is not available
in 32-bit command. A “D“ is added to the head of the mnemonic code to indicate 32-bit command. (For example: API 12 DMOV)
The mnemonic code of application command A symbol “☺” in the upper row indicates the command is generally applied by using pulse
execution command. A “P“ in the lower row indicates the command is used with the pulse execution command. (For
example: API 12 MOVP) The operand format of application command The description of application command function Applicable models of DVP series PLC The step numbers occupied by the command in 16-bit operation, the name of continuous execution
command and pulse executive command The step numbers occupied by the command in 32-bit operation, the name of continuous execution
command and pulse execution command The related flag of the application command A symbol “*” is the device can use index register.
Note A symbol “*” is given to device which can be used for this operand
Device name Device type
5 Application Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 5-8
Application Commands Input
Some application commands are only combined by command codes API, but most of them are combined by
command codes API and several operands.
The application commands of DVP-Series PLC are controlled by command codes API 00 to API 246. Each
command code has its own meaning, for example, API 12 stands for MOV (move data). When using ladder
diagram editor to input programs, you will need to type in the command “MOV”. If using the HPP to input the
program, we will have to enter the API command codes. Each application command has its unique operand.
X0MOV K10 D10
command operand
This command is to move the value of operand to the appointed operand.
Source operand: if there is more than 1 source operand, then we use , … to display.
Destination operand: if there is more than one operand, then we use , …. to display.
If the operand may only be represented as a constant K, H or register then we will use , , , , , to display.
The Length of Operand (16-bit or 32-bit command)
The length of operand can be divided into two groups: 16-bit and 32-bit to process different length data.
A ”D” before a command separates 32-bit from 16-bit commands.
16-bit MOV command
X0
MOV K10 D10
When X0=On, K10 has been sent to D10.
32-bit DMOV command
X1
D10 D20
When X1=On, Data of (D11, D10) have been
sent to (D21, D20)
Continuous execution command and Pulse execution command
The execution type of command can be divided into two types: continuous execution command and pulse
execution command. Due to the execution time is shorter when the commands have not been executived,
please use the pulse execution command as far as possible to reduce the scan cycle of programming. A “P” to
be added directly after the command, which is pulse execution commands. Most used commands usually
5 Application Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 5-9
use pulse execution commands for application, for example, INC, DEC and MOV etc. related commands.
Therefore, pulse execution commands are identified by the symbol ☺ on the right top of the command.
Pulse execution command
X0
D10 D12
When X0 goes from OFF→ON, the MOVP command
will be executed one time and command cannot be
re-executed again in the scan of program scan. This
is called pulse execution command.
Continuous execution command
X1
MOV D10 D12
When X1=ON, the MOV command can be
re-executed again in every scan of program. This is
called continuous execution command.
The above figures show that when X0, X1=OFF, the command will not be executed and the contents of
the destination operand “D” will retmain unchanged.
The Assigned Devices of Operands
1. Bit device such as X, Y, M, S can be combined together and are defined as the WORD device. In
application commands, the bit device can serve as the word device (KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS) to store the
numeric values to operate.
2. Data register D, Timer T, Counter C and Index Register E, F are all assigned devices of operands.
3. A data register is usually a 16-bit register and it is also a register D. Hence, assigning a 32-bit register also
means assigning two register D with continuous numbers.
4. If the operand of 32-bit command assign D0, the 32-bit data register which is combined by D1 and D0 will
be occupied. D1 is the upper 16-bit and D0 is the lower 16-bit. The using rule of timer T and 16-bit
Counter(C0~C199) is the same.
5. When the 32-bit counter(C200~C255) is used as Data register, one point indicates 32-bit length. Only the
operand of 32-bit command can be assigned, the operand of 16-bit command can not be assigned.
Operand Data format
1. X, Y, M, S are only be single point ON/OFF, these are defined as a bit device.
2. However, 16-bit (or 32-bit) device T, C, D, E, F are data registers and are defined as Word device.
3. We also can add Kn in front of X, Y, M and S to be defined as word device, whereas n=1 means 4-bit. So
16-bit can be described from K1 to K4, and 32-bit can be described from K1 to K8. For example, K2M0
means there are 8-bit from M0 to M7.
5 Application Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 5-10
X0MOV K2M0 D10
When X0=On, move the contents of M0 to M7 to D10
segments 0 to 7, and segments 8 to 15 are set to 0.
Specified Number of Digits
16-bit command 32-bit command
Specified Number of Digits (16-bit command):
K-32,768~K+32,767
Specified Number of Digits (32-bit command):
K-2,147,483,648~K+2,147,483,647
16-bit command: (K1~K4) 32-bit command: (K1~K8)
K1 (4 points) 0~15 K1 (4 points) 0~15
K2 (8 points) 0~255 K2 (8 points) 0~255
K3 (12 points) 0~4,095 K3 (12 points) 0~4,095
K4 (16 points) -32,768~+32,767 K4 (16 points) 0~65,535
K5 (20 points) 0~1,048,575
K6 (24 points) 0~167,772,165
K7 (28 points) 0~268,435,455
K8 (32 points) -2,147,483,648~+2,147,483,647
Flags
1. General Flags
For the operation result of application commands, there are following flags of DVP series PLC:
Example : M1020 : Zero flag M1022 : Carry flag M1021 : Borrow flag
M1029 : Command execution completed flag
When executing the command, all flags will be turned to ON or OFF by the operation result of
application commands. However, when the command has not been executed, the ON/OFF state of
the flags will remain. Therefore, please notice that the above flags may not only be in connection with
specified commands but also many commands.
The program example of command execution completed flag , i.e. M1029
When the conditional contact is ON, the digital switch input command (DSW) will specify 4 output
points with 0.1 second frequency and circulate in order automatically to read the values of DSW.
During the intermediate period of operation, if the conditional contact is OFF, the DSW command is
suspended and the above-mentioned command will be re-executed from the beginning of the
program cycle.When the conditional contact is ON again, please refer the circuit below if you desire
to stop the interrupt.
5 Application Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 5-11
X0SET M0
M0DSW X10 Y10 D0 K0
RST M0M1029
When X0=ON, DSW command is activated.
When X0=OFF, wait for the program cycle of DSW command being completed, after M1029=ON, then M0 will be OFF.
2. Error Operation Flags
If the combination of the application command is error and/or the assigned devices of operands are out of
range, errors will occur and the error flags and numbers in the following table will be shown during the
excution of the application commands.
M1067
D1067
D1069
When error operations occur, M1067=On, D1067 will show the error number and D1069 will
show the error address.
If other errors occur, the contents of D1067 and D1069 will be refreshed. (when the error is
resetd, M1067=Off)
M1068
D1068
When error operations occur, M1068=On, D1068 will show the error address.
If other errors occur, the contents of D1068 will not be refreshed, M1068 must use RST
command to reset to OFF, otherwise the error will remain.
3. Flags for Extending Functions
Some application commands can extend the functions by using some special flags.
Example: command RS can switch transmission mode 8-bit and 16-bit by using M1161.
The Limited Using Times for Executing Commands:
Some commands can be used several times in the program, but some of them only can be used twice or even
once in the program. However, these commands can be modified by index register to extend more functions of
the commands in the operands.
1. Only can be used once in the program:
API 58 (PWM) (ES/EX/SS models) API 60 (IST) (ES/EX/SS/EP/SA/EH models) API 74 (SEGL) (ES/EX/SS models) API 88 (PID) (ES/EX/SS/EP/SA models)
2. Only can be used twice in the program:
API 57 (PLSY) (ES/EX/SS models) API 59 (PLSR) (ES/EX/SS models) API 74 (SEGL) (EH models) API 77 (PR) (EP/SA/EH models)
3. Only can be used four times in the program:
API 169 (HOUR) (EP/SA models)
4. Only can be used eight times in the program:
API 64 (TTMR) (EP/SA models)
5 Application Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 5-12
5. API 53 (DHSCS) and API 54 (DHSCR), these commands only can be executed simultaneously less than four
times in the program of DVP-ES/EX/SS models.
6. API 53 (DHSCS), API 54 (DHSCR), API 55(DHSZ) these commands only can be executed simultaneously
less than six times in the program of DVP-EP/SA models.
The Limited Using Times for Executing Commands Simultaneously:
There is no limited using time for executing the same command in the program. However, there are limited
using times for executing the commands simultaneously. 1. API 52 (MTR), API 56 (SPD), API 62 (ABSD), API 63 (INCD), API 69 (SORT), API 70 (TKY), API 71
(HKY), API 72 (DSW) (EP models), API 74 (SEGL)(EP models), API 75 (ARWS), API 80 (RS), API 100
(MODRD), API 101 (MODWR), API 102 (FWD), API 103 (REV), API 104 (STOP), API 105 (RDST), API
106 (RSTEF), API 150 (MODRW), API 151 (PWD), these commands only can be executed simultaneously
once in the program.
2. API 57 (PLSY), API 58 (PWM), API 59 (PLSR), API 72 (DSW) (EH models), these commands only can be
executed simultaneously twice in the program.
3. API 169 (HOUR) (EH models) only can be executed four times in the program.
4. API 64 (TTMR) (EH models) only can be executed eight times in the program.
5. In the program of DVP EH models, there is no limited using time for hardware high speed counter related
commands, like DHSCS, DHSCR and DHSZ. However, there are limited using times for executing the
commands simultaneously. DHSCS, DHSCR command will use one memory unit and DHSZ command will
use two memory units. When these commands are executed simultaneously, the total used memory units
can not exceed eight memory units. If exceeding eight memory units, system will totalize the used memory
units of the commands which have been scanned and executed first, the others will be ignored.
5.3 Handling of Numeric Values
Device such as X, Y, M, S are bit devices and there are only two state, ON and OFF. However, T, C, D, E,
F are data registers and are defined as word devices. Although bit device can only be single point
ON/OFF but it can be used as numeric value in the operands of application commands if adding the
specified bit device in front. The “specified bit device” is the “specified number of digit” and it would look
like Kn where “n” can be a number from the range of 0 to 8.
16-bit can be described from K1 to K4, and 32-bit can be described from K1 to K8. For example, K2M0
means there are 8-bit from M0 to M7.
5 Application Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 5-13
M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M0M1
transmit
equal to
clear to 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0000 1 1 1 1
11111111
D1
low byte
low byteD1 1111 000000000000
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b0b1
00000000
valid data
Transmit K1M0, K2M0, K3M0 to 16-bit registers and insufficient upper bit data have not been transmitted.
It’s the same as sending K1M0, K2M0, K3M0, K4M0, K5M0, K6M0, K7M0 to 32-bit registers and the
insufficient upper bit data have not been transmitted also.
The insufficient upper bit will be defined as 0 if the content of the operand assign K1 to K3 in 16-bit
operation or assign K4 to K7 in 32-bit operation. Therefore, it means the operation result is positive.
M0
BIN K2X4 D0 The BCD value combined by X4 to X13 will be converted to
D0 as BIN value.
The numbers of Bit device can specify freely. However, it is recommended to use 0 in the lowest digit
decimal place of X and Y devices (X0, X10, X20…Y0, Y10, Y20). For M and S Series, it is recommended
to use the multiple 8 but the use of 0 is the most device efficient, like M0, M10, M20…etc.
Assign Continuous Numbers
For example , like D date register, the continuous numbers of D are D0, D1, D2, D3, D4…etc.
For the bit device, the continuous numbers are shown as follows:
K1X0 K1X4 K1X10 K1X14……
K2Y0 K2Y10 K2Y20 Y2X30……
K3M0 K3M12 K3M24 K3M36…….
K4S0 K4S16 K4S32 K4S48…….
The bit device numbers are all of the above. To avoiding errors, please do not skip over the continuous
numbers. Furthermore, if K4Y0 is used in 32-bit operation, the upper 16bit is defined as 0. Therefore, it is
recommended to use K8Y0 in 32bit operation.
Floating Point Operation
The internal operation of DVP series PLC usually is operated by “BIN integer” format. When performing integer
division operation, the decimal point will be discarded. For example: 40 ÷ 3 = 13, remainder is 1 and the
decimal point will be discarded. But if use floating point operation, the decimal point can be given.
5 Application Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 5-14
The application commands related to floating point operation are shown in the following table.
API 49 (FLT), API 110 (D ECMP), API 111 (D EZCP), API 116 (D RAD),
API 117 (D DEG), API 118 (D EBCD), API 119 (D EBIN), API 120 (D EADD),
API 121 (D ESUB), API 122 (D EMUL), API 123 (D EDIV), API 124 (D EXP),
API 125 (D LN), API 126 (D LOG), API 127 (D ESQR), API 128 (D POW)
API 129 (INT) API 130 (D SIN) API 131 (D COS) API 132 (D TAN)
API 133 (D ASIN) API 134 (D ACOS) API 135 (D ATAN) API 136 (D SINH)
API 137 (D COSH) API 138 (D TANH)
Binary Floating Point
DVP PLC represents floating point number with 32-bit number by IEEE754 and the format is in the following:
S exponent mantissa
8-bit 23-bit
b31 b0
Sign bit0: positive1: negative
Equation ( ) 127;.121 =××− − BMBES
Therefore, the range of 32-bit floating is from ±2-126 to ±2+128, i.e. from ±1.1755×10-38 to ±3.4028×10+38.
Example 1: using 32-bit floating point to represent decimal number 23
Step 1: convert 23 to binary number: 23.0=10111
Step 2: Normalizing the binary: 10111=1.0111 × 24, 0111 is mantissa and 4 is an exponent.
Step 3: get exponent: E∵ -B=4 →E-127=4 E=131=10000011∴ 2
Step 4: We can now combine the sign, exponent, and normalized mantissa into the binary IEEE short real
representation.
0 10000011 011100000000000000000002=41B8000016
Example 2: using 32-bit floating point to represent decimal number –23
The conversion steps are the same as decimal number 23. Only need to modify sign bit from 0 to 1 to get value
1 10000011 011100000000000000000002=C1B8000016
DVP PLC also uses two registers with continuous number to store binary floating point. The following is the example
that uses register (D1, D0) to store binary floating point.
S E7 E6 E5 E1 E0 A22 A21 A20 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0
b0b1b2b3b4b5b6b20b21b22b23b24b28b29b30b31
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 22 27 6 5 1 0 -1 -2 -3 -17 -18 -19 -20 -21 -22 -23
D1(b15~b0) D0(b15~b0)
E0~E7=0 or 1 A0~A22=0 or 18 bits of exponent 23 bits of constant
sign bit (0: positive 1:negative)When b0~b31 is 0, the content is 0.
5 Application Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 5-15
Decimal Floating Point
The binary floating point is not accepted by most people. Therefore, binary floating point format can be converted
to decimal floating point format for people to perform the operation of decimal numbers. However, the DVP series
PLC use binary floating point to perform the operation of decimal numbers.
Decimal floating point is stored in the register with 2 continuous numbers. The register with small number stores
constant and the register with larger number stores exponent.
For example, using register (D1, D0) to store a decimal floating point.
Decimal floating point = [constant D0] X 10 [exponent D1 ]
constant D0 = ±1,000~±9,999
exponent D1 = - 41~+35
the most significant bit of (D1, D0) is symbol bit.
Besides, constant 100 doesn’t exist in D0 due to 100 will be shown with 1,000×10-1.
The range of decimal number is from ±1175×10-41 to ±3402×10+38.
Decimal floating point can be used in the following commands.
The conversion command for Binary floating point Decimal floating point (D EBCD)
The conversion command for Decimal floating point Binary floating point (D EBIN)
Zero flag (M1020), Borrow flag (M1021) and carry flag (M1022)
The flags that corresponds to the floating command are:
Zero flag: when the result is 0, M1020=On.
Borrow flag: when the result is least than the minimum unit, M1021=On
Carry flag: when the absolute value of result exceeds usage range, M1022=On
5.4 Index register E, F
The index register is 16-bit register. There are 2 devices for ES/EX/SS models (E and F), 8 devices for EP
models (E0~E3, F0~F3) and 16 devices for EH models (E0~E7, F0~F7).
E0 F0
F0E0
16-bit 16-bit
32-bit
lower bitupper bit
E and F are also 16-bit register just the same as general
register. It can be wrote/read freely.
If using a 32-bit register, you should specify E. In this
condition, F will be covered by E and cannot be used
anymore; otherwise the contents of E will become incorrect.
(When PLC start-up, it is commended to use MOVP
command to clear the contents of F and reset it to 0)
When using 32-bit index register, the combination of E, F are
as follows. (E0, F0), (E1, F1), (E2, F2)…(E7, F7).
5 Application Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 5-16
MOV K20E0 D10F0
E0=8 F0=1420+8=28 10+14=24K28 D24 transmit
As the left figure shown, the contents of operand will change
according to the contents of E, F. and we name this kind of
modification as “Index”.
For example, E0=8 and K20E0 all represent constant
K28(20+8). If the contact is ON, constant K28 will be
transmitted to register D24.
Devices can use Index register to modify in ES/EX/SS Series are: P, X, Y, M, S, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D.
Devices can use Index register to modify in EP Series are: P, X, Y, M, S, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D
Devices can use Index register to modify in EH Series are: P, I, X, Y, M, S, K, H, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D
The above device can use index register E, F to modify. However, index register E, F cannot modify itself,
either Kn. (K4M0E0 is available, K0E0M0 is not available). In each application command, if the symbol “*” is
added in the table of operand, it means the device can use index register E, F to modify.
Index register E, F can be used to modify P, I, X, Y, M, S, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D these devices under
certain condition. Two devices, E or F can be specified when using 16-bit register. If using index register E, F to
modify constant K, H in 32-bit command, only one device, E can be specified.
When constant (K,H) is used to be index function in WPLSoft command mode, it needs to use symbol
“@”.
Example: ”MOV K10@E0 D0F0”
The program example of index:
DVP - PLC
The digit switch input X3~X0,which be selected by Timer T
The 7-step display output Y17~Y0, which beused to display the present value of Timer T
5
T0 can use index register F0 to shorten the program and
display the 7 present value of T0~T9 on the external 7-step
display panel.
M1000BIN K1X0
BCD T0F0 K4Y0
F0
(X3~X0)BCD (F0)BIN
(T0F0)BIN (Y17~Y0)BCD
When F0=0~9, T0F0=T0~T9.
There are limited using times of some commands. If using the index register E, F to modify, the final result can
be the same as the operation result of using the same command repeatedly.
5 Application Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 5-17
5.5 Index for Commands • Sort by Characters
Mnemonic Codes Applicable models STEPS Classification API
16 bits 32 bits
P Command Function
ES EP EH 16-bit 32-bitPage
87 ABS DABS Absolute value 3 5 7-10062 ABSD DABSD – Absolute drum sequencer – 9 17 7-43155 ABSR DABSR – ABS current value read – – 7 13 9-1420 ADD DADD Perform the addition of BIN data 7 13 6-2966 ALT – – On/Off alternate command 3 – 7-49
218 AND& DAND& – Comparison contact is ON when S1 & S2 is true – 5 9 10-2
220 AND^ DAND^ – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ^ S2 is true – 5 9 10-2
219 AND| DAND| – Comparison contact is ON when S1 | S2 is true – 5 9 10-2
234 AND< DAND< – Comparison contact is ON when S1 < S2 is true 5 9 10-5
237 AND<= DAND<= – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ≦ S2 is true 5 9 10-5
236 AND<> DAND<> – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ≠ S2 is true 5 9 10-5
232 AND= DAND= – Comparison contact is ON when S1 = S2 is true 5 9 10-5
233 AND> DAND> – Comparison contact is ON when S1 > S2 is true 5 9 10-5
238 AND>= DAND>= – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ≧ S2 is true 5 9 10-5
93 ANDF – – Series connection command for the falling-edge detection operation
3 – 3-12
92 ANDP – – Series connection command for the rising-edge detection operation
3 – 3-11
47 ANR – Alarm device reset – 1 – 6-5846 ANS – – Alarm device output – 7 – 6-5875 ARWS – – Arrow keyboard input – 9 – 7-6576 ASC – – ASCII code conversion – 11 – 7-6682 ASCII – Convert HEX to ASCII 7 – 7-88
133 – DASIN Arcsine operation of binary floating point – – 9 8-39
134 – DACOS Arccosine operation of binary floating point – – 9 8-40
A
135 – DATAN Arctangent operation of binary floating point – – 9 8-41
18 BCD DBCD Convert BIN data into BCD 5 9 6-2619 BIN DBIN Convert BCD data into BIN 5 9 6-2715 BMOV – Block move 7 – 6-23
B
44 BON DBON Determine the ON bits 7 13 6-5601 CALL – Call subroutine 3 – 6-5 84 CCD – Check code – 7 – 7-9500 CJ – Conditional jump 3 – 6-1
C
14 CML DCML Compliment 5 9 6-22
5 Application Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 5-18
Mnemonic Codes Applicable models STEPS Classification API
16 bits 32 bits
P Command Function
ES EP EH 16-bit 32-bitPage
10 CMP DCMP Compare 7 13 6-1797 CNT DCNT – Counter 4 6 3-8
131 – DCOS Cosine operation of binary floating point – 9 8-36
137 – DCOSH Hyperbolic cosine operation of binary floating point – – 9 8-42
C
108 CRC – CRC error check – 7 – 8-1525 DEC DDEC Perform the subtraction of 1 3 5 6-3441 DECO – 8 → 256 bits decode 7 – 6-53117 – DDEG Radian → Degree – – 9 8-2105 DI – – Disable interrupts 1 – 6-7 23 DIV DDIV Perform the division of BIN data 7 13 6-32159 DRVA DDRVA – Data backup MEMORY write in – – 9 17 9-26158 DRVI DDRVI – Drive to increment – – 9 17 9-22
D
72 DSW – – Digital Switch input – 9 – 7-58120 – DEADD Binary floating point addition – 13 8-24
118 – DEBCD Convert binary floating point to decimal floating point – 9 8-23
119 – DEBIN Convert decimal floating point to binary floating point – 9 8-23
110 – DECMP Binary floating point comparison – 13 8-19123 – DEDIV Binary floating point division – 13 8-2704 EI – – Enable interrupts 1 – 6-7
122 – DEMUL Binary floating point multiplication – 13 8-26
42 ENCO – 256 → 8 bits encode 7 – 6-54
127 – DESQR Square root of binary floating point – 9 8-31
121 – DESUB Binary floating point subtraction – 13 8-25
124 – DEXP Convert binary floating point to perform exponent operation – 9 8-28
E
111 – DEZCP Binary floating point zone comparison – 17 8-20
06 FEND – – First end 1 – 6-11
49 FLT DFLT Convert BIN integer to binary floating point 5 9 6-61
16 FMOV DFMOV Multiple devices movement 7 13 6-2408 FOR – – Start of FOR-NEXT loop 3 – 6-1478 FROM DFROM Read special module CR data 9 17 7-69
102 FWD – – VFD-A series drive forward command 7 – 8-8
F
145 FTC – – Fuzzy temperature control – – 9 8-45
144 GPWM – – General pulse width modulation output – – 7 8-44
171 GBIN DGBIN Convert Gray code to BIN – P P 5 9 9-45G
170 GRY DGRY Convert BIN to Gray code – P P 5 9 9-4483 HEX – Convert ASCII to HEX P P 7 – 7-92H 71 HKY DHKY – 16-key keyboard input – P P 9 17 7-56
5 Application Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 5-19
Mnemonic Codes Applicable models STEPS Classification API
16 bits 32 bits
P Command Function
ES EP EH 16-bit 32-bitPage
169 HOUR DHOUR – Hour meter – P P 7 13 9-44
54 – DHSCR – High speed counter comparison RESET P P – 13 7-15
53 – DHSCS – High speed counter comparison SET – 13 7-6
196 HST DHST High speed counter – – 3 – 9-60
H
55 – DHSZ – Zone comparison (High-speed counter) – – 17 7-17
24 INC DINC Perform the addition of 1 3 5 6-3463 INCD – – Increment drum sequencer – 9 – 7-44
129 INT DINT Convert binary floating point to BIN integer 5 9 8-33
98 INV – – Inverting operation 1 – 3-1503 IRET – – Interrupt return 1 – 6-7
I
60 IST – – Manual/Auto control 7 – 7-36
215 LD& DLD& – Comparison contact is ON when S1 & S2 is true – 5 9 10-1
217 LD^ DLD^ – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ^ S2 is true – 5 9 10-1
216 LD| DLD| – Comparison contact is ON when S1 | S2 is true – 5 9 10-1
226 LD< DLD< – Comparison contact is ON when S1 < S2 is true 5 9 10-4
229 LD<= DLD<= – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ≦ S2 is true 5 9 10-4
228 LD<> DLD<> – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ≠ S2 is true 5 9 10-4
224 LD= DLD= – Comparison contact is ON when S1 = S2 is true 5 9 10-4
225 LD> DLD> – Comparison contact is ON when S1 > S2 is true 5 9 10-4
230 LD>= DLD>= – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ≧ S2 is true 5 9 10-4
91 LDF – – Falling-edge detection operation 3 – 3-1190 LDP – – Rising-edge detection operation 3 – 3-11
125 – DLN Convert binary floating point to perform natural logarithm operation
– 9 8-29
126 – DLOG Convert binary floating point to perform logarithm operation – 13 8-30
L
107 LRC – LRC error check – 7 – 8-13180 MAND – Matrix AND – – 9 – 9-47190 MBC – Matrix bit state count – – 7 – 9-59189 MBR – Matrix bit rotate – – 7 – 9-58186 MBRD – Matrix bit read – – 7 – 9-54188 MBS – Matrix bit shift – – 7 – 9-56187 MBWR – Matrix bit write – – 7 – 9-55185 MCMP – Matrix compare – – 9 – 9-5245 MEAN DMEAN Mean value 7 13 6-57
M
148 MEMR DMEMR Data backup MEMORY read – 7 13 8-49
5 Application Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 5-20
Mnemonic Codes Applicable models STEPS Classification API
16 bits 32 bits
P Command Function
ES EP EH 16-bit 32-bitPage
149 MEMW DMEMW MEMORY write in – 7 13 8-50184 MINV – Matrix inverse – – 7 – 9-52183 MNOR – Matrix NOR – – 9 – 9-51100 MODRD – – MODBUS data Read 7 – 8-1 150 MODRW – – MODBUS data read/write in 11 – 9-1 101 MODWR – – MODBUS data write in 7 – 8-5 181 MOR – Matrix OR – – 9 – 9-4912 MOV DMOV Data Move 5 9 6-1952 MTR – – Input matrix – 9 – 7-3
22 MUL DMUL Perform the multiplication of BIN data 7 13 6-31
M
182 MXOR – Matrix XOR – – 9 – 9-5029 NEG DNEG Negation 3 5 6-38N 09 NEXT – – End of FOR-NEXT loop 1 – 6-14
221 OR& DOR& – Comparison contact is ON when S1 & S2 is true – 5 9 10-3
O 223 OR^ DOR^ – Comparison contact is ON when
S1 ^ S2 is true – 5 9 10-3
222 OR| DOR| – Comparison contact is ON when S1 | S2 is true – 5 9 10-3
242 OR< DOR< – Comparison contact is ON when S1 < S2 is true 5 9 10-6
245 OR<= DOR<= – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ≦ S2 is true 5 9 10-6
244 OR<> DOR<> – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ≠ S2 is true 5 9 10-6
240 OR= DOR= – Comparison contact is ON when S1 = S2 is true 5 9 10-6
241 OR> DOR> – Comparison contact is ON when S1 > S2 is true 5 9 10-6
246 OR>= DOR>= – Comparison contact is ON when S1 ≧ S2 is true 5 9 10-6
95 ORF – – Parallel connection command for the falling-edge detection operation
3 – 3-13
O
94 ORP – – Parallel connection command for the rising-edge detection operation
3 – 3-12
88 PID – – PID calculation 9 – 7-10099 PLF – – Falling-edge output 3 – 3-1389 PLS – – Rising-edge output 3 – 3-13
59 PLSR DPLSR – Pulse wave output with acceleration/deceleration speed 9 17 7-31
157 PLSV DPLSV – Variable speed pulse output – – 7 13 9-2157 PLSY DPLSY – Pulse output 7 13 7-25
128 – DPOW Convert binary floating point to perform power operation – 13 8-32
77 PR – – Print – 5 – 7-67
P
81 PRUN DPRUN Octal number system transmission – 5 9 7-87
5 Application Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 5-21
Mnemonic Codes Applicable models STEPS Classification API
16 bits 32 bits
P Command Function
ES EP EH 16-bit 32-bitPage
151 PWD – – Input pulse width detection – – 5 – 9-11P 58 PWM – – Pulse width modulation output 7 – 7-30116 – DRAD Degree → Radian – – 9 8-2167 RAMP – – Ramp signal – 9 – 7-50154 RAND – – Random value – 9 – 9-13
33 RCL DRCL Rotate to the left with the carry flag attached 5 9 6-44
32 RCR DRCR Rotate to the right with the carry flag attached 5 9 6-43
105 RDST – – VFD-A series drive status read 5 – 8-11
R
50 REF – I/O refresh 5 – 7-1
51 REFF – Refresh and adjust the response time of input filter – 3 – 7-2
103 REV – – VFD-A series drive reverse command 7 – 8-9
31 ROL DROL Rotate to the left 5 9 6-4230 ROR DROR Rotate to the right 5 9 6-4180 RS – – Serial data communication 9 – 7-74
106 RSTEF – – VFD-A series drive abnormal reset 5 – 8-13
153 RTMD – – End to measure the execution time of I interrupt – – 3 – 9-12
R
152 RTMU – – Start to measure the execution time of I interrupt – – 5 – 9-11
73 SEGD – Decode the 7-step display panel 5 – 7-6074 SEGL – – 7-step display scan output 7 – 7-6161 SER DSER Search a data stack – 9 17 7-4239 SFRD – Shift register read – 7 – 6-50
35 SFTL – Shift the data of device specified to the left – 9 – 6-46
34 SFTR – Shift the data of device specified to the right 9 – 6-45
38 SFWR – Shift register write – 7 – 6-49
130 – DSIN Sine operation of binary floating point – 9 8-34
136 – DSINH Hyperbolic sine operation of binary floating point – – 9 8-42
13 SMOV – Shift move – 11 – 6-2069 SORT – – Data sort – 11 – 7-5256 SPD – – Speed detection – 7 – 7-2448 SQR DSQR Square root of BIN 5 9 6-6002 SRET – – Subroutine return 1 – 6-5 65 STMR – – Special timer – 7 – 7-48
104 STOP – – VFD-A series drive stop command 7 – 8-9
21 SUB DSUB Perform the subtraction of BIN data 7 13 6-30
S
43 SUM DSUM Sum of ON bits 5 9 6-56
5 Application Commands
DVP-PLC Application Manual 5-22
Mnemonic Codes Applicable models STEPS Classification API
16 bits 32 bits
P Command Function
ES EP EH 16-bit 32-bitPage
147 SWAP DSWAP Swap high/low byte 3 5 8-48S 109 SWRD – Digital switch read – 3 – 8-18
162 TADD – Real time clock data addition – 7 – 9-37
132 – DTAN Tangent operation of binary floating point – 9 8-37
138 – DTANH Hyperbolic tangent operation of binary floating point – – 9 8-43
160 TCMP – Time compare – 11 – 9-35
70 TKY DTKY – 10-key keyboard input – 7 13 7-5496 TMR – – Timer 4 – 3-8 79 TO DTO Special module CR data write in 9 17 7-69166 TRD – Time data read – 3 – 9-40
163 TSUB – Time subtraction – 7 – 9-38
64 TTMR – – Teaching timer – 5 – 7-46167 TWR – Time data write in – 3 – 9-42
T
161 TZCP – Time zone compare – 9 – 9-3685 VRRD – Potentiometer read – 5 – 7-97V 86 VRSC – Potentiometer scale – 5 – 7-99
26 WAND DAND Perform the logical product (AND) operation 7 13 6-35
07 WDT – Watchdog timer refresh 1 – 6-12
27 WOR DOR Perform the logical sum (OR) operation 7 13 6-36
37 WSFL – Shift the register to the left – 9 – 6-4836 WSFR – Shift the register to the right – 9 – 6-47
W
28 WXOR DXOR Perform the exclusive logical add(XOR) operation 7 13 6-37
X 17 XCH DXCH Data exchange 5 9 6-2511 ZCP DZCP Zone compare 9 17 6-18
156 ZRN DZRN – Zero point return – – 9 17 9-18Z 40 ZRST – Resets a range of device
specified 5 – 6-51
Note 1: Applicable models ES series above includes EX and SS series; EP includes SA series.
Note 2: Above commands for ES/EX/SS models don’t possess pulse execution command (P command).
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-1
API Applicable modelsES EP EH 00
CJ
P Conditional Jump
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F Note: Operand S can assign P
P can be modified by Index register E, F ES Series models: Operand S can assign P0~P63 EP / EH Series models: Operand S can assign P0~P255 ES series models do not support the pulse execution command (CJP)
16-bit command (3 STEPS)
CJ Continuous execution CJP Pulse
execution
32-bit command - - - - Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: The destination pointer of conditional jump CJ command can be used in the following conditions:
1. In order to shorten the program scan time when user do not want to execute some
unnecessary parts of PLC program.
2. In double or dual coils designation.
When the program that pointer P indicats is before CJ command, please note that the
error of WDT exceeding time. If PLC stop running, please use carefully.
CJ command can assign the same pointer P repeatedly. However, CJ command and
CALL command cannot assign the same pointer P, otherwise the error will occur.
The explanation of each device when executing the CJ command:
1. Y, M, S remains its previous state before the condition jump occurs.
2. The timer 10ms, 100ms that execute the counting will stop.
3. The timer T192~T199 that execute the subroutine program will continue and the
output contact will execute normally.
4. The high-speed counter that executes the counting will continue and the output
contact will execute normally.
5. The general counter will stop.
6. If the reset command of the accumulative type timer is activated before the condition
jump is activated, the device will be still in the reset state when condition jump is
executing.
7. The general application commands will not be executed.
8. The executing application commands, i.e. API 53 DHSCS, API 54 DHSCR, API 55
DHSZ, API 56 SPD, API 57 PLSY, API 58 PWM, API 59 PLSR, API 157 PLSV, API
158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA, will continue executing.
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-2
ProgramExample
1
When X0=On, the program will skip from address 0 to N (label P1) automatically and keep on executing. But the area between address 0 and N will be skipped and will not be executed.
When X0=Off, as usual, the program will keep on executing from address 0. CJ command will not be executed.
X0
X1
X2
CJ P1
Y1
Y2
0
NP1
P***(CJ command)
ProgramExample
2
There are five situations that the CJ command can be executed between the commands MC and MCR.
1. Out of MC~MCR.
2. Valid in the loop P1 in the following chart.
3. In the same level N, inside of MC~MC .
4. Inside of MC, out of MCR.
5. Jump from this MC~MCR to another MC~MCR. (1)
(1) This function is only provided in V4.9 (included) or higher version of ES series models and EP/EH series models.
The execution explanations of V4.7(included) or lower version of ES series models: CJ command is used between MC and MCR command but It is only used in the range
out of MC~MCR or in the same level N inside the MC~MCR. CJ command can not be used to jump from this range of MC~MCR to another range of MC~MCR, otherwise the error will occur. CJ command can execute correctly in the above-mentioned condition 1 and 3 but the error will occur if it is not used in other conditions.
X0
MC N0X2
X3
X1
M1000
M1000
P1
P0
CJ
CJ
MC N1
N1
N0
P1
P0
Y1
Y0
MCR
MCR
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-3
ProgramExample
3
The states of each device are shown in the following:
Device The contact
state before CJ execution
The contact state during CJ execution
The output coil state during CJ execution
M1, M2, M3 Off
M1, M2, M3 Off On Y1 (note1), M20, S1 Off
Y, M, S M1, M2, M3 On
M1, M2, M3 On Off Y1 (note1), M20, S1 On
M4 Off M4 Off On Timer is not activated 10ms, 100ms Timer
(ES/EP/EH) M4 On M4 On Off The interrupt of timer latched. Keep on counting after M0 is off.
M6 Off M6 Off On Timer (T240) is not activated 1ms, 10ms,
100ms Timer (for accumulative)
EP/EH M6 On M6 On Off
All accumulative timers will stop but latched once executing command CJ. When M0 is from On Off, T240 will be unchanged.
M7, X10 Off M10 On/Off trigger Timer does not count
C0~C234 M7 Off, X10 On/Off trigger
M10 On/Off trigger
The interrupt of counter latched. Keep on counting after M0 is off.
M11 Off M11 Off On Application commands won’t be executed.
Application command M11 On M11 On Off
Do not execute the skipped application command but API 53~59, API 157~159 keep executing.
Note 1: Y1 is dual output. When M0 is Off, it is controlled by M1. when M0 is On, it is
controlled by M12.
Note 2: When timer that subroutine used (T192~T199, for EP/EH) executes CJ command, it
will keep counting. After timer attains, output contact of timer will be On.
Note 3: When high-speed counters (C235~C255) execute CJ command, it will kekep counting
and output point will also continue act.
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-4
Y1 is double or dual coil designation. When M0=Off, it is controlled by M1. When M0=On,
it is controlled by M12.
CJ P0M0
M1
M2
M17
M3
M4
M5
M6
M7
M1
M11
M0
M12
M13
END
RST
RST
RST T127
C0
D0
Y1
CJ P0
CJ P63
S1
TMR T0 K10
TMR
RST
RST
CNT
MOV
T127
T127
C0
C0
D0K3
K20
Y1
M20
K1000
P0
P63
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-5
API Applicable modelsES EP EH 01
CALL P Call Subroutine
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
Note: Operand S can assign P. P can be modified by Index register E, F. ES Series models: operand S can assign P0~P63. EP / EH Series models: operand S can assign P0~P255. ES Series models do not support the pulse execution command (CALLP).
16-bit command (3 STEPS)
CALL Continuous execution CALLP Pulse
execution
32-bit command - - - -
Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: The desinition pointer of call subrountine. Program continues in the subroutine after the FEND command.
Subroutine pointers of CALL command and the pointers of CJ command are not
allowed to coincide.
If only using CALL command, it can call subrountine of the same pointer number with
no limit of times.
Subroutine can be nested for 5 levels including the initial CALL command. (If entering
the six level, the subroutine won’t be executed.) API Applicable models
ES EP EH 02 SRET
Subroutine Return
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
Note: No operand The command driven by contact is not necessary.
16-bit command (1 STEPS)
SRET Continuous execution - -
32-bit command
- - - - Flag: None
CommandExplanation
Indicates the end of subroutine program.
The subroutine will return to main program by SRET after the termination of subroutine
and execute the sequence program located at the next step to the CALL command.
ProgramExample
1
When X0 = ON, then start CALL command, jump to P2 and run subroutine. When run
SRET command, it will jump back to address 24 and keep running.
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-6
X0
X1CALL P2
Y1
20P***
24
FEND
SRET
P2 Y0
Y0Subroutine P2subroutine
subroutine return
call subroutine P***
ProgramExample
2
When X10 is the rising-edge triggered CALL P10 command that goes from Off to On,
jump to P10 and run subroutine.
When X11 is On, execute CALL P11, jump to P11 and run subroutine.
When X12 is On, execute CALL P12, jump to P12 and run subroutine.
When X13 is On, execute CALL P13, jump to P13 and run subroutine.
When X14 is On, execute CALL P14, jump to P14 and run subroutine. When run SRET
command, it will jump back to the last P*** subroutine and keep running.
Run SRET command in the P10 subroutine and return to the main program.
X0
X10
INC D0
Y0
CALL P10X0
INC D1
Y1
FEND
INC D10X2
P10
Y4
X2
X11CALL P11
INC D11
Y5
SRET
INC D20X2
P11
Y6X12
CALL P12X2
INC D21
Y7
SRET
X2
X13
X2
X2
X2
X14
X2
P13
P14
P12 INC D30
Y10
CALL P13
INC D31
Y11
SRET
INC D40
Y12
CALL P14
INC D41
Y13
SRET
INC D50
Y14
SRET
END
MainProgram Main
Program
subroutine
subroutine
subroutine
subroutine
subroutine
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-7
API Applicable modelsES EP EH 03
IRET
Interrupt Return
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F Note: No operand
The command driven by contact is not necessary.
16-bit command (1 STEPS)
IRET Continuous execution - -
32-bit command
- - - - Flag: None
CommandExplanation
IRET denotes the interrupt of subroutine program.
Terminate the processing of interrupt program and return to the main program by IRET
command. Execute the original program to produce the next interrupt command. API Applicable models
ES EP EH 04 EI
Enable Interrupts
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
Note: No operand The command driven by contact is not necessary. The pulse width of interrupt signal should be higher than 200us. Please refer to the footnote of DI command to see the range of numbers of each model.
16-bit command (1 STEPS)
EI Continuous execution - -
32-bit command - - - -
Flag: M1050~M1059, M1280~M1294 (Please refer to the footnote of DI command)
API Applicable models
ES EP EH05 DI
Disable Interrupts
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
Note: No operand The command driven by contact is not necessary.
16-bit command (1 STEPS)
DI Continuous execution - -
32-bit command - - - - Flag: None
CommandExplanation
EI command enables interrupt subroutine to be processed in the program, e.g. External
interrupt, Time interrupt, High-speed counter interrupt.
In the program, using interrupt subroutine between EI and DI command is allowed.
However, it is not allowed to use DI command if there is no disable interrupt period
during the program.
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-8
Even in the interrupt allowed range when interrupting special the auxiliary relay M1050
to M1059 in ES / EP series models and M1280 to M1294 in EH series models, the
corresponding interrupting request will not be activated.
Interrupting cursor ( I ) must be used after the FEND command.
Other interrupts are not allowed to occur during executing the interrupt routine
program.
When most interrupts occur, priority is given to the interrupt occuring first. If the
interrupts occur simultaneously, the interrupt with the lower pointer number will be
given the higher priority.
Any interrupt request occuring between DI and EI commands cannot be executed
immediately. The request will be memorized and execute the subroutine in the enabling
range of the interrupt.
When using the interrupt pointer, please do not repeatly use the high-speed counter
driven by the same X input contact.
When the interrupt routine program is running and the I/O is immediately activated, the
state of I/O can be refreshed by writing REF command in the program.
ProgramExample
During the PLC operation, the program scans the commands between EI and DI, if X1
or X2 are ON, the subroutine A or B will be interruptted. When IRET is reached, the
main program will resume.
I 101
I 201
Y1
EI
FEND
X0
DI
IRET
IRET
Y0
Y0
EIDisabled interrupt
Enabled interrupt
Enabled interrupt
Interrupt subroutine A
Interrupt subroutine B
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-9
Footnote
Interrupt pointer I numbers of ES series models:
1. External interrupts: (I001, X0), (I101, X1), (I201, X2), (I301, X3) 4 points.
2. Time interrupts: I6□□, 1 point (□□=10~99, time base=1ms) (support for
V5.7)
3. Communication interrupt for specific characters received (I150) (support for
V5.7)
Interrupt pointer I numbers of EP series models:
1. External interrupts: (I001, X0), (I101, X1), (I201, X2), (I301, X3), (I401, X4),
(I501, X5) 6 points.
2. Time interrupts: I6□□, I7□□ 2 points. (□□=1~99ms, time base=1ms)
3. High-speed counter interrupts: I010, I020, I030, I040 4 points. (used with API 53
DHSCS command and interrupt signal occurs)
4. Communication interrupt for specific characters received (I150)
5. The order of interrupt point I: high-speed counter interrupt, external interrupt,
time interrupt and communication interrupt for specific characters received.
Interrupt pointer I Number of EH series models:
1. External interrupts: (I00□, X0), (I10□, X1), (I20□, X2), (I30□, X3), (I40□, X4),
(I50□, X5) 6 points. (□=0 indicates the interrupt of falling-edge, □=1 indicates
the interrupt of rising-edge)
2. Time interrupts: I6□□, I7□□, 2 points. (□□=1~99ms, time base=1ms) I8□□
1 point. (□□=1~99ms, time base=0.1ms)
3. High-speed counter interrupts: I010, I020, I030, I040 4 points. (used with API 53
DHSCS command and interrupt signal occurs)
4. The interrupt, start and end of pulse output interrupt should be used with API 57
PLSY command. I130, I140 are triggered at the beginning of the pulse output by
the start-arranged flag of pulse output command M1342, M1343. Then, M1340,
M1341 will trigger I110, I120 at the end of pulse output command to interrupt the
executing program and jump to the assigned interrupt subroutine to execute .
5. Communication interrupt for specific characters received (I150)
6. The order of the interrupt pointer I : External interrupts, time interrupts, high-speed
counter interrupts, and pulse output interrupts.
Interrupt Inhibit Flag of ES series models:
Flag Function M1050 External interrupt, I 001 masked M1051 External interrupt, I 101 masked M1052 External interrupt, I 201 masked M1053 External interrupt, I 301 masked
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-10
Interrupt Inhibit Flag of EP series models:
Flag Function M1050 External interrupt, I 001 masked M1051 External interrupt, I 101 masked M1052 External interrupt, I 201 masked M1053 External interrupt, I 301 masked M1054 External interrupt, I 401 masked M1055 External interrupt, I 501 masked M1056 Time interrupt, I6□□ masked M1057 Time interrupt, I7□□ masked M1059 High-speed counter interrupt, I010~I040 masked
Interrupt Inhibit Flag of EH series models:
Flag Function
M1280 External interrupt, I00□masked M1281 External interrupt, I10□masked M1282 External interrupt, I20□masked M1283 External interrupt, I30□masked M1284 External interrupt, I40□masked M1285 External interrupt, I50□masked M1286 Time interrupt, I60□masked M1287 Time interrupt, I70□masked M1288 Time interrupt, I80□masked M1289 High-speed counter interrupt, I010 masked M1290 High-speed counter interrupt, I020 masked M1291 High-speed counter interrupt, I030 masked M1292 High-speed counter interrupt, I040 masked M1293 High-speed counter interrupt, I050 masked M1294 High-speed counter interrupt, I060 masked M1295 Pulse output interrupt insert I110 masked M1296 Pulse output interrupt insert I120 masked M1297 Pulse output interrupt insert I130 masked M1298 Pulse output interrupt insert I140 masked M1299 Pulse output interrupt insert I150 masked M1340 After CH0 pulse is transmitted, I110 interrupt occur M1341 After CH1 pulse is transmitted, I120 interrupt occur M1342 CH0 pulse is transmitted; meanwhile, I130 interrupt occur simultaneouslyM1343 CH1 pulse is transmitted; meanwhile, I140 interrupt occur simultaneously
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-11
API Applicable modelsES EP EH 06
FEND
First End
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F Note: No operand
The command driven by contact is not necessary.
16-bit command (1 STEPS)
FEND Continuous execution - -
32-bit command - - - - Flag: None
CommandExplanation
This command denotes the end of the main routine program. It has the same function
as END command during PLC operation.
CALL must follow right after FEND command and add SRET command at the end of
the subroutine. Interrupt commands also have to follow after FEND command and add
IRET command at the end of the service program.
If using several FEND commands, please place the subroutine and interrupt service
programs between the last FEND and END command.
After CALL command is executed, the program error will occur when execute the FEND
command before SRET command is executed.
After FOR command is executed, the program error will occur when execute the FEND
command before NEXT command is executed.
CJ CommandProgramFlow
X1CALL P63
P0
P63
CJ P0
I301
X0
0The program flowwhen X0=off, X1=off main
program
mainprogram
mainprogram
interrupt subroutine
command CALL subroutine
The program flow when X0=Onprogram jumps to P0
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-12
CALL CommandProgramFlow
X1CALL P63
P0
P63
CJ P0
I301
X0
0The program flowwhen X0=off, X1=off main
program
mainprogram
mainprogram
interrupt subroutine
command CALL subroutine
The program flow when X0=Off, X1=On.
API Applicable models
ES EP EH07 WDT
P Watchdog Timer Refresh
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
Note: No operand ES series models do not support the pulse execution command (WDTP).
16-bit command (1 STEPS)
WDT Continuous execution WDTP Pulse
execution
32-bit command - - - -
Flag: None
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-13
CommandExplanation
WDT (Watch Dog Timer) is used to monitor the PLC operation in the DVP series PLC
system.
The WDT command can be used to reset the Watch Dog Timer. If the PLC scanning
time (from step 0 to END or FEND command) is more than 200ms, the ERROR LED will
flash. The user will have to turn the PLC off and then back ON to clear the fault. PLC will
determine the status of RUN/STOP according to RUN/STOP switch. If there is no
RUN/STOP switch, PLC will return to STOP automatically.
When to use WDT:
When error occur in PLC system.
When the executing time of the program is too long to cause the scanning time to
exceed the content value of D1000. It can be modified by using the following two
methods. Use WDT command
T1 t2
STEP0 END(FEND)WDT
Use the set value of D1000 (default is 200ms) to change the watchdog time.
ProgramExample
If the program scanning time is over 300ms, users can divide the program into 2 parts.
Insert the Watchdog Timer in between, so both programs’ scanning time will be less
than 200ms.
X0
END
END
WDT
300ms program
150ms program
150ms program
Dividing the program to two partsso that both parts?scan time areless than 200ms.
Watchdog timer reset
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-14
API Applicable modelsES EP EH08
FOR Start of FOR-NEXT Loop
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S Note: The contact execution command is not necessary
Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (3 STEPS)
FOR Continuous execution - -
32-bit command
- - - - Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: The number of repeats for the nested loop
API Applicable models
ES EP EH09 NEXT
End of FOR-NEXT loop
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
Note: No operand The command driven by contact is not necessary.
16-bit command (1 STEPS)
NEXT Continuous execution - -
32-bit command
- - - - Flag: None
CommandExplanation
FOR and NEXT commands are used when “n” nested loops are needed.
“N” may be within the range of K1 to K32767. If the range N≦K1, N will always be K1.
When it is not desired to execute the FOR to NEXT commands, use the CJ command.
Error will occur in the following conditions: NEXT command is before FOR command. With FOR command, without NEXT command. There is a NEXT command after the FEND or END command. The numbers of FOR to NEXT commands are different.
The FOR to NEXT loop can be nested for five levels but please notice that if there are
too many loops, the PLC scanning time will increase and it may cause the watchdog
timer to be activated and result in error. User can use WDT command to modify.
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-15
ProgramExample
1
After loop A operate 3 times, the program after the NEXT command will resume. For
every completed cycle of loop A, loop B will completely executed for 4 times, therefore,
the total number of times that loop B operate will be 3 ×4=12 times.
FOR K3
FOR K4
NEXT
NEXT
AB
ProgramExample
2
Program which executes the FOR to NEXT commands when X7 is off. It does not
execute the FOR to NEXT commands when X7 is on and CJ command jump to P6.
X7
M0
M0
P6
MOV
FOR
MOV D0
D0
K3
K0
Y10
INC
MEXTX10
D0
D1
CJ P6
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-16
ProgramExample
3
When the FOR to NEXT command are not executed, CJ command can be used to
jump. When the most internal loop of FOR to NEXT, X1 will be ON and CJ command
will jump to P0 and not be executed.
X0TMR T0 K10
P0
FOR K4X100X0
INC D0
K2X0
D1
K3X0
D2
K4X0
WDT
D3X1
CJ P0
FOR K5X0X0
INC D4
NEXT
NEXT
NEXT
NEXT
NEXT
END
FOR
INC
FOR
INC
FOR
INC
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-17
API Applicable modelsES EP EH10 D
CMP P Compare
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1 S2 D Note: If operand S1, S2 use with device F, it is only available in 16-bit
command. Operand D occupies 3 continuous devices. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse execution command (CMPP, DCMPP).
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
CMP Continuous execution CMPP Pulse
execution
32-bit command (13 STEPS)
DCMP Continuous execution DCMPP Pulse
execution Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: First comparison value : Second comparison value : Comparison result.
The contents of the comparison source and are compared and denotes the compare result.
Two comparison values are compared algebraically and this function compares the two
values that are considered binary values. If b15=1 in 16-bit command or b31=1 in 32-bit
command, the comparison will regard the value as the negative of the binary value.
If is set to Y0, then Y0, Y1, Y2 will work as the program example as below. When X10=On, CMP command is driven and one of Y0, Y1, Y2 is On. When X10=Off,
CMP command is not driven and Y0, Y1, Y2 remain in the previous status.
The comparison result of ≧, ≦, ≠ commands can be got by the parallel connection of
Y0~Y2.
X10
Y0
Y1
Y2
CMP K10 D10 Y0
If K10>D10, Y0 = On
If K10=D10, Y1 = On
If K10<D10, Y2= On
Please use RST or ZRST command to reset the comparison result.
ProgramExample
X10RST M0
RST
RST
M1
M2
X10ZRST M0 M2
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-18
API Applicable modelsES EP EH11 D
ZCP P Zone Compare
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1 S2 S D Note: If operand S1, S2, S use with device F, it is only available in
16-bit command. Operand S1 should be less than Operand S2. Operand D occupies 3 continuous devices. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse execution command (ZCPP, DZCPP).
16-bit command (9 STEPS)
ZCP Continuous execution ZCPP Pulse
execution
32-bit command (17 STEPS)
DZCP Continuous execution DZCPP Pulse
execution Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: First comparison value (Minimum) : Second comparison value
(Maximum) : Comparison value : Comparison result.
is compared with its limits and and denotes the compare result.
When > , set as the limit to compare.
Two comparison values are compared algebraically and this function compares the two
values that are considered binary values. If b15=1 in 16-bit command or b31=1 in 32-bit
command, the comparison will regard the value as the negative of the binary value.
ProgramExample
If is set to M0, then M0, M1, M2 will work as the program example as below. When X0=On, ZCP command is driven and one of M0, M1, M2 is On. When X0=Off,
ZCP command is not driven and M0, M1, M2 remain in the previous status. X0
M0
M1
M2
ZCP
If C10 < K10, M0 = On
If K10 < C10 < K100, M1 = On
If C10 > K100, M2 = On
X0K10 C10 M0K100
= =
Please use RST or ZRST command to reset the comparison result.
X0
RST M0
RST
RST
M1
M2
X0ZRST M0 M2
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-19
API Applicable modelsES EP EH12 D
MOV P Data Move
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S D Note: If operand S, D use with device F, it is only available in 16-bit
command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse execution command (MOVP, DMOVP)
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
MOV Continuous execution MOVP Pulse
execution
32-bit command (9 STEPS)
DMOV Continuous execution DMOVP Pulse
execution Flag: None
CommandExplanation
S : Data source : Data move destination When the MOV command is driven, the data of is moved to without any
change. If the MOV command is not driven, the content of remain unchanged. If the calculation result is a 32-bit output, (i.e. the application MUL) and the data of a
32-bit high-speed counter, users will have to use DMOV command.
ProgramExample
MOV command is used in 16-bit command to move data. When X0=Off, the content of D10 remain unchanged. If X0=On, the data of K10 is
moved to D10 data register. When X1=Off, the content of D10 remain unchanged. If X1=On, the data of T0 is
moved to D10 data register. DMOV command is used in 32-bit command to move data
When X2=Off, the content of (D31, D30) and (D41, D40) remain unchanged. If X2=On, the data of (D21, D20) is moved to (D31, D30) data register. Meanwhile, the data of C235 is moved to (D41, D40) data register.
X0
X1
X2
MOV K10 D0
MOV T0 D10
DMOV D20 D30
DMOV C235 D40
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-20
API Applicable modelsES EP EH 13
SMOV P Shift Move
-
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S m1 m2 D n Note: The usage range of operand m1: m1=1~ 4
The usage range of operand m2: m2=1~ m1 The usage range of operand n: n=m2 ~ 4 Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (11 STEPS)
SMOV Continuous execution SMOVP Pulse
execution
32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1168 (mode setting operation
of SMOV) When M1168=On, BIN mode. When M1168=Off, BCD mode.
CommandExplanation
: Data movementsource : Source position of the first digit to be moved
: Number of source digits to be moved : Data destination of movement
: Destination position for the first digit This command can arrange or combine the data.
ProgramExample
1
When M1168=Off, X0=On, assign the content of the two digits from the 4th digit
(thousands’ place digital) of D10 (decimal number) and move the assigned data to the
two digits from the 2nd digit (hundreds' place digits) of D20 (decimal number). Then, the
content of 103 and 100 of D20 remain unchaged after SMOV command is executed.
When BCD number is higher than 9,999 or be negative (outside range of 0 to 9,999), an
operation error will occur in PLC. Then, the command will not be executed and M1067,
M1068 will be On, D1067 record error code “0E18” (hexidecimal number).
SMOV
M1168
D10 K2 D20 K3K4
103 102 101 100
103 102 101 100
No variation No variation
D10(BIN 16bit)
D10(BCD 4 digits)
D20(BIN 16bit)
D20(BCD 4 digits)
Shift move
Auto conversion
Auto conversion
M1001
X0
If D10=H1234,D20=H5678 before executing, D10 won’t change and D20=H5128 after finishing execution.
ProgramExample
2
When M1168=On, if use SMOV command, the D10 and D20 do not move data in BCD
format. However the data is moved as a 4 digit BIN number.
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-21
SMOV
M1168
D10 K2 D20 K3K4
No variation No variation
D10(BIN 16bit)
D20(BIN 16bit)
Shift move
M1000
X0
Digit 4 Digit 3 Digit 2 Digit 1
Digit 4 Digit 3 Digit 2 Digit 1
ProgramExample
3
Digit switch connected to the interrupted number inputs can use SMOV command to
combine.
Move the right second digit switch to the right second digit of D2 and move the left first
digit switch to the right first digit of D1.
Use SMOV command to move the first digit to the third digit of D2 and combine these
two digit switches into one group. 101 100102
6 4 2
PLC
X13~X10 X27~X20
8 88
M1000BIN K2X20 D2
D1
SMOV D1 K1 D2 K3K1
K1X10BIN
(X20~X27)BCD
(X10~X13)BCD
2 digits D2(BIN)
1 digit D1(BIN)
M1001M1168
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-22
API Applicable modelsES EP EH14 D
CML P Compliment
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S D Note: If operand S, D use with device F, it is only available in 16-bit
command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse executioncommand (CMLP, DCMLP)
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
CML Continuous execution CMLVP Pulse
execution
32-bit command (9 STEPS)
DCML Continuous execution DCMLP Pulse
execution Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Transfer data source : Transfer destination device
Counter phase the contents of (0→1, 1→0) and have the contents transferred to
. If the content is Constant K, this Constant K will be converted to the BIN value automatically.
ProgramExample
1
This command can be used during the counter-phase output.
When X10=ON, contents of D1, b0~b3, will be counter transferred to K1Y0. X10
CML K1Y0D1
b 0b 1b 2b 3b 15
D1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0Symbol bit (0=positive, 1=negative)
0 1 0 1
No variation Transfer thecounter-phase data
ProgramExample
2
The left loop shown below can be displayed as the right program example by using CML
command. X000
M0X001
M1X002
M2X003
M3
X000M0
X001M1
X002M2
X003M3
M1000CML K1M0K1X0
Normal on contact
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-23
API Applicable models
ES EP EH15 BMOV
P Block Move
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS D n Note: The usage range of operand n=1~ 512
Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse execution command (BMOVP).
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
BMOV Continuous execution BMOVP Pulse
execution
32-bit command - - - - Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Head source device : Head destination device : Block of multiple data
This command is used to move an assigned block of multiple data to a new destination.
Move the contents of the register, with this register obtained from counting
the registers within the -assigned numbers, to the register within the
-assigned number. If the -assigned points exceed the usage range of this device, only those that are within the enabled range will be moved.
ProgramExample
1
When X10=On, move the contents of the four registers D0~D3 to their corresponding
registers D20~D23. X10
D20 K4 D0D1D2D3
D20D21D22D23
n=4
ProgramExample
2
If move the specified bit device, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, the digit numbers of and
should be the same and this also means the number of n should be the same. ES series models do not support KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS devices.
M1000D0 D20 K4 M0
M1M2M3
M4M5M6M7
M8M9M10
n=3
M11
Y10Y11Y12Y13
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-24
ProgramExample
3
The BMOV command has built the automatic movement as the program example below
to prevent overwriting errors from occurring when the specified numbers of and
coincide.
When > , the BMOV command is processed in the order as 1→2→3
When < , the BMOV command is processed in the order as 3→2→1.
But, be sure to avoid the specified number being continuous when < in ES series models. Otherwise, the execution result will be the same value. For
example, when the BMOV command is processed in the order as 3→2→1, the
content value of D11 to D13 will all be the content value of D10.
X10BMOV D20 D19 K3 D19
D20D21
D11
D13
X11BMOV D10 D11 K3
D20D21D22
D10D11D12
1
2
3
1
2
3
API Applicable models
ES EP EH16 D FMOV
P Fill Move
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS D n Note: If operand S, D use with device F, it is only available in 16-bit
command. The usage range of operand n: n=1~ 512(16-bit command), n=1~ 256 (32-bit command) Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse execution command (FMOVP, DFMOVP)
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
FMOV Continuous execution FMOVP Pulse
execution 32-bit command (13 STEPS)
DFMOV Continuous execution DFMOVP Pulse
execution Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Source device : Head destination device : A quantity of multiple devices
The data stored in the source device is moved to every device within the range of
destination device. Move the contents of to the register, with this
register obtained from counting the registers within the -assigned numbers. If the
-assigned devices exceed the usage range, only those that are within the enabled range will be moved.
ES series models do not support KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS devices.
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-25
ProgramExample
When X0=ON, move Constant K10 to the continuous five registers (D10~D14) starting
from D10. X10
D10 K5FMOV K10
K10
K10
K10
K10
K10
K10 D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
n=5
API ☺ Applicable modelsES EP EH 17 D
XCH P Data Exchange
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
D1 D2 Note: If operand D1, D2 use with device F, it is only available in 16-bit
command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse execution command (XCHP, DXCHP).
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
XCH Continuous execution XCHP Pulse
execution
32-bit command (9 STEPS)
DXCH Continuous execution DXCHP Pulse
execution Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: First exchange data : Second exchange data
Exchange the contents of and with each other. This command is usually pulse execution (XCHP).
ProgramExample
1
When X0=Off→On, the contents of D20 and D40 exchange with each other.
X0D40XCHP D20
Beforeexecution
Afterexecution
120
12040
40D20
D40
D20
D40
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-26
ProgramExample
2
When X0=Off→On, the contents of D20 and D40 exchange with each other.
Beforeexecution
Afterexecution
4020
D100
D101
D100
D101
X0D200D100
2040
D200
D201
D200
D201
Footnote
In 16-bit command, when the devices specified by and are the same and M1303=On, the upper and lower 8-bit contents of that specified devices will exchange.
In 32-bit command, when the devices specified by and are the same and M1303=On, the upper and lower 8-bit contents of that 32-bit devices will exchange.
When X0=On and M1303=On, the upper and lower 8-bit contents of D100, D0101 will
exchange.
X0M1303
9
20
8
40
D100L
D100H
8
40
9
20
D101L
D101H
D100L
D100H
D101L
D101H
DXCHP D100 D100
Beforeexecution
Afterexecution
API Applicable modelsES EP EH18 D
BCD P Converts BIN Data into BCD
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S D Note: If operand S, D use with device F, it is only available in 16-bit
command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse execution command (BCDP, DBCDP)
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
BCD Continuous execution BCDP Pulse
execution
32-bit command (9 STEPS)
DBCD Continuous execution DBCDP Pulse
execution Flag: M1067 (operation error)
M1068 (operation error) D1067 (error code)
CommandExplanation
Converts BIN data (0 to 9999) of the source device into BCD and transfers the
result to the device . If the BCD conversion result is outside the range of 0 to 9999, an operation error occurs,
the error flag M1067, M1068 will be On and D1067 record error code “0E18”
(hexadecimal number).
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-27
If the DBCD conversion result is outside the range of 0 to 99,999,999, an operation error
occurs, the error flag M1067, M1068 will be On and D1067 record error code “0E18”
(hexadecimal number).
The operation value of four fundamental operations (+, −, ×, ÷), INC and DEC command
in PLC are executed in BIN format. This command can be used to output BIN format
data in BCD format value directly to a seven segment display.
ProgramExample
When X0=ON, the binary data D10 is converted into BCD number, and stored at K4Y0
(Y0~Y3).
X0BCD D10 K1Y0
When D10=001E (Hex)=0030 (decimal number), the execution result will be
Y0~Y3=0000(BIN).
API Applicable models
ES EP EH19 D BIN
P Converts BCD Data into BIN
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS D Note: If operand S, D use with device F, it is only available in 16-bit
command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (BINP, DBINP)
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
BIN Continuous execution BINP Pulse
execution
32-bit command (9 STEPS)
DBIN Continuous execution DBINP Pulse
execution Flag: M1067 (operation error)
M1068 (operation error) D1067 (error code)
CommandExplanation
: Data source : Converted result
Converts BCD data (0 to 9,999) of the source device into BIN and transfers the
result to the device .
The enabled range of source device : BCD (0 to 9,999), DBCD (0 to 99,999,999)
If the content of source device is not BCD value (each digit of which is indicated as HEX being outside the range of 0 to 9), an operation error will occur, the
error flag M1067, M1068 will be On and D1067 records error code “0E18”.
Constant K and H is automatically converted into the BIN data. There is no necessity for
constant to use this command.
ProgramExample
When X0=ON, the BCD data K1X0 is converted to BIN data, and stored the result at
D10. X0
BIN D10K1X0
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-28
Footnote
The application explanation of BCD and BIN command:
The BIN command is used to covert the source data into BIN data and store in the
PLC when PLC read a BCD format digit switch from external equipment.
The BCD command is used to convert the stored data into BCD data and transmit it
to the 7-segment display when PLC display the stored data on a BCD format
7-segment display from external equipment.
When X0=On, convert K4X0(BCD data) into BIN data and transmit it to D100. Then,
convert BIN data of D100 into BCD data and transmit it to K4Y20. X0
BIN D100K4X0
BCD D100 K4Y20
101 100102
6 4 2
X17 X0
8 8 8
103
6
8
4 digit BCD format switch
4 digit BCD format7-segment display
Y37 Y20
4 digit BCD value
use the BIN command tostore BIN value into D100
use the BCD command toconvert the BIN value in D100
convert to be 4 digit BCD value
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-29
API Applicable modelsES EP EH20 D
ADD P Perform the Addition of BIN Data
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1 S2 D Note: If operand S1, S2, D use with device F, it is only available in
16-bit command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse execution command (ADDP, DADDP).
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
ADD Continuous execution ADDP Pulse
execution
32-bit command (13 STEPS)
DADD Continuous execution DADDP Pulse
execution Flag: M1020 (Zero flag)
M1021 (Borrow flag) M1022 (Carry flag)
Refer to following for detail.
CommandExplanation
: Augend : Addend : Addition result
+ = . Performs the addition on BIN data and the BIN data
, and stores the addition result into the device . The most significant bit are the symbolic bit 0 and 1. 0 indicates positive and 1 indicates
negative. All calculation are algebraically processed, i.e. 3 + (-9) = -6.
Flag changes of binary addition
16-bit command:
If the operation result is “0”, then the Zero flag, M1020 is set to ON.
If the operation result exceeds -32,768, the borrow flag, M1021 is set to ON.
If the operation result exceeds 32,767, the carry flag, M1022 is set to ON.
32-bit command:
1. If the operation result is “0”, then the Zero flag, M1020 is set to ON.
2. If the operation result exceeds -2,147,483,648, the borrow flag, M1021 is set to ON.
3. If the operation result exceeds 2,147,483,647, the carry flag, M1022 is set to ON.
ProgramExample
1
16-bit command: When X0 is ON, the data contained within the augend D0 and addend D10 is combined and the total is stored in the result device D20.
X0ADD D0 D10 D20
(D0) + (D10) = (D20)
ProgramExample
2
32-bit command:
When X0 is ON, the data contained within the augend (D31, D30) and addend (D41, D40) is combined and the total is stored in the result device (D51, D50). (D30, D40, D50 is the lower 16-bit data, and D31, D41, D51 is the higher 16-bit data)
X10DADD D30 D40 D50
(D31, D30) + (D41, D40) = (D51, D50)
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-30
Footnote
Flag operations:
-2 -1 0 -32,768B B B B B-1 0 1 32,767 0 1 2B B B
-2 -1 0 -2,147,483,648B B B B B-1 0 1 2,147,483,647 0 1 2B B B
16-bit command: Zero flag Zero flag Zero flag
Borrow flag the most significant bit becomes ? ?(negative)
32-bit command: Zero flag Zero flag Zero flag
the most significant bit becomes ? ?(positive) Carry flag
Borrow flag the most significant bit becomes ? ?(negative)
the most significant bit becomes ? ?(positive) Carry flag
API Applicable models
ES EP EH21 D SUB
P Perform the Subtraction of BIN Data
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1 S2 D Note: If operand S1, S2, D use with device F, it is only available in
16-bit command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse execution command (SUBP, DSUBP).
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
SUB Continuous execution SUBP Pulse
execution
32-bit command (13 STEPS)
DSUB Continuous execution DSUBP Pulse
execution Flag: M1020 (Zero flag)
M1021 (Borrow flag) M1022 (Carry flag)
Please refer to the command explanation of ADD command
CommandExplanation
: Minuend : Subtrahend : Subtraction result
− = . Performs the subtraction of BIN data and the BIN data
, and stores the subtraction result into the device . The most significant bit are the symbolic bit 0 and 1. 0 indicates positive and 1 indicates
negative. All calculation are algebraically processed.
Flag changes of binary subtraction
16-bit command: If the operation result is “0”, then the Zero flag, M1020 is set to ON. If the operation result exceeds –32,768, the borrow flag, M1021 is set to ON. If the operation result exceeds 32,767, the carry flag, M1022 is set to ON.
32-bit command: . If the operation result is “0”, then the Zero flag, M1020 is set to ON. . If the operation result exceeds –2,147,483,648, the borrow flag, M1021 is set to ON. . If the operation result exceeds 2,147,483,647, the carry flag, M1022 is set to ON.
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-31
The flag operations of SUB command please refer to the flag operations of ADD
command on the previous page.
ProgramExample
1
16-bit command:
When X0 is ON, the data contained within the subtrahend D10 is subtracted from the data
contained within the minuend D0 and the result of this calculation is stored in the result
device D20. X0
SUB D0 D10 D20
(D0) − (D10) = (D20)
ProgramExample
2
32-bit command:
When X0 is ON, the data contained within the subtrahend (D41, D40) is subtracted from
the data contained within the minuend (D31, D30) and the result of this calculation is
stored in the result device (D51, D50). (D30, D40, D50 is the lower 16-bit data, and D31,
D41, D51 is the higher 16-bit data) X10
DSUB D30 D40 D50
(D31, D30) − (D41, D40) = (D51, D50) API Applicable models
ES EP EH22 D MUL
P Perform the Multiplication of BIN Data
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1 S2 D Note: If operand S1, S2 use with device F, it is only available in
16-bit command. If operand D use with device E, it is only available in 16-bit command. In 16-bit command, operand D occupies 2 continuous devices. In 32-bit command, operand D occupies 4 continuous devices. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse execution Command (MULP, DMULP).
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
MUL Continuous execution MULP Pulse
execution
32-bit command (13 STEPS)
DMUL Continuous execution DMULP Pulse
execution Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Multiplicand : Multiplier : Multiplication result
× = . Performs the Multiplication of BIN data and the BIN data
, and stores the multiplication result into the device . Please pay careful
attention to the polarity display of the operation result of , and in the 16-bit and 32-bit command.
16-bit command:
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-32
b15................ b00
X =b15................ b00 b31............ b16 b15.............b00
+1
b15 is a symbol bit b15 is a symbol bit b31 is a symbol bit D+1) (b15 of
b15=0,S is a positive value1
b15=1,S is a negative value1
b15=0,S is a positive value2
b15=1,S is a negative value2
b31=0,S is a positive value2
b31=1,S is a negative value2
When is bit device, it can specify K1~K4 and produce a 16-bit result. Then, the flag M1067, M1068 will be On and D1067 record error code “0E19”. 32-bit command:
b31.. b16
X =
+1
b31 is a symbol bit b31 is a symbol bit b63 is a symbol bit ) (b15 of D+1
b31=0,S (S +1) are positive value1 1
b31=1,S (S +1) are negative value1 1
b31=0,S (S +1) are positive value2 2
b31=1,S (S +1)2 2 are negative value
b63=0, D1(D1+1) (D1+2) (D1+3) are positive valueb63=1, D1(D1+1) (D1+2) (D1+3) are negative value
b15.. b00 b31.. b16 b15.. b00
+1
b63. b48 b47. b32 b31. b16 b15. b00
+3 +2 +1
When is bit device, it can specify K1~K8 and produce a 32-bit result. The
destination device is used to store low 32-bit data only.
ProgramExample
16-bit command: A 16-bit data source, D10 is multiplied by another 16-bit data source, D0 and the total is a 32-bit result, D20. The upper 16-bit data is stored in D21 and the lower one is stored in D20. The polarity of the result is indicated by the OFF/ON of the most significant bit. OFF indicates the value of positive 0 and ON indicates the value of negative 1.
X0MUL D0 D10 D20
MUL D0 D10 K8M0
(D0) × (D10) = (D21, D20) 16-bit × 16-bit = 32-bit
API Applicable models
ES EP EH23 D DIV
P Perform the Division of BIN Data
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS1 S2 D Note: If operand S1, S2 use with device F, it is only available in
16-bit command. If operand D use with device E, it is only available in 16-bit command. In 16-bit command, operand D occupies 2 continuous devices. In 32-bit command, operand D occupies 4 continuous devices. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse execution Command (ADDP, DADDP).
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
DIV Continuous execution DIVP Pulse
execution
32-bit command (13 STEPS)
DDIV Continuous execution DDIVP Pulse
execution Flag: None
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-33
CommandExplanation
: Dividend : Divisor : Quotient and Remainder
÷ = . Performs the division of BIN data and the BIN data
, and stores the result into the device . Please pay careful attention to the
polarity display of the operation result of , and in the 16-bit and 32-bit command.
This command is not executed when the divisor is “0”. Then, the flag M1067, M1068 will
be On and D1067 record error code “0E19”.
16-bit command:
+1
=/
Quotient Remainder
When D is bit device, it can specify K1~K4 to produce a 16-bit result and occupies 2 continuous groups. In regards to the operation result, the quotient and remainder are stored.
32-bit command:
+1
/ =
+1 +1 +3 +2
Quotient Remainder
When D is bit device, it can specify K1~K8 and produce a 32-bit result. In regards to the operation result, only the quotient is stored.
ProgramExample
When X0 is ON, the primary source D0 (divisor) is divided by the second source D10
(dividend). The quotient is specified to be stored in D20 and the remainder is specified to
be stored in D21. The polarity of the result is indicated by the OFF/ON of the most
significant bit. OFF indicates the value of positive and ON indicates the value of
negative.
X0DIV D0 D10 D20
D0 D10 K4Y0DIV
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-34
API ☺ Applicable modelsES EP EH24 D
INC P Perform the Addition of 1
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
D
Note: If operand D use with device F, it is only available 16-bit command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse execution (INCP, DINCP).
16-bit command (3 STEPS)
INC Continuous execution INCP Pulse
execution
32-bit command (5 STEPS)
DINC Continuous execution DINCP Pulse
execution Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Destination device If the command is not the pulse execution command, “1” is added to the value of
destination device on every execution of the command. This command is usually pulse execution (INCP, DINCP).
In 16-bit command, when +32,767 is reached, “1” is added and it will write a value
of –32,768 to the destination device. In 32-bit command, when +2,147,483,647 is
reached, “1” is added and it will write a value of -2,147,483,648 to the destination device.
Flag M1020~M1022 won’t be influenced by the operation result of this command.
ProgramExample
When X0 is ON, the content of D0 will perform the addition of 1. X0
INCP D0
API ☺ Applicable modelsES EP EH25 D
DEC P Perform the Subtraction of 1
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
D
Note: If operand D use with device F, it is only available in 16-bit command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse the execution (DECP, DDECP).
16-bit command (3 STEPS)
DEC Continuous execution DECP Pulse
execution
32-bit command (5 STEPS)
DDEC Continuous execution DDECP Pulse
execution Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Destination device If the command is not the pulse execution command, “1” is subtracted to the value of
destination device on every execution of the command. This command is usually pulse execution (INCP, DINCP).
In 16-bit command, when –32,768 is reached, “1” is subtracted and it will write a value of
+32,767 to the destination device. In 32-bit command, when -2,147,483,648 is reached,
“1” is subtracted and it will write a value of +2,147,483,647 to the destination device.
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-35
Flag M1020~M1022 won’t be influenced by the operation result of this command.
ProgramExample
When X0 is ON, the content of D0 will perform the subtraction of 1. X0
DECP D0
API W Applicable models
ES EP EH26 D AND
P Perform the Logical Product (AND) Operation
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1 S2 D Note: If operand S1, S2, D use with device F, it is only available in
16-bit command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse execution(WANDP, DANDP)
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
WAND Continuous execution WANDP Pulse
execution
32-bit command (13 STEPS)
DAND Continuous execution DANDP Pulse
execution Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: First data source device : Second data source device
: Operation result
Performs the logical product of the data source device and , and stores the
operation result into the device . General operation rule: If one of the bit contained within the data source devices is “0”,
then the operation result is also “0”.
ProgramExample
1
When X0 is ON, the 16-bit data source device D0 and D2 are analyzed and the
operation result of the logical WAND command is stored in the device D4.
WAND D0 D2 D4
X0
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01 1 1
WAND
b15 b00
Beforeexecution
Afterexecution
D0
D2
D4
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-36
ProgramExample
2
When X1 is ON, the 32-bit data source device (D11, D10) and (D21, D20) are analyzed
and the operation result of the logical DAND command is stored in the device (D41,
D40). X1
DAND D10 D20 D40
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01 1 1
DAND
b31
Beforeexecution
Afterexecution
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01 1 1
b15 b0
D11 D10
D21 D20
D41 D40
API W Applicable modelsES EP EH27 D
OR P
Perform the Logical Sum (OR) Operation
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1 S2 D Note: If operand S1, S2, D use with device F, it is only available in
16-bit command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse execution (WORP, DORP)
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
WOR Continuous execution WORP Pulse
execution
32-bit command (13 STEPS)
DOR Continuous execution DORP Pulse
execution Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: First data source device : Second data source device
: Operation result
Performs the logical sum of the data source device and , and stores the
operation result into the device . General operation rule: If one of the bit contained within the data source devices is “1”,
then the operation result is also “1”.
ProgramExample
1
When X0 is ON, the 16-bit data source device D0 and D2 are analyzed and the
operation result of the logical WOR command is stored in the device D4.
WOR D0 D2 D4X0
WOR D0 D2 D4X0
0 0 1 11 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 01 1 1 1
0 0 0 01 1 1
WOR
b15 b000 0 0 0 0 01 1
0 1 1 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Beforeexecution
Afterexecution
D0
D2
D4
0 0 1 11 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 01 1 1 1
0 0 0 01 1 1
b15 b000 0 0 0 0 01 1
0 1 1 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 0 1 11 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 01 1 1 1
0 0 0 01 1 1
WOR
b15 b000 0 0 0 0 01 1
0 1 1 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Beforeexecution
Afterexecution
D0
D2
D4
0 0 1 11 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 01 1 1 1
0 0 0 01 1 1
b15 b000 0 0 0 0 01 1
0 1 1 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-37
ProgramExample
2
When X1 is ON, the 32-bit data source device (D11, D10) and (D21, D20) are analyzed
and the operation result of the logical DOR command is stored in the device (D41, D40).X1
DOR D10 D20 D40
0 0 1 11 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 01 1 1 1
0 0 0 01 1 1
b310 0 0 0 0 01 1
0 1 1 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Beforeexecution
Afterexecution
D11 D100 0 1 11 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 01 1 1 1
0 0 0 01 1 1
DOR
b0 0 0 0 0 01 1
0 1 1 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 0 1 11 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 01 1 1 1
0 0 0 01 1 1
b15 b00 0 0 0 0 01 1
0 1 1 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
D21 D20
D41 D40 API W Applicable models
ES EP EH28 D XOR
P Perform the Exclusive Logical Add (XOR) Operation
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1 S2 D Note: If operand S1, S2, D use with device F, it is only available in
16-bit command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse execution (WXORP, DXORP).
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
WXOR Continuous execution WXORP Pulse
execution
32-bit command (13 STEPS)
DXOR Continuous execution DXORP Pulse
execution Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: First data source device : Second data source device : Operation result
Performs the exclusive logical add of the data source device and , and
stores the operation result into the device . General operation rule: If both of the bit contained within the two data source devices are
the same, then the operation result is “0”. But if both of the bit contained within the two
data source devices are different, then the operation result is “1”.
ProgramExample
1
When X0 is ON, the 16-bit data source device D0 and D2 are analyzed and the
operation result of the logical WXOR command is stored in the device D4.
0 0 1 11 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 01 1 1 1
0 0 0 01 1 0
WOR
b15 b000 0 0 0 0 01 1
0 1 1 1 0 1
1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
WXOR D0 D2 D4X0
Beforeexecution
Afterexecution
D0
D2
D4
0 0 1 11 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 01 1 1 1
0 0 01 1
b15 b000 0 0 0 0 01 1
0 1 1 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 1 1
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-38
ProgramExample
2
When X1 is ON, the 32-bit data source device (D11, D10) and (D21, D20) are analyzed
and the operation result of the logical DXOR command is stored in the device (D41,
D40). X1
DXOR D10 D20 D40
0 0 1 11 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 00 1 1 1
1 1 1 10 0 0
b311 1 1 1 1 10 0
1 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1
Beforeexecution
Afterexecution
D11 D100 0 1 11 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 01 1 1DXOR
b
1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
D21 D20
D41 D40
0 0 1 11 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 00 1 1 1
1 1 1 10 0 0
b151 1 1 1 1 10 0
1 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1
0 0 1 11 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 01 1 11
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
b0
API ☺ Applicable models
ES EP EH29 D NEG
P Negation
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FD
Note: If operand D uses with device F, it is only available in 16-bit command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution (NEGP, DNEGP).
16-bit command (3 STEPS)
NEG Continuous execution NEGP Pulse
execution
32-bit command (5 STEPS)
DNEG Continuous execution DNEGP Pulse
execution Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Once the command is executed, the specified device, , will be served as the complement of 2.
This command can convert the negative BIN value to the positive number, and that is, to
get its absolute value.
This command is usually pulse execution (NEGP, DNEGP).
ProgramExample
1
When X goes from OFF → ON, every bit of the D10 contents will be countered (0→1,
1→0) and be added with 1, and will then be saved in the original register, D10. X0
NEGP D10
ProgramExample
2
Obtaining the absolute value of a negative value: 1. When the 15th bit of D0 is “1”, M0 is ON. (D0 is a negative value). 2. When M0 is ON, the absolute value of D0 can be obtained using the NEG command.
M1000BON D0 K15M0
M0NEGP D0
Normal ON contact
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-39
ProgramExample
3
Obtaining the absolute value by the result of the subtraction 1. When D0>D2, M0=ON. 2. When D0=D2, M1=ON. 3. When D0<D2, M2=ON. 4. Then D4 can be obtained and it will be a positive value.
X0CMP D0 D2 M0
M0SUB D0 D2 D4
M2SUB D2 D0 D4
M1
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-40
Footnote
Indication of the negative value and absolute value The content of the most significant bit of the register indicates the positive and
negative value. It is a positive value when the content is “0” and it is a negative value when the content is “1”.
If it is a negative value, the absolute value can be obtained by using the NEG command (API 29).
0 0 0 00 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 10 0
0 0 0 10 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 00 0
0 0 0 00 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 00 0
(D0=2)
(D0=1)
(D0=0)
1 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1(D0=-1)
0 0 0 10 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 00 0(D0)+1=1
1 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 0(D0=-2)
0 0 0 00 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 10 0(D0)+1=2
1 1 1 1 1 01 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1(D0=-3)
0 0 0 10 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 10 0(D0)+1=3
1 1 1 1 1 01 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 0(D0=-4)
0 0 1 00 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 00 0(D0)+1=4
1 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 01 1 1 1 1 1(D0=-5)
0 0 1 10 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 00 0(D0)+1=5
1 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 1(D0=-32,765)
1 1 1 11 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 01 1(D0)+1=32,765
1 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0(D0=-32,766)
1 1 1 01 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 11 1(D0)+1=32,766
1 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 1(D0=-32,767)
1 1 1 11 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 11 1(D0)+1=32,767
1 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0(D0=-32,768) (D0)+1=32,768
1 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0
Max. absolute value is 32,767
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-41
API ☺ Applicable modelsES EP EH30 D
ROR P Rotate to the Right
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
D n Note: If operand D uses with device F, it is only available in 16-bit
command. If operand D is specified as KnY, KnM, KnS, only K4 (16-bit) and K8 (32-bit) is valid. Essential condition: 1≤n≤16 (16-bit), 1≤n≤32 (32-bit) Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution (RORP, DRORP).
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
ROR Continuous execution RORP Pulse
execution
32-bit command (9 STEPS)
DROR Continuous execution DRORP Pulse
execution Flag: M1022 (Carry flag)
CommandExplanation
: Rotation device (destination device) : Bit places of one time rotation
The bit pattern of device is rotated bit places to the right on every operation of the command.
This command is usually pulse execution (RORP, DRORP).
ProgramExample
When X0 goes from OFF to ON, the 16 bit data of D10 will rotate 4 bits to the right, as
shown in the diagram, and b3 that located at D10 originally will then be moved to the
carry flag (CY) M1022.
0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 11 1 0 0 1
0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 111 1 00 1 0 0
upper bit lower bit
upper bit lower bit
*
X0RORP D10 K4
Rotate to the right
16 bits
Carryflag
Carryflag
After one rotationto the right
D10
D10
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-42
API ☺ Applicable modelsES EP EH31 D
ROL P Rotate to the Left
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
D n Note: If operand D uses with device F, it is only available in 16-bit
command. If operand D is specified as KnY, KnM, KnS, only K4 (16-bit) and K8 (32-bit) is valid. Essential condition: 1≤n≤16 (16-bit), 1≤n≤32 (32-bit) Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution (ROLP, DROLP).
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
ROL Continuous execution ROLP Pulse
execution
32-bit command (9 STEPS)
DROL Continuous execution DROLP Pulse
execution Flag: M1022 (Carry flag)
CommandExplanation
: Rotation device (destination device) : Bit places of one time rotation
The bit pattern of device is rotated bit places to the left on every operation of the command.
This command is usually pulse execution (ROLP, DROLP).
ProgramExample
When X0 goes from OFF → ON, the 16 bit data of D10 will rotate 4 bits to the left, as
shown in the diagram, and b12 that located at D10 originally will then be moved to the
carry flag (CY) M1022. X0
D10 K4
1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 01 1 0 0 0
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 100 11 0 11 1
16 bits
Rotate to the left
After one rotationto the left
Carryflag
Carryflag
D10
D10upper bit
upper bit lower bit
lower bit
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-43
API ☺ Applicable modelsES EP EH32 D
RCR P
Rotate to the Right with the Carry flag
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
D n Note: If operand D uses with device F, it is only available in 16-bit
command. If operand D is specified as KnY, KnM, KnS, only K4 (16-bit) and K8 (32-bit) are valid. Essential condition: 1≤n≤16 (16-bit), 1≤n≤32 (32-bit) Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution (RCRP, DRCRP).
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
RCR Continuous execution RCRP Pulse
execution
32-bit command (9 STEPS)
DRCR Continuous execution DRCRP Pulse
execution Flag: M1022 (Carry flag)
CommandExplanation
: Rotation device (destination device) : Bit places after one time rotation
The bit pattern of device with the attached carry flag (M1022) is rotated bit places to the right on every operation of the command.
This command is usually pulse execution (RCRP, DRCRP).
ProgramExample
When X0 goes from OFF to ON, the 16 bit data of D10, including the attached carry
flag (M1022), will rotate 4 bits to the right, as shown in the diagram, and b3 that
located at D10 originally will then be moved to the carry flag M1022, and that the
original contents of the carry flag M1022 will be moved to the bit of b12.
0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 00 1 0 0 1
1 0 0 0 1 1 0 011 1 00 0 0 01
X0D10 K4
Rotate to the right
16 bitsCarryflag
Carryflag
After one rotationto the right lower bit
lower bitupper bit
upper bit
1D10
D10
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-44
API ☺ Applicable modelsES EP EH33 D
RCL P
Rotate to the Left with the Carry flag Attached
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
D n Note: If operand D uses with device F, it is only available in 16-bit
command. If operand D is specified as KnY, KnM, KnS, only K4 (16-bit) and K8 (32-bit) is valid. Essential condition: 1≤n≤16 (16-bit), 1≤n≤32 (32-bit) Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution (RCLP, DRCLP).
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
RCL Continuous execution RCLP Pulse
execution
32-bit command (9 STEPS)
DRCL Continuous execution DRCLP Pulse
execution Flag:M1022 (Carry flag)
CommandExplanation
: Rotation device (destination device) : Bit places after one time rotation
The bit pattern of device with the attached carry flag (M1022) is rotated bit places to the left on every operation of the command.
This command is usually pulse execution (RCLP, DRCLP).
ProgramExample
When X0 goes from OFF to ON, the 16 bit data of D10, including the attached carry
flag (M1022), will rotate 4 bits to the left, as shown in the diagram, and b12 that
located at D10 originally will then be moved to the carry flag M1022, and that the
original contents of the carry flag M1022 will be moved to the bit of b3. X0
RCLP D10 K4
1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 01 1 0 0 0
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 100 00 11 1 1
16 bits
Rotate to the left
After one rotationto the left
Carryflag
Carryflag
upper bit lower bit
upper bit lower bit
D10
D10
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-45
API ☺ Applicable modelsES EP EH34
SFTR P
Shifts the Data of Device Specified to the Right
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S D n1 n2 Note: Essential condition: 1≤n1≤1024, 1≤ n2≤n1
In ES series models: 1≦n2≦n1≦512 Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution (SFTRP).
16-bit command (9 STEPS)
SFTR Continuous execution SFTRP Pulse
execution
32-bit command - - - - Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Starting number of shift device (source device) : Starting number of
specified shift device (destination device) : Specified bit stack of data length
: Bit places after one time shift
Shifts data bits of device to the right by bits. bits, which
begin with , are shifted to the right. This command is usually pulse execution (SFTRP).
ProgramExample
When X0 is in the rising-edge, the 16 bit data of M0~M15 will shift 4 bits to the right.
Please refer to the following ~ steps to perform SFTR command of one time scan.
M3~M0 → carry
M7~M4 → M3~M0
M11~M8 → M7~M4
M15~M12 → M11~M8
X3~X0 → M15~M12 complete X0
SFTR X0 M0 K16 K4
X3 X2 X1 X0
M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0
1234
5
4 bits in a group shift to the right
carry
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-46
API ☺ Applicable modelsES EP EH35
SFTL P
Shifts the Data of Device Specified to the Left
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S D n1 n2 Note: Essential condition: 1≤n1≤1024, 1≤ n2≤n1
In ES series models: 1≦n2≦n1≦512 Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution (SFTLP).
16-bit command (9 STEPS)
SFTL Continuous execution SFTLP Pulse
execution
32-bit command - - - - Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Starting number of shift device (source device) : Starting number of
specified shift device (destination device) : Specified bit stack of data length
: Bits after one time shift
Shifts data bits of device to the left by bits. bits, which
begin with , are shifted to the left. This command is usually pulse execution (SFTLP).
ProgramExample
When X0 is in the rising-edge, the 16 bit data of M0~M15 will rotate 4 bits to the left.
Please refer to the following ~ steps to perform SFTL command of one time scan.
M15~M12 → carry
M11~M8 → M15~M12
M7~M4 → M11~M8
M3~M0 → M7~M4
X3~X0 → M3~M0 complete
X0SFTR X0 M0 K16 K4
X3 X2 X1 X0
M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0
1 2 3 4
5
4 bits in a group shift to the left
carry
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-47
API ☺ Applicable modelsES EP EH36
WSFR P Shift the Register to the Right
-
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S D n1 n2 Note: When using bit devices as operand S (source) and D
(destination) the specified device must be equal, for example, one kind is the KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS and the other kind is T, C, D. When using bit devices as operand S (source) and D (destination) the Kn value must be equal. Essential condition: 1≤n1≤512, 1≤ n2≤n1 Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution (WSFR, WSFRP).
16-bit command (11 STEPS)
WSFR Continuous execution WSFRP Pulse
execution
32-bit command - - - - Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Starting number of shift device (source device) : Starting number of
specified shift device (destination device) : Specified bit stack of data length
: Words after one time shift
Shifts data words of device to the right by words. words,
which begin with , are shifted to the right. This command is usually pulse execution (WSFRP).
ProgramExample
1
When X0 goes from OFF to ON, the 16 register data of D20~D35 are paralleled a shift
area and shift 4 register to the right.
Please refer to the following ~ steps to perform WSFR command of one times.
D23~D20 → carry D27~D24 → D23~D20 D31~D28 → D27~D24 D35~D32 → D31~D28 D13 ~D10 → D35~D32 complete
X0WSFRP D10 K16D20 K4
D13 D12 D11 D10
D35 D34 D33 D32 D31 D30 D29 D28 D27 D26 D25 D24 D23 D22 D21 D20
1234
54 registers in one group shift to the right
Carry
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-48
ProgramExample
2
When X0 goes from OFF to ON, the word register data of Y10~Y27 are paralleled a
shift area and shift 2 digits to the right.
Please refer to the following ~ steps to perform WSFR command of one time shift.
Y17~Y10 → carry
Y27~Y20 → Y17~Y10
X27~X20 → Y27~Y20 complete
X0WSFRP K1X20 K4 K2
X27 X26 X25 X24
Y27 Y26 Y25 Y24 Y23 Y22 Y21 Y20 Y17 Y16 Y15 Y14 Y13 Y12 Y11 Y10
12
32 digits shift to the right
Carry
K1Y10
When using Kn device, the specified value must be equal
X23 X22 X21 X20
API ☺ Applicable modelsES EP EH37
WSFL P Shift the Register to the Left
-
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S D n1 n2 Note: When using bit devices as operand S (source) and D
(destination) the specified device must be equal, for example, one kind is the KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS and the other kind is T, C, D. When using bit devices as operand S (source) and D (destination) the Kn value must be equal. Essential condition: 1≤n1≤512, 1≤ n2≤n1 Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution (WSFL, WSFLP)
16-bit command (11 STEPS)
WSFL Continuous execution WSFLP Pulse
execution
32-bit command - - - - Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Starting number of shift device (source device) : Starting number of specified
shift device (destination device) : Specified bit stack of data length : Words after one time shift
Shifts data words of device to the left by words. words, which
begin with , are shifted to the left. This command is usually pulse execution (WSFLP).
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-49
ProgramExample
When X0 goes from OFF to ON, the 16 register data of D20~D35 are paralleled a shift area
and shift 4 register to the right.
Please refer to the following ~ steps to perform WSFL command of one time shift.
D35~D32 → carry
D31~D28 → D35~D32
D27~D24 → D31~D28
D23~D20 → D27~D24
D13~D10 → D23~D20 complete
1 3 4
5
2
4 registers in one group shift to the left
Carry
X0WSFLP D10 K16D20 K4
D13 D12 D11 D10
D35 D34 D33 D32 D31 D30 D29 D28 D27 D26 D25 D24 D23 D22 D21 D20
API ☺ Applicable models
ES EP EH38 SFWR
P Shift Register Write -
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS D n Note: Essential condition: 2≤n≤512
Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution (SFWR, SFWRP).
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
SFWR Continuous execution SFWRP Pulse
execution
32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1022 (Carry flag)
CommandExplanation
: Source device which the data is written in : Head address device : Data length
is the length of the First-in/First-OUT stack and the destination device is the head address device of the First-in/First-OUT stack. Use the first number device
as the pointer and add 1 to the content value of the pointer when executing this
command. The contents of the devices specified by are written into the position
specified by the pointer of the First-in/First-OUT stack. If the contents of the
pointer exceed the value “n-1”, the insertion into the First-in/First-OUT stack will stop and the carry flag M1022 will be turned ON.
This command is usually pulse execution (SFWRP).
ProgramExample
First, reset the content of D0 to 0. When X0 goes from OFF to ON, the content of D0
becomes 1 when the content of D20 is created and built in D1. After changing the
content of D20, X0 is executed to goes from OFF to ON again, then the content of D0
becomes 2 when the content of D20 is created and built in D2.
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-50
Please refer to the following ~ steps to perform SFWR command.
The content of D20 is created and built in D1. The content of D0 becomes 1.
X10RST D0
D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0D20
X0SFWRP D20 -K10D0
reset the content of D0 to 0 (zero) previously
pointer
n = 10 points
D0 = 3 2 1
Footnote
This API 38 SFWR command can be used with the API 39 SFRD command to execute
the Write-in/Read Control of the First-in/First-OUT stack.
API ☺ Applicable modelsES EP EH39
SFRD P Shift Register Read
-
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S D n Note: Essential condition: 2≤n≤512
Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution (SFRD, SFRDP).
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
SFRD Continuous execution SFRDP Pulse
execution
32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1020 (Zero flag)
CommandExplanation
: Head address device : destination device : Data length
is the length of the First-in/First-OUT stack and the source device is the
head address device of the First-in/First-OUT stack. Use the first number device as the pointer and subtract 1 to the content value of the pointer when executing this
command. The contents of the devices specified by are written into the position specified by the pointer of the First-in/First-OUT stack. If the contents of the pointer
are equal to 0 (zero), the First-in/First-OUT stack will be empty and the carry flag M1022 will be turned ON.
This command is usually pulse execution (SFRDP).
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-51
ProgramExample
When X1 goes from OFF to ON, D9~D2 are all shifted one register to the right and the
content of D0 is substracted by 1 when the content of D1 is read and moved to D21.
Please refer to the following ~ steps to perform SFRD command.
The content of D1 is read and moved to D21.
D9~D2 are all shifted one register to the right.
The content of D0 is substracted by 1.
D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D21
X0SFRDP D0 K10D21
n = 10 points
data read
pointer
Footnote
This API 38 SFWR command can be used with the API 39 SFRD command to execute
the Write-in/Read Control of the First-in/First-OUT stack.
API ☺ Applicable modelsES EP EH40
ZRST P Resets a Range of Device Specified
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
D1 D2 Note: Essential condition: D1 must be less than or equal to (≦) D2.
Operand D1 and D2 must be in the same category. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (ZRSTP).
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
ZRST Continuous execution ZRSTP Pulse
execution
32-bit command - - - - Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: First destination device : Second destination device For ES series models, standard and High speed counters cannot be mixed.
For EH/EP series models, standard and High speed counters can be mixed use.
When > , then only device is reset. This command is usually pulse execution (ZRSTP).
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-52
ProgramExample
When X0 is ON, M300 to M399 (auxiliary relays) will be reset to OFF.
When X1 is ON, C0 to C127 (16-bit counter) will all be reset. (0 is written in and
contact and coil will be reset to OFF)
When X10 is ON, T0 to T127 (timer) will all be reset. (0 is written in and contact and
coil will be reset to OFF)
When X2 is ON, the status of S0 to S127 will be reset to OFF.
When X3 is ON, the data of D0 to D100 (data register) will be reset to 0.
When X4 is ON, C235 to C254 (32-bit counter) will all be reset. (0 is written in and
contact and coil will be reset to OFF)
ZRST M300 M399
ZRST C0 C127
ZRST T0 T127
ZRST S0 S127
ZRST D0 D100
ZRST C235 C254
X0
X1
X10
X2
X3
X4
Footnote
The RST command can be independently used in the bit device, i.e. Y, M, S and in
word device, i.e. T, C, D.
API 16 FMOV command can also be used to transmit the data of K0 to word device,
i.e. T, C, D or to bit register, i.e. KnY, KnM, KnS, just as RST command.
RST M0X0
RST T0
RST Y0
FMOV K0 D10 K5
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-53
API ☺ Applicable modelsES EP EH41
DECO P 8 → 256 Bits Decoder
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S D n Note: When operand D is bit device, n=1~8
When operand D is word device, n=1~4 Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (DECOP).
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
DECO Continuous execution DECOP Pulse
execution
32-bit command - - - - Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Decode source device : Destination device for storing the encode result
: Decode data length
Decodes the data of lower “n” bit of source device and stores the result of “2 n”
bit at device . This command is usually pulse execution (DECOP).
ProgramExample
1
is used in case of a bit device, 0<n≦8. But if n=0 or n>8, the calculation error
will occur.
When n=8, the maxium decoded data is 2 8, equal 256 points. (Must notice the range
of the stored device after decoding. Please do not use repeatly.)
When X10 goes from Off → On, the data of X0~X2 will be decoded to M100~M107.
If data source is 1+2=3, M103 at the third position from M100 turns ON and is set to 1.
After the execution is completed, X10 is changed to OFF. The device which have been
decoded is still action.
DECOP X0 K3M100X10
X2 X1 X0
M107 M106 M105 M104 M103 M102 M101 M100
0 1 1
10 0 0 0 0 0 037 6 5 4 2 1 0
4 12
3
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-54
ProgramExample
2
is used in case of a bit device, 0<n≦4, but if n=0 or n>4, the calculation error will
occur.
When n=4, the maxium decoded data is 2 4, equal 16 points.
When X10 goes from Off → On, the data in D10 (b2 to b0) will be decoded and stored
at D20 (b7 to b0). The unused bits in D20 (b15 to b8) will be all set to 0.
Decodes three lower bits in D10 and stores at eight lower bits in D20 (one bit will be 1)
and the content of eight upper bits are all 0.
After the execution is completed, X10 is changed to OFF. The device which have been
decoded is still action.
X10DECOP D10 D20 K3
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1111111
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
01234567
124
b15
b15 b0
b0D10
D20
all be 0 (zero)
When 3 is specifiedat b2 to b0 of D10
result after decoding
When 3 is specified as effectivebits, 8 points are occupied.b3 at the third position from
b0 turns ON and is set to 1
API ☺ Applicable modelsES EP EH42
ENCO P 256 → 8 Bits Encoder
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S D n Note: When operand S is bit device, n=1~8
When operand S is word device, n=1~4 Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (ENCOP).
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
ENCO Continuous execution ENCOP Pulse
execution
32-bit command - - - - Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Encode source device : Destination device for storing encode data
: Encode data length
Encodes the data of lower “2 n” bit in source device and stores the result at
device .
If the source device is a multiple bit and its value is 1, processing is performed for the last bit position.
This command is usually pulse execution (ENCOP).
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-55
ProgramExample
1
is used in case of a bit device, 0<n≦8. But if n=0 or n>8, the calculation error
will occur.
When n=8, the maxium decoded data is 2 8, equal 256 points.
When X0 goes from Off → On, the data of 2 3 (M0 to M7) will be decoded and stored
at three lower bits of D0 (b2 to b0). The unused bits in D0 (b15 to b3) will be all set to
0.
After the execution is completed, X10 is changed to OFF and the data in remain unchanged.
ENCOP M0 K3D0X0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100124
b15 b0D01
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 07 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
M07 M06 M05 M04 M03 M02 M01 M00
all be 0 (zero)
When 3 is specified as effective bits, 8 points are occupied.
result after encoding
Which point, counting from M0, is ON and stored in BIN.
ProgramExample
2
is used in case of a word device, 0<n≦4. But if n=0 or n>4, the calculation error
will occur.
When n=4, the maxium decoded data is 2 4, equal 16 points.
When X0 goes from Off → On, the data of 2 3 (b0 to b7) in D10 will be decoded and
stored at three lower bits (b2 to b0) at D20. The unused bits in D20 (b15 to b3) will be
all set to 0. (b8 to b15 in D10 is not available)
After the execution is completed, X10 is changed to OFF and the data in remain unchanged.
ENCOP D10 K3D20
X0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100b15 b0D20
1
6 5 4 3 2 1 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 01 0 0111
b15
b0
7D10
all be 0 (zero)
Data inactivated
result after encoding
When 3 is specified as effective bits, 8 points are occupied.
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-56
API Applicable modelsES EP EH43 D
SUM P Sum of ON Bits
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S D Note: If operand S, D use with device F, it is only available in
16-bit command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (SUMP, DSUMP).
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
SUM Continuous execution SUMP Pulse
execution 32-bit command (9 STEPS)
DSUM Continuous execution DSUMP Pulse
execution Flag: M1020 (Zero flag)
CommandExplanation
: Source device : Destination device for storing counted number If the contents of these 16 bits are all “0”, the “Zero” flag, M1020=ON.
will occupy two registers when using in 32-bit command.
ProgramExample
When X10 is ON, all the bits that with “1” as its content within D0 will be counted and have this counted number stored in D2.
X10SUM D0 D2
0 0 0 0 0 0 01 1 10 0 0 00 0 3
D2D0
API Applicable models
ES EP EH44 D BON
P Check Specified Bit Status
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS D n Note: If operand S uses with device F, it is only available in 16-bit
command. Essential condition: n=0~15 (16-bit), n=0~31 (32-bit) Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (BONP, DBONP).
16-bit command (7 STEP)
BON Continuous execution BONP Pulse
execution
32-bit command (13 STEPS)
DBON Continuous execution DBONP Pulse
execution Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Source device : Result device for storing determined bit : Specified determined bit
ProgramExample
When X0 is ON, and if the 15th bit of D0 is “1”, M0 is ON. But if the 15th bit of D0 is “0”,
M0 is OFF.
Once X0 is switched to OFF, M0 will stay at its previous ON/OFF status.
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-57
.
X0BON D0 M0
0 0 0 0 0 0 01 1 10 0 0 00 0D0
K15
b0M0=Off
b15
1 0 0 0 0 0 01 1 10 0 0 00 0D0
b0M0=On
b15
API Applicable models
ES EP EH 45 D MEAN
P Mean Value
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS D n Note: If operand D uses with device F, it is only available in
16-bit command. Essential condition: n=1~64 Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (MEANP, DMEANP).
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
MEAN Continuous execution MEANP Pulse
execution 32-bit command (13 STEPS)
DMEAN Continuous execution DMEANP Pulse
execution Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Starting device for taking mean value : Destination device for storing
the mean value : Device number for taking mean value
Add the contents of registers specified by , and have the sum divided by
to take a mean value. To save this mean value in the designated . If there is remainder in this calculation, ignore the remainder.
If the specified device number exceeds the normal usable range, only those that within
the range could be processed.
If the value of is out of the stated range (1~64), an “operation error” will be generated.
ProgramExample
When X10 is ON, add up the contents of the three registers starting from D0 (specified
by this command), and divide the sum by three to take the mean vlaue. Then store this
mean value in the specified device D10 and ignore the remainder.
MEAN D0 K3D10X10
(D0+D1+D2)/D3 D10
D0
D1
D2
K100
K113
K125
K112 D10
reminder = 3, be ignored
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-58
API Applicable modelsES EP EH46
ANS Alarm Device Output
-
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S m D Note: Operand S available range: for EP series: T0~T191
for EH series: T0~T199. Operand m available range: K0~K32,767, in units of 100 msOperand D available range: S900~S1023 Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (ANS).
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
ANS Continuous execution - -
32-bit command
- - - - Flag: M1048 (Alarm point is activated)
M1049 (Monitor is valid) Refer to following for detail.
CommandExplanation
: A timer which detect alarm : Time setting : Alarm device ANS command is used to drive the output alarm device.
If alarm device S999=On when X3 is On for more than 5 seconds, S999 will keep
being On afterward even X3=Off later. (but T10 will be reset to Off, present value=0)
ProgramExample
X3ANS T10 K50 S999
API ☺ Applicable models
ES EP EH47 ANR
P Alarm Device Reset
-
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
Note: No operand ES series models do not support pulse execution command (ANR, ANRP).
16-bit command (1 STEP)
ANR Continuous execution ANRP Pulse
execution
32-bit command - - - - Flag: None
CommandExplanation
ANR command is used to reset alarm device.
When several alarm devices are ON, the lower number of alarm device will be reset.
This command is usually pulse execution (ANRP).
ProgramExample
When X10 and X11 are simultaneously ON more than 2 seconds, the alarm device
S910 is ON. Then even if X10 and X11 are changed to OFF, the alarm device S910
will still remain ON. (But T10 will reset to OFF, present value is 0.)
When X10 and X11 are simultaneously ON less than 2 seconds, the present value of
T10 is reset to 0.
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-59
When X3 goes from Off → On,
for EP series, the activated alarm device S896~S1023 will be reset.
for EH series, the activated alarm device S899~S1023 will be reset.
When X3 goes from Off → On again, the second lower alarm device will be reset. X10
ANS T10 K20 S910X11
X3ANRP
Footnote
Flag:
1. M1048 (Alarm device is activated): When M1049 is driven to be ON, if any one alarm
device of S899~S1023 (in EP series)/ S899~S1023 (in EH series) outputs, M1048 is
ON.
2. M1049(Monitor is valid): When M1049 is driven to be ON, D1049 will automatically
display the lowest number during the execution of this command.
Application of alarm device: I/O devices arrangement: X0: forward switch, X1: backward switch, X2: front location switch, X3: back location
switch, X4: alarm device reset button, Y0: forward, Y1: forward, Y2: alarm indicator,
S910: forward alarm device, S920: backward alarm
Y0ANS T0 K100 S910
X2
X4ANRP
M1000M1049
Y1ANS T1 K200 S920
X3
X0Y0
X2
M1048Y2
Y0
X1Y1
X3
Y1
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-60
1. When M1049=On, M1048, D1049 is valid. 2. If Y0=ON more than 10 seconds and not reach the front location X2, S910=ON. 3. If Y1=ON more than 20 seconds and not reach the back location X3, S920=ON. 4. When backward switch X1=ON, backward device Y1=ON and the signal reach
the back location switch X3, Y1 is switched to be OFF. 5. If there is a driven alarm device, alarm indicator Y2=ON. 6. The alarm device which have been activated will be reset one by one, each time
the reset button X4 of alarm device is ON during the execution of this command. The lower activated alarm device is reset on every execution of this command.
API Applicable modelsES EP EH48 D
SQR P Square Root of BIN
-
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S D Note: If operand S, D use with device F, it is only available in
16-bit command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (SQR, SQRP, DSQR, DSQRP).
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
SQR Continuous execution DSQR Pulse
execution
32-bit command (9 STEPS)
SQRP Continuous execution DSQRP Pulse
execution Flag: M1020 (Zero flag)
M1021 (Borrow flag) M1067 (Operation error)
CommandExplanation
: Source device : Destination device which store the result
This command performs a square root operation on source device and stores
the result at the destination device .
only can be a positive value. Performing any square root operation on a negative value will result in an “operation error” this command will not be
executed.The error flag M1067 and M1068 will be On and D1067 records error code
“0E1B” (hexadecimal).
The operation result of is calculated as the integer only, decimal is ignored. If there is decimal ignored, the Borrow flag M1021=ON.
When operation result of is 0, the Zero flag M1020=On.
ProgramExample
When X10=On, the content of D0 will be stored in D12 after the operation of square
root. X10
SQR D0 D12
D0 D12
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-61
API Applicable modelsES EP EH49 D
FLT P
Convert BIN Integer to Binary Floating Point
- -
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range.
ES series models do not support pulse execution command (FLT, FLTP, DFLT, DFLTP).
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
FLT Continuous execution DFLT Pulse
execution
32-bit command (9 STEPS)
FLTP Continuous execution DFLTP Pulse
execution Flag: M1081 (FLT command function
exchange)
CommandExplanation
: Source device : Destination device which store the converted result When M1081 is OFF, the source data is converted from BIN integer to binary floating
point. At this time, source device of 16-bit command FLT occupies 1 register
and Destination device occupies 2 registers. If absoluted value of conversion result is larger than max. floating value, carry flag
M1022=On.
If absoluted value of conversion result is less than min. floating value, carry flag
M1021=On.
If conversion result is 0, zero flag M1020=On.
When M1081 is ON, the source data is converted from binary floating point to BIN
integer. (ignore the decimal) At this time, source device of 16-bit command FLT
occupies 2 registers and Destination device occupies 1 register. The action is the same as command INT.
If conversion result exceeds BIN integer range of (16-bit is -32,768~32,767 and 32-bit is -2,147,483,648~2,147,483,647), it wil be represented with max. value or min.
value. Then carry flag will be set to M1022=On.
If the decimal of conversion result is ignored, borrow flag M1021=On.
If conversion result is 0, zero flag M1020=On.
After conversion, is saved by 16 bits.
ProgramExample
1
When M1081 is OFF, the source data is converted from BIN integer to binary floating
point.
When X10 is ON, D0 (BIN integer) is converted to D13, D12 (binary floating point).
When X11 is ON, D1, D0 (BIN integer) are converted to D21, D20 (binary floating
point).
If D0=K10, X10 will be On. 32-bit of floating point after conversioin will be H41200000
and it will be saved in 32-bit register D12(D13).
If 32-bit register D0(D1)=K100,000, X11 will be On. 32-bit of floating point after
conversioin will be H4735000 and it will be saved in 32-bit register D20(D21).
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-62
M1002RST M1081
X10FLT D0 D12
X11DFLT D0 D20
ProgramExample
2
When M1081 is On, the source data is converted from binary floating point to BIN
integer. (ignore the decimal)
When X10 is ON, D0 and D1(binary floating point) are converted to D12 (BIN integer).
If D0(D1)=H47C35000, the floating point is 100,000. The execution result will be
D12=K32,767, M1022=On due to the value exceeds max. value of 16-bit register D12.
When X11 is ON, D1, D0 (binary floating point) are converted to D21, D20 (BIN
integer). If D0(D1)=H47C35000, the floating point is 100,000. The result will be saved
in 32-bit register D20(D21). M1002
SET M1081
X10FLT D0 D12
X11DFLT D0 D20
ProgramExample
3
Please use this application command to complete the following operation.
(D10) (X7~X0) K61.516 BIN bit 2 bit BCD
(D21,D20)
(D101,D100) (D200) BIN
(D203,D202)
(D301,D300)
(D401,D400)
(D31,D30)
(D41,D40)
1 2
3
45
6
7
8
binary floating point
binary floating pointbinary floating point
binary floating point
binary floating point
decimal floating point (for monitor)
32 integer bit
6 Application Commands API 00-49
DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-63
M1000
FLT D10 D100
BIN K2X0 D200
FLT D200 D202
DEDIV K615 K10
DEDIV D100 D202
DEMUL D400 D300
DEBCD D20 D30
DINT D20 D40
D300
D400
D20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 1. Covert D10 (BIN integer) to D101, D100 (binary floating point).
2. Covert the value of X7~X0 (BCD value) to D200 (BIN value).
3. Covert D200 (BIN integer) to D203, D202 (binary floating point).
4. Save the result of K615 ÷ K10 to D301, D300 (binary floating point).
5. The division of binary floating point:
Save the result of of (D101, D100) ÷ (D203, D202) to D401, D400 (binary floating
point).
6. The multiplication of binary floating point:
Save the result of (D401, D400) × (D301, D300) to D21, D20 (binary floating point).
7. Covert binary floating point (D21, D20) to decimal floating point (D31, D30).
8. Covert binary floating point (D21, D20) to BIN integer (D41, D40).
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-1
API Applicable modelsES EP EH50
REF P I/O Refresh Immediately
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
D n Note: Operand D should be a multiple of 10, i.e. 00, 10, 20, 30…
etc., so it should be X0, X10, Y0, Y10… etc., please refer to the command explanation. Essential condition: n=8~256, and should be a multiple of 8, i.e. 8, 16, 24, 32…etc. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (REFP).
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
REF Continuous execution REFP Pulse
execution
32-bit command - - - - Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Starting device of I/O refresh : Refreshed I/O number The state of all PLC inputs and outputs will be refreshed after scanning to END. The
state of inputs is read from external inputs to save in inputs memory. The output
terminals send outputs memory to output device after END command. Therefore, this
command can be used during algorithm process when need to input/output the newest
data.
The state of all inputs and outputs may change immediately after they are scanned.
If the user does not want to wait for the next scan time, the REF command may be
used.
should always be a multiple of 10, i.e. 00, 10, 20, 30… etc., so it should be X0,
X10, Y0, Y10… etc. should always be a multiple of 8, i.e. 8, 16, 24, 32…etc.
and its available range is 8~256. If the value of is out of the stated range (8~256) or not a multiple of 8, an “operation error” will be generated. The usage range
may be different by various models, please refer to the footnote for detail.
ProgramExample
1
When X0 = ON, PLC will read the state of X0~X7 input points immediately and
refreshed. There is no input delay occurs. X0
REF X0 K16
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-2
ProgramExample
2
When X0 = ON, the output signal Y0~Y7 (8 points) are sent to output terminal
immediately and refreshed. It desn’t need to output till END command. X0
REF Y0 K8
Footnote
For ES and EP series models, the input and output points processed by this command
are the I/O points of MPU: X0~X17, Y0~Y17 and n=K8 or K16.
API Applicable modelsES EP EH51
REFF P
Refresh and Adjust the Response Time of Input Filter
-
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
n Note: None
16-bit command (3 STEPS)
REFF Continuous execution REFFP Pulse
execution
32-bit command - - - - Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Response time setting, in units of ms. PLC is provided with the input filter to prevent the noises or interferences. The input
filters of X0~X17 inputs of DVP series PLC are digital filters and using REFF
command can adjust the response time of the input filters. Command will set in D1020 and D1021 directly and adjust reaction time of X0~X7 and X10~X17
separately.
The operation rules when the input filters of X0~X17 inputs of DVP series PLC adjust
the response time:
When the power of PLC turns from Off to On or execute to END command,
response time is decided by the content value of D1020 and D1021.
During the program, the setting value can be moved to D1020 and D1021by using
MOV command.
The response time can be changed by using REFF command in the execution of
the program. At this time, the response time specified by REFF command will be
moved into D1020, D1021and it will be adjusted again in the next scan.
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-3
ProgramExample
When the power of PLC turns from Off to On, the
response time of X0~X17 inputs is decided by the
content value of D1020 and D1021.
When X20=On, REFF K5 command is executed,
respone time is changed to 5 ms and and it will
be adjusted again in the next scan.
When X20=Off, the REFF command will not be
executed, the response time is changed to 20ms
and it will be adjusted again in the next scan.
X20REFF K5
X0Y1
X20REFF K20
X1Y2
END
Footnote
When using the interrupt parameters, or high-speed counter, or SPD command (API
56), the response time of corresponding input terminals won’t delay and its action has
no ralation with this command. API Applicable models
ES EP EH52 MTR
Input Matrix -
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS D1 D2 n Note: Operand S should be a multiple of 10, i.e. 00, 10, 20, 30…
etc., so it should be X0, X10… etc. and occupies 8 continuous devices. Operand D1 should be a multiple of 10, i.e. 00, 10, 20, 30… etc., so it should be Y0, Y10… etc. and occupies n continuous devices Operand D2 should be a multiple of 10, i.e. 00, 10, 20, 30… etc., so it should be Y0, M0, S0… etc. Essential condition: n=2~8 Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (9 STEPS)
MTR Continuous execution - -
32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1029 Execution completed flag
CommandExplanation
: Head address of input matrix : Head address of output matrix :
Corresponding head address of matrix scan : Number of banks for the matrix
is the head address that specify all inputs of the matrix. Once the input is specified, a selection of 8 continuous input devices is called as “input matrix”.
is the head address of transister output Y of the matrix.
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-4
This command allows a selection of 8 continuous input devices (head address )
to be used multiple ( ) times. Each input has more than one and different signal being processed. Each set of 8 input signals are grouped into a “bank” and
there are number of banks. Each bank is selected by the quantity of outputs
from , used to achieve the matrix are equal to the number of banks . The
result is stored in a matrix-table which starts at corresponding head address . The maximum inputs can achieve 64 inputs (8 inputs’ 8 banks).
When this command is used on an interrupt format, processing each bank of inputs
every 25msec. This would result in an 8 bank matrix, i.e. 64 inputs (8 inputs’ 8 banks)
being read in 200msec. Hence, this command is not available for the input signal
which its On/Off speed is over than 200ms.
It is recommended to use special auxiliary relay M1000, normally open contact.
After the completion of performing MTR command, the command execution completed
flag M1029 is turned ON and this flag is automatically reset when the MTR command
is turned OFF.
This command can only be used ONCE.
ProgramExample
When X0=On, MTR command starts to execute. The external 2 banks, total 16
devices are read by order and the result are stored in the internal relay M10~M17,
M20~M27. M1000
MTR X40 Y40 M10 K2
The figure below is an example wiring diagram for the operation of MTR command.
The external 2 banks consist of X40~47 and Y40~41 and total 16 devices correspond
to the internal relay M10~M17, M20~M27 are used with MTR command. For a general
precaution to aid successful operation, diodes should be placed after each input
devices. These diodes should have a rating of 0.1A, 50V.
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-5
COM X40 X41 X42 X43 X44 X45 X47X46
COM Y40 Y41 Y42 Y43 Y44 Y45 Y47Y46
M10
X41
M20
M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17
X42 X43 X44 X45 X46 X47
M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26 M27
Diode0.1A/50V
Input devices
When output Y40 is ON, only those inputs in the first bank are read. These result are
stored in auxiliary coils M10~M17. The second step involves Y40 going OFF and Y41
coming ON and this time only inputs in the second bank are read. These results are
stored in M20~M27.
2 4Y41
Y40
25ms
1 3
Read input signal in the first bank
Read input signal in the second bank
Processing time of each bank is about 25ms
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-6
API Applicable modelsES EP EH53 D
HSCS
High-speed Counter Comparison SET
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1 S2 D Note: Operand S2 should be C235~C240, C241~C244,
C246~C249, C251~C254 or available high-speed counters, please refer to the footnote for details. The usage range of operand D: I010 to I060 can be set, also can use index register E, F to modify. There is no 16-bit command for API 53, only 32-bit command DHSCS is available. Refer to each model specification for usage range. In ES and EP series models, operand S2 and D cannot use index register E, F to modify.
16-bit command
- - - -
32-bit command (13 STEPS)
DHSCS Continuous execution - -
Flag: M1150~M1333. Refer to the footnote for details. M1289~M1294. High-speed counter interrupt disabled flags in EH series models. Refer to the program example 3 below.
CommandExplanation
: Compare value : Numver of high-speed counter : Compare result
All high-speed counters use an interrupt process, therefore, all compare result devices
are updated immediately. HSCS command compares the current value of the selected high-speed counter
against a selected comapre value . When the counters currrent value
changes to a value equal to , the device specified as is set ON. Even if
the compare result is unequal, the status of device will still be ON.
If the devices specified as the device are Y0~Y17, when the compare value and the present value of high-speed counter are equal, the compare result will
immediately output to the external inputs Y0~Y17, and other Y devices will be affected
by the scan cycle. However, M, S devices are immediate output, not being affected by
the scan cycle.
ProgramExample
1
After PLC perform the RUN command, if M0=On, DHSCS command starts to operate.
Y10 will ON immediately when C235’s present value stepped from 99→100 or 101→
100 and be ON constantly. M1000
DCNT C235 K1000
M0DHSCS K100 C235 Y10 On immediately
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-7
ProgramExample
2
Difference between Y output of DHSCS command and general Y output:
When C249’s value stepped from 99→100 and 101→100, Y10 output of DHSCS
command immediately output to the external output by using interrupt process so it
is irrelevant to the program scan time. However, there will still be a delay due to the
output of module relay (10ms) or transistor (10us).
When the present value of high-speed timer C249 changes from 99 to 100, C249
will be activated, and Y17 will be ON after END command due to the program scan
time. M1000
DCNT C249 K100
SET Y17C249
DHSCS K100 C249 Y10 ON immediately
ProgramExample
3
High-speed counter interrupt:
ES series models do not support high-speed counter interrupt function.
The limit when EP series models using high-speed counter interrupt
When using DHSCS command to specify I interrupt, the specified high-speed
counter can not be use in other DHSCS, DHSCR, DHSZ command. If using it, it
will result in error.
The interrupt pointers I010 to I060 can be used as D operand of DHSCS command
and this enables the interrupt routine to be executed when the value of the
specified high-speed counter reaches the value in DHSCS command.
In EP series models, there are six high-speed counter interrupts: I010, I020, I030,
I040, I050, I060 6 points can be used. I010 is used with C235, C241, C244, C246,
C247, C249, C251, C252, C254. I020 is used with C236; I030 is used with C237,
C242; I040 is used with C238; I050 is used with C239 and I060 is used with C240.
When the present value of C251 changes from 99→100and 101→100, the
program will jump to the interrupt pointer I010 to execute the interrupt routine.
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-8
M1000DCNT C251 K1000
FEND
DHSCS K100 C251 I010
M1000Y1
IRET
END
I010
In EP series models, M1059 is high-speed counter interrupt inhibit flag.
In EH series models, M1289~M1294 are high-speed counter interrupt inhibit flag, I010
to I060 masked. For example, when M1294 is On, Interrupt pointer I060 masked. Interrupt pointer
I Number interrupt inhibit
flag Interrupt pointer
I Number interrupt inhibit flag
I010 M1289 I040 M1292 I020 M1290 I050 M1293 I030 M1291
I060 M1294
Footnote
The ouput contact of high-speed counter and the compare output of DHSCS (API 53)
command, DHSCR (API 54) command and DHSZ(API 55) command are all activated
when there are counted inputs. If using data operation command, such as DADD,
DMOV…etc. commands to change the present value of high-speed counter equal to
the setting value, there is comparsion will be set or output because there is no counted
inputs.
High-speed counter provided in ES series models: total counting frequency is 30 KHz.1-phase 1 input 1-phase 2 inputs 2-phase inputs Type
Input C235 C236 C237 C238 C241 C242 C244 C246 C247 C249 C251 C252 C254
X0 U/D U/D U/D U U U A A A X1 U/D R R D D D B B B X2 U/D U/D R R R R X3 U/D R S S S
U: Increasing input A: A phase input S: Start input D: Decreasing input B: B phase input R: Reset input
1. Input point X0 and X1 can plan to be higher speed counter and 1-phase can be up
to 30KHz. But total counting frequency of these input points should be less than or
equal to total frequency 30KHz. If counting input is A/B phase signal, frequency will
be four times of counting frequency. Therefore, counting frequency of A/B phase is
almost 7KHz.
2. In ES series models, DHSCS and DHSCR command can not be used more than 4
times.
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-9
High-speed counter provided in EP series models:
1-phase high-speed counter: total counting frequency is 30 KHz.
1-phase 1 input 1-phase 2 inputs 2-phase inputs Type
Input C235 C236 C237 C238 C239 C240 C241 C242 C244 C246 C247 C249 C251 C252 C254
X0 U/D U/D U/D U U U A A AX1 U/D R R D D D B B BX2 U/D U/D R R R RX3 U/D R S S SX4 U/D X5 U/D
U: Increasing input A: A phase input S: Start input D: Decreasing input B: B phase input R: Reset input
1. Input point X0 and X1 can plan to be higher speed counter and 1-phase can be up
to 30KHz. But total counting frequency of these input points should be less than or
equal to total frequency 30KHz. If counting input is A/B phase signal, frequency will
be four times of counting frequency. Therefore, counting frequency of A/B phase is
almost 7KHz.
2. Input X5 has two functions.
• When M1260=Off, C240 is general U/D high-speed counter.
• When M1260=On, X5 is the global reset of C235~C239. 3. In EP series models, DHSCS, DHSCR and DHSZ command can not be used more
than 6 times. High-speed counter provided in EH series models:
1. Program interrupt type 1-phase high-speed counter, C235~C240: general counting
frequency is up to 10KHz, maximum total counting frequency is 20 KHz.
2. DVP-EH series has four Hardware high-speed counter (hereinafter referred to as
HHSC), HHSC0~3 and available device number for HHSC0~3 are C241~ C254.
Pulse output frequency of each group can reach 250 KHz.
Available device number for HHSC0: C241, C246, C251
Available device number for HHSC1: C242, C247, C252
Available device number for HHSC2: C243, C248, C253
Available device number for HHSC3: C244, C249, C254
• Each HHSC can only be specified one time for one device number. Use
DCNT command to specify the HHSC.
• Available counter modes of each HHSC:
1). 1-phase 1 input, also called as Pulse/Direction mode
2). 1-phase 2 inputs, also called as CW/CCW mode.
3). 2-phase 2 inputs, also called as AB phase mode.
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-10
3. Please refer to the following table for the available high-speed counters:
Counter Type
Program interrupt type 1-phase high-speed counter Hardware high-speed counter
1-phase 1 input 1-phase 1 input 1-phase 2 inputs 2-phase input Type
Input C235 C236 C237 C238 C239 C240 C241 C242 C243 C244 C246 C247 C248 C249 C251 C252 C253 C254
X0 U/D U/D U A X1 U/D D B X2 U/D R R R X3 U/D S S S X4 U/D U/D U A X5 U/D D B X6 R R R X7 S S S X10 U/D U A X11 D B X12 R R R X13 S S S X14 U/D U AX15 D BX16 R R RX17 S S S
U: Increasing input A: A phase input S: Start input D: Decreasing input B: B phase input R: Reset input
4. In the program of DVP EH series models, there is no limited using time for
hardware high-speed counter related commands, like DHSCS, DHSCR and
DHSZ. However, there are limited using times for executing the commands
simultaneously. DHSCS, DHSCR command will use one group setting and DHSZ
command will use two groups settings. When these commands are executed
simultaneously, the total used groups settings can not exceed eight groups
settings. If exceeding eight groups settings, system will totalize the used memory
units of the commands which have been scanned and executed first, the others will
be ignored.
5. System structure of hardware high-speed counter:
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-11
HHSC0
HHSC1
HHSC2
HHSC3
M1265
M1273
M1267
M1275
M1269
M1277
M1271
M1279
X3 X7 X17X13
M1272 M1274 M1276 M1278
M1264 M1266 M1268 M1270X2 X6 X12 X16
M1241 M1242 M1243 M1244C241 C242 C243 C244
D1225 D1226 D1227 D1228
X1 X5 X11 X15
X14X10X4X0
HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3
HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3
HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3
HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3
HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3
HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3
M1246
M1247
M1248
M1249 M1254
M1253
M1252
M1251
DHSCS
DHSCR
DHSCZ
SET/RESETI 060 interruptcounting value reset010 ~ I
I 010I 020I 030I 040I 050I 060
M1289M1290M1291M1292M1293M1294M1294
HHSC0
HHSC1
HHSC2
HHSC3
DHSCS occupies one group setting valueDHSCR occupies one group setting valueDHSCZ occupies two groups setting value
ANDOR
Reset signal R
ANDOR
U/D mode setting flag
Counting modeselection
U/DUA
BD
Counting up/down flag
Setting value:0~3 respectivelyrepresent Mode 1~4(1~4 ) frequency mode
Counting pulse
Counting pulse
Comparator
Current valueof counter
Start signal S
Interrupt inhibit flag
High speedcompar isoncommand
Comparison valuereached operation
Comparison valuereached output
Comparison valuereached setting
6. HHSC0~3 all have reset and start signal of external input. Reset signal (R) can be
set by M1272/M1274/M1276/M1278 (belong to HHSC0 ~3) and start signal can be
set by M1273/M1275/M1277/M1279 (belong to HHSC0 ~3). When using
high-speed counter, if do not use the external signal input of R and S, you can set
M1264/M1266/M1268/M1270 and M1265/M1267/M1269 /M1271 as TRUE. Close
the operation of the input signal and the corresponding external inputs can be used
as general inputs. Please refer to the above example figure for usage.
7. Select counter modes
High-speed conter of ES / EP series is 2-phase 2 inputs counter mode and set by
special device D1022 with four double frequency modes. The content value of
register D1022 is loaded at the first scan time when PLC controller switch from
Stop to Run status. (Only V5.5 and above of DVP-ES series MPU support this
function) Device No. Function Explanation
D1022 Use counting method of counter to set double frequency
D1022=K1 Select (normal frequency) mode D1022=K2 Select (double frequency) mode D1022=K4 Select (4 times frequency) mode
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-12
Double frequency mode: Counter mode Signal Diagram
1(normal frequency)
A-phase
B-phase
Counting up Counting down
2(double frequency)
A-phase
B-phase
Counting up Counting down
2-phase 2 inputs
4(four times frequency)
A-phase
B-phase
Counting up Counting down
According to the different type of counter modes, HHSC 0~3 of EH series models can set
normal, double, thriple and four times these four frequency modes by using special
device D1225 to D1228:
Counter mode Signal Diagram
Type Setting value of special D Counting up(+1) Counting down(-1)
0 (normal
frequency)
U/D
U/D FLAG 1-phase1 input 1
(double frequency)
U/D
U/D FLAG 0
(normal frequency)
U
D 1-phase2 inputs 1
(double frequency)
U
D
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-13
Counter mode Signal Diagram
Type Setting value of special D Counting up(+1) Counting down(-1)
0 (normal
frequency)
A
B 1
(double frequency)
A
B 2
(triple frequency)
A
B
2-phase 2 inputs
3 (four times frequency)
A
B
U/D FLAG are special M device, M1241~M1244 and each indicates the setting flag of
C241~C244 counting up and down. Related flags and special register of high-speed counter:
Flag Function Explanation
M1150 Announce that DHSZ command is used as multi groups setting value compare mode
M1151 DHSZ command multi groups setting value compare mode execution completed
M1152 Announce that DHSZ command is used as frequency control mode
M1153 Frequency control mode execution completed
M1235 ~ M1244Specify counting direction of C235 ~ C244 high-speed counter When M12□□=Off, C2□□ counting up When M12□□=On, C2□□ counting down
M1246 ~ M1249M1251 ~ M1254
Monitor counting direction of C246~C249, C251~C254 high-speed counter When C2□□ counting up, M12□□=Off. C2□□ counting down, M12□□=On.
M1260 X5 is the reset input signal of all high-speed counters M1261 High-speed compare flag of DHSCR command
M1264 HHSC0 reset signal end (R) external control signal input contact disable
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-14
Flag Function Explanation
M1265 HHSC0 start signal end (S) external control signal input contact disableM1266 HHSC1 reset signal end (R) external control signal input contact disableM1267 HHSC1 start signal end (S) external control signal input contact disableM1268 HHSC2 reset signal end (R) external control signal input contact disableM1269 HHSC2 start signal end (S) external control signal input contact disableM1270 HHSC3 reset signal end (R) external control signal input contact disableM1271 HHSC3 start signal end (S) external control signal input contact disableM1272 HHSC0 reset signal end (R) internal control signal input contact M1273 HHSC0 start signal end (S) internal control signal input contact M1274 HHSC1 reset signal end (R) internal control signal input contact M1275 HHSC1 start signal end (S) internal control signal input contact M1276 HHSC2 reset signal end (R) internal control signal input contact M1277 HHSC2 start signal end (S) internal control signal input contact M1278 HHSC3 reset signal end (R) internal control signal input contact M1279 HHSC3 start signal end (S) internal control signal input contact M1289 High-speed counter interrupt, I010 masked M1290 High-speed counter interrupt, I020 masked M1291 High-speed counter interrupt, I030 masked M1292 High-speed counter interrupt, I040 masked M1293 High-speed counter interrupt, I050 masked M1294 High-speed counter interrupt, I060 masked M1312 C235 Start input control M1313 C236 Start input control M1314 C237 Start input control M1315 C238 Start input control M1316 C239 Start input control M1317 C240 Start input control M1320 C235 Reset input control M1321 C236 Reset input control M1322 C237 Reset input control M1323 C238 Reset input control M1324 C239 Reset input control M1325 C240 Reset input control M1328 C235 Start/Reset enable control M1329 C236 Start/Reset enable control M1330 C237 Start/Reset enable control M1331 C238 Start/Reset enable control M1332 C239 Start/Reset enable control M1333 C240 Start/Reset enable control
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-15
Special register Function Explanation
D1022 Double frequency selection of AB phase counter in ES/EP series models
D1150 DHSZ command for table counting register of multi-group setting comparison mode
D1151 DHSZ command for table counting register of frequency control mode D1152
(lower-bit) D1153
(upper-bit)
DHSZ command saves table counting register value that read in sequence from pulse output frequency of each group in D1153 and D1152.
D1225 First counter counting method setting, C241, C246, C251 counter mode D1226 Second counter counting method setting, C242, C247, C252 counter modeD1227 Third counter counting method setting, C243, C248, C253 counter mode D1228 Forth counter counting method setting, C244, C249, C254 counter mode
D1225 ~ D1228
Counter mode of Hardware high-speed counter, HHSC0~HHSC3 of EH series model When setting value is 0, it is normal frequency counter mode. When setting value is 1, it is double frequency counter mode. When setting value is 2, it is triple frequency counter mode. When setting value is 3, it is four times frequency counter mode.
API Applicable models
ES EP EH54 D HSCR
32-bit High-speed Counter Comparison Reset
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1 S2 D Note: Operand S2 should be C235~C240, C241~C244,
C246~C249, C251~C254. Please refer to the footnote of API 53 DHSCS command for details. Operand D uses the same counter as S2 operand. There is no 16-bit command for API 54, only 32-bit command DHSCR is available. Refer to each model specification for usage range. In ES and EP series models, D operand cannot use C device. In ES and EP series models, S2, D operand cannot use index register E, F to modify.
16-bit command
- - - -
32-bit command (13STEPS)
DHSCR Continuous execution - -
Flag: M1150~M1333. Refer to the footnote of API 53 DHSCS command for details. M1261. High-speed counter external reset mode selection. ES and EP series models doesn’t support. Refer to the footnote for details.
CommandExplanation
: Compare value : Numver of high-speed counter : Compare result
HSCR command compares the current value of the selected high-speed counter
against a selected comapre value . When the counters currrent value
changes to a value equal to , the device specified as is set Off. Even if the
compare result is unequal, the status of device will still be Off.
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-16
If the devices specified as the device are Y0~Y17, when the compare value and the present value of high-speed counter are equal, the compare result will
immediately output to the external inputs Y0~Y17 (specified Y output will be reset),
and other Y devices will be affected by the scan cycle. However, M, S devices are
immediate output, not being affected by the scan cycle.
ProgramExample
1
When M0=On and C251’s present value stepped from 99→100 or 101→100, Y10 will
be set Off.
When C251’s present value change from 199 to 200, the contact C251 will be On and
force Y0=On, but there will still be a program scan time delay output.
Y10 is status immediately reset device when specified counter reach. It also can be
used to specify the same number high-speed counter. Please refer to the program
example 2. M1000
DCNT C251 K200
M0DHSCR K100 C251 Y10
C251SET Y0
ProgramExample
2
When specifing the same number high-speed counter, the current value of high-speed
counter C251 will change from 999 1000 or 1001 1000 and C251 contact will be
reset to Off. M1000
DCNT C251 K200
DHSCR K1000 C251 C251
1000
200
C251outputcontact
affect by scan time
it doesn affect by scan time
Footnote
Please refer to the footnote of API 53 DHSCS command for the high-speed counters
and their usage range provided in each series models.
For EH series, M1261 is used to specify the external reset mode of high-speed
counter. Some high-speed counters provide input points for external reset. When
these input points being On, the corresponding current value of high-speed counter
will all be reset to 0 and the output contacts will turn Off. Therefore, user must use flag
M1261 to specify the external reset mode of high-speed counter and force the external
output being executed.
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-17
The function limit of M1261: Only can be used in hardware high-speed counters
C241~C254.
The followings are the using example: The input point of external reset of C251 is X2. If Y10=On. When M1261=Off, X2=On, the current value of C251 is reset to 0 and its contact
turns Off. When DHSCR command has been executed, there is no counter input and the compared result does not output. Therefore, Y10=On will remain unchaged. When M1261=On, X2=On, the current value of C251 is reset to 0 and its contact
turns Off. When DHSCR command has been executed, although there is no counter input, but compared result will still output. Therefore, the content of Y10 will be reset. M1000
DCNT C251 K1000
DHSCR K0 C251 Y10
X10M1261
API Applicable modelsES EP EH55 D
HSZ
Zone Comparison (High-speed Counter)
-
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1 S2 S D Note: Operand S1 should be equal to or smaller than operand S2
(S1 ≤ S2) Operand S2 should be C235~C240, C241~C244, C246~C249, C251~C254. Please refer to the footnote of API 53 DHSCS command for details. Operand D occupies 3 continuous devices. There is no 16-bit command for API 55, only 32-bit command DHSZ is available. Refer to each model specification for usage range. In EP series models, operand D cannot use index register E, F to modify.
16-bit command
- - - -
32-bit command (17 STEPS)
DHSZ Continuous execution - -
Flag: M1150~M1333. Refer to the footnote of API 53 DHSCS command.
M1150, M1151. DHSZ command execute multi devices comparison mode. Refer to the program 3 below. EP series models do not support these flags. M1152, M1153 DHSZ command has been used as frequency control mode. Refer to the program 4 below. EP series models do not support these flags.
CommandExplanation
: Lower-limit value of zone comparison : Upper-limit value of zone
comparison : Number of high-speed counter : compared result
should be equal to or smaller than (S1 ≦ S2).
Output operation won’t be affected by the scan time.
All outputs and zone comparison all use interrupt operation.
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-18
ProgramExample
1
The specified device is Y0, then Y0~Y2 will be occupied automatically.
When DHSZ command has been executed and high-speed counter C246 is counting,
if the upper- and lower limit value is reached, one of Y0~Y2 will be On. M1000
DCNT C246 K20000
DHSZ K1500 K2000 C246
Y0
Y0
Y1
Y2
When current value of C246 < K1500, Y0On
When K1500 < current value of C246 < K2000, Y1=On
When current value of C246 > K2000, Y2=On
ProgramExample
2
When using DHSZ command to control and stop high/low speed, C251 is AB phase
high-speed counter. There will be comparison value output of DHSZ command only
when counting pulse is stored in C251. Therefore, even the counting current value is
0, Y10 will not be On.
When X10=On, DHSZ command force Y10=On when counting current value ≦
K2,000. In order to improve this problem, use DZCPP command to compare C251
against and K2,000 when the program RUN at the beginning. When counting current
value ≦ K2,000, Y10=On and DZCPP command is Pulse execution command.
Command DZCPP only can be executed ONCE in program and Y10 will be still be On.
When drive contact X10=Off, Y10~Y12 will be reset to Off. X20
RST C251
ZRST Y10 Y12
M1000DCNT C251 K10000
X10DZCPP K2000 K2400 C251 Y10
DHSZ K2000 K2400 C251 Y10
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-19
Timing diagram
2000 2400
0
X10
Y10
Y11
Y12
0
high speedforward
low speedforward
Stop
current value ofC251 counter
Speed of variablespeed rotationalequipment
ProgramExample
3
When using the multi groups setting value comparison mode of DHSZ command, if
of DHSZ command is specified as special auxiliary relay M1150, it can execte a current value of high-speed counter and has the function which can compare and
output multi groups setting value.
Under this mode, is defined as starting device of comparison table. It only can be data register D and can be modified by index register E, F. But the number modified
by index register E, F is unchanged after the command has been executed. is defined as the data groups of comparison data. It only can be K1~K128 or H1~H80
and also can be can be modified by index register E, F. After the command has been
executed, it is disabled to change this value. is defined as the number of
high-speed counter and it should be C235~C254. is defined as mode setting. It only can be M1150 and can be modified by index register E, F. But if it is not M1150,
then will be disabled. The comparison table of high-speed counter consists of the head number of register
specified by and bank numbers (groups number) specified by . Please input the setting value of each register before the command being executed.
When current value of C251 high-speed counter specified by is equal to the setting value of (D1, D0), output Y specified by D2 will be reset to Off (D3=K0) or On
(D3=K1) and latched. All of output Y use interrupt operation.
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-20
When the current value of C251 is equal to the setting value of the first groups in the
comparison table, D1150=K1. If the current value of C251 is equal to the setting value
of the second groups, D1150=K2. Then the comparison will continute to execute in the
above described order. After the comparison operation of all groups are completed,
M1151=On for one scan cycle and D1150 will be reset to 0, then jump back to the first
groups to execute.
When the drive contact X10 turns Off, the operation of the command will be
interruptted and the content of table counting register D1150 will be reset to 0. But the
ON/OFF state is unchanged at that time.
When this command command has been executed and first scan to END command,
all setting value inside of the diagram are valid.
This function of this command only can be used ONCE in program. In EP series
models, this function does not provided.
This function of this command only can be used in hard ware high-speed counter
C241~C254. X10
DHSZ D0 K4 C251 M1150
Comparison table 32-bit comparison data
High word Low word Number of output
Y On/Off
indication Table counting register D1150
D1 (K0) D0 (K100) D2 (K10) D3 (K1) 0 D5 (K0) D4 (K200) D6 (K11) D7 (K1) 1 D9 (K0) D8 (K300) D10 (K10) D11 (K0) 2 D13 (K0) D12 (K400) D14 (K11) D15 (K0) 3
K10:Y10 K11:Y11
K0:Off K1:On
0→1→2→3→0Cyclic scan
M1151
D1050
Y11Y10
100
200
300
400
C251
01
23
0
current value
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-21
Related flags and special register of high-speed counter:
Flag Function Explanation
M1150 Announce that DHSZ command is used as multi groups setting value compare mode
M1151 For DHSZ command, Multi groups setting value compare mode execution completed
Special register Function Explanation
D1150 For DHSZ command, Table index of DHSZ Y output
ProgramExample
4
Frequency control operation (Combined DHSZ and DPLSY command): When of DHSZ command is special auxiliary relay M1152, it can execte a current value of
high-speed counter and has the function which can control pulse output frequency of
DPLSY command.
Under this mode, is defined as starting device of comparison table. It only can be data register D and can be modified by index register E, F. But the number modified
by index register E, F is unchanged after the command has been executed. is defined as the data groups of comparison data. It only can be K1~K128 or H1~H80
and also can be can be modified by index register E, F. After the command has been
executed, it is disabled to change this value. is defined as the number of
high-speed counter and it should be C235~C254. is defined as mode setting. It only can be M1152 and can be modified by index register E, F. But if it is not M1152,
then will be disabled. This function of this command only can be used ONCE in program. In EP series
models, this function does not provided. For EH series models, it only can be used in
hardware high-speed counters C241~C254. Please input the setting value of each
register before the command being executed.
When the current value of C251 specified by is within the range between the upper- and lower-limit of (D1, D0), the setting value of (D3, D2) will be converted to
pulse output frequency of DPLSY command. Then, the second groups in the
comparison table will continue to execute. After the comparison operation of all groups
are completed, M1153=On for one scan cycle and D1151 will be reset to 0, then jump
back to the first groups to execute.
If desiring to stop the execution at the last group, Please set the content of the last
group as KO.
When the drive contact X10 turns Off, the operation of the command will be
interruptted and the content of table counting register D1151 will be reset to 0.
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-22
X10DHSZ D0 K5 C251 M1152
PLS M0
DPLSY D1152 K0 Y0M0
Comparison table
32-bit comparison data High word Low word
Pulse output frequency 0~250KHz
Table counting register D1151
D1 (K0) D0 (K100) D3, D2 (K5,000) 0 D5 (K0) D4 (K200) D7, D6 (K10,000) 1 D9 (K0) D8 (K300) D11, D10 (K15,000) 2 D13 (K0) D12 (K400) D15, D14 (K6,000) 3 D17 (K0) D16 (K0) D19, D18 (K0) 4
0→1→2→3→4 Cyclic scan
D1051 01
20
34
0
5000
10000
15000
M1153
0
100
200
300
400
500
(Hz)
pulse output frequency
C251current value
Related flags and special register of high-speed counter:
Flag Function Explanation
M1152 Announce that DHSZ command is used as frequency control mode
M1153 For DHSZ command, frequency control mode execution completed
Special register Function Explanation
D1151 Table index changed by DHSZ D value
D1152 (low word)
D1153 (high word)
DHSZ command saves table counting register value that read in sequence from pulse output frequency of each group in D1153 and D1152.
D1336 (low word) D1337 (high word) Pulse numbers of DPLSY command output
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-23
The completed program is shown below: X10
DMOVP K5000 D2
DHSZ D0 K5 C251 M1152
DMOVP K10000 D6
DMOVP K15000 D10
DMOVP K6000 D14
DMOVP K0 D18
DMOVP K100 D0
DMOVP K200 D4
DMOVP K300 D8
DMOVP K400 D12
DMOVP K0 D16
PLS M0
M0DPLSY D1152 K0 Y0
frequency pulsenumber
output
Please do not change the setting value in this comparison table during the execution
of DHSZ command.
When the program has been executed to END command, the specified data will be
operated shown as the above example program. Therefore, DPLSY command should
be executed after the execution of DHSZ command.
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-24
API Applicable modelsES EP EH56
SPD Speed Detection
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1 S2 D
Note: The usage of Operand S1: In ES and EP series models, operand S1 only can be specified as X1~X2. In EH series models, operand S1 only can be specified as X0~X3. Operand D occupies 5 continuous devices. Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (7 STEP)
SPD Continuous execution - -
32-bit command
- - - - Flag: M1100. SPD command sampling one time flag
CommandExplanation
: External pulse input : Pulse reveived time(ms) : Detection result
: Specify the input of external pulse Pulse inputs of each series models
Models ES series models (V5.7 and above) and EP series models EH series models
Available inputs X1, X2 X0~X3
Count the number of pulse received at the inputs specified by during the time
specified by (unit is ms) and store te result in the register specified by .
occupies 5 registers, +1, indicate the detection value of previous
pulse, +3, +2 indicate the present accumulated count value of pulse and
+4 indicates the remaining count time, the max. can be 32767ms. Measured pulse frequency:
Pulse speed of each series models
Models ES series models (V5.7 and above) and EP series models EH series models
Max. measured frequency
X1(30KHz), X2(10KHz) Total frequency is less than 30KHz
X0/X1 (250KHz) X2/X3 (10KHz)
When using this command in EH series models, the pulse frequency of external input
X0~X3 and the frequency of hardware high-speed counter are the same and both of
them all can reach 250KHz.
This command is mainly used to obtain a proportional value of rotation speed. The
result and rotation speed are in proportion. The following equation can used to obtain the rotation speed of motor.
N: Rotation speed
n: The number of pulses per rotation of rotation equipment
N=( ) ( )rpmntD 310060
×
t: Detection time specified by (ms) If one of X0~X3 is specified, the specified device can not be used as the pulse input of
high-speed counter or external interrupt signal.
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-25
When SPD command has been executed and M1100 (SPD command sampling one
time flag)=On, SPD command will execute sampling one time. SPD command will
collect data one time when the movement of M1100 turning from Off to On, then stop.
If desiring to continue the collection, be sure to turn M1100 Off and execute SPD
command again.
ProgramExample
When X7=On, D2 will count the high-speed pulse input from X1. After 1,000ms, it will
stop counting automatically and store the result in D0.
After 1000ms counting completed, the content of D2 will be reset to 0. When X7 turns
On again, D2 will recount. X7
SPD X1 K1000 D0
X7
X1
1000
1000ms 1000ms
D4: content value
D2: currentvalue
D2: contentvalue
D0: detectionvalue
D4:remaining time (ms)
Footnote
In ES series models (V5.7 and above), if X1 or X2 is used in SPD command, then the
related high-speed counters or external interrupts I101, I201 can not be used.
API Applicable models
ES EP EH57 D PLSY
Pulse Output
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS1 S2 D Note: For the usage range of operand S1, S2 and D, please refer to
the command explanation for details. Refer to each model specification for usage range. In ES series models, PLSR command can be used twice but the output cannot be repeat.
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
PLSY Continuous execution - -
32-bit command (13 STEPS)
DPLSY Continuous execution - -
Flag: M1010~M1345. Refer to the footnote.
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-26
CommandExplanation
: Pulse output frequency : Pulse output number : Pulse output device (Please use the transistor output as output module)
specified as the pulse output frequency Output frequency range of each series models
Models ES series models EP series models EH series
Output frequency range 1~10,000Hz 1~32,000Hz 1~200,000Hz
specified as the pluse output number. 16-bit command: 1~32,767. 32-bit command: 2,147,483,647.
Numbers of continuous pulses of each series models
Models ES series models and EP series models
EH series models (TR models)
Specified method of continuous pulses
M1010(Y0) ON M1023(Y1) ON
Designated pulse output number is set to K0
If designated pulse output number is set to “0” (zero) in EH series models, it means
that unlimit numbers of pulses will continuously output. M1010(Y0) or M1023(Y1)
should be On when unlimt numbers of pulse continuously output .
specified as the pulse output device. In EH series models, only Y0 and Y2 can be specified. In EP/ES series models, only Y0 and Y1 can be specified.
When PLSY command has been executed, a specified quantity of pulses will
be output through pulse output device at the specified pulse output frequency
. When using PLSY command in progam, the outputs of PLSY command, API 58 PWM
command and API 59 PLSR command cannot be the same.
In EP/ES series models, after Y0 pulse output completed, M1029 will be turned On,
after Y1 pulse output completed, M1030 will be turned On. When PLSY command is
Off, M1029 or M1030 will be turned Off.
In EH series models, Y0 and Y1 pulse output completed, M1029 will be turned On,
after Y2, Y3 pulse output completed, M1030 will be turned On. When PLSY command
is Off, M1029 or M1030 will be turned Off.
The execution completed flag M1029, M1030 should be clear by user after the
execution of the command has been completed.
When command PLSY has been executed, Y start to output pulse. At this time, the
output will not be affected if is changed. If desiring to change pulse output number, stop command PLSY, then change the pulse number.
can be changed when command PLSY has been executed. It can change the
effective time. is changed when the program is executed to the executed command PLSY.
The ratio of Off TIME and On TIME of the pulse output is 1:1.
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-27
The actual output pulse numbers are stored in special registers D1336~D1339 when
the program is executed to the command PLSY. Refer to the footnote for details.
The special register D and M which are allowed to be changed during the execution of
the command. Refer to the footnote for details.
ProgramExample
When X0=On, the pulse of 1KHz for 200 times is generated from output Y0, after the
pulse has been completed, M1029=On trigger Y10=On.
When X0=Off, pulse output Y0 immediately stop. When X0 turns On again, the first
pulse start to output. X0
PLSY K1000 K200 Y0
M1029Y100
1 2 3 200Output Y0
0.5ms
1ms
Footnote
Flags description: M1010: In EH series MPU, when M1010= On, Y0, Y1 and Y2, Y3 will output pulse
while END command is executed. When output starts, M1010 will automatically turn Off. In EP/ES series MPU, when M1010=On, Y0 can output limitless continuous pulses. When M1010=Off, the pulse output numbers of Y0 are decided by
. M1023: In EP/ES series MPU, when M1023=On, Y1 can output limitless continuous
pulses. When M1023=Off, the pulse output numbers of Y1 are decided by .
M1029: In EH series MPU, M1029= On after Y0, Y1 pulse output complete. In EP/ES series MPU, M1029= On after Y0 pulse output complete. M1030: In EH series MPU, M1030= On after Y2, Y3 pulse output complete. In EP/ES series MPU, M1030= On after Y1 pulse output complete. M1078: In EP/ES series, Y0 pulse output stop. M1079: In EP/ES series, Y1 pulse output stop. M1258: In EH series MPU, (PWM command) Y0, Y1 pulse output signal exchange. M1259: In EH series MPU, (PWM command) Y2, Y3 pulse output signal exchange. M1334: In EH series MPU, CH0 pulse output stop. M1335: In EH series MPU, CH1 pulse output stop. M1336: In EH series MPU, CH0 pulse output indication flag. M1337: In EH series MPU, CH1 pulse output indication flag. M1338: In EH series MPU, CH0 offset pulse start flag. M1339: In EH series MPU, CH1 offset pulse start flag. M1340: In EH series MPU, the interrupt (I110) occur after CH0 pulse output complete. M1341: In EH series MPU, the interrupt (I120) occur after CH1 pulse output complete.
M1342: In EH series MPU, the interrupt (I130) occur simultaneously when CH0 pulse transmit.
M1343: In EH series MPU, the interrupt (I140) occur simultaneously when CH1 pulse transmit.
M1344: In EH series MPU, CH0 compensation pulse start flag. M1345: In EH series MPU, CH1 compensation pulse start flag.
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-28
Special registers description of EP series MPU: D1030: Present total pulse numbers of first output group Y0 (LOW WORD). D1031: Present total pulse numbers of first output group Y0 (HIGH WORD). D1032: Present total pulse numbers of second output group Y1 (LOW WORD). D1033: Present total pulse numbers of second output group Y1 (HIGH WORD). Special registers description of EH series MPU:
D1220: The phase setting of the first output group Y0, Y1: determine by the last two bits of D1220, other bits are invalid.
1. K0: Y0 output 2. K1: Y0, Y1 AB phase output, A leads B 3. K2: Y0, Y1 AB phase output, B leads A 4. K3: Y1 output
D1221: The phase setting of the second output group Y2, Y3: determine by the last two bits of D1221, other bits are invalid.
1. K0: Y2 output 2. K1: Y2, Y3 AB phase output, A leads B 3. K2: Y2, Y3 AB phase output, B leads A 4. K3: Y3 output
D1328: CH0 offset pulse number (Low word) D1329: CH0 offset pulse number (High word) D1330: CH1 offset pulse number (Low word) D1331: CH1 offset pulse number (High word) D1332: CH0 remaining pulse number (Low word) D1333: CH0 remaining pulse number (High word) D1334: CH1 remaining pulse number (Low word) D1335: CH1 remaining pulse number (High word) D1336: Present total output pulse numbers of first output group (Y0, Y1) (LOW WORD). D1337: Present total output pulse numbers of first output group (Y0, Y1) (HIGH WORD). D1338: Present total output pulse numbers of second output group(Y2,Y3)(LOW WORD). D1339: Present total output pulse numbers of second output group(Y2,Y3)(HIGH WORD). D1344: CH0 compensation pulse number (Low word) D1345: CH0 compensation pulse number (High word) D1346: CH1 compensation pulse number (Low word) D1347: CH1 compensation pulse number (High word)
When several high-speed pulse output commands (PLSY, PWM, PLSR) use Y0 to
output pulse in one program and simultaneously been executed in the same scanning
cycle, PLC will perform the command which has fewest step numbers.
The explanation of PLSY pulse output command and related devices of EH series
MPU: Explanation of PLSY command
Operand S1 S2 D Explanation Frequency setting Pulse quantity Output device
16-bit 0~32,767Hz 0~32,767 Range
32-bit 0~200KHz 0~2,147,483,647 Y0~Y3
Definition K0: No output Kn: Specified frequency output
K0: Continuous pulse output Kn: Specified pulse output
Refer to the setting of D1220, D1221
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-29
Explanation of the related device of PLSY command (Special D)
Device No. Data format Attribute Initial
value Content
D1220 16-bit R/W K0 The phase setting of the first output pulse group
D1221 16-bit R/W K0 The phase setting of the second output pulse group
D1328 Low word D1329 High word 32-bit R/W K0 The offset pulse number of the first pulse
group D1330 Low word D1331 High word 32-bit R/W K0 The offset pulse number of the first pulse
group D1332 Low word D1333 High word 32-bit R/W K0 The remaining pulse number of the first
pulse group D1334 Low word D1335 High word 32-bit R/W K0 The remaining pulse number of the second
pulse group D1336 Low word
D1337 High word 32-bit R/W K0 The current value of the first pulse group (The accumulated value of pulse output numbers)
D1338 Low word
D1339 High word 32-bit R/W K0 The current value of the second pulse group (The accumulated value of pulse output numbers)
D1341 Low word D1342 High word 32-bit R/W K200000 Max. output frequency
D1344 Low word D1345 High word 32-bit R/W K0 The compensation pulse number of the
first pulse group D1346 Low word D1347 High word 32-bit R/W K0 The compensation pulse number of the
second pulse group
Explanation of the related device of PLSY command (Special M) Device
No. Attribute Content Related setting device
M1010 R/W Two pulse output groups simultaneously M1029 R End indication flag of the first pulse group M1030 R End indication flag of the second pulse group M1334 R/W Pulse output stop of the first pulse group M1335 R/W Pulse output stop of the second pulse group M1336 R Output indication flag of the first pulse group M1337 R Output indication flag of the second pulse group
M1338 R/W OFFSET start flag of the first pulse group D1328, D1329
M1339 R/W OFFSET start flag of the second pulse group D1330, D1331
M1340 R/W Interrupt occur after the first pulse group output complete. I110
M1341 R/W Interrupt occur after the first pulse group output complete. I120
M1342 R/W Interrupt occur after the first pulse group output complete. I130
M1343 R/W Interrupt occur after the first pulse group output complete. I140
M1344 R/W Compensation start flag of the first pulse group D1344, D1345M1345 R/W Compensation start flag of the second pulse group D1346, D1347M1347 R/W Auto interrupt reset flag of the first pulse group M1348 R/W Auto interrupt reset flag of the second pulse group
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-30
API Applicable modelsES EP EH58
PWM Pulse Width Modulation Output
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1 S2 D Note: For the usage range of operand S1, S2 and D, please refer
to the command explanation. The content value of operand S1 should be smaller than the content value of S2. Refer to each model specification for usage range. In ES / EP series models, command PWM only can be used ONCE in program.
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
PWM Continuous execution - -
32-bit command
- - - - Flag: M1010~M1337. Refer to the footnote.
CommandExplanation
: Pulse output width : Pulse output cycle : Pulse output device (Please use transistor output as the output module)
is specified as pulse output width as t:0~32,767ms.
is specified as pulse output cycle as T:1~32,767ms, ≦ .
is specified as pulse output device. In EH series MPU, can be specified
as Y0, Y2. In EP/ES series models, can be specified as Y1. Modulated pulse output of each series models
Models ES/EX series models and EP series models EH series models
PWM output Y1 Y0, Y2
PWM command can be used TWICE in the program of EH series models. PWM
command can be used ONCE in the program of EP/ES series models.
The output cannot be the same as the output of API 57 PLSY, API 59 PLSR command
while PWM command is used in program.
When PWM command has been executed, the pulse output width and pulse
output cycle is output through pulse output device .
If > , an operation error will occur, M1067 =On. When is 0, there is
no pulse output from the pulse output device. When = , the pulse output device will be always On.
, can be changed during the execution of PWM command.
ProgramExample
When X0=On, Y1 output the following pulse. When X0=Off, output Y1 will also turn
Off. X0
PWM K1000 K200 Y1
Output Y1
t=1000ms
T=2000ms
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-31
Footnote
Flags description: M1010: In EH series MPU, when M1010= On, Y0, Y1 and Y2, Y3 will output pulse
while END command is executed. When output starts, M1010 will automatically turn Off.
M1067: In EH series MPU, when operand is error, M1067=On. M1070: In EP/ES series MPU, When PWM command output Y1, the pulse unit will
exchange. When M1070=On, the pulse unit is 100µs, when M1070=Off, the pulse unit is 1ms.
In EH series MPU, when the first pulse output group of PWM command output Y0, the pulse unit will exchange. When M1070=On, the pulse unit is 100µs, when M1070=Off, the pulse unit is 1ms.
M1071: In EH series MPU, when the first pulse output group of PWM command output Y2, the pulse unit will exchange. When M1071=On, the pulse unit is 100µs, when M1071=Off, the pulse unit is 1ms.
M1258: In EH series MPU, (PWM command) Y0, Y1 pulse output signal exchange.M1259: In EH series MPU, (PWM command) Y2, Y3 pulse output signal exchange.M1334: In EH series MPU, CH0 pulse output stop. M1335: In EH series MPU, CH1 pulse output stop. M1336: In EH series MPU, CH0 pulse output indication flag. M1337: In EH series MPU, CH1 pulse output indication flag.
When several high-speed pulse output commands (PLSY, PWM, PLSR) use Y0 to
output pulse in one program and simultaneously been executed in the same scanning
cycle, PLC will perform the command which has fewest step numbers.
Functions of EH series MPU
Explanation of PWM command and the related device of EH series models. Device
No. Data
Format Attribute Related setting device
M1010 R/W Two pulse output groups simultaneously M1070 R/W Y0 and Y1 PWM pulse time unit exchange M1071 R/W Y2 and Y3 PWM pulse time unit exchange M1258 R/W Y0 and Y1 PWM pulse output signal exchange M1259 R/W Y2 and Y3 PWM pulse output signal exchange M1334 R/W Pulse output stop of the first pulse group M1335 R/W Pulse output stop of the second pulse group M1336 R Output indication flag of the first pulse group M1344 R/W Output indication flag of the second pulse group D1344, D1345
API Applicable models
ES EP EH59 D PLSR
Pulse Wave Output with Acceleration/Deceleration Speed
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1 S2 S3 D
Note: For the usage range of operand S1, S2 and D, please refer to the command explanation. Refer to each model specification for usage range. In ES series models, PLSR command can be used TWICE in program but the output can not be the same.
16-bit command (9 STEPS)
PLSR Continuous execution - -
32-bit command (17 STEPS)
DPLSR Continuous execution - -
Flag: M1029, M1030. Execution Completed flag.
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-32
CommandExplanation
: Maximum speed (HZ) : Content of the pulse output quantity (PLS)
: Acceleration/Deceleration time (ms) : Pulse output device (Please use transistor output as output module)
: the maximum frequency (Hz) of output pulse. Settings: In 16-bit command: 10 to 32,767 Hz. In 32-bit command: 10 to 200,000 Hz. The maximum speed is deemed
to be the multiples of 10, if not, the first unit will be discarded automatically. 1/10 of the
maximum speed is the one time variation of the accel/decel speed. Note that the
condition meets the acceleration requirement of the step motor and would not result in
the step motor crash..
: Content of the pulse output quantity (PLS). Settings: In 16-bit command: 110~32,767 (PLS). In 32-bit command: 110~2,147,483,647(PLS). If the setting is
below 110, the pulse cannot output normally.
: Acceleration/Deceleration time (ms). Settings: below 5,000ms. The accel time and the decel time have to be the same and cannot be set without one another.
1. The accel/decel time has to be over 10 times the maximum scan time (contents of
D1012). If the setting is below 10 times, the slope of the accel/decel speed will be
inaccurate.
2. Minimum setting of the accel/decel time could be obtained from the following
equation. 90000
If the setting is smaller than the result of the above-mentioned equation, the
acceleration/deceleration time will be greater, and if the setting is smaller than the
9000/ , the result value of 9000/ will be treated as its regular setting. 3. Maximum setting of the accel/decel time could be obtained from the following
equation.
818
4. Number of the accel/decel speed variation steps is fixed to be 10. If the input acceleration/deceleration time is greater than the maximum setting, the maximum
setting will be treated as its regular setting. If the setting is smaller than the
minimum setting, the minimum setting will be treated as its regular setting.
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-33
PLSR command is the pulse output command with the accel/decel speed function.
The acceleration is conducted when the pulse wave goes from the static status to
reaching its targeted speed, and getting faster when the targeted speed is to be
reached. The pulse wave will stop its output once the targeted distance is reached.
When PLSR command has been executed, after set the maximum frequency , a
quantity of total pulse numbers and accel/decel time , then output them through
pulse output device . The output frequency is first raised up in 1/10 of the
maximum frequency /10 and the time of each output frequency is fixed as 1/9 of
.
Even user change , or when PLSR command has been executed, the output will not be affected.
After the pulse numbers of the first output pulse group (Y0, Y1) set by has been completely output, M1029=On. After the pulse numbers of the second output pulse
group (Y0, Y1) set by has been completely output, , M1030=On. When the command PLSR is activated again, M1029 or M1030 will turn to 0, then turn to 1 after
the PLSR command has been completed.
The output pulse of the first output group (Y0, Y1) and the cueent value of he second
output group (Y2, Y3) are stored in the special regisers D1336~D1339.
During the acceleration of each step, the pulse numbers (each frequency x time) may
not all be integer, but the output operation of PLC is conducted in whole integer
number. Therefore, the time of each interval may not be the same and has some
deviation. The offset is determined by the frequency value and the discarding decimal
point value. In order to ensure the output pulse numbers are correct, PLC will fill the
insufficiency pulse numbers to the last interval.
ProgramExample
When X0=On, the maximum frequency of command PLSR is 1,000Hz. The quantity of
total pulse numbers D10, accel/decel time is 3,000ms and pulses output from output
Y0. The pulses are output and the output frequency is 1,000/10 Hz every time. The
time of output pulse of each frequency is fixed as 3,000/9.
When X10 is OFF, output will be interrupted, and when turned ON again, counting of
the pulse will be counted from 0. X0
PLSR K1000 D10 K3000 Y0
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-34
Outputs: Y0 or Y2
Pulse speed(Hz)
Targeted speed: 10~200,000Hz
Time(Sec)Decel timebelow 5000ms
Accel timebelow 5000ms
16-bit command:110~32,767PLS32-bit command:110~2,147,483,647PLS
1 122
3 344
5 566
7 788
9 91010
Output pulses
The time interval of theone time pulse output is 1/9 of
The max. speed of theone time speed variation is 1/10 of
10-stepvariations
10-stepvariations
Footnote
The output cannot be the same as the output of API 57 PLSY, API 58 PWM command
while PLSR command is used in program.
When several high-speed pulse output commands (PLSY, PWM, PLSR) use Y0 to
output pulse in one program and simultaneously been executed in the same scanning
cycle, PLC will perform the command which has fewest step numbers.
Functions of EH series MPU
Explanation of the command and related devices in EH series MPU X0
PLSR K1000 D10 K3000 Y0
The speed range for the pulse of this command is 10~200,000Hz. And if the settings
for the high speed and the accel/decel time exceed this range, use the allowable
setting within this range for operation. Command Explanation
Operand S1 S2 S3 D
Explanation Max. frequency Total pulse quantity Accel/Decel Time Output device
16-bit 10~32,767Hz 110~32,767 Range 32-bit 10~200KHz 110~2,147,483,647 1~5000ms Y0~Y3
Definition K0: No output Kn: Specified frequency output
K0: Continuous pulse output Kn: Specified pulse output
Flag: M1067 M1068
Refer to the setting of D1220, D1221
1~5000ms 1~5000ms
16-bit command: 110~32,767PLS
16-bit command: 110~2,147,483,647PLS
Frequency F
Maximum speed: 10~200,000Hz
Decel timeAccel time
F0Start
frequency
Total output pulses
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-35
Explanation of the related device of PLSR command (Special D)
Device No. Data forma
t Attribute Initial
value Content
D1220 16-bit R/W K0 The phase setting of the first output pulse group
D1221 16-bit R/W K0 The phase setting of the second output pulse group
D1336 Low word
D1337 High word32-bit R/W K0
The current value of the first pulse group (The accumulated value of pulse output numbers)
D1338 Low word
D1339 High word32-bit R/W K0
The current value of the second pulse group (The accumulated value of pulse output numbers)
D1340 16-bit R/W K200 Start frequency D1341 Low wordD1342 High word 32-bit R/W K200000 Max. output frequency
Explanation of the related device of PLSR command (Special M) Device
No. Attribute Content Related setting device
M1010 R/W Two pulse output groups simultaneously M1029 R End indication flag of the first pulse group M1030 R End indication flag of the second pulse group M1334 R/W Pulse output stop of the first pulse group M1335 R/W Pulse output stop of the second pulse group M1336 R Output indication flag of the first pulse group M1337 R Output indication flag of the second pulse group M1067 R/W Program execution error flag M1068 R Execution error latch D1068
In EH series models, if the acceleration/deceleration time cannot reach the maximum
acceleration frequency, the acceleration/deceleration time and maximum frequency
will be adjusted automatically. The related functions are listed as follows: Step 1: First, use the following equations to obtain the result of (1), (2) and (3) to adjust
acceleration time.
13400 DF = if 10 60 SF >+ or 00 =F ⇒ 60S1
0 =F …………..(1)
( )( )10
23 2930
30SF
SS×+×
×< ……………..(2)
03
600000F
S ≥ ……………………….….(3)
Step 2: Calculates the interval of the acceleration of each step, FG by using the following
equation. The interval of each step are the same:59
1SFG = …..(4)
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-36
Step 3: Calculates the max. output pulse numbers of acceleration/ deceleration
time: 22
2 −=SPG ……(5)
Step 4: Set the following variables. Fi: The frequency of each acceleration/deceleration interval, i = 1~59,
GFFF += 01 , Gii FFF += −1 ……(6) TG: The acceleration/deceleration time of each acceleration/deceleration
interval 59
3STG = ………… (7)
Step 5: Entering the result of (5), (6), (7) to the following equation can get the result as
follows:∑=
≤×59
0iGGi PTF …………….. (8)
Step 6: In the equation of (8), if the value of the calculation result has been greater than the PG value before item 59 has been calculated.
In EH series models, the commands that are related to acceleration and deceleration
all can use the above equations.
The parameters of command PLSR must be input before the command has been
executed.
All acceleration and deceleration commands are with brake function. When the PLC
acceleration is executed but the switch contact is Off suddenly, the brake function is
activated and PLC will decelerate in the same slope of acceleration speed.
S1
F0
Time T
Frequency F
Origin acceleration path
Brake path
API Applicable modelsES EP EH60
IST Manual/Auto Control
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S D1 D2 Note: Operand S will occupy 8 continuous devices.
The usage range of operand D1 and D2 is S20~S899 and D2>D1. IST command only can be used one time in program. Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
IST Continuous execution - -
32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1040~M1047.
Refer to following for detail.
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-37
CommandExplanation
: The starting input number of the designated operation mode. : The
smallest number for the designated-status step point under the auto mode. : The greatest number for the designated-status step point under the auto mode.
The IST is a convenient command made specifically for the initial state of the step
ladder control procedure to accommodate the special auxiliary relay to the convenient
auto control command.
M1000IST X10 S20 S60
X10: Individual operation (Manual operation)
X11: Zero point return X12: Step operation X13: One cycle operation
X14: Continuous operation X15: Zero point return start switchX16: Start switch X17: Stop switch
When the IST command is executed, the following special auxiliary relay will switch
automatically.
M1040: Movement inhibited M1041: Movement start M1042: Status pulse M1047: STL monitor enable
S0: Manual operation/initial state step point S1: Zero point return/initial state step point S2: Auto operation/initial state step point
ProgramExample
1
When IST command is used, S10~S19 are for zero point return operation and the step
point of this state can’t be used as general step point. However, when using S0~S9
step points, S0 initiates “manual operation”, S1 initiates “zero point return operation”
and S2 initiates “auto operation”. Thus, there should be three circuits of these three
initial state step points first written in program.
When switching to S1 (zero point return mode), zero point return won’t have any
actions once one of S10~S19 is On.
When switching to S2 (auto operation mode), auto operation won’t have any actions
once one of between to is On or M1043=On
ProgramExample
2
Example: the Robot arm control (use IST command): Motion request: In the example, two kinds of balls (big and small) are separated and
moved to different boxes. Distribute the control panel for the control. Motion of the Robot arm: lower robot arm, collect balls, raise robot arm, shift to right,
lower robot arm, release balls, raise robot arm, shift to left to finish motion in order. I/O Device:
Y0
Y1Y2Y3
Left-limit X1
Upper-limit X4
Upper-limit X5
Right-limit X2(big balls)
Right-limit X3(small balls)
Big SmallBig/smallsensor X0
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-38
Control panel
X15 X16
X17
X20
X21
X22
X23
X24
X25
Step X12
One cycleoperation X13
Continuousoperation X14
Manualoperation X10
Zero return X11
Power start
Power stop
Zero return Auto start
Auto stop
Shiftto right
Shiftto left
Releaseballs
Collectballs
Lowerrobot arm
Raiserobot arm
Big/small sensor X0. The left-limit of the robot arm X1, the right-limit X2 (big balls), the right-limit X3 (small balls), the upper-limit X4, and the lower-limit X5. Raise robot arm Y0, lower robot arm Y1, shift to right Y2, shift to left Y3, and collect balls Y4.
START circuit:
M1000IST X10 S20 S80
X0M1044
X1 Y4
Manual operation mode:
X20SET
RST Y4
Y4SS0
X21
X22 Y1Y0
X23 Y0Y1
X24 X4Y2
Y3
X25 X4Y3
Y2
Collect balls
Release balls
Lower robot arm
Raise robot armCondition interlock
Shift to right
Shift to left
Condition interlockRaise robot arm to theupper-limit (X4 is ON)
Zero point return mode:
SFC figure:
S1
S10
X15
S11
X4
S12
X1
RST Y4
RST Y1
Y0
RST Y2
Y3
SET M1043
RST S12
Release balls
Stop lowering robot arm
Raise robot arm to theupper-limit (X4 is ON)
Stop shifting to right
Shift to left and shift tothe left-limit (X1 is On)
Start zero return completed flag
Zero return operation completed
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-39
Ladder Diagram: X15
SET S10SS1
RST Y4SS10
RST Y1
Y0X4
SET S11
RST Y2SS11
Y3X1
SET S12
SET M1043SS12
RST S12
Enter zero return operation mode
Release balls
Stop lowering robot arm
Raise robot arm to theupper-limit (X4 is ON)
Stop shifting to right
Shift to left and shift tothe left-limit (X1 is On)
Start zero return completed flag
Zero return operation completed
Auto operation (step/one-cycle/continuous operation modes):
SFC figure:
S2
S20
S30
S31
M1044
X5
T0
Y1
SET
Y0
S32
X4
X2
S50 Y1
Y2
S2
X1
M1041
X0Y4
TMR T0 K30
S60 RSTX5
Y4
TMR T2 K30
S70
T2
Y0
S80
X4
Y3X1
S40
S41
X5
T1
SET
Y0
S42
X4
X3
Y2
X0Y4
TMR T1 K30
X3X2
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-40
Ladder Diagram:
SET S20
SET S30
SET Y4
Y0
END
X5
S31S
X4
TMR T0
SET S32
S2S
M1041 M1044
S20S
S30S
Y1X0
SET S40X5 X0
SET S31T0
K30
Y2S32
SX2
SET S50
X2
SET Y4
TMR T1
S40S
SET S41T1
K30
Y0S41
SX4
SET S42
Y2S42
SX3
SET S50
X3
Y1S50
SX5
SET S60
RST Y4
TMR T2
S60S
SET S70T2
K30
Y0S70
SX4
SET S80
Y3S80
SX1
X1
RET
S2
Enter auto operation mode
Collect balls
Release balls
Lower robot arm
Shift to right
Raise robot arm to theupper-limit (X4 is ON)
Shift to left and shift tothe left-limit (X1 is On)
Collect balls
Raise robot arm to theupper-limit (X4 is ON)
Shift to right
Lower robot arm
Raise robot arm to theupper-limit (X4 is ON)
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-41
Footnote
Flag explanation:
M1040: step point movement inhibited. When M1040=ON, all movements of the step point
are inhibited.
1. Manual operation mode: M1040 keeps being ON.
2. Zero point return mode/one cycle operation mode: During the time of pressing
STOP button and pressing START button again, M1040 will keep being ON.
3. Step operation mode: M1040 keeps being ON, and will only be OFF when the
START button is pressed.
4. Continuous operation mode: When PLC goes from STOP→RUN, M1040 keeps
being ON, and will be OFF when the START button is pressed.
M1041: Step point movement start: the special auxiliary relay that reflects the movement of
the primary step point (S2) to the next step point. 1. Manual operation mode/Zero point return mode: M1041 keeps being OFF. 2. Step operation mode/One cycle operation mode: M1041 will only be OFF when
the START button is pressed. 3. Continuous operation mode: Keeps being ON when the START button is pressed,
and keeps being OFF when the STOP button is pressed. M1042: START pulse: Only one pulse will be sent out when the button is pressed.
M1043: Zero point return complete: Once M1043 =ON is driven, it means that the RESET
motion has been executed.
M1044: Conditions of the origin: Under the continuous operation mode, conditions of the
origin, M1044, have to be driven to ON to execute the motion of initial step point (S2)
moving to the next step point.
M1045: All output reset inhibit.
If executing conditions: A. from manual control S0 to zero point return S1
B. from auto operation S2 to manual operation S0
C. from auto operation S2 to zero point return S1 1. When M1045=Off and one of S of D1~D2 is ON, step point of SET Y output and
actions will be cleared to Off. 2. When M1045 =On, SET Y output will be reserved and step point during action will
be cleared to Off.
3. If executing from zero point return S1 to manual operation S0, no matter
M1045=On or M1045=Off, SET Y output will be reserved and step point action will
be cleared to Off.
M1046: Setting STL state to On: If one of step point S is On, M1046=On. After M1047 forces
to be On, M1046 will be On once one of S is On. Besides, 8 points numbers before S
is on will be recorded in D1040~D1047.
M1047: STL monitor enabled. When IST command starts executing, M1047 will be forced to
be On and it will be forced to On for each scan time once IST command is still On.
This flag is used to monitor all S. D1040~D1047: ON state number 1-8 of step point S.
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-42
API Applicable models ES EP EH 61 D
SER P Search a Data Stack
-
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1 S2 D N Note: If operand S2 uses with device F, it is only available in
16-bit command. Operand D occupies 5 continuous devices. The usage of operand n: n=1~256 (16-bit command), n=1~128 (32-bit command) Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (9 STEPS)
SER Continuous execution - -
32-bit command (17 STEPS)
DSER Continuous execution - -
Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Starting device of data stack for multiple devices comparison : Value
data for comparison : Starting device for storing compared result : Data stack length for comparison
specify the numbers of compared registers and specify the compared
numbers. The specified data is compared against the data specified by and the
compared result is stored in several registers specified by .
When using 32-bit command to designate registers, , , and specify 32-bit register.
ProgramExample
When X0=On, the data stack consist of D10~D19 are compared against D0 and the
result is stored in D50~D54. If the equal value does not exist, the content of D50~D52
will all be 0.
The data is compared in algebra formate. (-10<2)
The largest value of all compared data will be record in D53 and the samllest value of
all compared data will be record in D54. When the numbers of largest value and
smallest are more than one, only the numbers of largest value will be recorded. X0
SER D10 D0 D50 K10
Content value Compared data Data number Result D10 88 0 D11 100 1 Equal D12 110 2 D13 150 3 D14 100 4 Equal D15 300 5 D16 100 6 Equal D17 5 7 Smallest D18 100 8 Equal
n
D19 500
D0=K100
9 Largest
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-43
Content value Explanation
D50 4 The total data numbers of equal value D51 1 The number of the first equal value D52 8 The number of the last equal value D53 7 The number of the smallest value D54 9 The number of the largest value
API Applicable models
ES EP EH62 D ABSD
Absolute Drum Sequencer -
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS1 S2 D n Note: When operand S1 is specified as KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, K4
should be specified in 16-bit command and K8 should be specified in 32-bit command. The usage range of n: n=1~64 Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (9 STEPS)
ABSD Continuous execution - -
32-bit command (17 STEPS)
DABSD Continuous execution - -
Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Starting device of the compared data table : Number of counter :
Starting number of compared result : Groups of multi-step comparison The ABSD command is a multi-step comparison command and usually used in
absolute cam control.
of DABSD command can specify high-speed counter. However, when the current value of high-speed counter is compared against the setting value, the result
can not output immediately because it is influenced by the scan time. If immediate
output is desired, please use the DHSZ command, the specific comparison command
for high-speed counter.
ProgramExample
Before executing the ABSD command, use MOV command to write each setting value
into D100~D107 in advance. The content of the even number D is the lower-limit value
and the content of the odd number D is the upper-limt value.
When X0=On, the current value of counter C10 is compared against the upper- and
lower-limit value of D100~D107 four groups. The compared result is showed in
M10~M13.
When X10=Off, the origin On/Off state of M10~M13 will not be changed. X10
ABSD D100 C10 M10 K4
C10RST C10
X11CNT C10 K400
X11
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-44
M10~ M13 will be On when the current value of C10 is equal to or higher than the
lower-limit value and equal to or lower than the upper-limit value.
Lower-limit value Upper-limit value Current value of C10 Output
D100= 40 D101=100 50≦C10≦100 M10=On
D102=120 D103=210 120≦C10≦210 M11=On
D104=140 D105= 170 140≦C10≦170 M12=On
D106=150 D107=390 150≦C10≦390 M13=On
When the lower-limit value is higher than the upper-limit value, if the current value of
C10 is higher than the lower-limit value and lower than the upper-limit value
(C10>140), M12=On.
Lower-limit value Upper-limit value Current value of C10 Output
D100= 40 D101=100 50≦C10≦100 M10=On
D102=120 D103=210 120≦C10≦210 M11=On
D104=140 D105= 60 60≦C10≦140 M12=Off
D106=150 D107=390 150≦C10≦390 M13=On
4002000
40 100
120 210
60 140
150 390
M0
M1
M2
M3
API Applicable models
ES EP EH63 INCD
Increment Drum Sequencer -
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS1 S2 D N Note: When operand S1 is specified as KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, K4
should be specified. In 16-bit command, operand S2 should be C0~C198 and will occupy 2 continuous counters. The usage range of operand n: n=1~64 Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command ( 9 STEPS)
INCD Continuous execution - -
32-bit command
- - - - Flag: M1029 execution completed flag
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-45
CommandExplanation
: Starting device of the compared data table : Number of counter :
Starting number of compared result : Groups of multi-step comparison The INCD command is a multi-step comparison command and usually used in relative
cam control.
The current value of is compared against the setting value of . Once the
current value is equal to the setting value, the current value of will be reset to 0
and be compared again. The return times will be stored in +1.
When the comparison of groups data has been completed, the execution completed falg M1029 will On one scan cycle.
ProgramExample
Before executing the INCD command, use MOV command to write each setting value
into D100~D104 in advance. D100=15, ,D101=30, D102=10, D103=40, D104=25.
The current value of counter C10 is compared against the setting value of
D100~D104. Once the current value is equal to the setting value, the current value of
C10 will be reset to 0 and be compared again.
The return times will be stored in C11.
When the content of C11 increase 1, M10~M14 will also change in response. Please
refer to the following timing diagram.
When the comparison of 5 groups data has been completed, the execution completed
falg M1029 will On one scan cycle.
When X0 turns from On to Off, C10 and C11 will all bereset to 0 and M10~M14 all turn
Off. When X0 turns On again, this command will be executed again from the
beginning.
INCD D100 C10 M10 K5
X0CNT C10 K100
M1013
X0
M10
M12
M11
M13
M14
M1029
15 10 15 153030
4025
1110 0 02 3 4
C10
C11
Current value
Current value
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-46
API Applicable modelsES EP EH64
TTMR Teaching Timer
-
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
D n Note: Operand D will occupy 2 continuous devices.
The usage range of operand n: n=0~2 Refer to each model specification for usage range. It only can use TTMR command eight times in program.
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
TTMR Continuous execution - -
32-bit command
- - - - Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Device number for storing the On duration of the button switch : Multiple setting
The On duration of external button switch is measured and stored in the number of
+1, the measured unit is 100ms periods. The content of +1 in seconds is
multiplied by and stored in .
When multiple setting n=0, the measured unit of is in seconds. When n=1, the
measured unit of is 100ms periods (is multiplied by 10). When n=2, the
measured unit of is 10ms periods (is multiplied by 100).
ProgramExample
1
The time that the button switch X0 is pushed (On duration of X0) will be stored in D1, n
is used to specify the multiple of the time and the total bit time is stored in D0. Then the
button switch can be used to adjust the setting value of timer.
When X0 turns Off, the content of D1 will be reset to 0 but the content of D0 is
unchanged. X0
TTMR D0 K0
X0
D1D0
D0D1
T Tpushed time (sec) pushed time (sec)
If On duration of X0 is T seconds, the relation between D0, D1 and n are shown as the
table below.
n D0 D1(unit: 100 ms) K0 (unit: s) 1×T D1=D0×10 K1 (unit: 100 ms) 10×T D1=D0 K2 (unit: 10 ms) 100×T D1=D0/10
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-47
ProgramExample
2
Using TTMR command to write 10 groups setting time.
Write the setting value into D100~D109 in advance.
The measured unit of the following timers T0~T9 is 0.1 second and the measured unit
of the alternate is 1 second.
Connect one bit digital switch to X0~X3 and use BIN command to convert the setting
value of digital switch to BIN value and store in E.
The On duration (in sec) of X10 is stored in D100.
M0 is the pulse of one time scan cycle generated when the alternate timer button is
released.
Use the setting number of digital switch as the pointers of index register, and then
transmit the content of D100 to D200E (D200~D209). M10
TMR T0 D100
M11TMR T1 D101
M19TMR T9 D109
M1000BIN K1X0 E
X10TTMR D200 K0
X10PLF M0
M0MOV D100 D200E
Footnote
For EP series models, it can only use TTMR command eight times in program. If used
in subroutine or interrupt subroutine, it only can use ONCE.
For EH series models, the maximum TTMR command groups it can only use at the
same time is eight groups.
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-48
API Applicable modelsES EP EH65
STMR Special Timer
-
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S M D Note: The operand S: EP series models can use T0~T191, EH
series models can use T0~T199 The usage range of operand m: m=1~32767 Operand D occupies 4 continuous devices. Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (7 STEP)
STMR Continuous execution - -
32-bit command
- - - - Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Number of timer : Setting value of timer, unit is 100ms : Starting device of output device
STMR command is a command which provides Off-delay, one shot and flash loop.
The number of timer specified by STMR command can not be reapeat.
ProgramExample
When X10=On, the settting value of the timer T0 specified by STMR command is 5
seconds.
Y0 is the contact of Off-delay: When X10 turns from Off to On, Y0= On. When X10
turns On to Off and delay 5 seconds, Y0=Off.
When X10 turns from On to Off, Y1= On output one time for 5 seconds.
When X10 turns from Off to On, Y2=On output one time for 5 seconds.
When X10 turns from Off to On, Y3= On after delay 5 seconds. When X10 turns from
On to Off, Y3=Off after delay 5 seconds. X10
STMR T0 K50 Y0
X10
Y0
Y1
Y2
Y3
5 sec 5 sec
5 sec5 sec
5 sec
5 sec
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-49
Add a b contact of Y3 after the drive contact X10, ans then Y1, Y2 can be used as the
output of flash loop. When X10 turns Off, Y0, Y1 and Y3 will be Off and the content of
T10 will be reset to 0. X10
STMR T10 K50 Y0Y3
X10
Y1
Y2 5 sec 5 sec
API ☺ Applicable modelsES EP EH66
ALT P ON/OFF Alternate
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range.
ES series models do not support pulse execution command (ALTP).
16-bit command (3 STEP)
ALT Continuous execution ALTP Pulse
execution
32-bit command - - - - Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Dentisation device This command is usually pulse execution command (ALTP).
ProgramExample
1
When X0 turns from Off to On for the first time, Y0=ON. When X0 turns from Off to On
for the second time, Y0=OFF. X0
ALTP Y0
X0
Y0
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-50
ProgramExample
2
The ALT command is a command, which use one switch to control start and stop mode.
In the beginning, M0=Off, so Y0=On, Y1=Off. When X10 is activated for the first time,
M0=ON, Y1=ON and Y0=OFF. When X10 is activated for the second time, M0=OFF,
Y0=ON, Y1=OFF. X10
ALT M0M0
Y0M0
Y1
ProgramExample
3
Output Y will flash. When X10= On, T0 will generate a pulse every two seconds and
output Y0 will be switching between On and Off mode depending on the pulse of T0. X10
TMR T0
ALTP Y0
K20T0
T0
API Applicable models
ES EP EH67 RAMP
Ramp Signal -
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS1 S2 D N Note: The usage range of operand n: n=1~32767
Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command ( 9 STEPS)
RAMP Continuous execution - -
32-bit command
- - - - Flag: M1026 Starting mode (Please
refer to the footnote) M1029 Execution completed flag
CommandExplanation
: Start setting of ramp signal : End setting of ramp signal : Current
value of ramp signal : Scan times This command is used to get a ramp signal. A ramp signal has a strong connection
with linear and scan time. Therefore, must fix the scan time before using this RAMP
command.
Write the start setting value of ramp signal to D10 and end setting value of ramp signal
to D11 in advance. When X0 is On, the setting value is forwarding from D10 to D11
(setting value in D10 will be increased) and the proceeding time (n= 100 times scans)
is stored in D12.
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-51
The scan time can be fixed if set M1039=On in the program previously. Then, using
MOV command to write the setting value of the fixed scan time into special register
D1039. Take the above program as an example, if the setting value is 30ms and
n=K100, the time between D10 and D11 is 3 second (D3: 30ms×100).
During the execution of this command, when starting signal X10 turns Off, this
command will stop the operation. When X10 turns On again, the content value of D12
will be reset to 0(zero) and calculated again.
After the execution of this command has been completed, M1029= On and the
content value of D12 will be reset to the setting value of D10.
Using this command with analog signal output can execute the operation of Sort
Start/Stop.
If start PLC from STOP to RUN when X10= On, please reset the content value of D12
to 0(zero) in the beginning of the program. (If D12 is a latched area.)
X10RAMP D10 D11 D12 K100
D10
D12
D11
D11D12
D10
D10<D11 D10 D11>?times scans ?times scans
The scan times is stored in D13
Footnote
On/Off condition of starting mode flag M1026 and the change of the content value in
D12 are shown below:
D11
D10D12
M1029
M1026=ON
X10
D11
D10D12
M1029
M1026=OFF
Starting signalX10 Starting signal
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-52
API Applicable modelsES EP EH69
SORT Data Sort
-
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S m1 m2 D n Note: The usage range of operand m1: m1 =1~32
The usage range of operand m2: m2 =1~6 The usage range of operand n: n=1~ m2 Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command ( 11 STEPS)
SORT Continuous execution - -
32-bit command
- - - - Flag: M1029 Execution completed flag
CommandExplanation
: Starting device of source data table : Sort data grops : Column
numbers of each data : Starting device for storing sort data : Reference value of sort data
The resulting sorted data is stored in the m1 × m2 registers counted from the starting
device specified by . Therefore, if the device and specify the same register, the resulting sorted data will be the same as the content of source device
.
An ideal most right number of the head number specified by is 0. The data sort will be completed after the SORT command being processed m1 times.
Once the SORT command has been completed, the Flag M1029= On.
ProgramExample
When X0 is On, it starts to sort specified data. After the data sort is completed,
M1029= On. During the execution of the SORT command, do not change the sort
data. If user want to re-sort the data, be sure to turn X0 from Off to On again. X0
SORT D0 K5 K5 D50 D100
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-53
Example table of data sort Data numbers: m2
Data Column 1 2 3 4 5 Column
Row Students
No. Chinese English Mathematics Physis and Chemistry
1 (D0)1 (D5)90 (D10)75 (D15)66 (D20)79
2 (D1)2 (D6)55 (D11)65 (D16)54 (D21)63
3 (D2)3 (D7)80 (D12)98 (D17)89 (D22)90
4 (D3)4 (D8)70 (D13)60 (D18)99 (D23)50
Dat
a nu
mbe
rs: m
1
5 (D4)5 (D9)95 (D14)79 (D19)75 (D24)69
Sort data table when D100=K3. Data numbers: m2
Data Column 1 2 3 4 5 Column
Row
Students No. Chinese English Mathematics Physis and
Chemistry
1 (D50)4 (D55)70 (D60)60 (D65)99 (D70)50
2 (D51)2 (D56)55 (D61)65 (D66)54 (D71)63
3 (D52)1 (D57)90 (D62)75 (D67)66 (D72)79
4 (D53)5 (D58)95 (D63)79 (D68)75 (D73)69
Dat
a nu
mbe
rs: m
1
5 (D54)3 (D59)80 (D64)98 (D69)89 (D74)90
Sort data table when D100=K5. Data numbers: m2
Data Column 1 2 3 4 5 Column
Row
Students No. Chinese English Mathematics Physis and
Chemistry
1 (D50)4 (D55)70 (D60)60 (D65)99 (D70)50
2 (D51)2 (D56)55 (D61)65 (D66)54 (D71)63
3 (D52)5 (D57)95 (D62)79 (D67)75 (D72)69
4 (D53)1 (D58)90 (D63)75 (D68)66 (D73)79
Dat
a nu
mbe
rs: m
1
5 (D54)3 (D59)80 (D64)98 (D69)89 (D74)90
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-54
API Applicable modelsES EP EH70 D
TKY 10-Key Keyboard Input
-
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S D1 D2 Note: Operand S occupies 10 continuous devices
Operand D2 occupies 10 continuous devices Refer to following for detail.
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
TKY Continuous execution - -
32-bit command (13 STEPS)
DTKY Continuous execution - -
Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Head input device : Destination device for storing key input value
: Key input signal
This command can specify ten external input devices from and these ten external input devices is identified as decimal value of 0 to 9. These ten external input
devices are connected to ten keys respectively. When one of the ten keys is pressed,
the value of decimal numbers from 0 to 9,999 (max. 4 digits in 16-bit command) or from
0 to 99,999,999 (max. 8 digits in 32-bit command) can be inputted and stored in
destination device . The device is used to store the condition of that key has been pressed.
ProgramExample
Using this command can specify ten input terminals from X0 to connect to ten keys
which number is from 0 to 9. When X20=On, the command is executed and it will store
the BIN value which is inputted by keys into D0 and M10~M19 is used to store the
condition of that key has been pressed. X20
TKY X0 D0 M10
PLC
0 1 32 4 5 6 7 8 9
X3X2X1X0S/S X6X5X4 X10X7 X11+24V0V
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
D0
103
102
101
100
number key
BCD value one digit number BCD code
BIN value
overflow
BCD value
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-55
As the time chart shown below, the four keys are connected to X5, X3, X0, X1 of
number keyboard. After pressing the four keys in that order of 1234 and the number
5,301 will be entered into D0. The max. number which can be entered in D0 is 9,999 i.e.
4 digits. If the entered number exceeds the above allowable range, the highest digits will
overflow.
After X2 is pressed, M12=On untill other keys are pressed. The situation of other press
keys are the same.
When any key of X0~X11 is pressed, one device of M10~M19 will be On.
If any key is pressed, M20=On.
When the drive contact X20 turns Off, the previous value do not change but M10~M20
all turns Off.
X0
X1
X3
X5 j
k
l
m
j k l m
M10
M11
M13
M15
M20
Key outputsignal
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-56
API Applicable modelsES EP EH71 D
HKY 16-Key Keyboard Input
-
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S D1 D2 D3
Note: Operand S occupies 4 continuous devices Operand D1 occupies 4 continuous devices Operand D3 occupies 8 continuous devices Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (9 STEPS)
HKY Continuous execution - -
32-bit command (17 STEPS)
DHKY Continuous execution - -
Flag: M1029 execution completed flagM1167 HKY input mode switch Please refer to the footnote
CommandExplanation
: Head scan input device : Head scan output device : Destination
device for storing key input value : Key input signal This command can create a 16-key keyboard which is a multiplex of 4 continuous
external input devices from and 4 continuous external output devices from
by matrix scan. The key input value will be stored in and is used to store the condition of that key has been pressed.
When this command is executed every time, the execution completed flag M1029 will
be On for the duration of that key pressed (one scan cycle).
If two or more keys are pressed at the same time, only the key activated first is
effective.
When HKY command is used in 16-bit command, can store numbers from 0 to
9,999 (max. 4 digits). When DHKY command is used in 32-bit command, can store numbers from 0 to 99,999,999 (max. 8 digits). If the entered number exceeds the
above allowable range, the highest digits will overflow.
ProgramExample
Using this command to create a 16-key keyboard which is a multiplex of 4 continuous
external input devices X10~X13 and 4 continuous external output devices Y10~Y13.
When X4=On, the command is executed and it will store the BIN value which is
inputted by keys into D0 and M0~M7 is used to store the condition of that key has been
pressed.
X4HKY X10 Y10 D0 M0
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-57
Number input:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
D0
103
102
101
100
number key
one digit number BCD codeBCD value
BCD value
BIN value
overflow
Function key input:
When press A key, M0=On and latch. Next, press D key and then M0=Off, M3=On and latch.
If two or more keys are pressed at the same time, only the key activated first is effective.
F E D C B A
M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0 Key output signal:
When any key of A to Fis pressed, M6=On one time. When any key of 0 to 9 is pressed, M7=Onone time.
When the drive contact X4 turns Off, the previous value do not change but M0~M7 all
turns Off.
External wiring:
Y13Y12Y11Y10COM
X13X12X11X10COM
C D E F
8 9 A B
4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3
PLC( )Transistor output
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-58
Footnote
When this command is executed, 8 times scan cycles is required to read the input
value of keys sucessfully. If the scan cycle is too long or too short, it may cause the key
to input incorrectly. Therefore, user can use the following command to avoid it.
When the scan cycle is too short, the I/O may not response in time and can not
read the key input correctly. At this time, user can fix the scan time to avoid it.
When the cycle is too long, the response of key may become slow. User can avoid
this by writing this command in a time interrupt subroutine and executing this
command in the fix time.
The function of flag M1167:
When M1167=On, HKY command can input hexadecimal value of 0~F.
When M1167=Off, A~F of HKY command are used as function keys.
API Applicable models
ES EP EH72 DSW
Digital Switch Input -
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS D1 D2 n
Note: The usage range of operand n: n=1~2 Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (9 STEPS)
DSW Continuous execution - -
32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1029 Execution completed flag
CommandExplanation
: Head input device : Head output device : Destination device for
storing the setting value : Number of digits This command is used to read one or two groups of 4 digits switch through 4 or 8
continuous external input devices from and 4 continuous external devices from
and store the setting value in destination device . When is 1, only
one group of digital switches is read. When is 2, two groups of digital switches are read.
ProgramExample
The first group of switches consists of X20~X23 and Y20~Y23. The second group of
switches consists of X24~X27 and Y20~Y23. When X10=On, the command starts to
execute. The setting value of the first group of switches are read and converted to BIN
value and stored in D20. The setting value of the second group of switches are read
and converted to BIN value and stored in D21. X10
DSW X20 Y20 D20 K2
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-59
When X10=On, Y20~Y23 will be On and scan in circles automatically. After the
completion of each circle scan, execution completed falg M1029=ON is a scan period
after a circle scan.
Outputs Y20~Y23 please use transistor output. Besides, please make sure that every
1, 2, 4, 8 terminal should connect a diode (0.1A/50V) to the inputs of PLC in serial as
shown in the example below.
X10
Y20
Y21
Y22
Y23
M1029
0.1s
0.1s
0.1s
0.1s
0.1s 0.1s
interrupt
execution completed
operation start
Wiring diagram of digital switch
S/S X20 X21 X22 X23 X24 X25 X26 X27
Y23Y22Y21Y20C
1 2 4 8 1 2 4 8
PLC
10 10 10 100 1 2 3
100 101 102 103
0V +24V
BCD digitalswitches
should connecta diode (1N4148)in serial
The first group The second group
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-60
Footnote
When the scan terminals are relay outputs, the following program technique is used
with this command to operate successfully:
When X10=On, DSW command is executed. When X10 turns Off, M10 will be On
until the scan terminals of DSW command complete one output scan cycle. Then,
M10 will turn Off.
If the drive contact X10 use button switch, every time when X10 is pushed, M10,
the scan terminals specified by DSW command, will be reset to Off after the
completion of one output scan cycle. Then, the command will stop executing, the
data of digital switch will be read completely and the scan terminals will be activated
while the button switch is pushed. Therefore, even relay output is used in this
situation, the relay can be used for long because the operation of relay is not
frequent.
M10DSW X20 Y20 D20 K2
X10SET M10
M1029RST M10
API Applicable models
ES EP EH73 SEGD
P Decode the 7-segment Display Panel
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S D
Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (SEGDP)
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
SEGD Continuous execution SEGDP Pulse
execution
32-bit command - - - - Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Source device for decoding : Output device after decoding
ProgramExample
When X10=On, contents (0~F: 16 bits) of the lower 4 bits (b0~b3) of D10 will be
decoded as readable in the 7-segment display panel for output. The decoding results
will be stored in Y10~Y17. X10
SEGD D10 K2Y10
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-61
Decoding Chart of the 7-segment Display Panel:
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F 1111
1110
1101
1100
1011
1010
1001
1000
0111
0110
0101
0100
0011
0010
0001
0000 ON OFFON ON ON ON ON
OFFOFFOFFOFF OFFON ON
ON ON ON ONOFF OFF ON
ON ON ON ON ONOFFOFF
OFFOFF OFFON ON ON ON
ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON
OFF ON ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON OFFOFF OFF
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON ON ONOFF
ON ON
OFF OFF ON ON ON
OFF ONON
ON OFF ON
OFF OFF ON ON ON ON
OFF OFF OFF
a
c
b
d
g
ON
ON
ONON ONON OFF
ON ON
ON OFF ON OFF
OFF ON ON ON
ON ON ON
ON
ON
16bits
BitCombi-nation
Compositionof the 7-Step
Display Panel
Status of Every Step DataDisplayed
API Applicable models
ES EP EH74 SEGL
7-segment Display Scan Output
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS D n Note: The usage range of operand n: n=0~7. Please refer to
the footnote. In EH series models, SEGL command can only be used twice. Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
SEGL Continuous execution - -
32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1029 execution completed flag
CommandExplanation
: Display source device of 7-segment display : Start device of
7-segment display scan output : Polarity setting of output signal and scan signal
8 or 12 continuous external output points that start from this command can be regarded as display and scan signal output of 1 or 2 groups of 4 digits of 7-segment
display. 7-segment display module has function to convert input BCD code to
7-segment display and has control signal to latch or not.
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-62
will decide the numbers of groups of 4 digits of 7-segment display and also indicate the polaritys of PLC output terminal and 7-segment display input terminal.
The points number of 7-segment display output command that a group of 4 digits use
is 8 points and 2 groups of 4 digits use are 12 points.
Scan output terminal will circulate in sequence when this command executes. The
drive contact will be changed from Off to On and scan output execute again.
ProgramExample
When X10=ON, command will start to execute. 7-segment display scan loop is
composed of Y10~Y17. The value of D10 will be converted to BCD code and send to
the first group of 7-segment display to display. The value of D11 will be converted to
BCD code and send to the second group of 7-segment display to display. If any value
of D10 or D11 is greater than 9999, operation error will occur. X10
SEGL D10 Y10 K4
When X10=ON, Y14~Y17 will scan in circles automatically. Each circle scan needs 12
scan time. M1029=ON is a scan period after a circle scan.
4 digits of a group, n=0~3. After the terminal of 1, 2, 4, 8 of decoded 7-segment display connects itself in
parallet, they should connect to Y10~Y13 of PLC. Latch terminal of each number connects to Y14~Y17 of PLC individually. When X10=ON, the content of D10 will be transmitted to 7-segment display to
display in sequently according to Y14~Y17 circulates in sequence 4 digits of 2 groups, n=4~7.
After the terminal of 1, 2, 4, 8 of decoded 7-segment display connects itself in parallet, they should connect to Y20~Y23 of PLC. Latch terminal of each number and the first group share Y14~Y17 of PLC. The content of D10 will be transmitted to the first group of 7-segment display and
the content of D11 will be transmitted to the second group of 7-segment display to display. If D10=K1234 and D11=K4321, the first group will display 1234 and the second group will display will display 4321.
7-segment display scan output wiring
COM Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 Y14 Y15 Y16 Y17 Y20 Y21 Y22 Y23COM COM
1 2 4 8 100
101
102
103
103
102
101
100
V+10
310
210
110
0
V+1248
1248
The first group The second group
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-63
Footnote
The V4.9 and above of ES series provide this command (SEGL).
Version 4.9 of ES series only provide a group of 4 digits of 7-segment display and use
8 points to output. SEGL command only can be used once in the program and the
usage range of operand n is 0 to 3.
Scan time must be longer than 10ms while this command is executed. If scan time is
shorter than 10ms, please use fixed scan time function to fix scan time on 10ms.
Please use suitable 7-segment display for the transistor that PLC uses to output.
Settings of n: it is used to set the polarity of transistor output loop. It can be set to
positive polarity or negative polarity. What 7-segment display it connects is a group of
4 digits or two groups of 4 digits.
PLC transistor output is NPN type and it is open collect output. When wiring,
output should connect a step up resistor to VCC (less than 30VDC). Therefore,
when output point Y is On, output will be low potential.
On
PLC
VCC
Y
step up resistor
signal output
Y drive
Output loop of PNP transistor: when inner signal is “1”, it will output high potential.
This logic is called positive polarity.
PLC
Logic 1
On
+24V
HIGH
positive
Step downresistor
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-64
Positive logic (Negative polarity) output of BCD code
BCD value Y output (BCDcode) Signal output
b3 b2 b1 b0 8 4 2 1 A B C D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0
Negative logic (Positive polarity) output of BCD code
BCD value Y output (BCDcode) Signal output
b3 b2 b1 b0 8 4 2 1 A B C D 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1
Display scan (latch) signal
Positive logic (Negative polarity) output
Negative logic (Positive polarity) output
Y output (Latch) Output control signal Y output (Latch) Output control
signal 1 0 0 1
Parameter n settings:
groups number of 7-segment display A group Two groups
Y of BCD code outputs + - + -
Display scan latch signal + - + - + - + -
n 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
’+’: Positive logic (Negative polarity) output ‘-’: Negative logic (Positive polarity) output
The combination of output polarity of PLC transistor and input polaity of 7-segment
display can be set by settings of n.
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-65
API Applicable modelsES EP EH75
ARWS Arrow Keyboard Input
-
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S D1 D2 n
Note: Operand S occupies 4 continuous devices The usage range of operand n: n=0~3 (Refer to API 74 SEGL footnote). ARWS command only can be used once in the program. In EP series models, operand D2 do not provide index register E, F to modify and it only can be specified as a multiple of 10, e.g. Y0, Y10…etc.
16-bit command (9 STEPS)
ARWS Continuous execution - -
32-bit command
- - - - Flag: None Refer to each model specification for
usage range. Output point that designated by this
command should use transistor to output. When using this command, please fix
scan time or put this command into time interrupt subroutine (I6□□~I8□□) to execute.
CommandExplanation
: Start device of key input : Display device on 7-segment display
: Scan output start device of 7-segment display : Polarity setting of output signal and scan signal
ProgramExample
When the command is executed, X20 is defined as the down key, X21 is defined as
the up key, X22 is defined as the right key and X23 is defined as the left key. These
keys are used to edit and display the external setting value. The setting value is stored
in D20 and its setting range is from 0 to 9,999.
When X10=On, 103 is a effective setting digit number. If pressing left key, the effective
setting digit number will be displayed and jump by the direction from 103→100→101
→102→103→100.
If pressing the right key, the effective setting digit number will be displayed and jump
by the direction from 103→102→101→100→103→102. Meanwhile, the digit position
LED connected from Y24 to Y27 will also be Onto indicate the effective setting digit
number.
If pressing the up key to increase , the effective number will change from 0→1→2→…
8→9→0→1. If pressing the down key, the effective number will change from 0→9→8
→…1→0→9, meanwhile, the changed value will be displayed on the 7-segment
display. X10
ARWS X20 D20 Y20 K0
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-66
1248
10 10 10 103 2 1 0
Y20Y21Y22Y23
Y27Y26Y25Y24
LED
Digitposition
7-step display which displays setting value (4 digits data)
X21
X20
X22X23
Increase digit value
decrease digit value
moveto
the left
moveto
the right
The 4 switches is used to movedigit position to the left or to theright and increase or decrease the setting value of the digits
API Applicable modelsES EP EH76
ASC ASCII Code Conversion
-
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S D Note: Operand S is 8 alphanumeric character string inputted by
WPLSoft software from PC, or ASC II code inputted by HPP02. Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (11 STEPS)
ASC Continuous execution - -
32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1161 8/16 mode exchange
CommandExplanation
: The alphanumeric character which can be converted to its ASC II code : The destination device for storing ASC II code.
The alphanumeric character can be used to display error message directly if connect
7-segment display when using this command.
ProgramExample
When X0=On, A~H is converted to ASCII code and stored in D0~D3. X0
ASC A B C D E F G H D0
D0
D1
D2
b15 b042H (B) 41H (A)
44H (D) 43H (C)
46H (F) 45H (E)
D3 48H (H) 47H (G)
low bytehigh byte When M1161=On, the ASCII code converted from every character will occupy lower
8-bit (b7~b0) of one register. The high byte will be invalid and its content is filled as 0.
This also means that one register only can be used to store one character.
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-67
b15 b0D0
D2
D4
D6
D1
D3
D5
D7
00 H00 H00 H00 H00 H00 H00 H00 H
41H (A)42H (B)43H (C)44H (D)45H (E)46H (F)47H (G)48H (H)
low bytehigh byte API Applicable models
ES EP EH77 PR
Print -
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS D Note: Operand S occupies 4 continuous devices.
Operand D occupies 10 continuous devices. PR command only can be used twice in the program. Refer to each model specification for usage range. In EP series models, operand D does not provide index register E, F to modify.
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
PR Continuous execution - -
32-bit command
- - - - Flag: M1029 execution completed flag
M1027
CommandExplanation
: The device for storing ASCII code : The external output device which outputs ASC II code.
This command will output ASCII codes stored in 4 registers from device in
order of the output devices specified by .
ProgramExample
1
First, using API 76 ASC command convert A~H to ASCII code and store them in
D0~D3. Then, using this command output them in the order of A~H.
When M1027=Off, X10 turns from Off to On, the command is executed, Y10(low byte)
to Y17(high byte) is specified as the data output devices, Y20 is specified as scan
signal and Y21 is specified as the monitor signal while the command being executed.
This mode can execute 8 character string output operation.
If X10 turns from Off to On while the command being executed, the data output will be
interrupt. When X10 is On once more, the data will be sent again.
X10PR D0 Y10
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-68
T T TT (ms) : scan time
X10 start signal
Y10~Y17 data
Y20 scan singal
Y21 being executed
A B C D H
ProgramExample
2
PR command provide 8 serial string output operation. When M1027=Off, maximum 8
character string can be outputted in serial. When M1027=On, 1 to 16 character string
output operation can be executed.
When M1027=On, X10 turns from Off to On, Y10(low byte) to Y17(high byte) is
specified as the data output devices, Y20 is specified as scan signal and Y21 is
specified as the monitor signal while the command being executed. This mode can
execute 16 character string output operation.
If the character string 00H (NUL) has been sent, it means the end of the character
string and the operation of PR command won’t be continous.
The drive contact X10 is always On but it will automatically stop after one time
operation of data output. However, if X0 is always On, M1029 won’t be activated.
X10PR D0 Y10
M1002SET M1027
T T T
M1029 execution is completed
X10 start signal
Y10~Y17 data
Y20 scan singal
Y21 being executed
last characterfirst character
T : scan time or interrupt time
Footnote
This command should only use transistor output.
When using this command, please fix the scan time or execute this command in a time
interrupt subroutine.
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-69
API Applicable modelsES EP EH78 D
FROM P Read Special Module CR Data
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
m1 m2 D n Note: The usage range of operand m1: m1=0~7
The usage range of operand m2: m2=0~48 The usage range of operand n: n =1~(49- m2) Refer to each model specification for usage range. For ES series, it doesn’t support pulse execution command (FROMP, DFROMP).
16-bit command (9 STEPS)
FROM Continuous execution FROMP Pulse
execution
32-bit command (17 STEPS)
DFROM Continuous execution DFROMP Pulse
execution Flag: When M1083=On, it allows to
insert interrupt during command FROM/TO. Refer to following explanation for detail.
CommandExplanation
: Number for special module : Number of CR (Control Register) of
special module that will be read : Location to save reading data : Data number of reading one time
DVP PLC uses this command to read CR data of special module.
When indicates bit operand, you can use K1~K4 for 16-bit command and K5~K8 for 32-bit command.
Please refer to the following footnote to see the detail of the numbering rule of special
module.
ProgramExample
To read the content of CR#29 of special module#0 to D0 of PLC and to read the
content of CR#30 of special module#0 to D1 of PLC. It can read 2 data at one time
(n=2).
The command will be executed when X0=ON. The command won’t be executed when
X0=OFF and the content of previous reading data won’t change. X0
FROM K0 K29 D0 K2
API Applicable models
ES EP EH79 D TO
P Special Module CR Data Write in
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E Fm1 m2 S n Note: The usage range of operand m1: m1=0~7
The usage range of operand m2: m2=0~48 The usage range of operand n: n =1~(49- m2) Refer to each model specification for usage range. For ES series, it doesn’t support pulse execution command (TOP, DTOP)
16-bit command (9 STEPS)
TO Continuous execution TOP Pulse
execution
32-bit command (17 STEPS)
DTO Continuous execution DTOP Pulse
execution Flag: M1083 FROM/TO mode
exchange Refer to following for detail.
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-70
CommandExplanation
: Number of special module : Number of CR (Control Register) of special
module that will be wrote in : Data to write in CR : data number to write in one time.
When assigns bit operand, K1~K4 can be used for 16-bit command and K1~K8 can be used for 32-bit command.
DVP-series PLC uses this command to write data into CR of special module.
ProgramExample
Using 32-bit command DTO, program will write D11 and D10 into CR#13 and CR#12 of
special module#0. It only writes a group of data at one time (n=1)
The command will be executed when X0=ON and it won’t be executed when X0=OFF.
The data that wrote in previous won’t have any change. X0
DTO K0 K12 D10 K1
The rule of command operand: m1: arrangement number of special module. The number of special module that
connects to PLC MPU. The numbering rule of special module from the near to the distant of MPU is from 0 to 7. The maximum is 8 special modules and won’t occupy I/O point. m2: the number of CR. Built-in 16-bit of 36 groups memory of special module is
called CR (Control Register). The number of CR uses decimal digits (#0~#35). All running status and setting values of special module have included.
Footnote
If using FROM/TO command, the unit of read/write of CR is one number for one time. If using DFROM/DTO command, the unit of read/write of CR is two numbers in one time.
CR #10 CR #9
Upper 16-bit Lower 16-bit
Specified CR number The number of transmission groups n. The meaning of n=2 of 16-bit command and
n=1 of 32-bit are the same.
D0D1D2D3D4D5
CR #5CR #6CR #7CR #8CR #9CR #10
D0D1D2D3D4D5
CR #5CR #6CR #7CR #8CR #9CR #10
Specified device Specified CR Specified device Specified CR
16-bit command when n=6 32-bit command when n=3
In ES series models, flag M1083 is not provided. When FROM/TO command is executed,
all interrupts (including external or internal interrupt subroutines) will be disabled. All
interrupts will be executed after FROM/TO command is completed. Besides, FROM/TO
command also can be executed in the interrupt subroutine.
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-71
The function of the flag M1083 (FROM/TO mode exchange) provided in EP/EH series
models:
1. When M1083=Off, FROM/TO command is executed, all interrupts (including external
or internal interrupt subroutines) will be disabled. All interrupts will be executed after
FROM/TO command is completed. Besides, FROM/TO command also can be
executed in the interrupt subroutine.
2. When M1083=On, if a interrupt occurs while FROM/TO command has been
programmed, FROM/TO command will be interruptted to execute the interrupt.
However, FROM/TO command cannot be executed in the interrupt subroutine
Application program example of FROM/TO command:
Example 1: Adjust A/D conversion characteristic curve of DVP-04AD by setting
OFFSET value of CH1 to 0V(=K0LSB) and GAIN value of CH1 to 2.5V(=K2000LSB).
M1002TO K0 K1 H0 K1
TO K0 K33 H0 K1
X0TO K0 K18 K0 K1
TO K0 K24 K2000 K1
1. Write H0 to CR#1 of analog input mode No. 0 and set CH1 to mode 0 (voltage
input : -10V to +10V).
2. Write H0 to CR#33 and allow to adjust characteristics of CH1 to CH4.
3. When X0 turns from OFF to ON, K0LSB of OFFSET value will be wrote in CR#18
and K2000LSB of GAIN value will be wrote in CR#24.
Example 2: Adjust A/D conversion characteristic curve of DVP-04AD by setting
OFFSET value of CH2 to 2mA(=K400 LSB) and GAIN value of CH2 to 18
mA(=K3600LSB).
M1002TO K0 K1 H18 K1
TO K0 K33 H0 K1
X0TO K0 K19 K400 K1
TO K0 K25 K3600 K1
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-72
1. Write H18 to CR#1 of analog input mode No. 0 and set CH2 to mode 3 (current
input : -20mA to +20mA).
2. Write H0 to CR#33 and allow to adjust characteristics of CH1 to CH4.
3. When X0 turns from OFF to ON, K400LSB of OFFSET value will be wrote in
CR#19 and K3600LSB of GAIN value will be wrote in CR#25.
Example 3: Adjust D/A conversion characteristic curve of DVP-02DA by setting
OFFSET value of CH2 to 0mA(=K0LSB) and GAIN value of CH2 to
10mA(=K1000LSB). M1002
TO K1 K1 H18 K1
TO K1 K33 H0 K1
X0TO K1 K22 K0 K1
TO K1 K28 K1000 K1
1. Write H18 to CR#1 of analog input mode No. 1 and set CH2 to mode 3
(current input : 0mA to +20mA).
2. Write H0 to CR#33 and allow to adjust characteristics of CH1 and CH2.
3. When X0 turns from OFF to ON, K0LSB of OFFSET value will be wrote in
CR#22 and K1000LSB of GAIN value will be wrote in CR#28.
Example 4: Adjust D/A conversion characteristic curve of DVP-02DA by setting
OFFSET value of CH2 to 2mA(=K400LSB) and GAIN value of CH2 to
18mA(=K3600LSB).
M1002TO K1 K1 H10 K1
TO K1 K33 H0 K1
X0TO K1 K23 K400 K1
TO K1 K29 K3600 K1
1. Write H10 to CR#1 of analog input mode No. 1 and set CH2 to mode 2
(current input : +4mA to +20mA).
2. Write H0 to CR#33 and allow to adjust characteristics of CH1 and CH2.
3. When X0 turns from OFF to ON, K400LSB of OFFSET value will be wrote in
CR#23 and K3600LSB of GAIN value will be wrote in CR#29.
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-73
Example 5: Program example when DVP-04AD and DVP-02DA module are used
together
M1000FROM K0 K0 D0 K1
TO K0 K1 H3030 K1LD= H88 D0
TO K0 K2 K32 K2
FROM K0 K6 D20 K4
M1000FROM K1 K0 D0 K1
CMP H49 D0 M0
M1013INC D100
ADD D101 K5 D101
RST D100LD= K4000 D100
RST D101LD= K4000 D101
M1TO K1 K1 H10 K1
M1TO K1 K10 D100 K2
END
1. Read the data of model type from expansion module K0 and distinguish if the data is
H88 (DVP-04AD model type).
2. If the model type is DVP-04AD, the drive contact M1 is on and set input mode CR#1:
(CH1, CH3)= mode 0, (CH2, CH4)= mode 3.
3. Set the mode of CR#2 and CR#3. The average times of CH1 and CH2 is K32.
4. Read the input signal average value of CH1~CH4 (4 data) from CR#6~CR#9 and
store them in D20 to D23.
5. Read the data of model type from expansion module K1 and distinguish if the data is
H49 (DVP-02DA model type).
6. D100 will increase K1 and D101 will increase K5 every second.
7. When value of D100 and D101 attain to K4000, they will be reset to 0.
8. If the model type is DVP-04AD, the drive contact M1 is on and set input mode CR#1:
CH1 mode to 0, CH2 mode to 2.
9. Write output setting CR#10 and CR#11 to D100 and D101. Analog output will change
with D100 and D101 value.
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-74
API Applicable modelsES EP EH80
RS Serial Data Communication
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S m D n Note: Operand m available range: m=0~256
Operand n available range: n=0~256 Refer to following for detail.
16-bit command (9 STEPS)
RS Continuous execution - -
32-bit command
- - - - Flag: M1120~M1131,
M1140~M1143, M1161 Please refer to the footnote.
CommandExplanation
: Start device of transmitting data : Transmitting data group number
: Start device of receiving data : receiving data group number This command is a convenience command for MPU to use RS-485 to connect
communication interface in series. It stores words data in source data register
and sets length . It also can set to receive data register and length .
If it doesn’t need to transmit data, can be indicated to K0 and if it doesn’t need
to receive data, can be indicated to K0. RS command can be used in the program unlimitedly, but you can’t execute two or
more RS commands at the same time.
It is invalid to change transmitting data during executing RS command.
Use this RS command to transmit and receive data of PLC and external/peripheral
equipment (AC drive, etc.) when external/peripheral equipment has RS-485 serial
communication and communication format of this equipment is public.
If communication format of external/peripheral equipment corresponds with
communication format of MODBUS, DVP series PLC provides several convenience
communication commands, API 100 MODRD, API 101 MODWR and API 150
MODRW, for user to use. Please refer to individual command explanation for detail.
Please refer to following footnote for more information of special auxiliary relay
M1120~M1161 and special data register D1120~D1131 related to RS-485
communication command.
ProgramExample
1
Writing data into the register that starts from D100 and set M1122 (send request flag)
to ON.
If RS command is executed when X10=ON, PLC will in the state of waiting for
transmitting and receiving data. It will start to transmit 10 continuous data that start
from D100. M1122 will be set to OFF at the end of transmitting (Please do not use
program to execute RST M1122). After 1ms, it will start to receive external 10 data and
store them into continuous registers that start from D120.
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-75
When receiving data complete, M1123 will be set to ON. (Program will set M1123 to
OFF when receiving data complete and in the state of waiting for transmitting and
receiving data. Please do use not PLC program to execute RST M1123 continuously.
MOV D1120H86M1002
SET M1120
SET M1122
MOV D1129K100
X10
M1123RST M1123
RS D100 K10 D120 K10
transmissionrequest
pulse
receivingcompleted
Setting communicationprotocol 9600, 7, E, 1
Communicationprotocol latched
Setting communicationtime out 100ms
write transmitting data in advance
sending request
Process of receiving data
receiving completedand flag reset
ProgramExample
2
8-bit mode (M1161=ON) / 16-bit mode (M1161=OFF) switch:
《8-bit mode》:
Head code and tail code of PLC transmission data will be set by using M1126 and M1130
according to D1124~D1126. After setting, PLC will send head code and tail code that set
by user automatically when executing RS command.
When M1161=ON, the conversion mode will be 8-bit. 16-bit data will be divided into high
byte and low byte. High byte will be ignored and low byte will be received and
transmitted.
M1000M1161
D100 D120K4 K7RSX0
Transmit data: (PLC → external equipment)
STX D100L D101L D102L D103L EXT1 EXT2
Headcode
source data register will start fromlow byte of D100
length = 4
Tail code1
Tail code2
Receive data: (external equipment → PLC)
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-76
D120L D122L D123L D124L D125L D126LD121L
Headcode
Tail code1
Tail code2
receive data register will start fromlow byte of D120
length = 7
PLC will receive all data that transmitted from external equipment, including head code
and tail code. Please pay attention on setting length .
《16-bit mode》:
Head code and tail code of PLC transmitting data is set by using M1126 and M1130 with
D1124~D1126. After complete the setting, PLC will send head code and tail code set by
user automatically when executing RS command.
When M1161=OFF, the conversion mode will be 16-bit. 16-bit data will be divided into high
byte and low byte for data transmitting and receiving.
M1001M1161
D100 D120K4 K7RSX0
Transmit data: (PLC → external equipment)
STX D100L D100L D101L D101L EXT1 EXT2
Headcode
source data register will start fromlow byte of D100
length = 4
Tail code1
Tail code2
Receive data: (external equipment → PLC)
D120L D120H D121L D121H D122L D122H D123L
Tail code1
Tail code2
receive data register will start fromlow byte of D120
length = 7
Headcode
PLC will receive all data that transmitted from external equipment, including head code and tail code. Please pay attention on setting length .
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-77
ProgramExample
3
When PLC connects to VFD-B series AC drives (ASCII Mode, M1143=OFF), (16-bit
Mode, M1161=OFF), it will transmit data to read 6 continuous data that start from
VFD-B parameter address H2101.
MOV D1120H86M1002
SET M1120
SET M1122
MOV D1129K100
X10
M1123RST M1123
RS D100 K17 D120 K35
pulse
receivingcompleted
Setting communicationprotocol 9600, 7, E, 1
Communicationprotocol latched
Setting communicationtime out 100ms
write transmitting data in advance
sending request
Process of receiving data
transmissionrequest
receiving completedand flag reset
PLC VFD-B, PLC transmitting: “: 01 03 2101 0006 D4 CR LF “
VFD-B PLC, PLC receiving: “: 01 03 0C 0100 1766 0000 0000 0136 3B CR LF “
PLC transmitting data register (PLC transmitting messages)
Register DATA D100 low byte ‘: ’ 3A H STX D100 high byte ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1 D101 low byte ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0 ADR (1,0) is AC drive address
D101 high byte ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1 D102 low byte ‘3’ 33 H CMD 0 CMD (1,0) is command code
D102 high byte ‘2’ 32 H D103 low byte ‘1’ 31 H D103 high byte ‘0’ 30 H D104 low byte ‘1’ 31 H
Start data address
D104 high byte ‘0’ 30 H D105 low byte ‘0’ 30 H D105 high byte ‘0’ 30 H D106 low byte ‘6’ 36 H
Number of data (count by word)
D106 high byte ‘D’ 44 H LRC CHK 1 D107 low byte ‘4’ 34 H LRC CHK 0
LRC CHK (0,1) is error check code
D107 high byte CR A H D108 low byte LF D H END
PLC receiving data register (VFD-B response messages) Register DATA
D120 low byte ‘: ’ 3A H STX D120 high byte ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1 D121 low byte ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0 D121 high byte ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1 D122 low byte ‘3’ 33 H CMD 0 D122 high byte ‘0’ 30 H D123 low byte ‘C’ 43 H Number of data (count by byte)
D123 high byte ‘0’ 30 H D124 low byte ‘1’ 31 H D124 high byte ‘0’ 30 H
Content of address 2101 H
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-78
Register DATA
D125 low byte ‘0’ 30 H D125 high byte ‘1’ 31 H D126 low byte ‘7’ 37 H D126 high byte ‘6’ 36 H D127 low byte ‘6’ 36 H
Content of address 2102 H
D127 high byte ‘0’ 30 H D128 low byte ‘0’ 30 H D128 high byte ‘0’ 30 H D129 low byte ‘0’ 30 H
Content of address 2103 H
D129 high byte ‘0’ 30 H D130 low byte ‘0’ 30 H D130 high byte ‘0’ 30 H D131 low byte ‘0’ 30 H
Content of address 2104 H
D131 high byte ‘0’ 30 H D132 low byte ‘1’ 31 H D132 high byte ‘3’ 33 H D133 low byte ‘6’ 36 H
Content of address 2105 H
D133 high byte ‘0’ 30 H D134 low byte ‘0’ 30 H D134 high byte ‘0’ 30 H D135 low byte ‘0’ 30 H
Content of address 2106 H
D135 high byte ‘3’ 33 H LRC CHK 1 D136 low byte ‘B’ 42 H LRC CHK 0 D136 high byte CR A H D137 low byte LF D H
END
ProgramExample
4
When PLC connects to VFD-B AC drive (RTU Mode, M1143=ON), (16-bit Mode,
M1161=ON), writing transmitting data, H12, in advance into VFD-B parameter address
H2000.
MOV D1120H86M1002
SET M1120
SET M1122
MOV D1129K100
X10
M1123RST M1123
RS D100 K8 D120 K8
SET M1143
SET M1161
RTU Mode
8 bits Mode
receivingcompleted
sending request
write transmitting data in advance
transmissionrequest
pulse
Setting communicationtime out 100ms
Communicationprotocol latched
Setting communicationprotocol 9600, 7, E, 1
Process of receiving data
receiving completedand flag reset
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-79
PLC VFD-B, PLC transmitting: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07 VFD-B PLC, PLC receiving: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07 PLC transmitting data register (PLC transmitting messages)
Register DATA D100 low byte 01 H Address D101 low byte 06 H Function D102 low byte 20 H D103 low byte 00 H Data address
D104 low byte 00 H D105 low byte 12 H Data content
D106 low byte 02 H CRC CHK Low D107 low byte 07 H CRC CHK High
PLC receiving data register (response messages of VFD-B)
Register DATA D120 low byte 01 H Address D121 low byte 06 H Function D122 low byte 20 H D123 low byte 00 H Data address
D124 low byte 00 H D125 low byte 12 H Data content
D126 low byte 02 H CRC CHK Low D127 low byte 07 H CRC CHK High
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-80
Footnote
RS-485 communication RS / MODRD / MODWR / FWD / REV / STOP / RDST /
RSTEF / MODRW commands relation flags:
Flag Function Explanation Action
M1120
Communication protocol holding. It is used to hold communication setting. PLC will reset communication protocol setting according to special data register D1120 after first program scan. When second program scan starts and RS command is executed, it will reset communication protocol setting according to special data register D1120. If communication protocol is fixed, M1120 can be set to ON. At this time, communication protocol setting won’t be reset as RS / MODRD / MODWR / FWD / REV / STOP / RDST / RSTEF / MODRW is executed even if D1120 setting is changed.
User setting and clear
M1121 When it is off, RS-485 of PLC is sending communication information. System acts
M1122
Sending request. Users need to set M1122 to ON by pulse command when using RS / MODRD / MODWR / FWD / REV / STOP / RDST / RSTEF / MODRW command to transmit and receive data. If above command starts to execute, PLC will transmit and receive data. M1122 will be reset after above commands complete transmitting.
User setting and system clears auto
M1123
Receiving completed. M1123 will be set to ON after RS / MODRD / MODWR / FWD / REV / STOP / RDST / RSTEF / MODRW commands complete executing. User can process receiving data when M1123 is set to ON and reset M1123 to OFF when the process of receiving data is completed.
System auto setting
and user clear
M1124 Receiving wait. When M1124 is set to ON, it means PLC is waiting for receiving data. System acts
M1125 Communication reset. When M1125 is set to ON, the communication of PLC will be reset. After resetting, M1125 must be reset to Off.
M1126 STX/ETX selection. Please refer to the following table for selecting user/system definition and STX/ETX.
M1130 STX/ETX selection. Please refer to the following table for selecting user/system definition and STX/ETX.
User setting and clear
M1127 Communication command finishes transmitting and receiving. RS command is not included.
M1129 Receiving time out. This flag will be activated if D1129 is set and the process of receiving data is not completed within the setting time. After resetting, M1129 should be reset to OFF.
System auto setting
and user clear
M1128 Transmitting/receiving indication
M1131 M1131=ON during MODRD / RDST / MODRW convert to HEX. Otherwise M1131 will be OFF.
M1140 MODRD / MODWR / MODRW data received error
M1141 MODRD / MODWR / MODRW command error
M1142 VFD-A command data received error
System acts
M1143 ASCII / RTU mode selection, ON is RTU mode and OFF is ASCII mode. (use with MODRD / MODWR / MODRW commands)
M1161 8/16-bit mode setting. ON is 8-bit mode and OFF is 16-bit mode
User setting and clear
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-81
Special register related to RS-485 communication RS / MODRD / MODWR / FWD /
REV / STOP / RDST / RSTEF / MODRW command:
Special register Function Explanation
D1038 For ES/EP models, data response delay time setting when PLC MPU is slave. Time unit (0.1ms).
D1050~D1055 After executing MODRD/RDST command, PLC will convert ASCII data of D1070~D1085 to HEX and store hexadecimal data to D1050~D1055.
D1070~D1085
PLC built-in RS-485 communication convenience command. Executing this command will receive feedback (return) messages from receiver. The messages will be stored at D1070~D1085. User can check return data by viewing the content of the register.
D1089~D1099
PLC built-in RS-485 communication convenience command. The transmitting message will be stored in D1089~D1099 when this command is executed. Users can check if the command is correct by the content of the register.
D1120 Please refer to the following table for RS-485 communication protocol.
D1121 Communication address of PLC MPU when PLC MPU is slave.
D1122 Residual words of transmitting data.
D1123 Residual words of receiving data.
D1124 Start word definition (STX). Please refer to the table above.
D1125 First end word definition (ETX1). Please refer to the table above.
D1126 Second end word definition (ETX2). Please refer to the table above.
D1129
Communication time out is abnormal. Time unit (ms). It is used to set time of time out. If the value of the time is 0, it means there is no time out. PLC will set M1129 to be ON if receiving time of the first word or between any two words is more than setting after executing RS / MODRD / MODWR / FWD / REV / STOP / RDST / RSTEF / MODRW commands to enter received mode when the value of the time is more than 0. User can use M1129 to handle communication time out but be sure to remember to reset M1129 after handling.
D1130 MODBUS return error code record.
D1256~D1295
PLC built-in RS-485 communication convenience command MODRW. The characters transmitted by this command will be stored in D1256~D1295 when this command is executed. User can check if the command is correct by the content of the registers.
D1296~D1311 PLC will automatically convert ASCII data in the receiving register specified by user to HEX, hexadecimal value.
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-82
D1120: RS-485 communication protocol. For the settings, please refer to following
table:
Content 0 1 b0 Data length 7 8
00 : None 01 : Odd b1
b2 Parity bits 11 : Even
b3 Stop bits 1 bit 2 bit 0001 (H1) : 110 0010 (H2) : 150 0011 (H3) : 300 0100 (H4) : 600 0101 (H5) : 1200 0110 (H6) : 2400 0111 (H7) : 4800 1000 (H8) : 9600 1001 (H9) : 19200 1010 (HA) : 38400 1011 (HB) : 57600 (only in EH/EP series models)
b4 b5 b6 b7
1100 (HC) : 115200 (only in EH/EP series models)
b8 Start word selection None D1124
b9 First end word selection None D1125
b10 Second end word selection None D1126
b15~b11 No definition Start word and end word of control characters will be defined in the communication
format of peripheral equipment when using RS command. Start word and end word
can be set in D1124~D1125 by user or defined by machine/equipment. When using
M1126, M1130, D1124~D1125 to set start and end word, b8~b9 of D1120 of RS485
communication protocol should be set to 1. For the settings, please refer to the
following table: M1130
0 1
0 D1124: user define D1125: user define D1126: user define
D1124: H 0002 D1125: H 0003 D1126: H 0000(no setting)
M11
26
1 D1124: user define D1125: user define D1126: user define
D1124: H 003A(’:’) D1125: H 000D(CR) D1126: H 000A(LF)
Example for communication format setting: Communication format: Baud rate 9600 7, N, 2
STX : “: “ ETX1 : “CR”
EXT2 : “LF”
You can get the communication format H788 via check with table and write into D1120.
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-83
b15 b0
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
7 8 8
D11200
Don t care
MOV H788 D1120M1002
When using STX, EXT1 and EXT2 should pay attention to the On/Off relationship between special auxiliary relay M1126 and M1130. M1143: ASCII / RTU mode selection. ON is RTU mode and OFF is ASCII mode.
Take standard MODBUS format to explanation: ASCII mode (M1143=Off):
STX Start word = ‘: ’ (3AH) Address Hi Address Lo
Communication address: 8-bit address consists of 2 ASCII codes
Function Hi Function Lo
Function code: 8-bit function code consists of 2 ASCII codes
DATA (n-1)
…….
DATA 0
Data content: n × 8-bit data content consists of 2n ASCll codes
LRC CHK Hi LRC CHK Lo
LRC check sum: 8-bit check sum consists of 2 ASCll code
END Hi END Lo
End word: END Hi = CR (0DH), END Lo = LF(0AH)
Communication protocol is made of MODBUS ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange). Each byte consists of 2 ASCII characters. For example: a 1-byte data 64 Hex shown as ‘64’ in ASCII, consists of ‘6’ (36Hex) and ‘4’ (34Hex). The table below identifies the usable hexadecimal characters and their associated ASCII codes.
Character ‘0’ ‘1’ ‘2’ ‘3’ ‘4’ ‘5’ ‘6’ ‘7’
ASCII code 30H 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 36H 37H
Character ‘8’ ‘9’ ‘A’ ‘B’ ‘C’ ‘D’ ‘E’ ‘F’ ASCII code 38H 39H 41H 42H 43H 44H 45H 46H
Start word (STX): ‘: ’ (3AH)
Communication address (Address):
‘0’ ‘0’: broadcast for all driver (Broadcast)
‘0’ ‘1’: toward the drive at the 01 address
‘0’ ‘F’: toward the drive at the 15 address
‘1’ ‘0’: toward the drive at the 16 address﹒﹒﹒﹒﹒﹒and consequently, the Max. address
can be reached is 255 (‘F’ ‘F’). Function code (Function):
‘0’ ‘3’: read contents of many registers
‘0’ ‘6’: write one WORD into the register
‘1’ ‘0’: write contents of many registers
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-84
Data content: The content of transmitting data send by user
LRC check:
LRC check is the added sum from “Address” to “Data contents”. For example, the 01H +
03H + 21H + 02H + 00H + 02H = 29H, then take the complementary of 2, D7H. End word: END Hi = CR (0DH), END Lo = LF(0AH) For example: when the address of the drive is set as 01H, read 2 data contents that exist
successively within the register, as shown follows: the address of the start register is
2102H. Inquiry message: Response message:
STX ‘: ’ STX ‘: ’ ‘0’ ‘0’ Address ‘1’ Address ‘1’ ‘0’ ‘0’ Function ‘3’ Function ‘3’ ‘2’ ‘0’ ‘1’
Number of data (count by byte) ‘4’
‘0’ ‘1’
Start address ‘2’ ‘7’ ‘0’ ‘7’ ‘0’
Content of start address 2102H
‘0’ ‘0’ ‘0’
Number of data (count by word)
‘2’ ‘0’ ‘D’ ‘0’ LRC Check ‘7’
Content of address 2103H
‘0’ CR ‘7’ END LF LRC Check ‘1’
CR END LF
RTU mode (M1143=On):
START Please refer to following explanation Address Communication address: 8-bit binary
Function Function code: 8-bit binary DATA (n-1)
……. DATA 0
Data content: n × 8-bit data
CRC CHK Low CRC CHK High
CRC check: 16-bit CRC consists of 2 8-bit binary
END Please refer to following explanation
START: ES / EP series: keep none input signal to be greater or equal to 10 ms EH series:
Baud Rate(bps) RTU Timeout Timer(ms) Baud Rate(bps) RTU Timeout Timer(ms)300 40 9600 2 600 21 19200 1 1200 10 38400 1 2400 5 57600 1 4800 3 115200 1
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-85
Communication Address (Address):
00 H: broadcast for all driver (Broadcast) 01 H: toward the drive at the 01 address
0F H: toward the drive at the 15 address
10 H: toward the drive at the 16 address﹒﹒﹒﹒﹒﹒and consequently, the Max. address
can be reached is 255 (‘F’ ‘F’)
Function code (Function):
03 H: read contents of many registers
06 H: write one WORD into the register
01 H: write contents of many registers
Data content:
The content of transmitting data send by user
CRC check:
CRC check starts from “Address” and ends in “Data content”. Its calculation is as
follows:
Step 1: Load the 16-bit register (the CRC register) with FFFFH.
Step 2: Exclusive OR the first 8-bit byte message command with the 16-bit CRC
register of the low byte, then store the result into the CRC register.
Step 3: Shift the CRC register one bit to the right and fill 0 in the higher bit.
Step 4: Check the value that shifts to the right. If it is 0, store the new value from
step 3 into the CRC register, otherwise, Exclusive OR A001H and the CRC
register, then store the result into the CRC register.
Step 5: Repeat step 3 and 4 and calculates the 8-bit.
Step 6: Repeat Steps 2~5 for the next 8-bit message command, till all the message
commands are processed. And finally, the obtained CRC register value is
the CRC check value. What should be noticed is that the CRC check must
be placed interchangeably in the check sum of the message command.
END:
ES / EP series: keep none input signal to be greater or equal to 10 ms
EH series: Baud Rate(bps) RTU Timeout Timer(ms) Baud Rate(bps) RTU Timeout Timer(ms)
300 40 9600 2 600 21 19200 1 1200 10 38400 1 2400 5 57600 1 4800 3 115200 1
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-86
For example: when the address of the drive is set as 01H, read 2 continuous data of the
register shown follows: the address of the start register is 2102H Inquiry message: Response message:
Address 01 H Address 01 H
Function 03 H Function 03 H
21 H Start data address 02 H Number of data (count by byte)
04 H
00 H 17 H Number of data (count by word) 02 H
Content of data address 8102H 70 H
CRC CHK Low 6F H 00 H CRC CHK High F7 H
Content of data address 8103H 00 H
CRC CHK Low FE H CRC CHK High 5C H
Timing chart of RS-485 communication program flag:
MOV D1120H86M1002
SET M1120
SET M1122
MOV D1129K100
X10
M1123RST M1123
RS D100 K2 D120 K8
Setting communicationprotocol 9600, 7, E, 1
Communicationprotocol latched
Setting communicationtime out 100ms
write transmitting data in advance
transmissionrequest
pulsesending request
receivingcompleted
receiving completedand flag reset
Process of receiving data
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-87
Timing chart:
87
65
43
21
0
32
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 81 2 3
SET M1122 X0
RS X10command executes
MODRD/RDST/MODRW datareceiving and conversion completed
M1127
Covert MODRD/RDST/MODRW to hexadecimal
M1131
Transmission ready M1121
Sending request M1122
Receiving completed M1123
Receiving wait M1124
Communication reset M1125
Transmitting and receiving M1128
Receiving time out M1129Receive time outtimer set by D1129
Residual words of transmitting data D1122
Residual words ofreceiving data D1123
Auto reset after transmitting data completed
Changedirectionimmediately
User must reset in program
User will reset to the transmitstandby status in program
ASCII data converted to hexadecimal,less than a scan period
It will be activated when receiving time out message
Stop to count time afterreceiving data completed
Conversion data
API Applicable modelsES EP EH81 D
PRUN P
Octal Number System Transmission
-
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S D Note: X, Y, M of word device KnX, KnY, KnM should be a multiple
of 10, e.g. X10, M10, Y10. When operand S is specified as KnX, operand D should be specified as KnM. When operand S is specified as KnM, operand D should be specified as KnY. Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
PRUN Continuous execution PRUNP Pulse
execution 32-bit command (9 STEPS)
DPRUN Continuous execution DPRUNP Pulse
execution Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Transmission source device : Transmission destination device
Transmit the the content of to in octal number system format.
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-88
ProgramExample
1
When X3=On, transmit the content of K4X10 to K4M10 in octal number system
format. X3
PRUN K4X10 K4M10
X27
M27
X26 X25 X24 X23 X22 X21 X20 X17 X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10
M17 M16 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10M26 M25 M24 M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18
NO CHANGE
ProgramExample
2
When X2=On, transmit the content of K4M10 to K4Y10 in octal number system format.X2
PRUN K4M10 K4Y10
X27
M27
X26 X25 X24 X23 X22 X21 X20 X17 X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10
M17 M16 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10M26 M25 M24 M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18
These two devices won be transmitted
API Applicable modelsES EP EH82
ASCI P Convert HEX into ASCII
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S D n Note: Operand n available range: n=1~256
Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (ASCIP)
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
ASCI Continuous execution ASCIP Pulse
execution
32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1161 8/16-bit mode setting
CommandExplanation
: Start device of source data : Start device for storing converted result
: Converted digits
16-bit conversion mode: When M1161=Off, read hexadecimal data characters
from the source devcie and convert the data into the ASCII code. Then, store
the result into high and low byte of device .
8-bit conversion mode: When M1161=On, read hexadecimal data characters
from the source devcie and convert the data into the ASCII code. Then, store
the result into low byte of device (high byte of device are all set to 0).
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-89
ProgramExample
1
When M1161=Off, it is 16-bit conversion mode.
When X0=On, read four hexadecimal data characters from D10 and convert them into
ASCII codes. Then, store the converted data to the register started from D20.
X0ASCI D10 D20 K4
M1001M1161
Supposed condition:
(D10) = 0123 H ‘0’ = 30H ‘4’ = 34H ‘8’ = 38H (D11) = 4567 H ‘1’ = 31H ‘5’ = 35H ‘9’ = 39H (D12) = 89AB H ‘2’ = 32H ‘6’ = 36H ‘A’ = 41H (D13) = CDEFH ‘3’ = 33H ‘7’ = 37H ‘B’ = 42H
When n is 4, the bit structure is:
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1
0 1 2 3
D10=0123 H
D20
D21
0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0
1 31H 0 30H
3 33H 2 32H
high byte low byte
high byte low byte
When n is 6, the bit structure is:
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 11 0 0 0000
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 11 1 1 0
0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 00 1 1 0 1
0 1 2 3
D10 = H 0123
b15
b15
7 H 37 6 H 36
Convert to
b15
0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 01 1 0 0000
0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 00 1 1 1b15
3 H 33 2 H 32
D22
b15
b0
b0
b0
b0
b0
D11 = H 4567
4 5 6 7
D20
D21
1 H 31 0 H 30
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-90
When n = 1 to 16: n D K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8
D20 low byte “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” “5” “4” D20 high byte “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” “5” D21 low byte “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” D21 high byte “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” D22 low byte “3” “2” “1” “0” D22 high byte “3” “2” “1” D23 low byte “3” “2” D23 high byte “3” D24 low byteD24 high byte D25 low byteD25 high byte D26 low byteD26 high byte D27 low byteD27 high byte
no change
n D K9 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16
D20 low byte “B” “A” “9” “8” “F” “E” “D” “C” D20 high byte “4” “B” “A” “9” “8” “F” “E” “D” D21 low byte “5” “4” “B” “A” “9” “8” “F” “E” D21 high byte “6” “5” “4” “B” “A” “9” “8” “F” D22 low byte “7” “6” “5” “4” “B” “A” “9” “8” D22 high byte “0” “7” “6” “5” “4” “B” “A” “9” D23 low byte “1” “0” “7” “6” “5” “4” “B” “A” D23 high byte “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” “5” “4” “B” D24 low byte “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” “5” “4” D24 high byte “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” “5” D25 low byte “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” D25 high byte “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” D26 low byte “3” “2” “1” “0” D26 high byte “3” “2” “1” D27 low byte “3” “2” D27 high byte
no change
“3”
ProgramExample
2
When M 1161=On, it is 8-bit conversion mode.
When X0=On, read four hexadecimal data characters from D10 and convert them into
ASCII codes. Then, store the converted data to the register started from D20.
X0ASCI D10 D20 K4
M1000M1161
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-91
Supposed condition: (D10) = 0123 H ‘0’ = 30H ‘4’ = 34H ‘8’ = 38H (D11) = 4567 H ‘1’ = 31H ‘5’ = 35H ‘9’ = 39H (D12) = 89AB H ‘2’ = 32H ‘6’ = 36H ‘A’ = 41H (D13) = CDEFH ‘3’ = 33H ‘7’ = 37H ‘B’ = 42H
When n is 2, the bit structure is:
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1
0 1 2 3
D10=0123 H
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
3
3 3
210 0 0
10 0 0 0
ASCII code of D20=2 is 32H
ASCII code of D21=3 is 33H
When n is 4, the bit structure is:
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 11 0 0 0000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 1 1
0 0
0 1 2 3
D10 = H 0123
b15
b15
Convert to
b15
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 10 0 1 1b15
3 H 33
2 H 32
D22b15
b0
b0
b0
b0
b0
D20
D21
1 H 31
D23
0 H 30
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 00 1 1
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-92
When n = 1 to 16: n D K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8
D20 “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” “5” “4” D21 “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” “5” D22 “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” D23 “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” D24 “3” “2” “1” “0” D25 “3” “2” “1” D26 “3” “2” D27 “3” D28 D29 D30 D31 D32 D33 D34 D35
no change
n D K9 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16
D20 “B” “A” “9” “8” “F” “E” “D” “C” D21 “4” “B” “A” “9” “8” “F” “E” “D” D22 “5” “4” “B” “A” “9” “8” “F” “E” D23 “6” “5” “4” “B” “A” “9” “8” “F” D24 “7” “6” “5” “4” “B” “A” “9” “8” D25 “0” “7” “6” “5” “4” “B” “A” “9” D26 “1” “0” “7” “6” “5” “4” “B” “A” D27 “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” “5” “4” “B” D28 “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” “5” “4” D29 “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” “5” D30 “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” “6” D31 “3” “2” “1” “0” “7” D32 “3” “2” “1” “0” D33 “3” “2” “1” D34 “3” “2” D35
no change
“3”
API Applicable modelsES EP EH83
HEX P Convert ASCII to HEX
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S D n Note: Operand n available range: n=1~256
Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (HEXP).
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
HEX Continuous execution HEXP Pulse
execution
32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1161 8/16-bit mode
exchange
CommandExplanation
: Start device of source data : Start device for storing converted result n : number of converted ASCII codes.
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-93
16-bit conversion mode: When M1161=Off, it is 16-bit conversion mode. Convert
16-bit ASCII code of (high and low byte) to hexadecimal data characters and
then transmit to per 4-bit for one time. Number of converted ASCII codes is set
by . 8-bit conversion mode: When M1161=On, it is 16-bit conversion mode Convert 16-bit
ASCII code of (high and low byte) to hexadecimal data characters and then
transmit to low byte of . Number of converted ASCII codes is set by . (high
byte of are all 0)
ProgramExample
1
When M1161=Off, it is 16-bit conversion mode.
When X0=On, read ASCII bytes of the register started from D20 and convert them to
hexadecimal characters. Then, store the converted data to four registers started from
D10. (The converted data is four characters converted as one segment of data)
X0HEX D20 D10 K4
M1001M1161
Supposed condition:
S ASCII code HEX conversion
S ASCII code HEX conversion
D20 low byte H 43 “C” D24 low byte H 34 “4” D20 high byte H 44 “D” D24 high byte H 35 “5” D21 low byte H 45 “E” D25 low byte H 36 “6” D21 high byte H 46 “F” D25 high byte H 37 “7” D22 low byte H 38 “8” D26 low byte H 30 “0” D22 high byte H 39 “9” D26 high byte H 31 “1” D23 low byte H 41 “A” D27 low byte H 32 “2” D23 high byte H 42 “B” D27 high byte H 33 “3”
When n is 4, the bit structure is:
0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 01 1 0 0000
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 01 1 0 0
0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 00 1 0 0 0
0 A B CD10
D20
D21
41H A
43H C
30H 0
42H B
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-94
When n = 1 to 16:
n D D13 D12 D11 D10 1 ***C H 2 **CD H 3 *CDE H 4
CDEF H 5 ***C H DEF8 H 6 **CD H EF89 H 7 *CDE H F89A H 8
CDEF H 89AB H 9 ***C H DEF8 H 9AB4 H
10 **CD H EF89 H AB45 H 11 *CDE H F89A H B456 H 12
The used registers which
are not specified are all
0
CDEF H 89AB H 4567 H 13 ***C H DEF8 H 9AB4 H 5670 H 14 **CD H EF89 H AB45 H 6701 H 15 *CDE H F89A H B456 H 7012 H 16 CDEF H 89AB H 4567 H 0123 H
ProgramExample
2
When M1161=On, it is 16-bit conversion mode.
X0HEX D20 D10 K4
M1000M1161
Supposed condition:
ASCII code HEX conversion ASCII code HEX
conversionD20 H 43 “C” D28 H 34 “4” D21 H 44 “D” D29 H 35 “5” D22 H 45 “E” D30 H 36 “6” D23 H 46 “F” D31 H 37 “7” D24 H 38 “8” D32 H 30 “0” D25 H 39 “9” D33 H 31 “1” D26 H 41 “A” D34 H 32 “2” D27 H 42 “B” D35 H 33 “3”
When n is 2, the bit structure is
0 0 01 1 0 00
0 1 0 0 10 0
0 0 0 0 1 1 00 0 0
0 AD10
D20
D21
4 1
3 0
0 0
0
00 0 0
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-95
When n = 1 to 16:
n D D13 D12 D11 D10 1 ***C H 2 **CD H 3 *CDE H 4
CDEF H 5 ***C H DEF8 H 6 **CD H EF89 H 7 *CDE H F89A H 8
CDEF H 89AB H 9 ***C H DEF8 H 9AB4 H
10 **CD H EF89 H AB45 H 11 *CDE H F89A H B456 H 12
The used registers which
are not specified are all
0
CDEF H 89AB H 4567 H 13 ***C H DEF8 H 9AB4 H 5670 H 14 **CD H EF89 H AB45 H 6701 H 15 *CDE H F89A H B456 H 7012 H 16 CDEF H 89AB H 4567 H 0123 H
API Applicable models
ES EP EH84 CCD
P Check Code -
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS D n Note: Operand n available range: n=1~256
Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support this command (CCD, CCDP)
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
CCD Continuous execution CCDP Pulse
execution
32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1161 8/16-bit mode
exchange
CommandExplanation
: Start device of source data : Result device for storing check sum
: Number of data This command is used to check sum of words to ensure the truth of transmission data
during communication.
16-bit conversion mode: When M1161=Off, it is 16-bit conversion mode. Check the
sum of words (8-bit in one byte) from the register specified by source devcie
and store the sum to the register specified by device while the parity bits
are stored in +1. 8-bit conversion mode : When M1161=On, it is 8-bit conversion mode. Check the sum
of words (8-bit in one byte, only low byte are available) from the register
specified by source devcie and store the sum to the register specified by device
while the parity bits are stored in +1.
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-96
ProgramExample
1
When M1161=Off, it is 16-bit conversion mode.
When X0=On, check sum of 6 words from the register specified by D0 (8-bit in one
byte, n=6 means to specify D0~D2) and store the sum in the register specified by
D100 while the parity bits are stored in D101.
X0CCD D0 D100 K6
M1000M1161
(S)
D0 low byte K100 = 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0D0 high byte K111 = 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1D1 low byte K120 = 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0D1 high byte K202 = 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0D2 low byte K123 = 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1D2 high byte K211 = 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1D100 K867 TotalD101 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1
Content of data(words)
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 11 0 0 0010
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 1
D100
D101 Parity
An even result is indicated by the use of 0(zero) An odd result is indicated by the use of 1(one)
ProgramExample
2
When M1161=Off, it is 16-bit conversion mode.
When X0=On, check sum of 6 words from the register specified by D0 (8-bit in one
byte, n=10 means to specify D0~D4) and store the sum in the register specified by
D100 while the parity bits are stored in D101.
X0CCD D0 D100 K6
M1000M1161
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 11 0 0 0010D1000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 1D101 Parity
An even result is indicated by the use of 0(zero) An odd result is indicated by the use of 1(one)
(S)D0 low byte K100 = 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0D1 low byte K111 = 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1D2 low byte K120 = 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0D3 low byte K202 = 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0D4 low byte K123 = 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1D5 low byte K211 = 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1D100 K867 TotalD101 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1
Content of data(words)
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-97
API Applicable modelsES EP EH85
VRRD P Potentiometer Read
-
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S D Note: Operand S available range: n=0~7
Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support this command (VRRD, VRRDP)
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
VRRD Continuous execution VRRDP Pulse
execution
32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1178 and M1179.
Please refer to following footnote.
CommandExplanation
: Potentiometer number : Destination device for storing read potentiometer
VRRD command is used to read the two potentiometers of PLC main processing unit
and the number is No.0 and No.1., or it is used to read the six potentiometers of
function card and the number is No.2 to No.7. The read data will be converted as value
from 0 to 255 and stored in destination device . If regarding the potentiometer as the setting value of timer, the setting time of timer
can be changed by truning VR. If desiring to get the value more than 255, please
multiply by some constant.
ProgramExample
1
When X0=On, the potentiometer of No.0 of VR specified by VRRD command will be
converted to BIN value (0~255) in an 8-bit format and stored in D0 temporarily.
When X1=On, timer T0 regards the content of D0 as the setting value of timer and
starts to count time.
X1TMR T0 D0
X0VRRD K0 D0
ProgramExample
2
Potentiometer read in order: S=K0 to K7 corresponding to the 8 potentiometers, No.0
to No.7. The following program example use E (E=0~7) to modify, K0E=K0 to K7.
The loop of timer convert the potentiometer scale 0~10 to 0~255. The time unit of T0
to T7 is 0.1 second, therefore, the setting value is 0 to 25.5 seconds.
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-98
M1000
RST E
FOR K8M1000
VRRD
INC E
D100E
NEXTX10
TMR D100T0T0
Y000
X11TMR D101T1
T7Y007
END
K 0E
Operation of FOR~NEXT command:
1. In FOR~NEXT command area, FOR command specify K8 indicates the loop
between FOR~NEXT command is executed 8 times repeatly. After 8 times of
execution, it will continue to execute.
2. Between FOR~NEXT command (INC E), the content of E will be 0, 1, 2…7 and
increased by 1(one). Therefore, 8 potentiometer scales will also show as VR0→
D100, VR1→D101, VR2→D102…VR7→D107 in order and be read into the
specified register.
Footnote
VR means VARIABLE RESISTOR SCALE.
For EP/EH models, built-in 2 points VR potentiometer can be used with special D and
special M. Device Function M1178 Start potentiometer VR0 M1179 Start potentiometer VR1 D1178 VR0 value D1179 VR1value
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-99
API Applicable modelsES EP EH86
VRSC P Potentiometer Scale
-
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S D Note: S operand available range: n=0~7
Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support this command (VRSC, VRSCP).
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
VRSC Continuous execution VRSCP Pulse
execution
32-bit command - - - - Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Potentiometer number : Destination device for storing potentiometer scale
VRRD command is used to read the potentiometer scale value of two potentiometers
on PLC main processing unit and the number is No.0 and No.1., or it is used to read
the potentiometer scale value of six potentiometers on function card and the number is
No.2 to No.7 (potentiometer scale value is from 0 to 10). The read data will be stored
in destination device as an integer from the range 0 to 10.
ProgramExample
1
When X0=On, the potentiometer scale value (0 to10) of No. 0 specified by VRSC
command is stored in device D10. X0
VRSC K0 D10
ProgramExample
2
Regrad as digital switch: Correspond potentiometer scale 0 to 10. Only one contact is
On between M10 to M20. Using DECO command (API 41) can decode the
potentiometer scale into M0~M15.
When X0=On, store the potentiometer scale value (0 to 10) of specified No. 1
potentiometer to D1.
When X1=On, use DECO command (API 41) to decode the potentiometer scale into
M10~M25. X0
VRSC K1 D1
X1DECO D1 M10 K4
M10
M11
M20
On when volume scale is 0
On when volume scale is 1
On when volume scale is 10
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-100
API ☺ Applicable modelsES EP EH87 D
ABS P Absolute Value
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range.
ES series models do not support this command (ABSP, DABSP).
16-bit command (3 STEPS)
ABS Continuous execution ABSP Pulse
execution
32-bit command (5 STEPS)
DABS Continuous execution DABSP Pulse
execution Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Specified device for taking absolute value When the command is executed, take the absolute value of the specified device,
. This command is usually pulse execution (ABSP).
ProgramExample
When X0 goes from OFF→ON, take the absolute value of the D0 contents. X0
ABS D0
API Applicable models
ES EP EH88 D PID
PID Calculation
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS1 S2 S3 D Note: Operand S3 uses 14 continuous devices
Refer to each model specification for usage range. For the information of the PID usage times during the program, please refer to the footnote.
16-bit command (9 STEPS)
PID Continuous execution - -
32-bit command
DPID Continuous execution - -
Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Target value (SV) : Present measured value (PV) : Parameter
: Output value (MV) Specific command for PID calculation control. This scan will execute PID operation
when sampling time reaches. PID means Proportion, Integration and Differential. PID
control is widely applied on many applications of machine equipments, pneumatic
equipments and electric equipments.
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-101
: Target value (SV), : Present measured value (PV), for 16-bit command:
~ +14, for 32-bit command: ~ +20: PID command will start to
execute after completing all parameters setting and the result will be stored in .
Please give no latch register area for content. (if you want to give content a latch register, please reset latch to 0 when program runs.)
ProgramExample
Please complete the parameter settings before executing PID command.
This command will be executed when X0=ON and the result will be stored in D150.
The command will not be executed when X0=OFF and the previous data won’t have
any change.
D150X0
D100D1D0PID
Footnote
PID command is only available in V5.7 and above of ES series models and it is not
available for other version.
There is no time limit for using PID command but the register number specified by
cannot be repeated.
For 16-bit commands, uses 15 registers. In above program, the parameter
setting area of PID command that indicates are D100~D114. You should use MOV command to transmit settings to the indication register to set before PID
command executes. If the registers that parameters indicate are latch area, please
use MOVP to execute transmitting.
Parameter table of 16-bit :
Device No. Function Setting range Explanation
: Sampling time (TS) (unit: 10ms) 1~2,000
(unit: 10ms)
If TS is less than one program scan time, PID command will execute one program scan time. If TS=0, PID command won’t be activated.
+1: Propotional gain (KP) 0~30,000(%)
+2: Integral gain (KI) 0~30,000(%)
+3: Differential gain (KD) 0~30,000(%)
When setting exceeds 30,000, setting will be regarded as 30,000.
+4: Control method (Dir) 0: normal control 1: Forward control (E=SV-PV) 2: Inverse control (E=PV-SV)
+5: The range that Error value (E) doesn’t work
0~32,767 For example: if the range of error value (E) is 5, output value MV of E between –5~5 is 0.
+6: Upper bound of saturated output (MV) -32,768~32,767
For example: if upper bound is set to 1000 and once output (MV) is larger than 1000, it will output 1000. (upper bound should larger than lower bound, i.e. S3+6 > S3+7.)
+7: Lower bound of saturated output (MV) -32,768~32,767
For example: if lower bound is set to –1000, once output (MV) is less than –1000, it will output –1000.
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-102
Device No. Function Setting range Explanation
+8:
Upper bound of saturated integration -32,768~32,767
For example: if upper bound is set to 1000 and once output is larger than 1000, it will output 1000 and doesn’t integrate. (upper bound should larger than lower bound, i.e. S3+8 > S3+9.)
+9: Lower bound of saturated integration -32,768~32,767
For example: if lower bound is set to –1000, once output is less than –1000, it will output –1000 and doesn’t integrate.
+10, 11: Save accumulation integral value temporality
32-bit floating point range
For example: It is accumulated integration. It is usually for reference but user can clear or modify by requirement. (needs to modify by 32-bit floating point)
+12: Save previous PV value temporality -
For example: It is present measured value and usually for reference. But user can modify by requirement.
+13:
~
+14: For system use, please don’t use it.
When parameter setting is out of setting range, it will be set to upper bound or lower
bound. But if operation method is out of range, it will be set to 0.
PID commands can be used in interrupt subroutine, step point and CJ command.
Max. range of sampling error time TS is -(a scan time+1ms)~+(a scan time). If error
value has influence on output, please keep the scan time fixable or execute PID
command in interrupt subroutine of timer.
If the settings of sampling time TS ≦ a scan time, CPU will have error code K6740
(PID operation error). At this time, CPU will reset TS = a scan time to execute PID
operand. In this situation, please execute PID command in time interrupt subroutine
(I6□□~I8□□).
The present measured value (PV) must be a stable value before the execution of PID
command. If using input value of DVP-04AD / DVP-04XA / DVP-04PT / DVP-04TC
these modules to perform the PID calculation, please pay attention to the A/D
conversion time of the above-mentioned modules.
32-bit command occupies 21 registers. If parameter setting area of PID
command that designated by is D100~D120, it needs to use MOV command to send setting to designated registers before executing PID command.
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-103
Parameter table of 32-bit :
Device No. Function Setting range Explanation
: Sampling time (TS) (unit: 10ms)
1~2,000 (unit: 10ms)
If TS is less than one program scan time, PID command will execute one program scan time. If TS=0, PID command won’t be activated.
+1: Propotion gain (KP) 0~30,000(%)
+2: Integration gain (KI) 0~30,000(%)
+3: Differential gain (KD) 0~30,000(%)
When setting exceeds 30,000, setting will be regarded as 30,000.
+4: Control method (Dir) 0: normal control 1: Forward control (SV→PV) 2: Inverse control (PV→SV)
+5, 6: The range that 32-bit Error value (E) doesn’t work
0~2,147,483,647For example: if the range of error value (E) is 5, output value MV of E between –5~5 is 0.
+7, 8: Upper bound of 32-bit saturated output (MV)
-2,147,483,648~2,147,483,647
For example: if upper bound is set to 1000 and once output (MV) is larger than 1000, it will output 1000. (upper bound should larger than lower bound, i.e. S3+7, 8 > S3+9, 10.)
+9, 10: Lower bound of 32-bit saturated output (MV)
-2,147,483,648~2,147,483,647
For example: if lower bound is set to –1000, once output (MV) is less than –1000, it will output –1000.
+11, 12:
Upper bound of 32-bit saturated integrator
-2,147,483,648~2,147,483,647
For example: if upper bound is set to 1000 and once output is larger than 1000, it will output 1000 and doesn’t integrate. (upper bound should larger than lower bound, i.e. S3+11, 12 > S3+13, 14.)
+13, 14: Lower bound of 32-bit saturated integrator
-2,147,483,648~2,147,483,647
For example: if lower bound is set to –1000, once output is less than –1000, it will output –1000 and doesn’t integrate.
+15, 16: 32-bit temporary accumulation integral value
32-bit floating point range
For example: It is accumulated integration. It is usually for reference but user can clear or modify by requirement. (needs to modify by 32-bit floating point)
+17, 18: 32-bit save previous PV temporality -
For example: It is previous test value and usually for reference. But user can modify by requirement.
+19:
~
+20: For system uses, please don’t use it.
Explanation of 32-bit and 16-bit are almost the same. The different is
that capacity of +5 ~ +20.
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-104
PID Equations
This command executes PID calculation according to speed and differential type of
measured value.
PID operation has three control methods: normal, forward and inverse controls. The
control method is set by +4. Besides, the settings that have relation to PID
operation is set by ~ +5. PID equations:
( ) ( ) ( )StPVKS
tEKtEKMV DIP *1** ++=
Control Method PID Equations
Forward control, normal control
( ) PVSVtE −=
Inverse control
( ) SVPVtE −=
Besides, ( )StPV means the differential value of ( )tPV and ( )S
tE 1 means the
integral value of ( )tE .
You can know that this command is different from general PID command from above
equation. The difference is the change on differential usage. To avoid transient
differential value is too large when executing general PID command at the first time, this
command willl lower output (MV) value once the change of present measured value (PV)
is too large by monitoring differential value of present measured value (PV).
Symbols explanation:
MV : Output value
PK : Porprotional gain
( )tE : Error value. Forward control ( ) PVSVtE −= , Inverse control
( ) SVPVtE −=
PV : Present measured value
SV : Target value
DK : Differential gain
( )StPV : Differential value of ( )tPV
IK : Integral gain
( )S
tE 1 : Integral value of ( )tE
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-105
Control diagram:
G(s)
S
1/S K I
K P
K D
+ ++
+
In dotted-line is PID command
Note and suggestion:
1. When adjusting three major parameters, KP, KI and KD, please adjust KP first (set
by experience) and set 0 to KI and KD. When adjusting to control, adjust KI (order
from small to big) and KD (order from small to big). Refer to example 4 for adjusting.
If KP=100, it means 100%. When KP is less than 100%, error value will attenuate
and when KP is more than 100%, error value will amplify.
2. This command should be controlled with many parameters. Please follow setting
rule to avoid error occurs.
Example 1: block diagram for using PID command to control position (control method
S3+4 should be set to 0)
PID MV
Encoder
PV
Position command (SV) Plant
Example 2: block diagram for using PID command to control speed (control method
S3+4 should be set to 0)
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-106
PID
S+MV AC drive
speed detectionequipment (P)
actual accel/decel speed (PV=S-P)
Accel/Decelcommand (SV)
speed command (S)
Accel/Deceloutput (MV)
Example 3: block diagram for using PID command to control temperature (action
direction S3+4 should be set to 1)
temperature command (SV)
PID
add temperature (MV) heater
equipment
temperaturedetectionequipmentactual temperature(PV)
Example 4: suggested steps of PID adjustment
Consider that transfer function of plant ( )as
bsG+
= (most general AC drive model is this
function) in control system, command value SV is 1 and sampling time Ts is 10ms.
Suggested steps are in the following:
Step1: set KI and KD to 0 first, then set KP to 5, 10, 20 and 40 in order and record (SV)
and (PV) state. The result will be shown as following figure. 1.5
1
0.5
00 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
K =40P
K =20P K =10P
SV=1
K =5P
Time (sec)
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-107
Step 2: In above figure, we will choose the situation when KP is 10. The reason is in the
following:
When KP is 40, response has overshoot situation. So we won’t use it.
When KP is 20, PV response is close to SV and won’t have overshoot but transient MV
will be great due to start-up too fast. We also won’t use it.
When KP is 10, PV response is close to SV and is smooth. So we consider to use it.
When KP is 5, the response is too slow. So we won’t use it.
Example 3: When deciding to use the curve KP=10, arrange KI in order from small to big
(such as 1, 2, 4, 8) and not to large than KP. Then arrange KD in order from small to big
(such as 0.01, 0.05, 0.1 and 0.2) and not to exceed 10% KP. Finally, you can get
following PV and SV relation figure. 1.5
1
0.5
00 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
PV=SV
K =10,K =8,K =0.2P I D
Time (sec) Note: This example is only for reference. Therefore, user should adjust suitable control
parameters by himself according to real control system.
Applications
Application 1: using PID command in pressure control system. (use block diagram of
example 1)
Control destination: make control system reach pressure target value.
Control characteristics: this system should reach to control destination step by step,
therefore, it may cause system out of control or overload if reaching control destination
too fast.
Recommend solve method:
Method 1: reach by using long sampling time.
Method 2: reach by using delay command and its control block diagram is shown in the
following.
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-108
PID MVD5
SV
PVD1
D1110
0511
0
511
0V
10V
0rpm
rpm3000
D1116
0
255
0V
5V
ACDrive
pressurecommandvalue (D0)
pressure commanddelay
A wave B
wave
MVconvert to speed
speedconvert to voltage
voltage convert tocommand value
pressure meter
280
00
28025020015010050
tt
command value
command value
A wave B wave
D2 is command interval valueD3 is command interval timeuser can adjust by require
Program application of command delay is in the following:
M1002MOV K10 D3
M10
M0TMR T0 D3
T0RST T0
MOV K50 D2D1D0>
MOV K-50 D2D1D0<
MOV K0 D2D1D0=
ADD D2 D1 D1
CMP D2 K0 M10
D0D1< MOV D0 D1
M12D0D1> MOV D0 D1
M0PID D1 D1116 D10 D5
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual
7-109
Application 2: speed control and pressure control system is controlled separately. (use
block diagram of example 2)
Control destination: Adding pressure control system (PID command) after using open
loop to control speed for a period time to reach pressure control.
Control characteristics: This architecture should use open loop to reach speed control
and then reach control target by close loop pressure control due to there is no relation
between speed and pressure of these two systems. Besides, you can add command
delay function of application 1 to avoid control command of pressure control system
changes too fast. Control block diagram is shown in the following.
D40
0255
0rpm3000rpm
D30D32 D1116
D31+
+
M3 M2=ON
PIDPV
MVD5D1SV
D0D1110
M0=ON
M1=ON
Speedcommand
speedconvert tovoltage
AC drive
MV convert toaccel/decel
pressurecommand
delay function(optional)
pressure meter
Partial program application is in the following:
7 Application Commands API 50-99
DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-110
M1MOV K0 D5
M3MOV D40 D30
M2
MOV K3000 D32K3000D32>
MOV K0 D32K0D32<
ADD D30 D31 D32
MOV D32 D1116
M1PID D1 D1110 D10 D5
M1002MOV K1000 D40
M0MOV D0 D1
DIV D32 K11 D32
MOV K255 D32K255D32>
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-1
API Applicable modelsES EP EH100
MODRD MODBUS Data Read
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1 S2 n Note: Operand S1 available range: K0~K255
Operand n available range: K1<n≦K6 Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
MODRD Continuous execution - -
32-bit command
- - - - Flag: M1120~M1131, M1140~M1143
Please refer to the footnote of API 80 RScommand
CommandExplanation
: Communication address. : Address for reading data : Read data length.
MODRD is a specific command for the MODBUS ASCII mode and RTU mode
communication. The RS-485 communication build-in Delta VFD series drives (except
VFD-A series) all have MODBUS communication. Therefore, MODRD command can be
used to read communication data from Delta VFD series AC drives. Please refer to the
Delta VFD series manual for more details.
is the address for reading data. If the address setting is illegal, the user will be informed by an error message. The error code will be stored in D1130, while M1141 turn
to be ON.
The feedback (return) data from peripheral equipment will be stored in D1070 to D1085.
After receiving the feedback (return) data completed, PLC will check if all feedback
(return) data are correct. If there is an error, then M1140 will be ON.
If using ASCII mode, PLC will convert the data to value and store them in D1050 to
D1055 because the feedback (return) data are all ASCII characters. D1050 to D1055 will
be invalid if using RTU mode.
After M1140 or M1141 is On, a correct data will be transmit to peripheral equipment
again. If the feedback (return) data are all correct, then the flag M1140, M1141 will be
clear.
ProgramExample
1
Communication between PLC and VFD-S series AC drives (ASCII Mode, M1143=Off)
MOV D1120H87M1002
SET M1120
MOV D1129K100
M1127RST M1127receiving
completed
Setting communicationprotocol 9600, 8, E, 1
Communicationprotocol latched
Setting communicationtime out 100ms
Process of receiving data
receiving completed and flag reset
SET M1122 Setting transmission flagX1
X0MODRD K1 H2101 K6
Setting communication command:device address 01data address H2101data length 6 words
PLC will convert the receiving data storedin D1070~D1085 from ASCII character tovalue and store the value in D1050~D1055.
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-2
PLC VFD-S, PLC transmitting: “01 03 2101 0006 D4” VFD-S PLC , PLC receiving: “01 03 0C 0100 1766 0000 0000 0136 0000 3B”
PLC transmitting data register (transmitting messages)
Register DATA D1089 low ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1 D1089 high ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0
ADR (1,0) is AC drive address
D1090 low ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1 D1090 high ‘3’ 33 H CMD 0
CMD (1,0) is command code
D1091 low ‘2’ 32 H D1091 high ‘1’ 31 H D1092 low ‘0’ 30 H D1092 high ‘1’ 31 H
Starting data address
D1093 low ‘0’ 30 H D1093 high ‘0’ 30 H D1094 low ‘0’ 30 H D1094 high ‘6’ 36 H
Number of data (count by word)
D1095 low ‘D’ 44 H LRC CHK 1 D1095 high ‘4’ 34 H LRC CHK 0
LRC CHK (0,1) is error check code
PLC receiving data register (response messages)
Register DATA D1070 low ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1 D1070 high ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0 D1071 low ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1 D1071 high ‘3’ 33 H CMD 0 D1072 low ‘0’ 30 H D1072 high ‘C’ 43 H Number of data (count by byte)
D1073 low ‘0’ 30 H D1073 high ‘1’ 31 H D1074 low ‘0’ 30 H D1074 high ‘0’ 30 H
Content of address 2101 H
PLC automatically convert ASCII codes to value and store the converted value in D1050 = 0100 H
D1075 low ‘1’ 31 H D1075 high ‘7’ 37 H D1076 low ‘6’ 36 H D1076 high ‘6’ 36 H
Content of address 2102 H
PLC automatically convert ASCII codes to value and store the converted value in D1051 = 1766 H
D1077 low ‘0’ 30 H D1077 high ‘0’ 30 H D1078 low ‘0’ 30 H D1078 high ‘0’ 30 H
Content of address 2103 H
PLC automatically convert ASCII codes to value and store the converted value in D1052 = 0000 H
D1079 low ‘0’ 30 H D1079 high ‘0’ 30 H D1080 low ‘0’ 30 H D1080 high ‘0’ 30 H
Content of address 2104 H
PLC automatically convert ASCII codes to value and store the converted value in D1053 = 0000 H
D1081 low ‘0’ 30 H D1081 high ‘1’ 31 H D1082 low ‘3’ 33 H D1082 high ‘6’ 36 H
Content of address 2105 H
PLC automatically convert ASCII codes to value and store the converted value in D1054 = 0136 H
D1083 low ‘0’ 30 H D1083 high ‘0’ 30 H D1084 low ‘0’ 30 H D1084 high ‘0’ 30 H
Content of address 2106 H
PLC automatically convert ASCII codes to value and store the converted value in D1055 = 0000 H
D1085 low ‘3’ 33 H LRC CHK 1 D1085 high ‘B’ 42 H LRC CHK 0
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-3
ProgramExample
2
Communication between PLC and VFD-S series AC drives (RTU Mode, M1143=On)
MOV D1120H83M1002
SET M1120
MOV D1129K100
M1127RST M1127receiving
completed
Setting communicationprotocol 9600, 8, E, 1
Communicationprotocol latched
Setting communicationtime out 100ms
Process of receiving data
receiving completedand flag reset
SET M1122 Setting transmission flagX1
The receiving data in HEX valueformat is stored in D1070~D1085.
SET M1143 Setting as RTU mode
X0MODRD K1 H2102
Setting communication command:device address 01data address H2102data length 2 words
K2
PLC VFD-S, PLC transmitting: 01 03 2102 0002 6F F7
VFD-S PLC, PLC receiving: 01 03 04 1700 0000 FE 5C PLC transmitting data register (transmitting messages)
Register DATA D1089 low 01 H Address D1090 low 03 H Function D1091 low 21 H D1092 low 02 H Starting data address
D1093 low 00 H D1094 low 02 H Number of data (count by word)
D1095 low 6F H CRC CHK Low D1096 low F7 H CRC CHK High
PLC receiving data register (response messages) Register DATA
D1070 low 01 H Address D1071 low 03 H Function D1072 low 04 H Number of data (count by byte) D1073 low 17 H D1074 low 70 H Content of address 2102 H
D1075 low 00 H D1076 low 00 H Content of address 2103 H
D1077 low FE H CRC CHK Low D1078 low 5C H CRC CHK High
ProgramExample
3
PLC connects to VFD-S series AC drive (ASCII Mode, M1143=Off). When
communication is time-out, retry when error occurs during receiving data or sending
address.
When X0=On, read data from address H2100 of device 01 (VFD-S) and save in
D1070~D1085 with ASCII format. PLC will auto convert its content to numeral to save in
D1050~D1055.
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-4
Flag M1129 will be On when communication is time-out and program will send request
from M1129 and ask M1122 to read again.
Flag M1140 will be On when receive error and program will send request from M1140
and ask M1122 to read again.
Flag M1141 will be On when received address error and program will send request from
M1141 and ask M1122 to read again.
M1002MOV H87 D1120
SET M1120
SET M1122
MOV K100 D1129
RST M1127
M1127
X0
MODRW K1 H2100 K 6X0
M1129
M1140
M1141
RST M1129
Setting communication protocolto 9600, 8, E, 1
Communication protocol latched
Setting communicationtime-out to 100ms
Setting communication command:device address 01,data address
H2101
data length 6 words
Setting transmission request
Communication time-out Retry
data receive error Retry
sending address error Retry
receiving completed
handle received data
The receiving data in ASCIIformat stored in D1070-D1085.PLC will convert to numeraland save into D1050-D1055automatically.
receiving completed and flag reset
communication time-out and flag reset
Footnote
Rising-edge contact (LDP, ANDP, ORP) and falling-edge contact (LDF, ANDF, ORF)
can’t be used before API 100 MODRD, API 105 RDST, API 150 MODRW (FUNCTION
CODE H03) these three commands. Otherwise, the data stored in received register will
be incorrect.
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-5
API Applicable modelsES EP EH101
MODWR MODBUS Data Write In
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1 S2 n Note: Operand S1 available range: K0~K255
Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
MODWR Continuous execution - -
32-bit command
- - - - Flag: M1120~M1131, M1140~M1143
Please refer to the footnote of API 80 RScommand
CommandExplanation
: Communication address, K0~K255 : Address for writing data : Write data
MODWR is a specific command for the MODBUS ASCII mode and RTU mode
communication. The RS-485 communication build-in Delta VFD series drives (except
VFD-A series) all have MODBUS communication. Therefore, MODWR command can
be used to read communication data from Delta VFD series AC drives. Please refer to
the Delta VFD series manual for more details.
is the address for reading data. If the address setting is illegal, the user will be informed by an error message. The error code will be stored in D1130, while M1141
turn to be ON. For example, 4000H is an illegal address to VFD-S, then M1141 will turn
ON, D1130=2. For the information of error codes, please refer to VFD-S series user
manual.
The feedback (return) data from peripheral equipment will be stored in D1070 to
D1076. After receiving the feedback (return) data completed, PLC will check if all
feedback (return) data are correct. If there is an error, then M1140 will be ON.
After M1140 or M1141 is On, a correct data will be transmit to peripheral equipment
again. If the feedback (return) data are all correct, then the flag M1140, M1141 will be
clear.
ProgramExample
1
Communication between PLC and VFD-S series AC drives (ASCII Mode, M1143= Off)
MOV D1120H87M1002
SET M1120
SET M1122
MOV D1129K100X0
M1123RST M1123
MODRW K1 H0100 H1770
receivingcompleted
Setting communicationprotocol 9600, 8, E, 1
Communicationprotocol latched
Setting communicationtime out 100ms
Setting transmission flag
Process of receiving data
receiving completedand flag reset
X1
Setting communication command:device address 01data address H0100data H1770
The receiving data in ASCII character format is stored in D1070~D1085
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-6
PLC VFD-B, PLC transmitting: “ 01 06 0100 1770 71 ”
VFD-B PLC, PLC receiving: “ 01 06 0100 1770 71 ”
PLC transmitting data register (transmitting messages)
Register DATA D1089 low ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1 D1089 high ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0
ADR (1,0) is AC drive address
D1090 low ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1 D1090 high ‘6’ 36 H CMD 0 CMD (1,0) is command code
D1091 low ‘0’ 30 H D1091 high ‘1’ 31 H D1092 low ‘0’ 30 H D1092 high ‘0’ 30 H
Data address
D1093 low ‘1’ 31 H D1093 high ‘7’ 37 H D1094 low ‘7’ 37 H D1094 high ‘0’ 30 H
Data contents
D1095 low ‘7’ 37 H LRC CHK 1 D1095 high ‘1’ 31 H LRC CHK 0
LRC CHK (0,1) is error check code
PLC receiving data register (response messages)
Register DATA D1070 low ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1 D1070 high ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0 D1071 low ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1 D1071 high ‘6’ 36 H CMD 0 D1072 low ‘0’ 30 H D1072 high ‘1’ 31 H D1073 low ‘0’ 30 H D1073 high ‘0’ 30 H
Data address
D1074 low ‘1’ 31 H D1074 high ‘7’ 37 H D1075 low ‘7’ 37 H D1075 high ‘0’ 30 H
Data content
D1076 low ‘7’ 37 H LRC CHK 1 D1076 high ‘1’ 31 H LRC CHK 0
ProgramExample
2
Communication between PLC and VFD-S series AC drives (RTU Mode, M1143=On)
MOV D1120H87M1002
SET M1120
SET M1122
MOV D1129K100
M1123RST M1123
receivingcompleted
Setting communicationprotocol 9600, 8, E, 1
Communicationprotocol latched
Setting communicationtime out 100ms
Setting transmission flag
Process of receiving data
receiving completedand flag reset
X1
The receiving data in HEX valueformat is stored in D1070~D1085.
SET M1143 Setting as RTU modeX0
MODRW K1 H2000Setting communication command:device address 01data address H2000write in data H12
H12
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-7
PLC VFD-S, PLC transmitting: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07 VFD-S PLC, PLC receiving: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07 PLC transmitting data register (transmitting messages)
Register DATA D1089 low 01 H Address D1090 low 06 H Function D1091 low 20 H D1092 low 00 H Data address
D1093 low 00 H D1094 low 12 H Data content
D1095 low 02 H CRC CHK Low D1096 low 07 H CRC CHK High
PLC receiving data register (response messages) Register DATA
D1070 low 01 H Address D1071 low 06 H Function D1072 low 20 H D1073 low 00 H Data address
D1074 low 00 H D1075 low 12 H Data content
D1076 low 02 H CRC CHK Low D1077 low 07 H CRC CHK High
ProgramExample
3
PLC connects to VFD-S series AC drive (ASCII Mode, M1143=Off). When
communication is time-out, retry when error occurs during receiving data or sending
address.
When X0=On, PLC will write data H1770(K6000) into address H0100 of device 01
(VFD-S).
Flag M1129 will be On when communication is time-out and program will send request
from M1129 and ask M1122 to read again.
Flag M1140 will be On when receive error and program will send request from M1140
and ask M1122 to read again.
Flag M1141 will be On when received address error and program will send request from
M1141 and ask M1122 to read again.
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-8
M1002MOV H87 D1120
SET M1120
SET M1122
MOV K100 D1129
RST M1123
M1123
X0
MODRW K1 H0100 H1770X0
M1129
M1140
M1141
RST M1129
Setting communication protocolto 9600, 8, E, 1
Communication protocol latched
Setting communicationtime-out to 100ms
Setting communication command:device address 01,data address
H0100
data H1770
Setting transmission request
Communication time-out Retry
data receive error Retry
sending address error Retry
receiving completed
handle received data The receiving data in ASCIIformat stored in D1070-D1085.
receiving completed and flag reset
communication time-out and flag reset
Footnote
For detail information of the related flags and special registers, please refer to the
footnote of API 80 RS command.
If using rising-edge (LDP, ANDP, ORP)/falling-edge (LDF, ANDF, ORF) before API 101
MODWR and API 150 MODRW (Function Code H06 and H10), it needs to start
transmission request M1122 to act correct.
API Applicable modelsES EP EH102
FWD
VFD-A Series Drive Forward Command
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1 S2 n Note: Operand S1 available range: K0~K31
Operand n available range: n=K1or K2 Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
FWD Continuous execution - -
32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1120~M1131, M1140~M1143 Please refer to the footnote of API 80 RScommand
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-9
API Applicable modelsES EP EH103
REV
VFD-A Series Drive Reverse Command
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1 S2 n Note: Operand S1 available range: K0~K31
Operand n available range: n=K1or K2 Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
REV Continuous execution - -
32-bit command - - - -
Flag: M1120~M1131, M1140~M1143 Please refer to the footnote of API 80 RScommand
API Applicable models
ES EP EH104 STOP
VFD-A Series Drive Stop Command
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1 S2 n Note: Operand S1 available range: K0~K31
Operand n available range: n=K1or K2 Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
STOP Continuous execution - -
32-bit command
- - - - Flag: M1120~M1131, M1140~M1143
Please refer to the footnote of API 80 RScommand.
CommandExplanation
: Communication address. : AC drive master frequency. : Command object.
FWD/REV/STOP are communication commands for Delta A/H series drive, make sure
to use the communication overtime setting (D1129) when applying these commands.
indicates AC drive master frequency. AC drive master frequency setting for VFD-A series, K0000 to K4000, represents 0.0Hz to 400.0Hz. For H series AC drive,
the setting of K0000 to K1500 represent 0Hz to 1500Hz.
command object, n=1 is for one drive. n=2 communicates to all drives connected.
The feedback (return) data from perpherial equipment will be stored in D1070 to
D1080. After receiving the feedback (return) data completed, PLC will check if all
feedback (return) data are correct. If there is an error, then M1142 will be ON. If n = 2,
PLC will not receive the data.
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-10
ProgramExample
Communication between PLC and VFD-A series AC drives, retry for communication
time-out and received data error.
receiving completed
Setting communicationprotocol 4800, 8, O, 1
Communication protocol latched
Setting communicationtime-out 100ms
Setting transmission flag
Setting communication command:device address 0frequency setting is 500HzK1 is the AC drive for designated address
The receiving data in ASCII character format is stored in D1070~D1085
M1002MOV H0073 D1120
SET M1120
SET M1122
MOV K100 D1129
RST M1123
M1123
X0FWD K0 K500 K1
M1129
M1142
X0
Process of receiving data
receiving completed and flag reset
communication time-out Retry
received data error Retry
PLC VFD-A, PLC transmitting: “C ♥ ☺ 0001 0500 ” VFD-A PLC, PLC receiving: “C ♥ ♠ 0001 0500 ” PLC transmitting data register (transmitting messages)
Register DATA D1089 low ‘C’ 43 H Command starting word D1090 low ‘♥’ 03 H Check sum D1091 low ‘☺’ 01 H Command object D1092 low ‘0’ 30 H D1093 low ‘0’ 30 H D1094 low ‘0’ 30 H D1095 low ‘1’ 31 H
Communication address
D1096 low ‘0’ 30 H D1097 low ‘5’ 35 H D1098 low ‘0’ 30 H D1099 low ‘0’ 30 H
Operation command
PLC receiving data register (response messages) Register DATA
D1070 low ‘C’ 43 H Command starting word D1071 low ‘♥’ 03 H Check sum D1072 low ‘♠’ 06 H Reply authorization (correct: 06H,
error: 07 H) D1073 low ‘0’ 30 H D1074 low ‘0’ 30 H D1075 low ‘0’ 30 H D1076 low ‘1’ 31 H
Communication address
D1077 low ‘0’ 30 H D1078 low ‘5’ 35 H D1079 low ‘0’ 30 H D1080 low ‘0’ 30 H
Operation command
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-11
API Applicable modelsES EP EH105
RDST VFD-A Series Drive Status Read
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1 n Note: Operand S1 available range: K0~K31
Operand n available range: n=K0~ K3 Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
RDST Continuous execution - -
32-bit command
- - - - Flag: M1120~M1131, M1140~M1143
Please refer to the footnote of API 80 RScommand
CommandExplanation
: Communication address, K0~K31 : Status object RDST is a specific communication convenience command for Delta VFD-A series AC
drives and used to read the execution status of AC drive.
: Status object n = 0 Frequency command n = 2 Output current n = 1 Output frequency n = 3 Operation command
The feedback (return) data stored in the low byte of address D1070 to D1080 are total
11 words (please refer to VFD-A series manual). ”Q, S, B, Uu, Nn, ABCD”
feedback (return) Explanation Data storage
Q Starting word: ’Q’ (51H). D1070 low S Checksum code: 03H. D0171 low B Command authorization. correct: 06H, error: 07H. D1072 low U D1073 low u
Communication address (address: 00~31). ”Uu” = (“00”~”31”) indicated by ASCII. D1074 low
N D1075 low n Status object (00~03).”Nn” = (“00~03”) indicated by ASCII. D1076 low A D1077 low B D1078 low C D1079 low D
Status data. The content of ”ABCD” will be different according to the status objects (00~03). 00~03 indicate frequency, current and operation mode respectively. Please refer to the explanation shown below for details. D1080 low
Nn = “00” Frequency command = ABC.D(Hz) Nn = “01” Output command = ABC.D(Hz) Nn = “02” Output current = ABC.D(A)
PLC will automatically convert ASCII word of ”ABCD” to value and store the value in D1050. For example, if ”ABCD” = “0600”, PLC will automatically convert ASCII word to the value of K0600 (0258 H) and store it in the special register in D1050.
Nn = “03” Operation command
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-12
‘A’ = ‘0’ Stop, ‘5’ JOG(FWD) ‘1’ FWD operation, ‘6’ JOG(REV) ‘2’ Stop, ‘7’ JOG(REV)
‘3’ REV operation, ‘8’ Abnormal
‘4’ JOG(FWD),
PLC will automatically convert ASCII word of ”A” to value and store the value in D1051. For example, if ”A” = “3”, PLC will automatically convert ASCII word to the value of K0003 (03 H) and store it in the special register in D1051.
‘B’ = b7 b6 b5 b4 Operation command source 0 0 0 0 Digital keypad 0 0 0 1 1st Step Speed 0 0 1 0 2nd Step Speed 0 0 1 1 3rd Step Speed 0 1 0 0 4th Step Speed 0 1 0 1 5th Step Speed 0 1 1 0 6th Step Speed 0 1 1 1 7th Step Speed 1 0 0 0 JOG frequency 1 0 0 1 Analog signal frequency command 1 0 1 0 RS-485 communication interface 1 0 1 1 Up/Down control b3 = 0 No DC braking stop 1 DC braking stop b2 = 0 No braking startup 1 DC braking startup b1 = 0 FWD, 1 REV b0 = 0 Stop, 1 Operation
PLC will store the value of ”B” in special auxiliary relays M1168(b0)~M1175(b7)
“CD” = “00” No abnormal record “10” OcA “01” oc “11” Ocd “02” ov “12” Ocn “03” oH “13” GFF “04” oL “14” Lv “05” oL1 “15” Lv1 “06” EF “16” cF2 “07” cF1 “17” bb “08” cF3 “18” oL2 “09” HPF “19”
PLC will automatically convert ASCII word of ”CD” to value and store the value in D1052. For example, if ”CD” = “06”, PLC will automatically convert ASCII word to the value of 0006 H and store it in the special register in D1052.
Footnote
Rising-edge contact (LDP, ANDP, ORP) and falling-edge contact (LDF, ANDF, ORF)
before API 100 MODRD, API 105 RDST, API 150 MODRW (FUNCTION CODE 03)
these three commands. Otherwise, the data stored in received register will be incorrect.
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-13
API Applicable modelsES EP EH106
RSTEF VFD-A Series Drive Abnormal Reset
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1 n Note: Operand S1 available range: K0~K31
Operand n available range: n=K1 or K2 Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
RSTEF Continuous execution - -
32-bit command
- - - - Flag: M1120~M1131, M1140~M1143
Please refer to the footnote of API 80 RScommand.
CommandExplanation
: Communication address. : Command object. RSTEF is a specific communication convenience command for Delta VFD-A series AC
drives and used to reset the AC drive after an abnormal execution.
: Command object, n=1 is for one drive. n=2 communicates to all drives connected.
The feedback (return) data from peripheral equipment will be stored in D1070 to
D1089. If n = 2, there is no feedback (return) data.
Rising-edge contact (LDP, ANDP, ORP) and falling-edge contact (LDF, ANDF,
ORF)before API 100 MODRD, API 105 RDST, API 150 MODRW (FUNCTION CODE
H03) these three commands. Otherwise, the data stored in received register will be
incorrect.
Footnote
For detail information of the related flags and special registers, please refer to the
footnote of API 80 RS command.
API Applicable modelsES EP EH107
LRC P LRC Error Check
-
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S n D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range.
ES series models do not support this command (LRC, LRCP)
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
LRC Continuous execution LRCP Pulse
execution
32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1161 8/16-bit mode setting
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-14
CommandExplanation
: Starting device for the operation of sum check (ASCII mode) : Operand
numbers : Starting device for storing the operation result. LRC check: please refer to the footnote.
: operand numbers should be even and range is from K1~K256. If it is out of range, error will be occurred and commond won’t be executed. At this time, M1067 and
M1068 will be On and error code 0E1A will be record in D1067.
16-bit conversion mode: When M1161=Off, hexadecimal data that start from the source
devcie will be divided into upper 8-bit and lower 8-bit and perform the operation
of LRC command on numbers. Then, store the result into upper and lower 8-bit
of device . 8-bit conversion mode: When M1161=On, divide hexadecimal data that start from the
source devcie into upper 8-bit (invalid data) and lower 8-bit and perform the
operation of LRC command on numbers. Then, store the result into lower 8-bit
of device and it will use two resisters (upper 8-bit of all be zero (0)).
ProgramExample
Communication between PLC and VFD-B series AC drives (ASCII Mode, M1143= Off),
(8-bit Mode, M1161=On), writing transmitting data in advance to read six data from
VFD-B parameter address H2101.
MOV D1120H86M1002
SET M1120
SET M1122
MOV D1129K100
X10
M1123RST M1123
RS D100 K17 D120 K35
transmissionrequest
pulse
receivingcompleted
Setting communicationprotocol 9600, 7, E, 1
Communication protocol latched
Setting communicationtime out 100ms
write transmitting data in advance
sending request
Process of receiving data
receiving completedand flag reset
PLC VFD-B, PLC transmitting: “: 01 03 2101 0006 D4 CR LF ”
PLC transmitting data register (transmitting messages)
Register DATA D100 low ‘: ’ 3A H STX D101 low ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1 D102 low ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0
ADR (1,0) is AC drive address
D103 low ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1 D104 low ‘3’ 33 H CMD 0
CMD (1,0) is command code
D105 low ‘2’ 32 H D106 low ‘1’ 31 H D107 high ‘0’ 30 H D108 low ‘1’ 31 H
Starting data address
D109 low ‘0’ 30 H D110 low ‘0’ 30 H D111 low ‘0’ 30 H D112 low ‘6’ 36 H
Number of data (count by word)
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-15
Register DATA
D113 low ‘D’ 44 H LRC CHK 1 D114 low ‘4’ 34 H LRC CHK 0
LRC CHK (0,1) is error check code
D115 low CR A H D116 low LF D H END
The LRC CHK (0,1) above is error check code and it can be calculated by LRC command
(8-bit Mode, M1161=On).
M1000LRC D101 K12 D113
LRC check: 01 H + 03 H + 21 H + 01 H + 00 H + 06 H = 2C H, then take the complementary
of 2, D4H. At the time, ‘D’(44 H) is stored in the lower 8-bit of D113 and ‘4’ (34 H) is stored in
the lower 8-bit of D114.
Footnote
ASCII mode of communication data, the format is listed below: STX ‘: ’ Start word = ‘: ’ (3AH)
Address Hi ‘ 0 ’ Address Lo ‘ 1 ’
Communication: 8-bit address consists of 2 ASCll codes
Function Hi ‘ 0 ’ Function Lo ‘ 3 ’
Function code: 8-bit function consists of 2 ASCll codes
‘ 2 ’ ‘ 1 ’ ‘ 0 ’ ‘ 2 ’ ‘ 0 ’ ‘ 0 ’ ‘ 0 ’
DATA (n-1) …….
DATA 0
‘ 2 ’
Data content: n × 8-bit data content consists of 2n ASCll codes
LRC CHK Hi ‘ D ’ LRC CHK Lo ‘ 7 ’
LRC check: 8-bit check sum consists of 2 ASCll codes
END Hi CR END Lo LF
End word: END Hi = CR (0DH), END Lo = LF(0AH)
Communication protocol is made of MODBUS ASCII (American Standard Code for
Information Interchange). Each byte consists of 2 ASCII characters.
LRC check is the added sum from “Address” to “Data contents”. For example, 01H +
03H + 21H + 02H + 00H + 02H = 29H, then take the complementary of 2, D7H.
API Applicable models
ES EP EH108 CRC
P CRC Error Check -
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS n D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range.
ES series models do not support this command (CRC, CRCP)
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
CRC Continuous execution CRCP Pulse
execution
32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1161 8/16-bit mode setting
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-16
CommandExplanation
: Starting device for the operation of sum check (RTU mode) : Operand
numbers : Starting device for storing the operation result. CRC check: please refer to the footnote.
: range is from K1~K256. If it is out of range, error will be occurred and commond won’t be executed. At this time, M1067 and M1068 will be On and error code 0E1A will
be record in D1067.
16-bit conversion mode: When M1161=Off, hexadecimal data that start from the source
devcie will be divided into high byte and low byte. To perform the operation of
CRC command on numbers and store the result into upper and lower 8-bit of
device . 8-bit conversion mode: When M1161=On, divide hexadecimal data that start from the
source devcie into high byte (invalid data) and low byte. To perform the
operation of CRC command on numbers and store the result into low byte of
device and it will use two resisters (upper 8-bit of all be zero (0)).
ProgramExample
When PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive (RTU Mode, M1143=ON), (16-bit Mode,
M1161=ON), writing transmitting data, H12, in advance into VFD-S parameter address
H2000
MOV D1120H87M1002
SET M1120
SET M1122
MOV D1129K100
X10
M1123RST M1123
RS D100 K8 D120 K8
SET M1143
SET M1161
RTU Mode
8-bit Mode
receivingcompleted
sending request
write transmitting data in advance
transmissionrequest
pulse
Setting communicationtime out 100ms
Communication protocol latched
Setting communicationprotocol 9600, 8, E, 1
Process of receiving data
receiving completed and flag reset
PLC VFD-S, PLC transmitting: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-17
PLC transmitting data register (PLC transmitting messages)
Register DATA D100 low 01 H Address D101 low 06 H Function D102 low 20 H D103 low 00 H Data address
D104 low 00 H D105 low 12 H Data content
D106 low 02 H CRC CHK 0 D107 low 07 H CRC CHK 1
The CRC CHK (0,1) above is error check code and it can be calculated by CRC command
(8-bit Mode, M1161=On). M1000
CRC D100 K6 D106
CRC check: At the time, 02 H is stored in the lower 8-bit of D106 and 07 H is stored in the
lower 8-bit of D107.
Footnote
RTU mode of communication data, the format is listed below: START Please refer to the following explanation Address Communication address: 8-bit binary
Function Function code: 8-bit binary DATA (n-1)
……. DATA 0
Data content: n × 8-bit data
CRC CHK Low CRC CHK High
CRC check: 16-bit CRC check sum consists of 2 8-bit binary
END Please refer to the following explanation
CRC check:
CRC check starts from “Address” and ends in “Data content”. CRC check starts from
“Address” and ends in “Data content”. Its calculation is as follows:
Step 1: Load the 16-bit register (the CRC register) with FFFFH.
Step 2: Exclusive OR the first 8-bit byte message command with the 16-bit CRC
register of the low byte, then store the result into the CRC register.
Step 3: Shift the CRC register one bit to the right and fill 0 in the higher bit.
Step 4: Check the value that shifts to the right. If it is 0, store the new value from
step 3 into the CRC register, otherwise, Exclusive OR A001H and the CRC
register, then store the result into the CRC register.
Step 5: Repeat step 3 and 4 and calculates the 8-bit.
Step 6: Repeat Steps 2~5 for the next 8-bit message command, till all the message
commands are processed. And finally, the obtained CRC register value is
the CRC check value. What should be noticed is that the CRC check must
be placed interchangeably in the check sum of the message command.
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-18
API Applicable modelsES EP EH109
SWRD P Digital Switch Read
-
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range.
ES series models do not support this command (SWRD, SWRDP)
16-bit command (2 STEPS)
SWRD Continuous execution SWRDP Pulse
execution 32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1104~M1111 Digital switch
status
CommandExplanation
: Device for storing read value
Store the value that read from digital switch function card into the low byte of . Every digital switch has an associated BIT.
If executing this command without digital switch function card, there is no result and no
error message.
ProgramExample
There are total 8 DIP switchs on the digital switch function card. After using SWRD
command to read value, these 8 switchs are in association with the contact M0 to M7.
M1000SWRD K2M0
M0Y0
M1MOV K2M0 D0
M2CNT C0 K10
M3RST C0
M4TMR T0 K100
M0 to M7 can be executed by using each contact command.
When END command is executed, the process of input will complete. REF (I/O)
refresh)command will be invalid.
The min. read one time bits are 4 bits when SWRD command use the input data of
digital switch function card (i.e. K1Y* or K1M* or K1S*).
Footnote
When digital switch function card is inserted, 8 DIP switches correspond to
M1104~M1111 individually.
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-19
API Applicable modelsES EP EH110 D
ECMP P Binary Floating Point Comparison
- -
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1 S2 D Note: Operand D occupies 3 continuous devices.
Refer to each model specification for usage range. This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DECMP, DECMPP are available. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (DECMPP)
16-bit command
- - - - 32-bit command (13 STEPS)
DECMP Continuous execution DECMPP Pulse
execution Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Comparison value 1 of binary floating point : Comparison value 2 of
binary floating point : Comparison result, 3 continuous devices used.
The data of is compared to the data of and the result (>, =, <) is
showed by three bit devices in .
If the source operand or is indicated as constant K or H, the integer value will automatically be converted to binary floating point to compare.
ProgramExample
If the specified device is M10, M10~M12 will automatically be used.
When X0=On and execute DECMP command, one of M10~M12 will be On. When
X0=Off and not to execute DECMP command, M10~M12 will retain the state before X0=
Off.
Connect M10~M12 in series or in parallel and then the result of ≧, ≦, ≠ are given.
Please use RST or ZRST command to reset the result. X0
DECMP D0 D100 M10
M10
M11
M12
It is On when (D1 D0)>(D101 D100)A A
It is On when (D1 D0)=(D101 D100)A A
It is On when (D1 D0)<(D101 D100)A A
Footnote
As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric
Values for detail.
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-20
API Applicable modelsES EP EH111 D
EZCP P
Binary Floating Point Zone Comparison
- -
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1 S2 S D Note: Operand D occupies 3 continuous devices.
Operand S1 should be smaller than operand S2. Refer to each model specification for usage range. This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DEZCP, DEZCPP are available. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (DEZCPP).
16-bit command
- - - - 32-bit command (17 STEPS)
DEZCP Continuous execution DEZCPP Pulse
execution Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Lower limit of binary floating point zone comparison : Upper limit of binary
floating point zone comparison : Comparison value of binary floating point
: Comparison result, 3 continuous devices used.
The data of is compared to the data range of ~ and the result (>,
=, <) is showed by three bit devices in .
If the source operand or is indicated as constant K or H, the integer value will automatically be converted to binary floating point to compare.
When > , will be used as upper and lower limit for the comarison.
ProgramExample
If the specified device is M10, M10~M12 will automatically be used.
When X1=On and execute DEZCP command, one of M0~M2 will be On. When X1=Off
and not to execute EZCP command, M0~M2 will retain the state before X1= Off.
Please use RST or ZRST command to reset the result.
X0DEZCP D0 D10 D20
M10
M11
M12
It is On when (D1 D0)>(D21 D20) A A
it is On when (D1 D0) (D21 D20)<(D11 D10) A < A A
It is On when (D21 D20)>(D11 D10) A A
M0
Footnote
As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric
Values for detail.
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-21
API Applicable modelsES EP EH116 D
RAD P Degree Radian
-
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range.
This command is only valid for 32-bit commands DRAD and DRADP.
16-bit command
- - - -
32 -bit command (9 STEPS)
DRAD Continuous execution DRADP Pulse
execution Flag: M1020 Zero flag, M1021
Borrow flag, M1022 Carry flag
CommandExplanation
: data source (degree) : Coverted result (radian). Using following function to convert degree to radian:
Radian = degree × (π/180)
If absolut of conversion result is larger than max. floating point, carry flag M1022=On.
If absolut of conversion result is less than min. floating point, borrow flag M1021=On.
If conversion result is 0, zero flag M1020=On.
ProgramExample
When X0=On, convert degree value of specific binary floating point (D1, D0) to radian to
save in (D11, D10) and the content is binary floating point. X0
DRAD D0 D10
D 1 D 0
D 11 D 10binary floating pointRAD ( 180) value /X πdegree
degree valuebinary floating point
Footnote
As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric
Values for detail.
API Applicable modelsES EP EH117 D
DEG P Radian Degree
-
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range.
This command is only valid for 32-bit commands DDEG and DDEGP.
16-bit command
- - - -
32 -bit command (9 STEPS)
DDEG Continuous execution DDEGP Pulse
execution Flag: M1020 Zero flag, M1021
Borrow flag and M1022 Carry flag
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-22
CommandExplanation
: data source (radian). : Coverted result (degree). Using following function to convert radian to degree:
degree = radian × (180/π)
If absolut of conversion result is larger than max. floating point, carry flag M1022=On.
If absolut of conversion result is less than min. floating point, borrow flag M1021=On.
If conversion result is 0, zero flag M1020=On.
ProgramExample
When X0=On, convert degree value of specific binary floating point (D1, D0) to radian to
save in (D11, D10) and the content is binary floating point. X0
DDEG D0 D10
D 1 D 0
D 11 D 10binary floating pointdegree (radian 180/ ) value X π
radian valuebinary floating point
Footnote
As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric
Values for detail.
API Applicable modelsES EP EH118 D EBCD P
Convert Binary Floating Point to Decimal Floating Point
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range.
This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DEBCD, DEBCDP are available. ES series models do not support pulse execution commands (DEBCDP)
16-bit command
- - - - 32 -bit command (9 STEPS)
DEBCD Continuous execution DEBCDP Pulse
execution Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Data source : Coverted result
Convert binary floating point value at the register specified by to decimal floating
point value stored in the register specified by . PLC floating point is operated by the binary floating point format. DEBCD command is
the specific command used to convert binary floating point to decimal floating point.
If absolut of conversion result is larger than max. floating point, carry flag M1022=On.
If absolut of conversion result is less than min. floating point, borrow flag M1021=On.
If conversion result is 0, zero flag M1020=On.
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-23
ProgramExample
When X0=On, the binary floating point value in D1, D0 will be converted to decimal
floating point stored in D3, D2.
D0DEBCDX0
D2
D0D1
D2D3
Exponent Real number
BinaryFloating Point
32 bits for real number, 8 bits for exponent1 bit for symbol bit
[D2] * 10[D3]ExponentReal numberDecimal
Floating Point
32 bits for real number, 8 bits for exponent1 bit for symbol bit
Footnote
As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric
Values for detail.
API Applicable models
ES EP EH119
D
EBIN P
Convert Decimal Floating Point to Binary Floating Point
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range.
This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DEBIN, DEBINP are available. ES series models do not support pulse execution commands (DEBINP).
16-bit command
- - - - 32 -bit command (9 STEPS)
DEBIN Continuous execution DEBINP Pulse
execution Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Data source : Coverted result
Convert decimal floating point value at the register specified by to binary floating
point value stored in the register specified by .
For example, =1234, +1= 8 will become =1.2345 x 105
must be a binary floating point format. and +1 represent the real number and exponent of the floating point number respectively.
DEBIN command is the specific command used to convert decimal floating point to
binary floating point.
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-24
ProgramExample
1
When X1=On, the decimal floating point value in D1, D0 will be converted to binary
floating point stored in D3, D2.
D0DEBINX1
D2
D0D1
D2D3
[D1] * 10[D0]Decimal
Floating Point
BinaryFloating Point
Exponent Real numberExponent Real number
23 bits for real number, 8 bits for exponent1 bit for symbol bit
ProgramExample
2
Before perform floating point operation, must use FLT (API 49) command to convert BIN
integer to binary floating point. The source data (the value which will be converted)
should be a BIN integer. However, DEBIN command can be used to convert floating
point value to binary floating point value.
When X0=On, move K314 to D0 and move K-2 to D1 to generate decimal floating point
format (3.14 = 314 × 10-2).
K314MOVPX0
D0
D0DEBIN D2
K-2MOVP D1
K314 D0 [D1]
K-2 D1 [D0]314 x10
(D1 D0) (D3 D2), ,
314 x10
-2
BinaryFloating Point
Footnote
As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric
Values for detail.
API Applicable models
ES EP EH120 D EADD
P Binary Floating Point Addition
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS1 S2 D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range.
This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DEADD, DEADDP are available. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (DEADDP).
16-bit command
- - - - 32-bit command (13 STEPS)
DEADD Continuous execution DEADDP Pulse
execution Flag: M1020 (Zero flag), M1021
(Borrow flag) and M1022 (Carry flag)
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-25
CommandExplanation
: Augend : Addend : Addition result
+ = . The floating point value in the register specified by and
are added and the result is stored in the register specified by . All source data will be operated in floating point format and the result will be also stored in floating
point format.
If the source operand or is indicated as constant K or H, the integer value will automatically be converted to binary floating point to perform the addition
operation.
and can specify the same register number (the same device can be used
as and ). If in this case and on the continuous execution of the DEADD command, the data in the register will be added one time in every scan program during
the cycle when the condition contact is On. Therefore, the pulse execution command
(DEADDP) is generally used.
If absolut of conversion result is larger than max. floating point, carry flag M1022=On.
If absolut of conversion result is less than min. floating point, borrow flag M1021=On.
If conversion result is 0, zero flag M1020=On.
ProgramExample
1
When X0=On, add binary floating point value of (D1, D0) and binary floating point
value of (D3, D2) and store the result in (D11, D10).
D0DEADDX0
D2 D10
ProgramExample
2
When X2=On, add binary floating point value of (D11, D10) and K1234 (automatically
converted to binary floating point) and store the result in (D21, D20).
D10DEADDX2
K1234 D20
Footnote
As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric
Values for detail.
API Applicable models
ES EP EH121 D ESUB
P Binary Floating Point Subtraction
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS1 S2 D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range.
This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DESUB, DESUBP are available. ES series models do not support pulse command(DESUBP).
16-bit command
- - - - 32-bit command (13 STEPS)
DESUB Continuous execution DESUBP Pulse
execution Flag: M1020 (Zero flag), M1021
(Borrow flag) and M1022 (Carry flag)
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-26
CommandExplanation
: Minuend : Subtrahend : Subtraction result
− = . The floating point value in the register specified by is
subtracted from the floating point value in the register specified by and the result
is stored in the register specified by . All data will be operated in floating point format and the result will be also stored in floating point format.
If the source operand or is indicated as constant K or H, the integer value will automatically be converted to binary floating point to perform the subtraction
operation.
and can specify the same register number (the same device can be used
as and ). If in this case and on the continuous execution of the DESUB command, the data in the register will be subtracted one time in every scan program
during the cycle when the condition contact is On. Therefore, the pulse execution
command (DESUBP) is generally used.
If absolut of conversion result is larger than max. floating point, carry flag M1022=On.
If absolut of conversion result is less than min. floating point, borrow flag M1021=On.
If conversion result is 0, zero flag M1020=On.
ProgramExample
1
When X0=On, binary floating point value of (D3, D2) is subtracted from binary floating
point value of (D1, D0) and the result is stored in (D11, D10).
D0DESUBX0
D2 D10
ProgramExample
2
When X2=On, binary floating point value of (D1, D0) is subtracted from K1234
(automatically converted to binary floating point) and the result is stored in (D11, D10).
K1234DESUBX2
D0 D10
Footnote
As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric
Values for detail.
API Applicable models
ES EP EH122 D EMUL
P Binary Floating Point Multiplication
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS1 S2 D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range.
This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DEMUL, DEMULP are available. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (DEMULP).
16-bit command
- - - - 32-bit command (13 STEPS)
DEMUL Continuous execution DEMULP Pulse
execution Flag: M1020 Zero flag, M1021
Borrow flag and M1022 Carry flag
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-27
CommandExplanation
: Multiplicand : Multiplier : Multiplication result
× = . The floating point value in the register specified by is
multiplied with the floating point value in the register specified by and the result is
stored in the register specified by . All data will be operated in floating point format and the result will be also stored in floating point format.
If the source operand or is indicated as constant K or H, the integer value will automatically be converted to binary floating point to perform the multiplication
operation.
and can specify the same register number (the same device can be used
as and ). If in this case and on the continuous execution of the DEMUL command, the data in the register will be multiplied one time in every scan program
during the cycle when the condition contact is On. Therefore, the pulse execution
command (DEMULP) is generally used.
If absolut of conversion result is larger than max. floating point, carry flag M1022=On.
If absolut of conversion result is less than min. floating point, borrow flag M1021=On.
If conversion result is 0, zero flag M1020=On.
ProgramExample
1
When X1=On, binary floating point value of (D1, D0) is multiplied with binary floating
point (D11, D10) and the result is stored in (D21, D20).
D0DEMULX1
D10 D20
ProgramExample
2
When X2=On, binary floating point value of (D1, D0) is multiplied with K1234
(automatically converted to binary floating point) and the result is stored in (D11, D10).
K1234DEMULX2
D0 D10
Footnote
As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric
Values for detail.
API Applicable models
ES EP EH123 D EDIV
P Binary Floating Point Division
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS1 S2 D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range.
This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DEDIV, DEDIVP are available. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (DEDIVP).
16-bit command
- - - -
32-bit command (13 STEPS)
DEDIV Continuous execution DEDIVP Pulse
execution Flag: M1020 Zero flag, M1021
Borrow flag and M1022 Carry flag
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-28
CommandExplanation
: Dividend : Divisor : Quotient and Remainder
÷ = . The floating point value in the register specified by is
divided by the floating point value in the register specified by and the result is
stored in the register specified by . All data will be operated in floating point format and the result will be also stored in floating point format.
If the source operand or is indicated as constant K or H, the integer value will automatically be converted to binary floating point to perform the division operation.
If is 0 (zero), the operation will fail and will result in an “operand error”, then this command will not be executed.
If absolut of conversion result is larger than max. floating point, carry flag M1022=On.
If absolut of conversion result is less than min. floating point, borrow flag M1021=On.
If conversion result is 0, zero flag M1020=On.
ProgramExample
1
When X1=On, binary floating point value of (D1, D0) is divided by binary floating point
(D11, D10) and the remainder is stored in (D21, D20).
D0DEDIVX1
D10 D20
ProgramExample
2
When X2=On, binary floating point value of (D1, D0) is divided by K1234 (automatically
converted to binary floating point) and the result is stored in (D11, D10).
D0DEDIVX2
K10 D10
Footnote
As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric
Values for detail.
API Applicable models
ES EP EH124 D EXP
P Perform Exponent Operation of Binary Floating Point
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range.
This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DEXP, DEXPP are available. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (DEXPP).
16-bit command
- - - -
32-bit command (13 STEPS)
DEXP Continuous execution DEXPP Pulse
execution Flag: M1020 Zero flag, M1021
Borrow flag and M1022 Carry flag
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-29
CommandExplanation
: operand source device. : operand result device.
For example, the base e =2.71828 and exponent is :
EXP[ +1, ]=[ +1, ] No matter positive or negative value are valid for S. Specific register D needs to use
32-bit format and floating point for operating. Therefore, S needs to convert to floating
point.
When operand D= e S, e=2.71828 and S is specific source data.
Error flag M1067 and M1068 read D1067 and D1068.
If absolut of conversion result is larger than max. floating point, carry flag M1022=On.
If absolut of conversion result is less than min. floating point, borrow flag M1021=On.
If conversion result is 0, zero flag M1020=On.
ProgramExample
When M0=On, convert (D0, D1) to binary floating point and save in register (D10, D11).
When M1=On, use (D10, D11) to be exponent to perform exponent operation. The
value is binary floating point and save in register (D20, D21).
When M2=On, convert (D20, D21) binary floating point to decimal floating point and
save in register (D30, D31). (at this time, D31 means D30 to the power of 10) M0
RST M1081
M1DEXP D10 D20
M2DEBCD D20 D30
Footnote
As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric
Values for detail.
API Applicable models
ES EP EH125 D LN
P Perform Natural Logarithm Operation of Binary Floating Point
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range.
This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DLN, DLNP are available. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (DLNP).
16-bit command
- - - -
32-bit command (13 STEPS)
DLN Continuous execution DLNP Pulse
execution Flag: M1020 Zero flag, M1021
Borrow flag and M1022 Carry flag
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-30
CommandExplanation
: operand source device. : operand result device.
For example, perform natural logarithm operation ln to operand :
LN[ +1, ]=[ +1, ] Only positive number is valid for S. Specific register D needs to use 32-bit format and
floating point for operating. Therefore, S needs to convert to floating point.
When operand eD=S, operand D=lnS and S is specific source data.
If absolut of conversion result is larger than max. floating point, carry flag M1022=On.
If absolut of conversion result is less than min. floating point, borrow flag M1021=On.
If conversion result is 0, zero flag M1020=On.
ProgramExample
When M0=On, convert (D0, D1) to binary floating point and save in register (D10, D11).
When M1=On, use (D10, D11) to be real number to perform natural logarithm operation.
The value is binary floating point and save in register (D20, D21).
When M2=On, convert (D20, D21) binary floating point to decimal floating point and
save in register (D30, D31). (at this time, D31 means D30 to the power of 10) M0
RST M1081
M1DLN D10 D20
M2DEBCD D20 D30
Footnote
As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric
Values for detail.
API Applicable models
ES EP EH126 D LOG
P Perform Logarithm Operation of Binary Floating Point
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1 S2 D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range.
This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DLOG, DLOGP are available. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (DLOGP).
16-bit command
- - - -
32-bit command (13 STEPS)
DLOG Continuous execution DLOGP Pulse
execution Flag: M1020 Zero flag, M1021
Borrow flag and M1022 Carry flag
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-31
CommandExplanation
: operand base device. : operand source device. : operand result device.
Perform logarithm operation to and and save the result to . Only positive number is valid for S2 (positive and negative number are valid for S1).
Specific register D needs to use 32-bit format and floating point for operating. Therefore,
S1 and S2 need to convert to floating point. Consider S1D=S2, D=? →Log S1
S2=D Consider S1=5,S2=125, D=log 5125=? S1D=S2→5D=125→D=log 5
125=3 If absolut of conversion result is larger than max. floating point, carry flag M1022=On.
If absolut of conversion result is less than min. floating point, borrow flag M1021=On.
If conversion result is 0, zero flag M1020=On.
ProgramExample
When M0=On, convert (D0, D1) and (D2, D3) to binary floating point and save in
register (D10, D11) and (D12, D13) individually.
When M1=On, use (D10, D11) and (D12, D13) binary floating point of 32-bit registers to
perform logarithm operation and save the result in 32-bit register (D20, D21).
When M2=On, convert (D20, D21) binary floating point of 32-bit registers to decimal
floating point and save in register (D30, D31). (at this time, D31 means D30 to the
power of 10) M0
RST M1081
M1D10 D12
M2DEBCD D20 D30
D2 D12
D20
Footnote
As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric
Values for detail.
API Applicable models
ES EP EH127 D ESQR
P Square Root of Binary Floating Point
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS D Note: Essential condition: S only can be a positive value. (S≧0)
Refer to each model specification for usage range. This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DESQR, DESQRP are available. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (DESQRP).
16-bit command
- - - - 32-bit command (9 STEPS)
DESQR Continuous execution DESQRP Pulse
execution Flag: M1020 (Zero flag), M1067
(Program execution error)
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-32
CommandExplanation
: Source device : Destination device which store the result This command performs a square root operation on the floating point value of source
device and stores the result at the destination device . All data will be operated in floating point format and the result will be also stored in floating point format.
If the source operand or is indicated as constant K or H, the integer value will automatically be converted to binary floating point to perform the addition
operation.
If operation result of is 0 (zero), the Zero flag M1020=On.
only can be a positive value. Performing any square root operation on a negative value will result in an “operation error” and this command will not be executed.
M1067 and M1068 will be On and error code “0E1B” will be record in D1067.
ProgramExample
1
When X0=On, the square root of binary floating point (D1, D0) is stored in the register
specified by (D11, D10) after the operation of square root.
D0DESQRX0
D10
(D1, D0) (D11 D10), binary floating point binary floating point
ProgramExample
2
When X2=On, the square root of K1234 (automatically converted to binary floating
point) is stored in (D11, D10).
K1234DESQRX2
D10
Footnote
As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric
Values for detail.
API Applicable models
ES EP EH128 D POW
P Perform Power Operation of Binary Floating Point
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1 S2 D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range.
This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DPOW, DPOWP are available. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (DPOWP).
16-bit command
- - - - 32-bit command (13 STEPS)
DPOW Continuous execution DPOWP Pulse
execution Flag: no.
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-33
CommandExplanation
: base device. : exponent device. : operand result device.
Perform power operation to binary floating point and and save the result
to .
POW [ +1, ]^[ +1, ]= Only positive number is valid for S1 and S2. Specific register D needs to use 32-bit
format and floating point for operating. Therefore, S1 and S2 need to convert to floating
point. When S1S2=D, D=? If S1=5,S2=3, D=53=? D=53=125
Error flag M1067 and M1068 read D1067 and D1068.
If absolut of conversion result is larger than max. floating point, carry flag M1022=On.
If absolut of conversion result is less than min. floating point, borrow flag M1021=On.
If conversion result is 0, zero flag M1020=On.
ProgramExample
When M0=On, convert (D0, D1) and (D2, D3) to binary floating point and save in
register (D10, D11) and (D12, D13) individually.
When M1=On, use (D10, D11) and (D12, D13) binary floating point of 32-bit registers to
perform power operation and save the result in 32-bit register (D20, D21).
When M2=On, convert (D20, D21) binary floating point of 32-bit registers to decimal
floating point and save in register (D30, D31). (at this time, D31 means D30 to the
power of 10) M0
RST M1081
M1D10 D12
M2DEBCD D20 D30
D2 D12
D20
Footnote
As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric
Values for detail.
API Applicable models
ES EP EH129 D INT
P Convert Binary Floating Point to BIN Integer
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range.
ES series models do not support this command (INTP, DINTP).
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
INT Continuous execution INTP Pulse
execution
32-bit command (9 STEPS)
DINT Continuous execution DINTP Pulse
execution Flag: M1020 (Zero flag), M1021
(Borrow flag), M1022 (Carry flag)
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-34
CommandExplanation
: Source device : Destination device which store the result
The binary floating point value of the register specified by is converted to BIN
integer and stored in the register specified . The decimal of Bin integer will be discarded.
This command is the inverse of the API 49 (FLT) command.
If operation result of is 0 (zero), the Zero flag M1020=On. If there is any decimal discarded, the Borrow flag M1021=On.
If the result exceeds the following setting range (an overflow occurs), the Carry flag
M1022=On.
16-bit command : -32,768~32,767
32-bit command : -2,147,483,648~2,147,483,647
ProgramExample
When X0=On, the binary floating point value of (D1, D0) will be converted to BIN
integer and the result is stored in (D10). The decimal of BIN integer will be discarded.
When X1=On, the binary floating point value of (D21, D20) will be converted to BIN
integer and the result is stored in (D31, D30). The decimal of BIN integer will be
discarded.
INTX0
D0 D10
DINTX1
D20 D30
Footnote
As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric
Values for detail.
API Applicable models
ES EP EH130 D SIN
P Sine Operation of Binary Floating Point
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS D Note: The data specified in S must be within the range 0° to 360°;
i.e., 0°≦S<360° Refer to each model specification for usage range. This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DSIN, DSINP are available. ES series models do not support pulse execution command (DSINP).
16-bit command
- - - -
32-bit command (9 STEPS)
DSIN Continuous execution DSINP Pulse
execution Flag: M1018 flag for radian/angle.
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-35
CommandExplanation
: Specified RAD value : Area where calculated result is stored.
Source desgnated by can be radian or angle by flag M1018. When M1018=Off, it is set to radian mode. RAD=angle ×π/180.
When M1018=On, it is set to angle mode. Angle range: 0°≦angle<360°.
The SIN value of an angle data specified by is calculated and the calculated
result is stored in the register specified by .
S: RadianR: Result
R
S-2 3
2-2 23
222-
1
-1
0-
Following shows the relation between radian and result:
ProgramExample
1
When M1018=Off, it is radian mode. When X0=On, specify RAD value (D1, D0).
Calculate SIN value of angle and store the result in (D11, D10). The result stored in
(D11, D10) are all in binary floating point format.
M1002RST M1018
X0DSIN D0 D10
D1 D0
D1 D10 COS value
RAD 180)value (degree x /binary floating point
binary floating point
ProgramExample
2
When M1018=Off, it is radian mode. Select angle from inputs X0 and X1 and convert it
to RAD value to calculate SIN value.
D10FLTM1000
D1120
K31415926 K1800000000
D20D14 D40
K30MOVPX0
K6
K60X1
K6
D50D40
DEDIV
DSIN
D20
MOVP
DEMUL
(K30 D10)
(K60 D10)
(D10 D15, D14)
( /180) (D21, D20)
(D15, D14) degree x /180(D41, D40) RAD binary floating point
(D41 D40) RAD (D51, D50) SIN,
binary floating point
binary floating point
binary floating point
binary floating point
ProgramExample
3
When M1018=On, it is anlge mode. When X0=On, it designates angle value of (D1,
D0). Angle range is: 0°≦angle value<360°. After converting to SIN value to save in
(D11, D10) with binary floating point number.
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-36
M1002SET M1018
X0DSIN D0 D10
D 1 D 0
D 11 D 10
angle value
SIN value(binary floating point)
Footnote
As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric
Values for detail.
API Applicable models
ES EP EH131 D COS
P Cosine Operation of Binary Floating Point
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS D Note: The data specified in S must be within the range 0° to 360°;
i.e., 0°≦S<360° Refer to each model specification for usage range. This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DCOS, DCOSP are available. ES/EP series models do not support this command (DCOS, DCOSP).
16-bit command
- - - -
32-bit command (9 STEPS)
DCOS Continuous execution DCOSP Pulse
execution Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Specified RAD value. : Area where calculated result is stored.
Source desgnated by can be radian or angle by flag M1018. When M1018=Off, it is set to radian mode. RAD=angle ×π/180.
When M1018=On, it is set to angle mode. Angle range: 0°≦angle<360°.
The COS value of an angle data specified by is calculated and the calculated
result is stored in the register specified by .
S: RadianR: Result
Following shows the relation between radian and result:
S-2 3
2-2 23
222-
1
-1
0-
R
Flag M1018 radian/angle switch: when M1018=Off, is RAD value. When
M1018=On, is angle value (0-360).
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-37
ProgramExample
1
When M1018=Off, it is radian mode. When X0=On, specify RAD value (D1, D0).
Calculate COS value of angle and store the result in (D11, D10). The value in (D1, D0)
and the result stored in (D11, D10) are all in binary floating point format.
M1002RST M1018
X0DCOS D0 D10
D1 D0
D1 D10 COS value
RAD 180)value (degree x /binary floating point
binary floating point
ProgramExample
2
When M1018=On, it is angle mode. When X0=On, it is angle of specific (D1, D0). Angle
range: 0°≦angle<360°. After converting to COS value, save in (D11, D10) with binary
floating point.
M1002SET M1018
X0DCOS D0 D10
D 1 D 0
D 1 D 10
angle value
COS value(binary floating point)
Footnote
As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric
Values for detail.
API Applicable models
ES EP EH132 D TAN
P Tangent Operation of Binary Floating Point
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS D Note: The data specified in S must be within the range 0° to 360°;
i.e., 0°≦S<360° Refer to each model specification for usage range. This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DTAN, DTANP are available. ES series models do not support pulse execution command(DTANP).
16-bit command
- - - -
32-bit command (9 STEPS)
DTAN Continuous execution DTANP Pulse
execution Flag: None
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-38
CommandExplanation
: Specified RAD value. : Area where calculated result is stored.
Source desgnated by can be radian or angle by flag M1018. When M1018=Off, it is set to radian mode. RAD=angle ×π/180.
When M1018=On, it is set to angle mode. Angle range: 0°≦angle<360°.
The TAN value of an angle data specified by is calculated and the calculated result is stored in the register specified by .
S: RadianR: Result
Following shows the relation between radian and result:R
S-2
2
32
22-
1-103
2--
ProgramExample
1
When M1018=Off, it is radian mode. When X0=On, specify RAD value (D1, D0).
Calculate TAN value of angle and store the result in (D11, D10). The value in (D1, D0)
and the result stored in (D11, D10) are all in binary floating point format.
M1002RST M1018
X0DTAN D0 D10
D1 D0
D11 D10
RAD 180)value (degree x /
TAN value
binary floating point
binary floating point
ProgramExample
2
When M1018=On, it is angle mode. When X0=On, it is angle of specific (D1, D0). Angle
range: 0°≦angle<360°. After converting to TAN value, save in (D11, D10) with binary
floating point.
M1002SET M1018
X0DTAN D0 D10
D 1 D 0
D 1 D 10
angle value
TAN value(binary floating point)
Footnote
As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric
Values for detail.
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-39
API Applicable modelsES EP EH133 D
ASIN P
Arc Sine Operation of Binary Floating Point
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range.
This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DASIN, DASINP are available.
16-bit command
- - - - 32-bit command (9 STEPS)
DASIN Continuous execution DASINP Pulse
execution Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Specified source (binary floating point) : Area where calculated result is stored.
ASIN value=SIN –1
S: RadianR: Result
Following shows the relation between radian and result:R
S
2
2-
0-1,0 1,0
ProgramExample
When X0=On, specify binary floating point (D1, D0). Calculate ASIN value and save the
result in (D11, D10). The result stored in (D11, D10) is all in binary floating point format.
DASINX0
D0 D10
D1 D0
D11 D10 ASIN value
binary floating point
binary floating point
Footnote
As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric
Values for detail.
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-40
API Applicable modelsES EP EH134 D
ACOS P
Arc Cosine Operation of Binary Floating Point
-
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range.
This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DACOS, DACOSP are available.
16-bit command
- - - - 32-bit command (9 STEPS)
DACOS Continuous execution DACOSP Pulse
execution Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Specified source (binary floating point) : Area where calculated result is stored
ACOS value=COS –1
S: RadianR: Result
Following shows the relation between radian and result:R
S
2
0 1,0-1,0
ProgramExample
When X0=On, specify binary floating point (D1, D0). Calculate ACOS value and save
the result in (D11, D10). The result stored in (D11, D10) is all in binary floating point
format.
DACOSX0
D0 D10
D1 D0
D11 D10 ACOS value
binary floating point
binary floating point
Footnote
As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric
Values for detail.
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-41
API Applicable modelsES EP EH135 D
ATAN P
Arc Tangent Operation of Binary Floating Point
-
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range.
This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DATAN, DATANP are available.
16-bit command
- - - - 32-bit command (9 STEPS)
DATAN Continuous execution DATANP Pulse
execution Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Specified source (binary floating point) : Area where calculated result is stored.
ATAN value=TAN –1
S: RadianR: Result
Following shows the relation between radian and result:R
S
2
2-
0
ProgramExample
When X0=On, specify binary floating point (D1, D0). Calculate ATAN value and save
the result in (D11, D10). The result stored in (D11, D10) is all in binary floating point
format.
DATANX0
D0 D10
D1 D0
D11 D10 ATAN value
binary floating point
binary floating point
Footnote
As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric
Values for detail.
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-42
API Applicable modelsES EP EH136 D
SINH P
Hyperbolic Sine Operation of Binary Floating Point
-
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range.
This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DSINH, DSINHP are available.
16-bit command
- - - - 32-bit command (9 STEPS)
DSINH Continuous execution DSINHP Pulse
execution Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Specified source (binary floating point) : Area where calculated result is stored
SINH value=(es-e-s)/2
ProgramExample
When X0=On, specify binary floating point (D1, D0). Calculate SINH value and save the
result in (D11, D10). The result stored in (D11, D10) is all in binary floating point format.
DSINHX0
D0 D10
D1 D0
D11 D10 SINH value
binary floating point
binary floating point
Footnote
As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric
Values for detail.
API Applicable models
ES EP EH137 D COSH
P Hyperbolic Cosine Operation of Binary Floating Point
-
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range.
This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DCOSH, DCOSHP are available.
16-bit command
- - - - 32-bit command (9 STEPS)
DCOSH Continuous execution DCOSHP Pulse
execution Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Specified source (binary floating point) : Area where calculated result is stored
COSH value=(es+e-s)/2
ProgramExample
When X0=On, specify binary floating point (D1, D0). Calculate COSH value and save
the result in (D11, D10). The result stored in (D11, D10) is all in binary floating point
format.
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-43
DCOSHX0
D0 D10
D1 D0
D11 D10 COSH value
binary floating point
binary floating point
Footnote
As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric
Values for detail.
API Applicable models
ES EP EH138 D TANH
P Hyperbolic Tangent Operation of Binary Floating Point
-
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range.
This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DTANH, DTANHP are available.
16-bit command
- - - - 32-bit command (9 STEPS)
DTANH Continuous execution DTANHP Pulse
execution Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Specified source (binary floating point) : Area where calculated result is stored
TANH value=(es-e-s)/(es+e-s)
ProgramExample
When X0=On, specify binary floating point (D1, D0). Calculate ASIN value and save the
result in (D11, D10). The result stored in (D11, D10) is all in binary floating point format.
DTANHX0
D0 D10
D1 D0
D11 D10 TANH value
binary floating point
binary floating point
Footnote
As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric
Values for detail.
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-44
API Applicable modelsES EP EH144 D
GPWM P
General Pulse Width Modulation Output
-
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1 S2 D Note: Please refer to command explanation for usage range of
operand S1, S2 and D. Operand S2 occupies 3 devices. Operand S1 should be less or equal to operand S2. Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command
- - - - 32-bit command (13 STEPS)
DPOW Continuous execution DPOWP Pulse
execution Flag: no.
CommandExplanation
: Pulse output width. : Pulse output cycle. : pulse output device.
is specified as pulse output width as t:0~32,767ms.
is specified as pulse output cycle as T:1~32,767ms, ≦ .
+1 and +2 is for system, please don’t use them.
pulse output devices: Y, M and S.
When GPWM command has been executed, the pulse output width and pulse output cycle is output through pulse output device .
When ≦ 0, there is no pulse output from the pulse output device. When ≧ , the pulse output device will be always On.
and can be modified when executing PWM command.
ProgramExample
When X0=On, Y10 will output following pulse. When X0=Off, Y10 output will also be Off.
X0GPWM K1000 K2000 Y10
t T
t=1000ms
T=2000ms
Output Y10
Footnote
This command counts by scan cycle so the maximum offset will be a PLC scan cycle. The value of , and ( - ) should be larger than PLC scan cycle. Otherwise, there will be error occurs for GPWM outputs.
Please notice that if using this command in subroutine or interruption, GPWM output may not be accurate.
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-45
API Applicable modelsES EP EH145 FTC
Fuzzy Temperature Control -
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS1 S2 S3 D Note: Refer to command explanation for operand S1, S2 and D
usage range. Operand S3 occupies continuous 6 devices. Refer to each model specification for usage range. Refer to footnote for PID usage times in program.
16-bit command (9 STEPS)
FTC Continuous execution - -
32-bit command - - - - Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Target value (SV) : Present measured value (PV) : Parameter : Output value (MV)
Operand S1 usage range is 1~3000 to show 0.1°C ~300°C. The unit is 0.1°C. If (+1) (refer to footnote) sets to K0 to show 0.1°C~300°C.
Operand S2 usage range is 1~3000 to show 0.1°C ~300°C. The unit is 0.1°C. If (+1) (refer to footnote) sets to K0 to show 0.1°C~300°C.
Therefore, when user gets the result that analog converts to digital from temperature sensor, it needs to convert to the value during 1~3000 by using the four fundamental operations of arithmetic.
is sampling time setting. If setting is less than K1, command won’t act. If setting exceeds K200, it will be regarded as K200.
The setting of ( +1) only can be K0 (means °C) and K1 (means °F). When setting is not these two settings (K0 and K1), this setting will be set to K0.
Operand D usage range is 0~100 to show 0%~100%. User should use with other commands by heater type when using this command. For example, it can use with GPWM command to control pulse output as shown in footnote (example 1).
ProgramExample
Finishing parameter setting before executing FTC command.
When X0=On, command is executed and save result in D150. When X0=Off, command is not executed and previous data is unchanged.
X0FTC D0 D1 D100 D150
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-46
Footnote
The setting of is in the following:
Device Function Usage range Explanation
: Sampling time (TS)(unit: 10ms)
1~200 (unit: 100ms)
When TS is less than a scan time, PID command will execute for a scan time. When TS=0, it won’t act. Therefore, the minimum setting of TS should be larger than program scan time. When setting exceeds 200, it will be regarded as 200.
+1: Temperature unit K0=°C,K1=°FWhen setting is not these two settings (K0 and K1), this setting will be set to K0.
+2:
~
+5: For system uses, please don’t use.
Control Diagram:
+ e
FTC
PV
MVFuzzy
Controller
Temperature Sensor
Attention and suggestion:
It is recommended to set sampling time to twice and above of sampling time of
temperature sensor to get better temperature control.
Example 1: control diagram
FuzzyController
FTC
SVD0 D10
MVY10
D1PV
+ e PWMProgram
Pt Module TemperatureSensor
Following time chart is using GPWM command to output Y10. (t is pulse output width
and T is pulse output cycle time)
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-47
T11
T10 The setting of FTC command is sampling time D2=K10 (unit: 10ms) and temperature
unit is D3=K0(℃). Other example for using with temperature control are shown in
following.
M3FTC D0
MOV D10
<=
D11<> D10 D11
SET M4
RST Y10D11 K0
CJ P0
> SET Y10D11 K99
CJ P0
M3TMR T10
Y10TMR T11
T11RST Y10
T10SET Y10
RST T10
M4SET Y10
RST M4
> T10 K99
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-48
API ☺ Applicable modelsES EP EH147 D
SWAP P Swap High/Low Byte
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S Note: If operand D uses with device F, it is only available in 16-bit
command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. The continuous command (SWAP, DSWAP) are only provided in V4.9(included) or later version of ES series models and EP/EH series models.
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
SWAP Continuous execution SWAPP Pulse
execution 32-bit command (9 STEPS)
DSWAP Continuous execution DSWAPP Pulse
execution Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Device for swapping high/low byte. When being 16-bit command, swapping the content of high/low byte.
When being 32-bit command, swapping the content of high/low byte.of two registers
separately.
This command is usually pulse execution (SWAPP, DSWAPP).
ProgramExample
1
When X0=ON, swapping the content of high/low byte of D0.
D0SWAPPX0
D0
High Byte Low Byte
ProgramExample
2
When X0=ON, swapping upper 8-bit and lower 8-bit of D11 and swapping upper 8-bit
and lower 8-bit of D10.
D10DSWAPX0
D10D11
High ByteHigh Byte Low Byte Low Byte
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-49
API Applicable modelsES EP EH148 D
MEMR P Data Backup MEMORY Read
-
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
m D n Note: The setting range of m operand: EP series model:
m=0~1,599; EH series models: m=0~9,999. The setting range of D operand: EP series model: D2000~D4999; EH series model: D2000~D9999 The setting range of n operand: 16-bit command: EP series model: n=K1~ K1,600; EH series models: n=K1〜K8,000. 32-bit command: EP series model: n=K1~ K800; EH series models: n=K1〜K4,000. Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
MEMR Continuous execution MEMRP Pulse
execution 32-bit command (13 STEPS)
DMEMR Continuous execution DMEMRP Pulse
execution Flag: M1101 (Please refer the
following footnote for detail)
CommandExplanation
: Address (Constant) for reading data of file register. : Address (Constant)
for storing read data. : Quantity of one time reading data. EP/EH series models use this command to read the data of file register and store the
read data in the data register.
EP series models provide 1,600 numbers of 16-bit file registers and EH series models
provide 10,000 numbers of 16-bit file registers.
Operand and for EP series models don’t support register E and F.
If operands , and is out of range, operand error will be occurred. M1067, M1068=On and error code 0E1A will be recorded in D1067.
ProgramExample
1
16-bit command MEMR reads 100 items data from the 10th address of file register and
store the read data in the data register started from D2000.
When X0=On, the command is executed. When X0 goes to Off, the command is not
executed and the content of previous read data has no change. X0
MEMR K10 D2000 K100
ProgramExample
2
32-bit command DMEMR reads 100 items data from the 20th address of file register
and store the read data in the data register started from D3000.
When X0=On, the command is executed. When X0 goes to Off, the command is not
executed and the content of previous read data has no change. X0
DMEMR K20 D3000 K100
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-50
API Applicable modelsES EP EH149 D
MEMW P Data Backup MEMORY Write In
-
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S m n Note: The setting range of S operand: EP series model:
S=D2000~D4999; EH series model: S=D2000~D9999. The setting range of m operand: EP series model: m=K0~K1,599; EH series models: m=K0~K9,999. The setting range of n operand: 16-bit command: EP series model: n= K1~ K1,600; EH series models: n=K1〜K8,000. 32-bit command: EP series model: n=K1~ K800; EH series models: n=K1〜K4,000. Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
MEMW Continuous execution MEMWP Pulse
execution 32-bit command (13 STEPS)
DMEMW Continuous execution
DMEMWP
Pulse execution
Flag: M1101 (Please refer the following footnote for detail)
CommandExplanation
: Address (Constant) for data writing in, D2000~D9999 : Address
(Constant) for file register writing in, K0~K9,999 : Quantity of one time reading data, K1~K8,000
EP/EH series models use this command to read the data of file register and store the
read data in the data register.
EP series models provide 1,600 numbers of 16-bit file registers and EH series models
provide 10,000 numbers of 16-bit file registers.
Operand and for EP series models don’t support register E and F.
If operands , and is out of range, operand error will be occurred. M1067, M1068=On and error code 0E1A will be recorded in D1067.
ProgramExample
When X0=On, the double word command DMEMW is executed. Write 100 items 32-bit
data started from D2001, D2000 in the file register address 0 to 199.
When X0=On, the command is executed. When X0 goes to Off, the command is not
executed and the content of previous read data has no change. X0
DMEMW D2000 K0 K100
File Register
EH series models: when EH series PLC startup or goes from STOP to RUN, EH
series PLC will determine M1101 (if startup the function of file register), D1101 (file
register starts to give number, K0~K9,999), D1102 (numbers of file registers of being
read, K1~K8,000), D1103 (destination device which stores the read data of file register,
specified data register D start to give number, K2,000~K9,999) and decide if
automatically transfer the content of file register to the specified data register.
EH series models: When the value of D1101 is less than 0, or the value of D1103 is less than 2,000 or more than 9,999, reading data from file register to data register is disabled.
8 Application Commands API 100-149
DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-51
EP series models: when EP series PLC startup or goes from STOP to RUN, EP series
PLC will determine M1101 (if startup the function of file register), D1101 (file register
starts to give number, K0~K1,600), D1102 (numbers of file registers of being read,
K1~K8,000), D1103 (destination device which stores the read data of file register,
specified data register D start to give number, K2,000~K4,999) and decide if
automatically transfer the content of file register to the specified data register.
EP series models: When the value of D1101 is less than 0 or more than 1,600, or the
value of D1103 is less than 2,000 or more than 4,999, reading data from file register to
data register is disabled.
When file register read data to data register D, if the address of file register or data
register exceeds the limit range, PLC will stop reading.
As for the data read and write in of file register, in PLC program only can use API
command 147 MEMR to read and use API command 148 MEMW to write in. For
detailed information about file registers, please refer to CH2 section 2.8.3.
There are 32,768 file registers. The file registers don’t have real number, therefore the
read/write in function of file register should be performed by the API command 147
MEMR and 148 MEMW, or using a peripheral equipment HPP and WPLSoft software.
The destination device is not always continuous. One part is on the inner SRAM and
the other part is on the SRAM CARD. If user did not insert the SRAM CARD and the
read address exceeds 2,000 addresses, then the read value will be all 0(zero).
Related special relays and registers of file register: Flag Function Explanation
M1101 If startup the function of file register, Latched, Default is Off
Special Register Function Explanation
D1101 File register starts to give number K0~K9,999, Latched, Default is 0
D1102 Numbers of file registers of being read K1~K8,000, Latched, Default is 0
D1103 Destination device which stores the read data of file register, specified data register D start to give number K2,000~K9,999, Latched, Default is 2,000
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual
9-1
API Applicable modelsES EP EH150
MODRW
MODBUS Data Read/ Write In
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1 S2 S3 S n Note: The setting range of S1 operand: K0~K255
The limit of S2 operand is specified as K3(H3), K6(H6), K16(H10) The setting range of n operand: n=K1~K8 This command (MODRW) is only provided in V4.9(included) or later version of ES series models and EP/EH series models.
16-bit command (11 STEPS)
MODRW Continuous execution - -
32-bit command
- - - - Flag: M1120~M1131, M1140~M1143
(Please refer the following footnote)
CommandExplanation
: Connection device address : Function code : Address of being
read or write : Register of being read/write : Length of read/write data
: Connection device address (UNIT ADDRESS). The setting range K0 to K255.
: FUNCTION CODE. For example: the command of AC drive or DVP-PLC to read many items is H03. Write command of AC drive or DVP-PLC is H06 and the
command of write many items is H10. Only above three function codes are provided
and the other function codes are disabled. Please refer the following program
examples.
: Device address that being read/write data (DEVICE ADDRESS). This is an inner device address of connection device. If the address is illegal to the specified
device, there will be fault code store in D1130 and at the same time, M1141 will be
ON. For example, 4000H is illegal to VFD-S, M1141 will be ON and D1130 = 2. Please
refer to VFD-S user manual for the details of fault codes.
: Source or destination of being read/write (SOURCE or DESTINATION). User can set register to write data length in advance or store data after reading.
: Read/Write data length (DATA LENGTH). The specified range K1~K8 (WORD).
ProgramExample
1
Function code K3(H3) : read many items data
1. PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive. (ASCII Mode when M1143=OFF)
2. PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive. (RTU Mode when M1143=ON)
Received data is stored in 16 continuous registers that start from D0 with ASCII format
when in ASCII mode. PLC will convert the content to Hexadecimal and store in
registers D1296~D1311 automatically. M1131=ON when it starts converting to
hexadecimal and M1131 will be OFF after completing converting.
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-2
ProgramExample
1
User can use MOV, DMOV or BMOV commands to move D1296~D1311 that store
hexadecimal data to general register to use. For ES series, other command is invalid
to this area.
Received data is stored in 8 continuous registers that start from D0 and specified by
users in hexadecimal format in RTU mode. At the same time, D1296~D1311 is invalid.
In ASCII mode or RTU mode, PLC will store the transmission data in D1256~D1295.
Users can move these register data to general register by using MOV, DMOV or
BMOV commands. Other commands are invalid to this area.
Data received from AC drive is stored in registers specified by users. After complete
receiving data, PLC will automatically check if the received data is correct. If there is
any fault, M1140 will be set to ON.
If inner data address of AC drive is illegal to specified device, it will have fault code.
Fault code will be stored in D1130 and M1141 will be on. For example, 8000H is illegal
to VFD-S and M1141=ON and D1130=2. Please refer to VFD-S user manual to fault
code.
After M1140=ON or M1141=ON, it will transmit a correct data to AC drive. If received
data is correct, M1140 and M1141 will be reset.
H87MOVM1002
D1120
SET M1120
SETX0
M1122
K100MOV D1129
MODRW K3K1X0
H2100
M1127
RST M1127
M1143X10
D0 K8
setting communicationprotocol 9600, 8, E, 1
communication protocol
setting communicationtime out 100ms
connectiondeviceaddress K1
functioncode K3read manyitems data
data addressH2100
data stored register
read/write datalength (word)
handling received data
ASCII mode : received data is stored in 16 consecutive registers that startfrom D0 with ASCII format when in ASCII mode. PLC will convert the contentto hexadecimal and store in registers D1296~D1311 automatically
RTU mode : received data is stored in 8 consecutive registers that start fromD0 and specified by users in hexadecimal type in RTU mode
receiving data completed and reset flag
RTU mode setting
Setting sending request
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual
9-3
ASCII Mode: PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive.
PLC VFD-S, PLC transmits: “ 01 06 0100 1770 71 ”
VFD-S PLC, PLC receives: “ 01 06 0100 1770 71 ”
PLC transmits data register (transmit message)
Register DATA Explanation D1256 Low ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1 D1256 High ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0
ADR (1,0) is AC drive address
D1257 Low ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1 D1257 High ‘6’ 36 H CMD 0 CMD (1,0) is command code
D1258 Low ‘0’ 30 H D1258 High ‘1’ 31 H D1259 Low ‘0’ 30 H D1259 High ‘0’ 30 H
Data Address
D1260 Low ‘1’ 31 H D1260 High ‘7’ 37 H D1261 Low ‘7’ 37 H D1261 High ‘0’ 30 H
Data contents The content of register D50 (H1770=K6000)
D1262 Low ‘7’ 37 H LRC CHK 1 D1262 High ‘1’ 31 H LRC CHK 0
LRC CHK (0,1) is error check
PLC receives data register (response message)
Register DATA Explanation D1070 Low ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1 D1070 High ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0 D1071 Low ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1 D1071 High ‘6’ 36 H CMD 0 D1072 Low ‘0’ 30 H D1072 High ‘1’ 31 H D1073 Low ‘0’ 30 H D1073 High ‘0’ 30 H
Data Address
D1074 Low ‘1’ 31 H D1074 High ‘7’ 37 H D1075 Low ‘7’ 37 H D1075 High ‘0’ 30 H
Data content
D1076 Low ‘7’ 37 H LRC CHK 1 D1076 High ‘1’ 31 H LRC CHK 0
RTU Mode: PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive
PLC VFD-S, PLC transmits: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07
VFD-S PLC, PLC receives: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07
PLC transmits data register (transmit message)
Register DATA Explanation
D1256 Low 01 H Address
D1257 Low 06 H Function
D1258 Low 20 H
D1259 Low 00 H Data Address
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-4
Register DATA Explanation
D1260 Low 00 H
D1261 Low 12 H Data content
The content of register D50
(H12)
D1262 Low 02 H CRC CHK Low
D1263 Low 07 H CRC CHK High
PLC receives data register (response message)
Register DATA Explanation
D1070 Low 01 H Address
D1071 Low 06 H Function
D1072 Low 20 H
D1073 Low 00 H Data Address
D1074 Low 00 H
D1075 Low 12 H Data content
D1076 Low 02 H CRC CHK Low
D1077 Low 07 H CRC CHK High
ProgramExample
2
Function code K6(H6) : write one WORD data into register
1. PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive. (ASCII Mode when M1143=OFF)
2. PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive. (RTU Mode when M1143=ON)
When in ASCII mode, users store the data that will be wrote to AC drive in ASCII
format in specified register D0. Data received from AC drive will be stored in registers
D1070~D1076.
When in RTU mode, users store the data that will be wrote to AC drive in hexadecimal
format in specified register D0. Data received from AC drive will be stored in registers
D1070~D1077.
When in ASCII mode or RTU mode, PLC will store the transmission data in registers
D1256~D1295. Users can move these data to general registers by using MOV, DMOV
or BMOV commands. Other commands are invalid to this area.
After complete receiving data, PLC will automatically check if the received data is
correct. If there is any fault, M1140 will be set to ON.
If inner data address of AC drive is illegal to specified device, it will have fault code.
Fault code will be stored in D1130 and M1141 will be on. For example, 8000H is illegal
to VFD-S and M1141=ON and D1130=2. Please refer to VFD-S user manual to fault
code.
After M1140=ON or M1141=ON, it will transmit a correct data to AC drive. If received
data is correct, M1140 and M1141 will be reset.
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual
9-5
H87MOVM1002
D1120
SET M1120
SETX0
M1122
K100MOV D1129
MODRW K6K1X0
H2000
M1127
RST M1127
M1143X10
D50 K1
setting communicationprotocol 9600, 8, E, 1
communication protocol
setting communicationtime out 100ms
connectiondeviceaddress K1
functioncode K6write onedata in
data addressH2000
data stored register
read/write datalength (word)
setting transmit flag
handling received data
ASCII mode : received data in ASCII format stored in special registers D1070~1078.
receiving data completed and reset flag
RTU mode : received data in hexadecimal format stored in special registers D1070~1078.
ASCII Mode: PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive.
PLC VFD-S, PLC transmits: “ 01 06 0100 1770 71 ”
VFD-S PLC, PLC receives: “ 01 06 0100 1770 71 ”
PLC transmits data register (transmit message)
Register DATA Explanation D1256 Low ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1 D1256 High ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0
ADR (1,0) is AC drive address
D1257 Low ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1 D1257 High ‘6’ 36 H CMD 0
CMD (1,0) is command code
D1258 Low ‘0’ 30 H D1258 High ‘1’ 31 H D1259 Low ‘0’ 30 H D1259 High ‘0’ 30 H
Data Address
D1260 Low ‘1’ 31 H D1260 High ‘7’ 37 H D1261 Low ‘7’ 37 H D1261 High ‘0’ 30 H
Data contents The content of register D50 (H1770=K6000)
D1262 Low ‘7’ 37 H LRC CHK 1 D1262 High ‘1’ 31 H LRC CHK 0
LRC CHK (0,1) is error check
PLC receives data register (response message)
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-6
Register DATA Explanation D1070 Low ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1 D1070 High ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0 D1071 Low ‘0’ 30 H CMD 1 D1071 High ‘6’ 36 H CMD 0 D1072 Low ‘0’ 30 H D1072 High ‘1’ 31 H D1073 Low ‘0’ 30 H D1073 High ‘0’ 30 H
Data Address
D1074 Low ‘1’ 31 H D1074 High ‘7’ 37 H D1075 Low ‘7’ 37 H D1075 High ‘0’ 30 H
Data content
D1076 Low ‘7’ 37 H LRC CHK 1 D1076 High ‘1’ 31 H LRC CHK 0
RTU Mode: PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive
PLC VFD-S, PLC transmits: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07
VFD-S PLC, PLC receives: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07
PLC transmits data register (transmit message)
Register DATA Explanation D1256 Low 01 H Address D1257 Low 06 H Function D1258 Low 20 H D1259 Low 00 H Data Address
D1260 Low 00 H D1261 Low 12 H Data content The content of
register D50 (H12) D1262 Low 02 H CRC CHK Low D1263 Low 07 H CRC CHK High
PLC receives data register (response message)
Register DATA Explanation D1070 Low 01 H Address D1071 Low 06 H Function D1072 Low 20 H D1073 Low 00 H Data Address
D1074 Low 00 H D1075 Low 12 H Data content
D1076 Low 02 H CRC CHK Low D1077 Low 07 H CRC CHK High
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual
9-7
ProgramExample
3
Function code K16(H10) : write many items WORD data into register
1. PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive. (ASCII Mode when M1143=OFF)
2. PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive. (RTU Mode when M1143=ON)
When in ASCII mode, users store the data that will be wrote to AC drive in ASCII
format in 8 continuous specified register started from D0. Received data from AC drive
will be stored in registers D1070~D1078.
When in RTU mode, users store the data that will be wrote to AC drive in hexadecimal
format in 8 continuous specified register started from D0. Received data from AC drive
will be stored in registers D1070~D1078.
When in ASCII mode or RTU mode, PLC will store the transmission data in registers
D1256~D1295. Users can move these data to general registers by using MOV, DMOV
or BMOV commands. Other commands are invalid to this area.
After complete receiving data, PLC will automatically check if the received data is
correct. If there is any fault, M1140 will be set to ON.
If inner data address of AC drive is illegal to specified device, it will have fault code.
Fault code will be stored in D1130 and M1141 will be on. For example, 8000H is illegal
to VFD-S and M1141=ON and D1130=2. Please refer to VFD-S user manual to fault
code.
After M1140=ON or M1141=ON, it will transmit a correct data to AC drive. If received
data is correct, M1140 and M1141 will be reset.
H87MOVM1002
D1120
SET M1120
SETX0
M1122
K100MOV D1129
MODRW K16K1X0
H2000
M1127
RST M1127
M1143X10
D50 K8
setting communicationprotocol 9600, 8, E, 1
communication protocol
setting communicationtime out 100ms
connectiondeviceaddress K1
functioncode K16write onedata in
data addressH2000
data stored register
read/write datalength (word)
setting transmit flag
handling received data
ASCII mode : received data in ASCII format stored in special registers D1070~1078.
receiving data completed and reset flag
RTU mode : received data in hexadecimal format stored in special registers D1070~1078.
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-8
ASCII Mode: PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive.
PLC VFD-S, PLC transmits: “ 01 10 2000 0002 04 0012 1770 30 ”
VFD-S PLC, PLC receives: “ 01 10 2000 0002 CD ”
PLC transmits data register (transmits messages)
Register DATA Explanation D1256 Low ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1 D1256 High ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0
ADR (1,0) is AC drive address
D1257 Low ‘1’ 31 H CMD 1 D1257 High ‘0’ 30 H CMD 0
CMD (1,0) is command code
D1258 Low ‘2’ 32 H D1258 High ‘0’ 30 H D1259 Low ‘0’ 30 H D1259 High ‘0’ 30 H
Data Address
D1260 Low ‘0’ 30 H D1260 High ‘0’ 30 H D1261 Low ‘0’ 30 H D1261 High ‘2’ 32 H
Number of Register
D1262 Low ‘0’ 30 H D1262 High ‘4’ 34 H Byte Count
D1263 Low ‘0’ 30 H D1263 High ‘0’ 30 H D1264 Low ‘1’ 31 H D1264 High ‘2’ 32 H
Data contents 1 The content of register D50 (H12)
D1265 Low ‘1’ 31 H D1265 High ‘7’ 37 H D1266 Low ‘7’ 37 H D1266 High ‘0’ 30 H
Data contents 2 The content of register D51 (H1770=K6000)
D1267 Low ‘3’ 33 H LRC CHK 1 D1267 High ‘0’ 30 H LRC CHK 0
LRC CHK (0,1) is error check
PLC receives data register (response messages)
Register DATA Explanation
D1070 Low ‘0’ 30 H ADR 1 D1070 High ‘1’ 31 H ADR 0 D1071 Low ‘1’ 31 H CMD 1 D1071 High ‘0’ 30 H CMD 0 D1072 Low ‘2’ 32 H D1072 High ‘0’ 30 H D1073 Low ‘0’ 30 H D1073 High ‘0’ 30 H
Data Address
D1074 Low ‘0’ 30 H D1074 High ‘0’ 30 H D1075 Low ‘0’ 30 H D1075 High ‘2’ 32 H
Number of Register
D1076 Low ‘C’ 43 H LRC CHK 1 D1076 High ‘D’ 44 H LRC CHK 0
RTU Mode: PLC connects to VFD-S AC drives
PLC VFD-S, PLC transmits: 01 10 2000 0002 04 0012 1770 C4 7F
VFD-S PLC, PLC receives: 01 10 2000 0002 4A 08
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual
9-9
PLC transmits data register (transmits messages)
Register DATA Explanation
D1256 Low 01 H Address
D1257 Low 10 H Function
D1258 Low 20 H
D1259 Low 00 H Data Address
D1260 Low 00 H
D1261 Low 02 H Number of Register
D1262 Low 04 H Byte Count
D1263 Low 00 H
D1264 Low 12 H Data content 1
The content of register D50
(H12)
D1265 Low 17 H
D1266 Low 70 H Data content 2
The content of register D51
(H1770=K6000)
D1262 Low C4 H CRC CHK Low
D1263 Low 7F H CRC CHK High
PLC receives data register (response messages)
Register DATA Explanation
D1070 Low 01 H Address
D1071 Low 10 H Function
D1072 Low 20 H
D1073 Low 00 H Data Address
D1074 Low 00 H
D1075 Low 02 H Number of Register
D1076 Low 4A H CRC CHK Low
D1077 Low 08 H CRC CHK High
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-10
Footnote
The startup condition (the contact) before MODRD, RDST, MODRW these three
commands, cannot use rising-edge contact and falling-edge. Otherwise, the data
stored in received register will be incorrect.
Related flags and special registers of RS-485 communication MODRW command:
Please refer to the footnote of API 80 RS command for more detail information. Flag/Special
Register Function Description
M1120 Communication setting latched. The change of D1120 will be invalid after setting.
M1121 When it is Off, RS-485 of PLC is sending communication data. M1122 Delivery request M1123 Receive completed M1124 Receive waiting message M1125 Receive status disable M1126 STX/ETX system definition selection M1127 MODRD / RDST / MODRW commands data receive completed M1128 Transmitting/receiving indication M1129 Receive time out M1130 Users/system definition STX/ETX M1131 MODRD / MODWR / MODRW data convert to HEX, M1131=ON M1140 MODRD / MODWR / MODRW data receive error M1141 MODRD / MODWR / MODRW command parameter error M1142 VFD-A convenience command data receive error
M1143 ASCII/RTU mode selection (use with commands MODRD/MODWR/MODRW) (Off is ASCII mode, ON is RTU mode)
D1070~D1085
It is PLC built-in RS-485 communication convenience command. This command will send messages during executing and if the receiver receives, it will return messages and save it in D1070~D1085. Users can view return data by this register content.
D1120 RS-485 communication protocol
D1121 PLC communication address.(save PLC communication address, has latched function)
D1122 Remainder characters of delivery data D1123 Remainder characters of received data D1124 Start text definition(STX) D1125 Definition of the first end character(ETX1) D1126 Definition of the second end character(ETX2) D1129 Communication time out abnormal. Time unit:(ms) D1130 Return fault code record of MODBUS
D1256~D1295
This is PLC built-in RS-485 communication convenience command MODRW. The message that this command sends during executing will be saved in D1256~D1295. User can check according to this register content.
D1296~D1311 PLC will automatically convert ASCII data saved in the register specified by users to hexadecimal format.
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual
9-11
API Applicable modelsES EP EH151
PWD Input Pulse Width Detection
- -
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S D Note: The limit of S operand is specified as X10~X17
The setting range of D operand: D=D0~D999, two continuous devices are used and only can be used one time in the program.
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
PWD Continuous execution - -
32-bit command
- - - - Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Source device : Destenstation device which stores detection result This command is used to detect the On pulse width of X10~X17 inputs and time unit is
100us.
occupy two continuous devices. The longest detectable time is 214,748.3647 seconds, about 3,579.139 minutes, about 59.652 hours.
If the On pulse width is less than 100us, the value of specified is equal to 0(zero).
ProgramExample
When X0=On, record the On pulse width of input X10 and store in D1, D0. X0
PWD X10 D0
API Applicable modelsES EP EH152
RTMU
Start to Measure the Execution Time of I Interrupt
- -
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S D Note: The limit of S operand is specified as K0~K9
The limit of D operand is specified as K1~K1,000
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
PWD Continuous execution - -
32-bit command
- - - - Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Source device : Destination device which stores measure time (time unit is 1us)
The limit range of is K0~K9, specified special D register and can measure ten interrupt subroutine at most, the number of specified special D register is D1156~1165
in order. For example, when the value of is K5, it means the number of specified special D register is D1161.
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-12
After executing RTMU command, if the range of , inputted by user is legal, this command will get the timer started to measure the execution time of I
interrupt and reset the content of special D register specified by to 0(zero) simultaneously. When reaching RTMD command, the timer will be closed and
measuring the execution time of I interrupt will end. At the same time, specify the
measuring execution time to the special D register specified by RTMD command.
This RTMU command is used with the next introduced RTMD command and these
two commands are all be used to measure the execution time of I interrupt service
program for the user to deal with high speed response and restrict to providing the
execution time of ISR (Interrupt Service Routine) at the beginning of the program
development. API Applicable models
ES EP EH153 RTMD
End to Measure the Execution Time of I Interrupt
- -
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S Note: The limit of S operand is specified as K0~K9
16-bit command (3 STEPS)
PWD Continuous execution - -
32-bit command
- - - - Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Source device
The limit range of is K0~K9, specified special D register and can measure ten interrupt subroutine at most, the number of specified special D register is D1156~1165
in order. For example, when the value of is K5, it means the number of specified special D register is D1161
ProgramExample
When X0 is Off→On, enter into I001 interrupt subtoutine, the RTMU command will
start a 8-bit timer (unit time is 10us). When reaching RTMD command K0 , close the
timer and store the measurin time in special D register (there are totally ten registers
D1156~D1165 and it is specified as K0~K9).
FEND
M1000
RTMU K0 D0
RTMD K0
IRET
I 001M1000
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual
9-13
Footnote
After developing PLC program completed, we recommanded that user should remove
this command.
Additional Explanation:
1. Due to the time interrupt executed by RTMU command is a less priority (less
important than other interrupts), the timer may not be triggered and cannot count the
time when executing high-speed pulse input counting or specifying high-speed pulse
input during the execution period of RTMU command.
2. If user execute RTMU command but not execute RTMD command before the end of
program interrupt, then the interrupt will not be ended.
3. Please specially notice that RTMU command is executed by starting one inner timer
interrupt of PLC, therefore, the timer may be disordered if execute multiple RTMU or
RTMD commands simultaneously.
D1156~D1165: Special D registers specified by RTMU, RTMD command (numbers is
from K0 to K9).
API Applicable modelsES EP EH154
RAND P Random Number
-
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1 S2 D
Note: S1 operand ≦S2 operand The usage range of operands S1, S2 is: K0 ≦ S1 , S2 ≦
K32,767 Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
RAND Continuous execution RANDP -
32-bit command
- - - Pulse executioin
Flag: No
CommandExplanation
: lower bound for producing random number. : upper bound for producing
random number. : result for producing random number. When user inputs S1 > S2, PLC will occur operand error and won’t execute it, and
then M1067, M1068=On, and records error code 0E1A(HEX) in D1067.
ProgramExample
When X10=On, the random number that produced during lower bound D0 and upper
bound D10 will save in D20. X10
RAND D0 D10 D20
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-14
API Applicable modelsES EP EH155 D
ABSR Absolute Current Value Read
- -
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S D1 D2 Note: Operand S occupies 3 continuous devices
Operand D1 occupies 3 continuous devices Operand D2 occupies 2 continuous devices Refer to each model specification for usage range. There is no 16-bit command for API 55, only 32-bit command, DABSR is available and it can only be used for ONCE in program.
16-bit command
- - - -
32-bit command (13 STEPS)
DABSR Continuous execution - -
Flag: For the description of M1010, M1029, M1030, M1334, M1335, M1336, M1337, M1346, please refer to the footnote.
CommandExplanation
This command provides continuous absolute position data read function of mitsubishi
servo drive MR-J2 (with absolute position check function).
: Input signal from Servo : Control signal for controling Servo : Absolute position data (32 bit) read from Servo
is the input signal from Servo and it will use 3 continuous devices , +1,
+2. Device and +1 are connected to the ABS (bit0, bit1) of Servo for
data transmitting. Device +2 is connected to Servo for transmitting data ready flag. Please see the wiring drawing below for details.
is the control signal for controling Servo and it will use 3 continuous devices ,
+1, +2. Device is connected to Servo On (SON) of Servo, device
+1 is connected to ABS data transmitting mode of Servo and +2 is connected to ABS data request signal. Please see the wiring drawing below for details.
PLCDVP32EH00T
ABS(bit 0)ABS(bit 1)
SERVO ON
SERVO AMPMR-J2-A
CN1B
D01 419
106
ZSPTLCSG
589
SONABSMABSR
X0X1X2
24G
S/S+24V
Y4Y5Y6C4
VDD 3
transmission data is ready
ABS requirementABS transmission mode
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual
9-15
is the absolute position data (32 bit) read from Servo and it will use 2 continuous
devices , +1. is low word and +1 is high word. The absolute position data should be stored in the current value registers (D1337, D1336)
corresponding to CH0 pulse or the current value registers (D1339, D1338) corresponding
to CH1 pulse, so it is recommanded to specify these two registers. If specify other
devices, finally, the user still have to transmit the data into the current value registers
(D1337, D1336) corresponding to CH0 pulse or the current value registers (D1339,
D1338) corresponding to CH1 pulse.
When DABSR command drvie contact turns ON and read starts, the command execution
completed flag M1029, M1030 will be energized. The flags must be reset by user.
When driving the DABSR command, please specify normally open contact. If the drive
contact of DABSR command turns Off when DABSR command read starts, the execution
of absolute current value read will be interrupted and result in incorrect data. Please be
careful and notice that.
If the drive contact of DABSR command turns Off after the read is completed, the Servo
On (SON) signal connected to will also turn Off and the operation will be disabled.
ProgramExample
When X7= On, the absolute position data (32 bit) read from Servo should be stored in the
current value register (D1337, D1336) corresponding to CH0 pulse. At the same time,
drive a timer T10 to count 5 second. If over 5 second and the absolute position data (32
bit) read not complete, it will drvie M10=On and this means the absolute position data (32
bit) read is abnormal.
When connecting to system, please set the power of DVP-PLC and SERVO AMP to be
On at the same time or set the SERVO AMP to be ON earlier than the power of DVP-PLC.
X7DABS X0 Y4 D1336
TMR T0 K50M11
M10T0
SET M11M1029
ABS read completed
execution completedflag
Read overtime
ABS absolute positiondata read is abnormal
ABS absolute positiondata read completed
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-16
Wiring
X0X1X2
COM+24V
Y4Y5Y6
COM4
24232516SG
PFZSPTLC
CN1
PLC ControllerDVP-20EH
SERVO AMPMR-H-A
ABS(bit 0)ABS(bit 1)
SERVO ON
SERVO AMPMR-J2-A
CN1BX0 D01 4
19
106
ZSPTLCSG
X1X2COM
Y4Y5Y6
589
SONABSMABSR
SOND13D14
124445
transmitting data ready flag
ABS data mode transmittingABS data request
Footnote
Time chart explanation of DABSR command absolute position data read:
When DABSR command starts to execute, it will drive the signal of Servo On (SON)
and ABS data transmitting mode to output.
By the transmitting data ready flag and ABS request signal can confirm the
transmission and receipt of both sides and process the data transmission of current
value position data (32 bit) plus check data (6 bit).
Data is transmitted by ABS (bit0, bit1) two bits.
SON
ABSM
TLC
ABSR
ZSP
D01
AMP output
SERVO ON
ABS(bit 1)
ABS(bit 0)
ABS datarequest
Transmittingdata ready
ABS datamode transmitting
Current value position data 32-bit+(plus) check data 6-bit
Controller output
AMP output
AMP output
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual
9-17
This command is applicable to the Servo motor equipped with absolute positioning
function is connected, such as Mitsubishi MR-J2-A Servo drive.
The Servo motor with absolute positioning function should be rotated more than one
revolution and given the reset signal before manufacturing equipments. Please use one of
the following methods to proceed the first time zero point return:
1. Complete zero point return by using reset signal function to execute API 156 ZRN
command.
2. After using JOG or manual operation to adjust the zero point position of the
equipment, input reset signal SERVO AMP. As for the reset signal input, please refer
to the external switches diagram below to see if using DVP-PLC controller to output.
For the detail of the wiring between DVP-PLC and Mitsubishi MR-J2- A, please
refer to the API 159 DRVA.
CR 8
SG 10
reset
Use Mitsubishi MR-J2- Aas example
Flags description: M1010: In EH series MPU, when M1010= On, CH0 (Y0, Y1) and CH1 (Y2, Y3) will
output pulse while END command is executed. When output starts, M1010 will automatically turn Off.
M1029: In EH series MPU, M1029=On after the first group pulse (Y0, Y1) pulse output complete or other relative command complete execution.
M1030: In EH series MPU, M1030= On after the second group pulse (Y2, Y3) pulse output complete.
M1334: In EH series MPU, CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse stop output when M1334= On. M1335: In EH series MPU, CH1 (Y2, Y3) pulse stop output when M1335= On. M1336: In EH series MPU, CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse output indication flag M1337: In EH series MPU, CH1 (Y2, Y3) pulse output indication flag M1346: In EH series MPU, ZRN command CLEAR output signal enable flag Special registers description: D1337, D1336: 1. D1337(HIGH WORD), D1336(LOW WORD) represents the
current value registers of positioning control commands (API 156 ZRN, API 157 PLSV, API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) output to the first output group Y0, Y1, the current value increases or decreases in accordance with the direction of rotation.
2. D1337(HIGH WORD), D1336(LOW WORD) represents the total number of output pulse of pulse output commands (API 57 PLSY, API 59 PLSR) output to the first output group Y0, Y1.
D1338, D1339: 1. D1339(HIGH WORD), D1338(LOW WORD) represents the current value registers of positioning control commands (API 156 ZRN, API 157 PLSV, API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) output to the second output group Y2, Y3, the current value increases or decreases in accordance with the direction of rotation.
2. D1339(HIGH WORD), D1338(LOW WORD) represents the total number of output pulse of pulse output commands (API 57 PLSY, API 59 PLSR) output to the first output group Y2, Y3.
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-18
D1340: Operates as the frequency setting of the first step acceleration and last step deceleration when positioning control commands (API 57 PLSY, API 59 PLSR) are executed. Setting range: This speed can not less than 10Hz. If the speed is less than 10Hz or larger than max. output frequency, it will output by 10Hz. Factory setting is 200Hz. Note: When controlling stepping motor, please consider the resonance of stepping motor and limit of initial frequency while setting speed.
D1341, D1342: D1342(HIGH WORD), D1341(LOW WORD) represents as the maximum speed setting when positioning control commands ((API 156 ZRN, API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) are executed. Setting range: it is 200KHz.
D1343: Operates as the Acceleration/Deceleration time setting in which maximum speed (D1342, D1341) is achieved from the first step acceleration and last step deceleration when positioning control commands (API 156 ZRN, API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) are executed. Setting range: This acceleration / deceleration time can’t be less than 50ms. If it less than 50ms or larger than 5000ms, it will output by 50ms.Facotry setting is 100ms. Note: When controlling stepping motor, please consider the resonance of stepping motor and limit of initial frequency while setting speed.
API Applicable modelsES EP EH156 D
ZRN Zero Point Return
- -
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1 S2 S3 D Note: Please refer to the command explanation for the
information of the usage range of Operand S1, S2,, D.
16-bit command(9 STEPS)
ZRN Continuous execution - -
32-bit command (17 STEPS)
DZRN Continuous execution - -
Flag: For the description of M1010, M1029, M1030, M1334, M1335, M1336, M1337, M1346, please refer to the footnote of API 155 ABSR command.
CommandExplanation
: Zero point return speed : Creep speed : Near point signal (DOG)
: Pulse output device (Please use transistor output as output module)
is specified as the zero point return speed as, 16-bit 10 to 32,767Hz or 32-bit 10 to 200,000Hz.
is specified as the creep speed, the lower speed after near point signal (DOG) turns On and its available range is 10 to 32,767Hz.
is specified as the near point signal (DOG) input (A contact input). If any Y, M, S device other than an input relay (X) is specified for the near point signal, it will be
affected by the scanning cycle of the PLC and the dispersion of zero point may be
large.
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual
9-19
Pulse output device only can be specified as Y0, Y2. When executing API 158 DRVI and API 159 DRVA command, the PLC store the
FWD/REV pulse which increase or decrease during operation in current vlaue
registers (Y0: D1337,D1336, Y2: D1339, D1338) so that it can always know the
machine position. However, the data may lost when the power of PLC is Off.
Therefore, the machine should execute zero point turn during initial operation to input
the zero point.
ProgramExample
When M10= On, a frequency of 20KHz outpus from Y0 and zero point return will be
energized. When it reaches the near point signal (DOG), X5= On and it will change to
creep speed. Then, a frequency of 1KHz outpus from Y0 and the command will be
energized. Pulses output will stop until X5=Off. M10
ZRN K20000 K1000 X5 Y0
Footnote
Time chart explanation of reset signal output:
1. When reset flag M1346= On, the reset signal is sent to the servo drive when zero
point trun is completed.
2. Output device of reset signal:
CH0(Y0, Y1) reset output device (Y4)
CH1(Y2, Y3) reset output device (Y5)
M1336, M1337
inside 1ms
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
DOG ONOutput near pointsignal (DOG)
Creep speed
Reset signal Y4 or Y5
Pulse output monitor
reset signal
Zero return speed
Initialposition
about 20ms+ 1 scan time
program interruptscan in circle
Explanation of zero point return operation:
1. When ZRN command is executed, accelerate to Zero point return speed and start to move.
2. When the Near point signal (DOG) goes from Off to On, it will decelerate to Creep
speed . 3. When the Near point signal (DOG) goes from On to Off and the same time of pulse
output stop, the content value of current value register (D1337, D1336) of CH0
pulse or current value register (D1339, D1338) of CH1 pulse will be 0(zero). Also,
if the reset signal flag M1346= On, the reset signal Y4 or Y5 will output
simultaneously.
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-20
4. When the operation of pulse output is completed and flag M1029, M1030 is
activated, indication flag M1336 sent by CH0 pulse or indication flag M1337 sent
by CH1 pulse will be Off.
5. Hence, the command can not search the position of Near point signal (DOG) and
the operation of ZRN command only can be processed in unidirection. In the
operation of ZRN command, the content value of current value register (D1337,
D1336) of CH0 pulse or current value register (D1339, D1338) of CH1 pulse will
decrease.
LSR(DOG)
DOG
LSF
DOG front end detectDOG back end detect( )zero point position
initial position
Zero return speed
Motor
decelerate toCreep speed
Near pointsignal ON switch near
zero point
ForwardBackward
(Forward limit)(Backward limit)
Front endBack end
6. This command is applicable to the Servo motor equipped with absolute positioning
function is connected, such as Mitsubishi MR-H-A Servo drive, MR-J2-A Servo
drvie. It can record current position even the power is Off. Besides, because the
current position of the servo drive can be read by API 155 ABSR command of
DVP-EH series PLC, the ZRN command should only be executed for one time.
After the power is Off, it is unnecessary to execute the ZRN command again.
7. When CH0 and CH1 pulse execute the ZRN command, the current value of pulse
output frequency will display in (D1394, D1395) and (D1396, D1397). After the
operation of ZRN command is completed, the last output frequency value will be
stored in (D1394, D1395) and (D1396, D1397).
8. When the drive contact of ZRN command is On, CH0 and CH1 pulse will read the
content value set by D1343t as aeceleration time. After accelerating to zero point
return speed, wait for the entry of the near point signal (DOG) and output the creep
speed of low speed by decelerating. Immediately stop output pulse when the near
point signal (DOG) turns Off..
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual
9-21
API Applicable modelsES EP EH157 D
PLSV Variable Speed Pulse Output
- -
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1 D1 D2 Note: Please refer to the command explanation for the information
of the usage range of Operand S1, S2, D.
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
PLSV Continuous execution - -
32-bit command (13 STEPS)
DPLSV Continuous execution
Flag: For the description of M1010, M1029, M1030, M1334, M1335, M1336, M1337, please refer to the footnote of API 155 ABSR command.
CommandExplanation
: Pulse output frequency : Pulse output device (Please use transistor as
output module) : Rotation direction signal
is specified as pulse output frequemcy, 16-bit 1 to 32,767Hz and -1 to -32,768 Hz or 32-bit 1 to 200,000Hz, -1 to -200,000 Hz. The (+) and (-) symbol indicates the
positive and negative direction. The pulse output frequency can be changed even
when pulses are being output.
Pulse output device only can be specified as Y0, Y2.
is specified as rotation direction signal and it operates following the polarity of
. When is positive (+), is On. When is negative (-), is Off.
PLSV command do not has acceleration/deceleration setting function. Therefore,
acceleration/deceleration are not performed at start and stop. If cushion start and stop
is desired, please increase or decrease the output pulse frequency by using API 67
RAMPcommand.
If the drive contact turns Off while PLSV command execute to output pulse, the
machine will stop without deceleration.
When the drive contact of PLSV command truns Off, it is impossible to drive PLSV
command again even if the pulse send indication flag M1336 of CH0 pulse or pulse
send indication flag M1337 of CH1 pulse is set.
ProgramExample
When M10= On, a frequency of 20KHz outputs from Y0. Y5= On represents the
positive direction. M10
PLSV K20000 Y0 Y5
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-22
API Applicable modelsES EP EH158 D
DRVI Drive to Increment
- -
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1 S2 D1 D2 Note: Please refer to the command explanation for the
information of the usage range of Operand S1, S2, D1, D2.
16-bit command(9 STEPS)
DRVI Continuous execution - -
32-bit command (17 STEPS)
DDRVI Continuous execution - -
Flag: For the description of M1010, M1029, M1030, M1334, M1335, M1336, M1337, M1346, please refer to the footnote.
CommandExplanation
: Numbers of pulses (Target device) : Pulse output frequency :
Pulse output designation device (Please use transistor as output module) : Rotation direction signal
is specified as the numbers of pulses (relative positioning). The available
numbers of are: 16-bit command: -32,768 to +32,767
32-bit command: -999,999 to +999,999. The positive (+) and negative (-) symbol
indicates the forward and reverser direction.
is specified as the pulse output frequency. The available numbers of are: 16-bit command: 10 to 32,767Hz
32-bit command: 10 to 200,000Hz
is specified as pulse output designation device. In EH series models, it only can be specified as Y0, Y2.
is specified as rotation direction signal and it operates following the polarity of
. When is positive (+), is On. When is negative (-), is Off.
The numbers of pulses will be stored in current value register (D1337 high byte, D1336
low byte) of CH0 pulse or current value register (D1339 high byte, D1338 low byte) of
CH1 pulse. When rotation direction is negative, the content value of current value
register will decrease.
The contents of each operand can not be changed while the DRVI command is
executed. The contents will be changed when the next execution is driven.
If the drive contact turns off when the DRVI command is executed, the machine will
decelerates and stops and the execution completed flag M1029, M1030 does not turn
On.
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual
9-23
When the drive contact of DRVI command turns Off, it is impossible to drive DRVI
command again even if the pulse send indication flag M1336 of CH0 pulse or pulse
send indication flag M1337 of CH1 pulse is set.
ProgramExample
When M10= On, twenty thousands (20000) of 2KHz frequency pulses outputs from Y0
(relative positioning). Y5= On represents the positive direction. M10
DRVI K20000 K2000 Y0 Y5
Footnote
Operation explanation of relative positioning control: Using a positive or a negative
symbol to specify travel distance from the current position is also a kind of drive method
of relative positioning control. +3,000
-3,000
0
Currentposition
Settings of relative positioning and operation speed:
Initial value : 100ms(D1343)(D1343)
Initial value(default) 200,000Hz:
(D1342,D1341)
(D1340) (D1340)
Actual
timeacceleration
Output pulsefrequency
Maximum speed
Currentposition
Last stepdeceleration
First stepacceleration
Actual
timedeceleration
Output pulsenumbers
Accel/Decel timeAccel/Decel time
Initial value 100ms:
The minimum value of output pulse frequency which can be actually used is deternined
by the following equation: 1. Minimum value of output pulse frequency =
MaxSpeed [D1342,D1341]Hz ( 2 (Acceleration\Deceleration [ D1343]ms 1000 ))÷ × ÷
2. Even if the specified pulse output frequency is lower than the value of the
calculation value of the equation above, the calculation value of the equation above
will still be actually used while outputting the pulses.
3. The actual output pulse frequency of the first step acceleration and last step
deceleration also use the calculation value of the equation above as the minimum value.
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-24
See below for an example:
1. Minimum value of output pulse frequency =
50000Hz ( 2 (100ms 1000 )) 500Hz÷ × ÷ = .
2. Although the specified output pulse frequency is equal to 400 Hz (lower than the calculation value, 500 Hz), the frequency of 500 Hz will be still be used when
output the pulses.
3. If specifying the output pulse frequency = 50,000 Hz, minimum value of output pulse frequency for the first step acceleration and last step deceleration will
still be the calculation value, 500 Hz.
50000Hz500Hz500Hz
Flags description:
M1010: In EH series MPU, when M1010= On, Y0, Y1 and Y2, Y3 will output pulse
while END command is executed. When output starts, M1010 will
automatically turn Off.
M1029: In EH series MPU, M1029= On after Y0, Y1 pulse output complete.
In EP/ES series MPU, M1029= On after Y0 pulse output complete.
M1030: In EH series MPU, M1030= On after Y2, Y3 pulse output complete.
In EP/ES series MPU, M1030= On after Y1 pulse output complete.
M1334: In EH series MPU, CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse stop output when M1334= On.
M1335: In EH series MPU, CH1 (Y2, Y3) pulse stop output when M1335= On.
M1336: In EH series MPU, CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse output indication flag
M1337: In EH series MPU, CH1 (Y2, Y3) pulse output indication flag
M1346: In EH series MPU, ZRN command output signal enable flag
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual
9-25
Special registers description:
D1337, D1336: 1. D1337(HIGH WORD), D1336(LOW WORD) represents the current
value registers of positioning control commands (API 157 PLSV, API
158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) output to the first output group Y0, Y1, the
current value increases or decreases in accordance with the direction
of rotation.
2. D1337(HIGH WORD), D1336(LOW WORD) represents the total
number of output pulse of pulse output commands (API 57 PLSY, API
59 PLSR) output to the first output group Y0, Y1.
D1338, D1339: 1. D1339(HIGH WORD), D1338(LOW WORD) represents the current
value registers of positioning control commands (API 157 PLSV, API
158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) output to the second output group Y2, Y3,
the current value increases or decreases in accordance with the
direction of rotation.
2. D1339(HIGH WORD), D1338(LOW WORD) represents the total
number of output pulse of pulse output commands (API 57 PLSY, API
59 PLSR) output to the first output group Y2, Y3.
D1340: Operates as the frequency setting of the first step acceleration and last
step deceleration when positioning control commands (API 156 ZRN,
API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) are executed.
Setting range: 1/10 or less of maximum speed (D1342, D1341)
If the current value exceeds the range, it is automatically set to 1/10 of
the maximum speed during operation.
3. Note: When controlling stepping motor, please consider the
resonance of stepping motor and limit of initial frequency while
setting speed.
D1341, D1342: D1342(HIGH WORD), D1341(LOW WORD) represents as the maximum
speed setting when positioning control commands (API 156 ZRN, API
158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) are executed.
Setting range: 10 to 200,000Hz, the factory setting (default) is 200,000Hz
Note: The output pulse frequency specified by operand S2 of API 158
DRVI command should be under this maximum speed.
D1343: Operates as the Acceleration/Deceleration time setting in which
maximum speed (D1342, D1341) is achieved from the first step
acceleration and last step deceleration (D1340) when positioning control
commands (API 156 ZRN, API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) are executed.
Setting range: 50 to 5,000 ms, the factory setting (default) is 100ms
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-26
API Applicable modelsES EP EH159 D
DRVA Data Backup MEMORY Write In
- -
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1 S2 D1 D2 Note: Please refer to the command explanation for the
information of the usage range of Operand S1, S2, D1, D2.
16-bit command (9 STEPS)
DRVA Continuous execution - -
32-bit command (17 STEPS)
DDRVA Continuous execution - -
Flag: For the description of M1010, M1029, M1030, M1334, M1335, M1336, M1337, M1346, please refer to the footnote of API 158 DRVI command.
CommandExplanation
: Numbers of pulses (Target device) : Pulse output frequency :
Pulse output designation device (Please use transistor as output module) : Rotation direction signal
is specified as the numbers of pulses (absolute positioning). The available
numbers of are: 16-bit command: -32,768 to +32,767 32-bit command: -2,147,483,648 ~ +2,147,483,647. The positive (+) and negative (-)
symbol indicates the forward and reverser direction.
is specified as the pulse output frequency. The available numbers of are: 16-bit command: 10 to 32,767Hz. 32-bit command: 10 to 200,000Hz
is specified as pulse output designation device. In EH series models, it only can be specified as Y0, Y2.
is specified as rotation direction signal and it operates following the polarity of
. When is positive (+), is On. When is negative (-), is Off
The numbers of pulses will be stored in current value register (D1337 high byte, D1336
low byte) of CH0 pulse or current value register (D1339 high byte, D1338 low byte) of
CH1 pulse. When rotation direction is negative, the content value of current value
register will decrease.
The contents of each operand can not be changed while the DRVA command is
executed. The contents will be changed when the next execution is driven.
If the drive contact turns off when the DRVA command is executed, the machine will
decelerates and stops and the execution completed flag M1029, M1030 does not turn
On. D1343 is used to set acceleration / deceleration time.
When the drive contact of DRVA command turns Off, it is impossible to drive DRVA
command again even if the pulse send indication flag M1336 of CH0 pulse or pulse
send indication flag M1337 of CH1 pulse is set.
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual
9-27
ProgramExample
When M10= On, twenty thousands (20000) of 2KHz frequency pulses outputs from Y0
(absolute positioning), Y5= On represents the positive direction. M10
DRVA K20000 K2000 Y0 Y5
Footnote
Operation explanation of absolute positioning control: Specifying travel distance from a
zero point is also a kind of drive method of absolute positioning control. +3,000
0
0
Zero point
Target position
F0 first step acceleration
(D1340) min. speed: 10Hzlast step deceleration
Settings of absolute positioning and operation speed:
T Accel/Decel time
Currentposition
Accel/Decel time
(D1342,D1341)
(D1340) (D1340)min. speedG 10Hz
F0 last step (deceleration)F0 first step (acceleration)
min. speedG 10Hz
output pulse frequency
Tg accelerationsampling time
Fa accelerated gradient
Initial value: 200,000HzF max. speed
Initial value: 50ms (D1343)
Initial value: 50ms (D1343)
outputpulsenumber
The relation between actual frequency and acceleration / deceleration time is in the
following:
Tg: sampling time of acceleration / deceleration T: acceleration / deceleration time Fa: acceleration / deceleration gradient F: Max. frequency F0: first step acceleration, last step deceleration P: total pulse number
1. Tg = T / ( 60 * 1000 ) 2. Fa = (F – F0) / 60 3. P0 (output pulse number of first step (acceleration)/last step (deceleration)) = 1 4. Each segment frequency:
i. F(n) = F0 + Fa * n ( n = 1~60) 5. Output pulse number of each segment:
Restriction:
1. When each segment of output pulse number P(n)<1, PLC won’t output pulse and
jump to next segment.
2. Speed of first step (acceleration) and last step (deceleration) F0 can’t less than
10Hz. If it is less than 10Hz or larger than max. output frequency, it will output 10Hz.
)(*)( nFTgnP =
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-28
3. If total pulse number P ≦3, acceleration/deceleration function will be invalid.
Wiring of DVP-EH series and Delta ASDA servo drive:
COM-/PLS 43
47
COM-/SIGN 36
49
/OZ
COM-
24
EH MPU
L
N
X0
X1X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
S/S
Y2
C2
startzero point reset
forward limit
JOG(+)
reverse limit 3-phase pow
er
R
ST
U
VW
ASDA series
Delta Servo Driveservo m
otor
24VCN1
VDD
COM+DI 1
DI 5
DI 6
DI 1DI 5DI 6DI 7DI 8
: servo start: servo reset: forward limit: reverse limit: emergency stop
COM-
DI 2
+24V
X7
24G
JOG(-)stop
error reset
DO_COM
X10
X11
X12
X13
X14
SRDYZSPDTPOSALARM
DI 7
DI 8
17
11
9
3332
3130
CN1
Z phase signal (zero point signal)
Error Counter
ElectricGear
200KPPS
EncoderCN2
10
45
pulse clear
Y0
C0
pulse output
Y1
C1
forward/reverse direction
DVP32EH00T
CN1
26
1
23
45
6
7 DO1+
DO2+
DO3+
DO4+
DO1-
DO2-
DO3-
DO4-
SRDY
ZSPD
TPOS
ALARM
DO_COM
220VAC single-phase
220VAC
COM- 50
45DO_COM
Note:
Please connect forward/reverse limit switch to SERVO AMP.
Wiring example of connection between DVP-EH series PLC and a Mitsubishi MR-J2-□A Servo drive:
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual
9-29
Error Counter
ElectricGear
pulse clear
pulse output
forward/reverse direction
SGPP 3
10
SGNP 2
10
OP
LG
14
EH MPU
L
N
X0
X1X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
S/S
Y2
C2
startzero point reset
forward limit
JOG(+)
reverse limit
3-phase power
R
S
T
U
V
W
MR-J2 series
Mitsubishi servo driveservo m
otor
CN1B
SON
RESLSP
LSN
TL
SONRESLSPLSNTL
G servo startG servo resetG forward limitG reverse limit
G emergency stop
SG
CR
+24V
X7
24G
JOG(-)stoperror reset
X10
X11
X12
X13X14
EMG
SG
5
14
16
17
9
1510
CN1AZ phase signal(zero point )
signal
8
20
Y0
C0
Y1
C1
DVP32EH00T
servo malfunctioin
Rcal1
Rcal2
Rcal3SV-END
SV-READY
1
RD
INP
ALM
VDD
COM
24V
Rc3
Rc2
Rc1
5
14
18
18
13
CN1A
CN1B
220VAC single power
220VAC
200KPPS
EncoderCN2
1. Connect to PLC when detecting absolute position.
2. Connect the forward/reverse limit switch to the SERVO AMP.
Cautions when designing position control program: There are no using time limit for position control command API 156 ZRN, API 157
PLSV, API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA. User can use these commands many times in a
program but be sure to follow the following cautions below:
1. Do not drive the position control commands which use the same output CH0(Y0,
Y1) or CH1(Y2, Y3) simultaneously. Otherwise, they will be treated as double coils
and can not function correctly.
2. It is recommended to use step ladder commands (STL) to design positioning
control program (please see the programming example shown below).
Notes when using position control commands API 156 ZRN, API 157 PLSV, API 158
DRVI, API 159 DRVA with pulse output commandsAPI 57 PLSY, API 58 PWM, API 59
PLSR:
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-30
The current value register (D1337 high byte, D1336 low byte) of CH0 pulse or current
value register (D1339 high byte, D1338 low byte) of CH1 will both be used in position
control commands and pulse output commands and this will result in complicated
operation. To avoid incorrect operation when pulse output commands are required while
position control commands are used, it is recommended to use position control
commands in place of pulse output commands.
Explanation of pulse output terminals Y0, Y1of CH0 pulse and Y2, Y3 of CH1 pulse:
1. Voltage range: DC5V to DC24V
2. Current range: 10 mA to 100 mA
3. Output pulse frequency: Y0, Y2 is 200KHz, Y1, Y3 is 10KHz.
Pulse output signal settings of positioning operation:
There are three kinds of pulse output signal of positioning operation for DVP-EH series
PLC:
1. 1-phase 1 output + direction (it is recommended to use this) U/D
U/D FLAG 2. 1-phase 2 outputs (frequency limit is 10KHz)
U
D 3. 2-phase 2 outputs (frequency limit is 10KHz)
A
B Please follow the PLC output settings above to set the pulse input type of parameters
on SERVO AMP or stepping motor.
Flags description: M1010: In EH series MPU, when M1010= On, CH0 (Y0, Y1) and CH1 (Y2, Y3) will
output pulse while END command is executed. When output starts, M1010 will automatically turn Off.
M1029: In EH series MPU, M1029= On after first group pulse CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse output complete or other relative commands complete execution.
M1030: In EH series MPU, M1030= On after second group pulse CH1 (Y2, Y3) pulse output complete.
M1334: In EH series MPU, CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse stop output when M1334= On. M1335: In EH series MPU, CH1 (Y2, Y3) pulse stop output when M1335= On. M1336: In EH series MPU, CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse output indication flag M1337: In EH series MPU, CH1 (Y2, Y3) pulse output indication flag M1346: In EH series MPU, ZRN command output signal enable flag
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual
9-31
Special registers description of EH series MPU:
D1220: The phase setting of the first output group Y0, Y1: determine by the last two bits of D1220, other bits are invalid.
1. K0: Y0 output 2. K1: Y0, Y1 AB phase output, A leads B 3. K2: Y0, Y1 AB phase output, B leads A 4. K3: Y1 output
D1221: The phase setting of the second output group Y2, Y3: determine by the last two bits of D1221, other bits are invalid.
1. K0: Y2 output 2. K1: Y2, Y3 AB phase output, A leads B 3. K2: Y2, Y3 AB phase output, B leads A 4. K3: Y3 output
When several high speed pulse output commands (PLSY, PWM, PLSR) and position
control commands (ZRN, PLSV, DRVI, DRVA) all use Y0 to output pulse in one
program and simultaneously been executed in the same scanning cycle, PLC will
perform the command which has fewest step numbers.
Programming example for forward/reverse operation: For wiring, please refer to the wiring example of connection between DVP-EH series
PLC and a Mitsubishi MR-J2-□A Servo drive.
There is one operation positionng is performed by using the absolute position method
shown below:
500Hz
500Hz
500000
100
200ms
200,000Hz
Zero point
Output pulse frequency
Acceleration/Deceleration time
In this example, the minimum output pulse frequency calculated by equation=
MaxSpeed [D1342,D1341]Hz ( 2 (Acceleration\Deceleration [ D1343]ms 1000 ))÷ × ÷
as the actual minimum output pulse frequency=
200,000Hz ( 2 (100ms 1000 )) 1,000Hz÷ × ÷ = .
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-32
Programming example when using step ladder command (STL):
M1002
S0 S10 S11 S12 S13
M1000
X0
JOG(+) JOG(-)
1
1
200,000Hz D1342,D13→
200ms D1343→
DMOV K10000 D1341
MOV K200 D1343
S1334M5
M1334
M1346
Y0
Stop
Zero point return
Output to X-axis (Y0)is stopped
Return to the zero pointwith reset signal is valid
Operation is stoppedPositioningin normalrotation
Positioningin reverserotation
output stop
Set the maximum speed
Set the acceleration/deceleration time
※1. If the maximum speed (D1342,D1341), the acceleration/deceleration (D1343) can set
in their factory setting value (default), then the programming is not required. The
factory setting value (default) of the maximum speed (D1342,D1341) is 200,000Hz.
The factory setting value (default) of the acceleration/deceleration (D1343) is 100
ms.
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual
9-33
X1
RST M10M5
RST M12
RST M13
SET S0
X2RST M12
M5
RST M13
SET S10
X3RST M12
M5
RST M13
SET S11
X4RST M12
M5
RST M13
SET S12
M10
X5RST M12
M5 M10
JOG(+)2
JOG(-)2
Zero pointreturn
Operation being stopped
Operation being stopped
Operation being stopped
Operation being stopped
Positioningin normalrotation
Positioningin reverserotation
Operation being stopped
Zero pointreturncompletedflag
Zero pointreturncompletedflag
Reset the reverse rotationpositioning completed flag
Reset the normal rotationpositioning completed flag
Drive the normal rotationpositioning status(S12)
Reset the reverse rotationpositioning completed flag
Reset the normal rotationpositioning completed flag
Reset the reverse rotationpositioning completed flag
Reset the normal rotationpositioning completed flag
Drive the JOG(-) status (S11)
Drive the JOG(+) status (S11)
Reset the reverse rotationpositioning completed flag
Reset the normal rotationpositioning completed flag
Reset the reverse rotationpositioning completed flag
Reset the normal rotationpositioning completed flag
Reset the reverse rotationpositioning completed flag
Reset the normal rotationpositioning completed flag
Reset the reverse rotationpositioning completed flag
Reset the normal rotationpositioning completed flag
Drive the zero point returnstatus (S0)
Reset the zero point returncompleted flag
RST M13
SET S13 Drive the reverse rotationpositioning status(S13)
※2. The maximum size of a JOG command is ±999,999 pulses, as this is equal to the
maximum number of output pulses for API 158 DRVI command. If a greater distance is
required, please execute the JOG command again.
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-34
S0 M50
M50M1000
S10DDRVI K999999 K30000 Y0 Y4
X2
RST S10M1336 M51
M51M1000
M51
S11DDRVI K-999999 K30000 Y0 Y4
X3
RST S11M1336 M52
M52M1000
M52
3
JOG(+) JOG(+)
3
3
JOG(-) JOG(-)
Zero point return is completed (auto-reset)
Executioncompleted
RST S0M1336 M50
Y0 beingoutput
DZRN K50000 K5000 X6 Y0
SET M10M1029
Zero pointreturn Zero point
returnspeed
Creepspeed
Near pointsignal (DOG)
Pulse outputdevice
Zero point return commandoperate in the (-) direction
Reset the zero point returncompleted flag
Y0 beingoutput
(maximum value in (+)direction)
Output pulsenumbers
Outputpulsefrequency
Outputpulsedevice
Rotationdirectionsignal outputdevice
JOG(+) operation is completed(auto-reset)
JOG(-) operation is completed(auto-reset)
Using relative positioningcommand execute the JOGoperation in the (+) direction(Y4=On)
(maximum value in (-)direction)
Output pulsenumbers
Outputpulsefrequency
Outputpulsedevice
Rotationdirectionsignal outputdevice
Using relative positioningcommand execute the JOGoperation in the (-) direction(Y4=Off)
Y0 beingoutput
RUN monitor
※3. In order to prevent position control commands being driven at the same time, the
command drive timing is delayed by one scanning cycle.
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual
9-35
S12DDRVA K500000 K100000 Y0 Y4
M53
SET M12M1029
RST M12M1336 M53
M53M1000
S13DDRVA K100 K100000 Y0 Y4
M54
SET M13M1029
RST M13M1336 M54
M54M1000
Positioningin normalrotation
Positioningin reverserotation
Executioncompleted
Executioncompleted
Reverse rotation positioningcompleted flag
Normal rotation positioningcompleted flag
Normal rotation positioningis completed (auto-reset)
Reverse rotation positioningis completed (auto-reset)
Y0 beingoutput
Y0 beingoutput
Using absolute positioningcommand move to theabsolute position ? 00000�(Y4=On)
Using absolute positioningcommand move to theabsolute position ? 00�(Y4=Off)
RET
END
API Applicable models
ES EP EH160 TCMP
P Time Compare -
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS1 S2 S3 S D Note: The range of operand S1, S2, S3: S1=0~23, S2 =S3=S0~59
Operand S occupies 3 continuous devices. Operand D occupies 3 continuous devices. Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (11 STEPS)
TCMP Continuous execution TCMPP Pulse
execution
32-bit command - - - - Flag: None
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-36
CommandExplanation
: setting the hour of comparison time, setting range is K0~K23 : setting
the minute of comparison time, setting range is K0~K59 : setting the second
of comparison time, setting range is K0~K59 : Current time of real time clock
: Comparison result
, , is compared to the current value of the head address and
save the comparsion result in .
is the hour of current time and the content is K0~K23. +1 is the minute of
current time and the content is K0~K59. +2 is the second of current time and the content is K0~K59.
The current time of real time clock specified by is read by using TRD command
previously and then compared by using TCMP command. If the content of exceeds the range, it will result in “operation error”. At this time, the command won’t
be executed and M1067=On, M1068=On, records error code 0E1A (HEX) in D1067.
ProgramExample
When X10= On, the command is executed and the current time of real time clock in
(D20~D22) is compared to the set value 12:20:45 and the result is shown at
M10~M12. When X10 goes from On→Off, the command is not executed but the
On/Off state before M10~M12 is kept.
Connect M10~M12 in series or in parallel and then the result of ≧, ≦, ≠ are given.
X10
M10
TCMP K12 K20 K45 D20 M10
M11
M12
ON when 12:20:45
ON when 12:20:45
ON when 12:20:45
>
=
<
API Applicable models
ES EP EH161 TZCP
P Time Zone Compare -
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS1 S2 S D Note: Operand S1, S2, S occupies 3 continuous devices.
S1 should be less than S2, i.e. S1 ≦ S2 Operand D occupies 3 continuous devices. Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (9 STEPS)
TZCP Continuous execution TZCPP Pulse
execution
32-bit command - - - - Flag: None
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual
9-37
CommandExplanation
: Lower limit time data : Upper limit time data : Current time of real
time clock : Comparison result
is compared to the time period of ~ and the comparsion result is
stored in .
, +1, +2: respectively represent “Hours”, “Minutes”, “Seconds” of the lower limit time data.
, +1, +2: respectively represent “Hours”, “Minutes”, “Seconds” of the Upper limit time data。
, +1, +2: respectively represent “Hours”, “Minutes”, “Seconds” of the current time of perpetual calender.
The current time of real time clock specified by is read by using TRD command
previously and then compared by using TZCP command. If the content of S , , exceeds the range, it will result in “operation error”. At this time, the
command won’t be executed and M1067=On, M1068=On, records error code 0E1A
(HEX) in D1067.
If < , is On. If > , +2 is On. Besides these two
situations, +1 is On. (Lower bound should be less than upper bound
.)
ProgramExample
When X10= On, the command is executed and one of M10~M12 will be On. When
X10=Off, the command is not executed but the state of M10~M12 before X10=Off is
kept. X10
M10
TZCP D0 D10 D20 M10
M11
M12
ON when
ON when
ON when
API Applicable models
ES EP EH162 TADD
P Time Addition -
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS1 S2 D Note: Operand S1, S2, D occupies 3 continuous devices.
Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
TADD Continuous execution TADDP Pulse
execution
32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1020 (Zero flag)
M1022 (Carry flag)
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-38
CommandExplanation
: Time augend : Time addend : Addition result
+ = . The time data in the register specified by is added to
the time data in the register specified by and the addition result is stored in the
register specified by .
If the time data in , exceeds the range, it will result in “operation error”. At this time, the command won’t be executed and M1067=On, M1068=On, records error
code 0E1A (HEX) in D1067.
If the addition result is in a value greater than 24 hours, the Carry flag M1022=On. The
value of the result shows in is the time remaining above 24 hours. If the addition result is equal to 0 (zero, 0 hour, 0 minute, 0 second), the Zero flag
M1020= On.
ProgramExample
When X10= On, the command is executed. Add the time data specified by D0~D2 and
D10~D12 and store the result in the register specified by D20~D22.
X10TADD D0 D10 D20
8
20
6406
14
265010
08:10:20 06:40:06 14:50:26
If the addition result is in a value greater than 24 hours, the Carry flag M1022=On.
X10TADD D0 D10 D20
30
11308
6
381040
18:40:30 11:30:08 06:10:38
18
API Applicable models
ES EP EH163 TSUB
P Time Subtraction -
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS1 S2 D Note: Operand S1, S2, D occupies 3 continuous devices.
Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support this command (TSUB, TSUBP).
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
TSUB Continuous execution TSUBP Pulse
execution
32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1020 (Zero flag)
M1021 (Borrow flag)
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual
9-39
CommandExplanation
: Time Minuend : Time Subtrahend : Subtraction result
− = . The time data in the register specified by is subtracted
from the time data in the register specified by and the result is stored in the
register specified by .
If the time data in , exceeds the range, it will result in “operation error”. At this time, the command won’t be executed and M1067=On, M1068=On, records error
code 0E1A (HEX) in D1067.
If the subtraction result is a negative value (less than 0), the Zero flag M1020= On.
The value of the result shows in is the time remaining below 0 (zero) hour. If the subtraction result is equal to 0 (zero, 0 hour, 0 minute, 0 second), the Zero flag
M1020= On.
Except using API 166 TRD command, MOV command also can be used to move the
special register D1315 (Hours), D1314 (Minutes), D1313 (Seconds) to the three
registers specified to read the current time of real time clock.
ProgramExample
When X10= On, the command is executed. The time data specified by D10~D12 is
subtracted from the time data specified by D0~D2 and the result is stored in the
register specified by D20~D22.
X10TSUB D0 D10 D20
14308
5
574920
20:20:05 14:30:08 05:49:57
20
5
If the subtraction result is a negative value (less than 0), the borrow flag M1021= On.
X10TSUB D0 D10 D20
191115 15
920
05:20:30 19:11:15 10:09:15
5
30
10
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-40
API Applicable modelsES EP EH166
TRD P Time Data Read
-
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
D Note: Operand D occupies 7 continuous devices.
Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
TRD Continuous execution TRDP Pulse
execution
32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1016, M1017, M1076
(Please refer the footnote for detail.)
CommandExplanation
: The device stored the reading current time of perpetual calender A perpetual calender clock is built in the DVP-EH/EP series PLC and this clock
provide year (A.D.), week, month, date, hours, minutes and seconds total 7 data
devices stored in D1319~D1313. The function of TRD command is for program
designer to read the current time of perpetual calender directly and store the reading
data in the 7 data registers specified by . D1319 is read as a two digit number and this setting can be change to a four digit
number, please refer the footnote of API 167 TWR command for the detail.
ProgramExample
When X0=On, read the current time of perpetual calender to the specified register
D0~D6.
The content of D1318: 1 is indicated Monday, 2 is indicated Tuesday,…, 7 is indicated
Sunday.
D0TRDX0
Special D
device Meaning Content General D device Meaning
D1319 Year (A.D.) 00~99 D0 Year (A.D.)
D1318 Day (Mon.~Sun.) 1~7 D1 Day
(Mon.~Sun.) D1317 Month 1~12 D2 Month D1316 Date 1~31 D3 Date D1315 Hours 0~23 D4 Hours
D1314 Minutes 0~59 D5 Minutes
D1313 Seconds 0~59 D6 Seconds
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual
9-41
Footnote
Error Flag of the real time clock built in DVP-EH/EP series PLC: Device Name Function
M1016 year display of perpetual calender
It displays 2 right-most digit number of year of D1319 when it is Off. It displays (2000+ 2 right-most digit number of year of D1319) when it is On.
M1017 ±30 seconds correction
It will correct when it is from Off→On. (if it is 0-29 seconds, it will reset to 0. If it is 30-59 seconds, add 1 to minute and set 0 to second)
M1076 perpetual calender fault
It will be On when setting is out of range or run out of battery. (it only check when power is on)
Device Name Range D1313 Second 0-59 D1314 Minue 0-59 D1315 Hour 0-23 D1316 Day 1-31 D1317 Month 1-12 D1318 Week 1-7 D1319 Year 0-99 (two right-most digit number of year) The method to correct perpetual calender:
There are two methods to correct built-in API perpetual calender:
1. specified command to correct
please refer to command TWR (API 167) for reference.
2. setting by peripheral
using WPLSoft (software to edit ladder diagram) to set
Display four digit number of year:
1. It usually displays 2 digit number of year (for example: only display 03 for year
2003). If you want to display 4 digit number, please key in following program at the
start of program. M1002
SET M1016 display 4 digit number for year
2. It will display 4 bits (two right-most digit number + 2000) to replace original 2 digit
number.
3. If you want to write new time setting in 4 digit number display mode, only 2 digit
number you can write in and its range is “00-99” which corresponds to year
“2000-2099”. For example, 00=year 2000, 50=year 2050 and 99=year 2099.
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-42
API Applicable modelsES EP EH167
TWR P Time Data Write In
-
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S Note: Operand D occupies 7 continuous devices.
Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
TWR Continuous execution TWRP Pulse
execution
32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1016, M1017, M1076 Please refer the footnote of API 166 TRD command.
CommandExplanation
: The device stored the new setting time of perpetual calender A perpetual calender clock is built in the DVP-EH/EP series PLC. This command can
be used to write the correct current time in the built-in perpetual calender clock when
adjusting the built in perpetual calender.
When executing this command, new setting time will be written in the internal
perpetual calender clock immediately. Therefore, please notice that the written-in new
setting time if match the current time then when executing this command.
If the time data in exceeds the range, it will result in “operation error”. At this time, the command won’t be executed and M1067=On, M1068=On, records error
code 0E1A (HEX) in D1067.
ProgramExample
1
When X0= On, write the correct current time in the built-in perpetual calender clock.
D20TWRPX0
General D device Meaning Content Special D
device Meaning
D20 Year (A.D.) 00~99 D1319 Year (A.D.)
D21 Day (Mon.~Sun.) 1~7 D1318 Day
(Mon.~Sun.) D22 Month 1~12 D1317 Month
D23 Date 1~31 D1316 Date
D24 Hours 0~23 D1315 Hours
D25 Minutes 0~59 D1314 Minutes
New
setting time
D26 Seconds 0~59 D1313 Seconds
Real Tim
e Clock
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual
9-43
ProgramExample
2
Set the current time of perpetual calender and adjust the time to 2002/03/23, Tuesday,
15:27:30 (please refer the following program example).
The content of D0~D6 is the new setting time of perpetual calender.
When X10= On, then can change the current time of perpetual calender clock to
setting time.
When X11=On every time, the perpetual calender clock will perform the ±30 seconds
correction. “Correction” means that if the second hand of perpetual calender colock is
located between 1~29, the second time will be automatically calculated as “0” (zreo)
second and the minute time won’t change. However, if the second hand of perpetual
calender colock is located between 30~59, the second time will also be automatically
calculated as “0” (zreo) second but the minute time will increase 1 minute.
X10MOV K02 D0
MOV K2 D1
MOV K3 D2
MOV K26 D3
MOV K15 D4
MOV K27 D5
MOV K30 D6
TWR D0
M1017
X11
Year (2002)
Day (Tuesday)
Month(March)
Date
Hours
Minutes
Seconds
Write the setting time in the perpetual calender
30 seconds correction
Footnote
Using WPLSoftsoftware also can set the time of perpetual calender.
The year (A.D.) display four digit number:
1. The year usually only dispaly two digit number (for example, year 1998 only
display 98). But this can be changed to a four digit number by setting the following
program during the first program scan. M1002
MOV K2000 D1018 The year dispaly four digit number
2. The year display will switch from two digit number to four digit number after the first
scan program when PLC is running. K2,000 in the command is a fix value.
3. If the new setting time is desired to be written in under the four digit number mode,
also only two digit number can be written in. The range for the year of two digit
number is 0~99. Hence, the corresponding range for the year of four digit number
is 1980~2079.
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-44
For example:
80(a two digit number) is equal to 1980(a four digit number)
99(a two digit number) is equal to 1999(a four digit number)
00(a two digit number) is equal to 2000 (a four digit number)
79(a two digit number) is equal to 2079 (a four digit number) API Applicable models
ES EP EH169 D HOUR
Hour Meter -
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS1 S2 D Note: Operand S only can use 16-bit command when using F
device. Operand D1 occupies 2 continuous devices. Refer to each model specification for usage range. Command HOUR can be used for four times in program.
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
HOUR Continuous execution - -
32-bit command
DHOUR Continuous execution - -
Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: setting time for turning on and unit is hour. Its setting range is
K1~K32,767. : current time suring counting and unit is hour. Its setting range is
K1~K32,767. : output device. +1 saves current time that less than one hour and unit is second. Its setting range is K0~K3,599.
If using input contact to be timer, output device will be On when attaining setting time
(unit is hour). It can provide user a timer for managing machine operation or maintain.
After output device is On, timer will keep on counting.
When 16-bit timer counts up to max. value (32,767 hours and 3,599 seconds) of
16-bit, it will stop. If you want to recount, and +1 need to clear to 0.
- +3 need to clear to 0. When 32-bit timer counts up to max. value (2,147,483,647 hours and 3,599 seconds)
of 16-bit, it will stop. If you want to recount, - +3 need to clear to 0.
ProgramExample
1
For 16-bit command: When X0=On, Y10 will turns On and start to count time. When
the time reaches 100 hours, Y0 will turns On and D0 will record the current time (unit
is hour, but if D0 is less than one hour, unit will be second and its range is 0~3599).
HOUR
Y10
K100 Y0D0Y10
X0
ProgramExample
2
For 32-bit command: When X0=On, Y10 will turns On and start to count time. When
the time reaches 40000 hours, Y0 will turns On. D0 and D1 will record the current time
(unit is hour). If current time is less than one hour, D2 will record the current time (unit:
second).
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual
9-45
DHOUR
Y10
K40000 Y0D0Y10
X0
API Applicable models
ES EP EH170 D GRY
P BIN GRAY CODE -
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS D Note: Operands S and D only can use 16-bit command when
using F device. Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
GRY Continuous execution GRYP Pulse
execution
32-bit command (9 STEPS)
DGRY Continuous execution DGRYP Pulse
execution Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Source device : Device which store Gray code
The BIN value in the specified device by is converted to the GRAY CODE
equivalent and the converted result is stored in the area specified by .
The range of that can be converted to the GRAY CODE is shown as follows: 16-bit command :0~32,767
32-bit command :0~2,147,483,647
If the BIN value is outside the range shown above, it is determined as “Operation Error”.
At this time, the command won’t be executed and M1067=On, M1068=On, records error
code 0E1A (HEX) in D1067.
ProgramExample
When X0=On, constant K 6513 is converted to the GRAY CODE and stored in the
K4Y20. X0
GRY K6513 K4Y20
0 0 0 1 1 10 0 0 1 1 1 10 0 0b15 b0
K6513=H1971
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1111111
K4Y20
Y37 Y20GRAY6513
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-46
API Applicable modelsES EP EH171 D
GBIN P GRAY CODE BIN
-
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
GBIN Continuous execution GBINP Pulse
execution
32-bit command (9 STEPS)
DGBIN Continuous execution DGBINP Pulse
execution Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Source device which store GRAY CODE : Device which store converted BIN value
The GRAY CODE value in the specified device by is converted to the BIN value
equivalent and the converted result is stored in the area specified by . This command can be used to read the value from an absolute position type encoder
(it is generally a gray code encoder) which is connected to PLC inputs. Convert the
value to the BIN value and store it in the specified register.
Program scan time plus input response time is equal to the output delay time specified
by . If the source is set to inputs X0~X17, it can speed up the input response time by using
REFF command (API151) or D1020 (adjust input response time).
The range of that can be converted to the GRAY CODE is shown as follows: 16-bit command :0~32,767
32-bit command :0~2,147,483,647
If the GRAY CODE value is outside the range shown above, it is determined as “Operation Error”.
ProgramExample
When X20=On, the GRAY CODE value in the absolute position type encoder
connected to X0~X17 inputs is converted to BIN value and stored in D10. X20
GBIN K4X0 D10
0 0 0 1 10 11 10 0 0
b15 b0
H1971=K6513 0 0 0 0 0 0 111111
X17 X0
GRAY6513
K4X0
0 1 0 1
0 0 1 0
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual
9-47
API Applicable modelsES EP EH180
MAND P Matrix AND
- -
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1 S2 D n Note: specific range of operand n is 1~256.
For EP series, when operands S1, S2 and D designate KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS, n can only be 4. Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (9 STEPS)
MAND Continuous execution MANDP Pulse
execution
32-bit command (17 STEPS) - - - - Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: matrix source device 1. : matrix source device 2. : Area where
calculated result is stored : matrix length
Do matix AND operation to matix source device 1 and 2 by length of and save
the result in . The operation rule of matix AND is: bit is 1 when 2 bits are all 1 otherwise it is 0.
ProgramExample
When X0=On, do MAND and matrix AND operation to 3 rows (D0-D2) of 16-bit
register and 3 rows (D10-D12) of 16-bit register. Then save the result in 3 rows
(D20-D22) of 16-bit register. X0
MAND D0 D10 D20 K3
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 0 0 0
b15 b0
MAND
1 1 0 0 01110 00000 00
1 1 0 0 01110 00000 00
1 1 0 0 01110 00000 00
1 1 0 0 010 00000 00
1 1 0 0 010 00000 00
1 1 0 0 010 00000 00
0 00 00 0
BeforeExecution
AfterExecution
Footnote
Explanation for matrix command:
1. A matix is made up of 1 and above continuous 16-bit registers. The register
number that made up matrix is called matrix length n. There are 16 X n bits (dots)
for a matix and a bit (dot) once for a oprand unit.
2. 16 X n bits (serial number b0 – b16n-1) will be regarded as a set of a serial single
point for matrix command. Thus, operate with a specific point in the set not value.
3. The matrix command is convenient and important application command for dealing
with single point to multi-points or multi-point to multi-point, such as move, copy,
compare, search, etc.
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-48
4. It usually needs a 16-bit register to designate one point of 16 X n points during
marix operation. This regsiter calls Pr (pointer). The setting range is 0 – 16n-1 and
correspond to b0 – b16n-1 in matrix individually.
5. There are actions: shift left, shift right or rotate during operation. Large number is
defined to left and small number is defined to right as shown in the following.
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
1 1 0 10 0 0 0 0 00 0 1 1 0 0
1 1 0 10 0 0 0 0 00 0 1 1 0 0
b0
b16
b32b31
b15
b47
D0
D1
D2
b16n-1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
Left Rightwidth is 16-bit
Dn-1
6. Fixed width of matrix is 16-bit.
7. Pr: matrix pointer. If Pr is 15, it means designated point is b15.
8. Matrix length is n and n is 1-256.
Example: The matrix that is made up of D0 and n=3, D0=HAAAA, D1=H5555,
D2=HAAFF
C15 C14 C13 C12 C11 C10 C9 C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
R0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 D0R1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 D1R2 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 D2
Example: The matrix that is made up of K2X0 and n=3, K2X0=H37, K2X10=H68,
K2X20=H45 C15 C14 C13 C12 C11 C10 C9 C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
R0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 X0~X7 R1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 X10~X17R2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 X20~X27
It needs to fill 0 to R0(C15-C8), R1(C15-C8), R2(C15-C8) once the value is empty.
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual
9-49
API Applicable modelsES EP EH181
MOR P Matrix OR
- -
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1 S2 D n Note: usage range of operand n is 1~256.
For EP series, when operands S1, S2 and D designate KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS, n can only be 4. Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (9 STEPS)
MOR Continuous execution MORP Pulse
execution
32-bit command (17 STEPS) - - - - Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: matrix source device 1. : matrix source device 2. : Area where
calculated result is stored : matrix length
Do matix OR operation to matix source device 1 and 2 by length of and save
the result in . The operation rule of matrix OR is: bit is 1 when one of 2 bits is 1 and only 2 bits are 0
bit will be 0.
ProgramExample
When X0=On, do MOR and matrix OR operation to 3 rows (D0-D2) of 16-bit register
and 3 rows (D10-D12) of 16-bit register. Then save the result in 3 rows (D20-D22) of
16-bit register. X0
MOR D0 D10 D20 K3
1
11 0 00 1100 00
11 0 00 1100 00
11 0 00 1100 00
0 10 10 10 10 10 10 1010 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
11
1
11
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
11 0 01100
11 0 01100
11 0 01100
1
11
1
11
1
11
1
11
11 1111
11
11
11
b15 b0
MOR BeforeExecution
AfterExecution
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-50
API Applicable modelsES EP EH182
MXOR P Matrix XOR
- -
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1 S2 D n Note: usage range of operand n is 1~256. For EP series, when operands S1, S2 and D designate KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS, n can only be 4.
Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (9 STEPS)
MXOR Continuous execution MXORP Pulse
execution
32-bit command (17 STEPS) - - - - Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: matrix source device 1. : matrix source device 2. : Area where
calculated result is stored : matrix length
Do matix XOR operation to matix source device 1 and 2 by length of and save
the result in . The operation rule of matrix XOR is: bit is 1 when 2 bits are different otherwise it is 0.
ProgramExample
When X0=On, do MXOR and matrix XOR operation to 3 rows (D0-D2) of 16-bit
register and 3 rows (D10-D12) of 16-bit register. Then save the result in 3 rows
(D20-D22) of 16-bit register. X0
MXOR D0 D10 D20 K3
BeforeExecution
AfterExecution
1
11 0 00 1100 0011 0 00 1100 00
11 0 00 1100 00
0 10 10 10 10 10 10 1010 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
11
1
11
1
00
0
11
1
1
1
1
1 0 01001 0 0100
1 0 0100
11
1
11
1
11 111
1
1
11
1
1
1
00
0
00
0
00
0
00
0
b15 b0
MXOR
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual
9-51
API Applicable modelsES EP EH183
MXNR P Matrix XNR
- -
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1 S2 D n Note: usage range of operand n is 1~256. For EP series, when operands S1, S2 and D designate KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS, n can only be 4.
Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (9 STEPS)
MXNR Continuous execution MXNRP Pulse
execution
32-bit command (17 STEPS) - - - - Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: matrix source device 1. : matrix source device 2. : Area where
calculated result is stored : matrix length
Do matix XNR operation to matix source device 1 and 2 by length of and save
the result in . The operation rule of matrix XNR is: bit is 1 when 2 bits are the same otherwise it is 0.
ProgramExample
When X0=On, do MXNR and matrix XNR operation to 3 rows (D0-D2) of 16-bit
register and 3 rows (D10-D12) of 16-bit register. Then save the result in 3 rows
(D20-D22) of 16-bit register. X0
MXNR D0 D10 D20 K3
BeforeExecution
AfterExecution
1
11 0 00 1100 00
11 0 00 1100 0011 0 00 1100 00
0 10 10 10 10 10 10 1010 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
111
111
0
00
111
111
1 0 00
1 0 001 0 00
1
11
111
111
000
000
000
000
000
1
11
1
11
1
11
1
11
b15 b0
MXNR
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-52
API Applicable modelsES EP EH184
MINV P Matrix Inverse
- -
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S D n Note: usage range of operand n is 1~256.
For EP series, when operands S1, S2 and D designate KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS, n can only be 4. Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
MINV Continuous execution MINVP Pulse
execution 32-bit command (13 STEPS)
- - - - Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Matrix source device : result : matrix length
Do matix inverse operation to matix source device 1 by length of and save the
result in .
ProgramExample
When X0=On, do MINV operation to 3 rows (D0-D2) of 16-bit register and 3 rows
(D10-D12) of 16-bit register. Then save the result in 3 rows (D20-D22) of 16-bit register.X0
MINV D0 D20 K3
BeforeExecution
AfterExecution
0
0
0
111
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
111
1
1
1
0
0
0
11
1
0
0
0
11
1
0
0
0
11
1
0
0
0
11
1
0
0
0
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1010 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
b15 b0
MINV
API Applicable models
ES EP EH185 MCMP
P Matrix Compare - -
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS1 S2 D n Note: usage range of operand n is 1~256. For EP series, when operands S1, S2 and D designate KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS, n can only be 4.
Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (9 STEPS)
MCMP Continuous execution MCMPP Pulse
execution
32-bit command (17 STEPS) - - - - Flag: Please refer to explanation for
M1088-M1092.
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual
9-53
CommandExplanation
: matrix source device 1. : matrix source device 2. : Area where
calculated result is stored : pointer Pr, save target address.
For each comparison, it will compare each bit of with from address Pr.
To find the address of different value and save the address in to complete this comparison.
You can find the result of comparison from comparison flag M1088. If the same,
M1088=1 and M1088=0 for difference. Once comparsion attains, it will stop
comparing immediately and set bit search flag M1091=1. When comparison attains
the last bit, matrix search end flag M1089 will be On and comparison attained number
is saved in . For next scan period, it will start comparing from the first bit and set
matrix search start flag M1090=1. When value exceeds the usage range, point error flag M1092 =1.
It usually needs a 16-bit register to designate one of 16n points in matrix to operate.
This register is called pointer, Pr. This is designated by user and the range is 0-16n-1
that correspond to bit b0 – b16n-1 individually. You should avoid to change Pr in
operation to affect correct comparison search. If Pr value exceeds this range, matrix
pointer error flag M1092 will be 1 and this command won’t be executed.
Matrix search end flag M1089 and set bit search flag M1091 will be 1 at the same
time.
ProgramExample
When X0 is from Off→On, matrix search start falg M1090=0 thus it will start comparing
to find the different bit from the bit that present value +1. (M1088=0 means difference) When present value of pointer D20=2, it can get following four results ( , , , )
when X0 is executed from Off→On for four times. D20=5, matrix bit search flag M1091=1, matrix search end flag M1089=0. D20=45, matrix bit search flag M1091=1, matrix search end flag M1089=0. D20=47, matrix bit search flag M1091=0, matrix search end flag M1089=1. D20=1, matrix bit search flag M1091=1, matrix search end flag M1089=0. X0
MCMPP D0 D10 D20K3
b0
1 0 11000
1 0 00 11000
1 0 00 1100
111
111
111
D202
111
000
000
111
10 10 10 10 10 1 10 110 10 10 10 10 10 10 1010 1 10 10 10 10 10 10
b47
b0
MCMP
b47
b0
0
0 1
1
1 0
pointer
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-54
Footnote
Explanation for flag signal
M1088: matrix comparison flag, if the result of comparison is the same, M1088=1,
otherwise M1088=0.
M1089: matrix search end flag, when comparing to the last bit, M1089=1.
M1090: matrix search start flag, start comparing from the first bit, M1090=1.
M1091: matrix bit search flag, it will stop comparing once comparison attained,
M1091=1.
M1092: matrix pointer error flag, pointer Pr exceeds that range, M1092=1.
API Applicable models
ES EP EH186 MBRD
P Matrix Bit Read - -
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS D n Note: usage range of operand n is 1~256. For EP series, when operands S1, S2 and D designate KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS, n can only be 4. Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
MBRD Continuous execution MBRDP Pulse
execution 32-bit command (9 STEPS)
- - - - Flag: Please refer to explanation for
M1089-M1095
CommandExplanation
: matrix source device. : matrix length : pointer Pr, save target address.
When executing command, it will start to see if M1094 (matrix pointer clear flag) is On.
If it is On, pointer will be cleared to 0 and read from the 0 bit and read On/Off state of each bit to M1095 (matrix rotate/shift/output/carry). It will see if M1093
(matrix pointer increase flag) is On after reading a bit. And increase 1 to if it is
On. When reading to the last bit, M1089 (matrix search end flag) =On, pointer records the number of read bit and then end executing this command.
Pr (pointer) is designated by user and the range is 0-16n-1 that correspond to bit b0 –
b16n-1 individually. If Pr value exceeds this range, matrix pointer error flag M1092 will
be 1 and this command won’t be executed.
ProgramExample
When X0 is from Off→On, pointer clear flag M1094=On, matrix pointer increase flag
M1093=1, and increase 1 to pointer Pr after reading a bit.
When present value of pointer D20=45, it can get following three results ( , , )
when X0 is executed from Off→On for three times.
D20=46, matrix rotate/shift/output carry flag M1095=0, matrix search end flag
M1089=0.
D20=47, matrix rotate/shift/output carry flag M1095=1, matrix search end flag
M1089=0.
D20=47, matrix rotate/shift/output carry flag M1095=1, matrix search end flag
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual
9-55
M1089=1. X0
MBRD D0 D10 D20K3
b0
D2045
10 10 10 10 10 1 10 1
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
1 10 10 10 10 10 10
b470
0 1
0 1pointer
Footnote
Explanation for flag signal
M1089: matrix search end flag, when comparing to the last bit, M1089=1.
M1092: matrix pointer error flag, pointer Pr exceeds that range, M1092=1.
M1093: matrix pointer increase flag, add 1 to present pointer.
M1094: matrix pointer clear flag, clear present pointer to 0.
M1095: matrix rotate/shift/output carry flag.
API Applicable models
ES EP EH187 MBWR
P Matrix Bit Write - -
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS D n Note: usage range of operand n is 1~256. For EP series, when operands S1, S2 and D designate KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS, n can only be 4. Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
MBWR Continuous execution MBWRP Pulse
execution 32-bit command (9 STEPS)
- - - - Flag: Please refer to explanation for
M1089-M1096
CommandExplanation
: matrix source device. : matrix length : pointer Pr, save target address.
When executing command, it will start to see if M1094 (matrix pointer clear flag) is On.
If it is On, pointer will be cleared to 0 and write M1096 (matrix shift/input
complement flag) in the 0 bit of . It will see if M1093 (matrix pointer increase flag)
is On after writing a bit. And increase 1 to if it is On. When writing to the last bit,
M1089 (matrix search end flag) =On, pointer records the number of read bit
and then end executing this command. If exceeds range, M1092=1. Pr (pointer) is designated by user and the range is 0-16n-1 that correspond to bit b0 –
b16n-1 individually. If Pr value exceeds this range, matrix pointer error flag M1092 will
be 1 and this command won’t be executed.
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-56
ProgramExample
When X0 is from Off→On, pointer clear flag M1094=On, matrix pointer increase flag
M1093=1, and increase 1 to pointer Pr after writing a bit.
When present pointer is D20=45, M1094 (matrix shift/input complement flag) =1.
When X0 is executed once from Off→On, it can get following result: X0
MBWRP D0 D20K3
1b0
0 10 10 10 10 10 10 110 10 10 10 10 10 10 1010 1 10 10 10 10 10 10
b47
D2045
1
1 M1096
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 110 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
10 1 10 10 10 10 10 10
1
0
1b47
D2045
Before Execution
AfterExecution
pointer
pointer
(Matrix shift/input complement flag)
Footnote
Explanation for flag signal
M1089: matrix search end flag, when comparing to the last bit, M1089=1.
M1092: matrix pointer error flag, pointer Pr exceeds that range, M1092=1.
M1093: matrix pointer increase flag, add 1 to present pointer.
M1094: matrix pointer clear flag, clear present pointer to 0.
M1096: matrix shift/input complement flag
API ☺ Applicable models
ES EP EH188 MBS
P Matrix Bit Shift - -
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS D n Note: usage range of operand n is 1~256. For EP series, when operands S1, S2 and D designate KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS, n can only be 4. Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
MBS Continuous execution MBSP Pulse
execution 32-bit command (9 STEPS)
- - - - Flag: Please refer to explanation for
M1095-M1097
CommandExplanation
: matrix source device. : matrix length : result.
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual
9-57
This command is used to shift to left or right by matrix length. M1097=0 moves to left and M1097=1 moves to right. It needs to use the state of M1096 (complement
flag) to fill the empty bit (shift to left is b0 and shift to right is b16n-1) due to shiftment
for each bit. If there is one more bit due to shiftment (shift to left is b16n-1 and shift to
right is b0), it needs to send the state to M1095 (carry flag) and save the result in
. The most use of this command is pulse execution command (MBSP).
ProgramExample
1
When X0=On, M1097=Off means shift matrix to left. Setting complement flag
M1096=0, shift 16-bit registers D0-D2 to left and save the result in 16-bit register
D20-D22 and carry flag M1095 will be 1.
X0RST
MBSP D0 D20 K3
M1097
Before Execution
After shifting to left
1b0010 10 10 10 10 10 1
1 010 10 10 10 10 10 10
1 01 10 10 10 10 10 10
b150
0
0
M1096
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 0
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
10 1 10 10 10 10 10 100
0
1
M1095
M1095
MBS
M1097=0
ProgramExample
2
When X1=On, M1097=On to shift matrix to right. Setting complement flag M1096=1,
shift 16-bit registers D0-D2 to right and save the result to 16-bit registers D20-D22 and
carry flag M1095 will be 0.
X1M1097
MBSP D0 D20 K3
Before Execution
1b0010 10 10 10 10 10 1
1 010 10 10 10 10 10 101 01 10 10 10 10 10 10
b150
0
0
M1096
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 010 10 10 10 10 10 10 1010 1 10 10 10 10 10 100
0
1
M1095
M1095
MBS
M1097=0
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-58
Footnote
Explanation for flag signal
M1095: matrix rotate/shift/output carry flag
M1096: matrix shift/input complement flag
M1097: matrix rotate/shift direction flag
API ☺ Applicable models
ES EP EH189 MBR
P Matrix Bit Rotate - -
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS D n Note: usage range of operand n is 1~256. For EP series, when operands S1, S2 and D designate KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS, n can only be 4. Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
MBR Continuous execution MBRP Pulse
execution 32-bit command (9 STEPS)
- - - - Flag: Please refer to explanation for
M1095, M1097
CommandExplanation
: matrix source device. : matrix length : result.
This command is used to rotate to right or left by matrix length. M1097=0 moves to left and M1097=1 moves to right. The empty bit (rotate to left is b0 and shift
to right is b16n-1) due to rotation will be filled by the bit (rotate to left is b16n-1 and
shift to right is b0) that rotated out and save the result in . The bit that is rotated out is not only used to fill the empty bit but also send its state to carry flag M1095.
The most use of this command is pulse execution command (MBRP).
ProgramExample
1
When X0=On, M1097=Off means rotate matrix to left. To rotate 16-bit registers D0-D2
to left and save the result in 16-bit register D20-D22. The carry flag M1095 will be 1.
X0
MBRP D0 D20 K3
RST M1097
Before Execution
After rotating to left
1b0010 10 10 10 10 10 1
1 010 10 10 10 10 10 101 01 10 10 10 10 10 10
b15
0
0
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
10 1 10 10 10 10 10 100
0
1
M1095
M1095
MBRM1097=0
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual
9-59
ProgramExample
2
When X1=On, M1097=On to rotate matrix to right. To rotate 16-bit registers D0-D2 to
right and save the result to 16-bit registers D20-D22 . The carry flag M1095 will be 0.
X1
MBRP D0 D20 K3
M1097
Before Execution
After rotating to right
M1097=0
1b0010 10 10 10 10 10 1
1 010 10 10 10 10 10 101 01 10 10 10 10 10 10
b15
0
0
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1010 1 10 10 10 10 10 100
0 0
M1095
M1095
MBR
Footnote
Explanation for flag signal
M1095: matrix rotate/shift/output carry flag
M1097: matrix rotate/shift direction flag
API Applicable models
ES EP EH190 MBC
P Matrix Bit State Count - -
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS D n Note: usage range of operand n is K1~K256. For EP series, when operands S1, S2 and D designate KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS, n can only be 4.
Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (7 STEPS)
MBC Continuous execution MBCP Pulse
execution 32-bit command (13 STEPS)
- - - - Flag: Please refer to explanation for
M1098, M1099
CommandExplanation
: Matrix source device : result : matrix length
To count number of bit 1 or bit 0 by matrix length and number in . When M1098=1, count the number of bit 1. And count the number of bit 0 when
M1098=0. If counting result is 0, M1099=1.
ProgramExample
When X10=On, it counts bit 1 number of D0-D2 and save the total number in D10. When
M1098=0, it counts bit 0 number of D0-D2 and save the total number in D10. X10
MBC D0 K3 D10
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-60
1 1 1 1 1 10 11 1 1 1 1 10 101 1 1 1 1 10 10
0
12
111
111
111
111
111
000
000
M1098=0
36 M1098=1
Footnote
Explanation for matrix command:
M1098: matrix count “bit 1” or “bit 0” flag
M1099: it is On when counted result is 0.
API Applicable models
ES EP EH196 HST
P High Speed Counter - -
Bit devices Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E FS Note: usage range of operand S is K0 (H0), K1(H1).
16-bit command (9 STEPS)
HST Continuous execution HSTP Pulse
execution
32-bit command (17 STEPS) - - - - Flag: M1015 high speed connected
timer action
CommandExplanation
: the ondition to stop high speed timer start
When =1, start high speed timer and set M1015=On, high speed timer starts and records present value in D1015. The min. unit of D1015 is 100us.
The range for D1015 to count is K0-K32767. When counting up to K32767, the next
count will be 0.
When =0, stop high speed timer and set M1015=Off, D1015 will stop counting immediately.
When is not 1 or 0, command HSTMR won’t act.
ProgramExample
When X10=On, M1015=On. It will start high speed timer and record present value in
D1015.
When X10=Off, M1015=Off. It will stop high speed timer.
X10HST K1
X10HST K0
9 Application Commands API 150-199
DVP-PLC Application Manual
9-61
Footnote
Explanation for flag signal
M1015: high speed timer start flag
D1015: high speed timer
This command doesn’t support for EH models. Following is the explanation for using
special M and special D directly.
1. It is only valid when PLC RUN.
2. When M1015=On, only start high speed timer D1015 as PLC executes END
command of that scan period. The min. unit of D1015 is 100us.
3. The range of D1015 is K0-K32767. When counting up to K32767, the next count will
be 0.
4. When M1015=Off, D1015 will stop counting in command END or HST.
This command doesn’t support for EP models. Following is the explanation for using
special M and special D directly.
1. It is only valid when PLC RUN.
2. When D1015=On, start high speed timer D1015 immediately. The min. unit of
D1015 is 100us.
3. The range of D1015 is K0-K32767. When counting up to K32767, the next count will
be 0.
4. When M1015=Off, D1015 will stop counting immediately.
10 Application Commands API 215-246
DVP-PLC Application Manual
10-1
API Applicable modelsES EP EH215~
217 D
LD#
The Contact Type Logic Operation LD#
-
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1 S2 Note: #: &, |, ^
Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
LD# Continuous execution - -
32-bit command (9 STEPS)
DLD# Continuous execution - -
Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Data source device 1 : Data source device 2
Compare the contents of and . To take “LD&” as an example, if the comparison result is not 0 , the contact is in continuity, and if it is 0 , the contact is in
discontinuity.
Command LD# could connect directly with the BUS.
API No. 16 -bit command
32 -bit command
Continuity condition
Discontinuity condition
215 LD& DLD& & ≠0 & =0 216 LD| DLD| | ≠0 | =0 217 LD^ DLD^ ^ ≠0 ^ =0
& : Logic “AND” operation
| : Logic “OR” operation
^ : Logic “XOR” operation
If the 32-bit length counter (C200~) is put into this command for comparison, be sure to
use the 32-bit command (DLD#). If the 16-bit command (LD#) is utilized, CPU will
determine it as “Program Error”, and the red “ERROR” indicator on the MPU panel will
be blinking.
ProgramExample
When the result that using the LD& (Logic “AND” operation) command to compare the
content of C0 and C10 is not equal to 0, Y10=ON.
When the result that using the LD| (Logic “OR” operation) command to compare the
content of D200 and D300 is not equal to 0 and X1=ON, Y10=ON and retain.
When the result that using the LD^ (Logic “XOR” operation) command to compare the
content of C201 and C200 is not equal to 0 or M3=ON, M50=ON.
M3DLD C201 C200 M50
LD C0 C10
LD D200 D300 SETX1
&
^
I Y011
Y10
10 Application Commands API 215-246
DVP-PLC Application Manual 10-2
API Applicable modelsES EP EH218~
220 D
AND#
The Series Connection Contact Type Logic Operation AND#
-
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1 S2 Note: #: &, |, ^
Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
AND# Continuous execution - -
32-bit command (9 STEPS)
DAND# Continuous execution - -
Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Data source device 1. : Data source device 2.
Compare the contents of and of . To take “AND&” as an example, if the comparison result is not 0, the contact is in continuity, and if it is 0, the contact is in
discontinuity.
The AND# command is used to connect to contact in series.
API No. 16 -bit command
32 -bit command
Continuity condition
Discontinuity condition
218 AND& DAND& & ≠0 & =0 219 AND| DAND| | ≠0 | =0 220 AND^ DAND^ ^ ≠0 ^ =0
& : Logic “AND” operation
| : Logic “OR” operation
^ : Logic “XOR” operation
If the 32-bit length counter (C200~) is put into this command for comparison, be sure to use
the 32-bit command (DAND#). Or if the 16-bit command (AND#) is utilized, CPU will
determine it as “Program Error”, and the red “ERROR” indicator on the MPU panel will be
blinking.
ProgramExample
When X0=ON, using the AND& (Logic “AND” operation) command to compare the content of
C0 and C10. If the result is not equal to 0, Y10=ON.
When X1=OFF, using the AND| (Logic “OR” operation) command to compare the content of
D10 and D0. If the result is not equal to 0, Y11=ON and retain.
When X2=ON, using the AND^ (Logic “XOR” operation) command to compare the content of
32-bit registers D200(D201) and D100(D101). If the result is not equal to 0 or
M3=ON,M50=ON.
10 Application Commands API 215-246
DVP-PLC Application Manual
10-3
M3DAND D200 D100 M50
AND C0 C10
AND D10 D0 SET
&
^
I Y11
Y10X0
X1
X2
API Applicable models
ES EP EH221~ 223
D OR#
The Parallel Connection Contact Type Logic Operation OR#
-
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1 S2 Note: #: &, |, ^
Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (5 STEPS)
OR# Continuous execution - -
32-bit command (9 STEPS)
DOR# Continuous execution - -
Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Data source device 1 : Data source device 2
Compare the contents of and of . Take ”OR&” as an example, if the comparison result is not 0, the contact is in continuity, and if it is 0, he contact is in
discontinuity.
Command OR# is used to connect to contact in parallel.
API No. 16 -bit
command
32 -bit
command
Continuity
condition
Discontinuity
condition
221 OR& DOR& & ≠0 & =0
222 OR| DOR| | ≠0 | =0
223 OR^ DOR^ ^ ≠0 ^ =0
& : Logic “AND” operation
| : Logic “OR” operation
^ : Logic “XOR” operation
If the 32-bit length counter (C200~) is put into this command for comparison, be sure
to use the 32-bit command (DOR#). Or if the 16-bit command (OR#) is utilized, CPU
will determine it as “Program Error” , and the red “ERROR” indicator on the MPU panel
will be blinking.
10 Application Commands API 215-246
DVP-PLC Application Manual 10-4
ProgramExample
When X1=ON, using the OR& (Logic “AND” operation) command to compare the
content of C0 and C10. If the result is not equal to 0, Y0=ON.
If both X2 and M30 are “ON”, or when using the OR| (Logic “OR” operation) command
to compare the content of D10 and D20 and the result is not equal to 0, or when using
the OR^ (Logic “XOR” operation) command to compare the content of D100 and D200
and the result is not equal to 0, M60=ON.
DOR D100 D200
OR C0 C10
DOR D10 D20
&
^
I
Y0
X2
X1
M30M60
API Applicable models
ES EP EH224~ 230
D LD*
The Contact Type Comparison LD*
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1 S2 Note: *: =, >, <, <>, ≦, ≧
Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (5 STEPS) LD*
Continuous execution - -
32-bit command (9 STEPS) DLD*
Continuous execution - -
Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Data source device 1 : Data source device 2
Compare the contents of and of . To take API 224 “LD=” as an example, if the comparison result is “=” , the contact is in continuity, and if it is “≠” , the contact is in
discontinuity.
Command LD*can connect to BUS directly.
API No. 16 -bit command
32 -bit command
Continuity condition
Discontinuity condition
224 LD= DLD= = ≠ 225 LD> DLD> > ≦ 226 LD< DLD< < ≧ 228 LD<> DLD<> ≠ = 229 LD<= DLD<= ≦ > 230 LD>= DLD>= ≧ <
When the left most bit, MSB (the 16-bit command: b15, the 32-bit command: b31), from
and is 1, this comparison value will be viewed as a negative value for comparison.
10 Application Commands API 215-246
DVP-PLC Application Manual
10-5
If the 32-bit length counter (C200~) is put into this command for comparison, be sure to
use the 32-bit command (DLD*). If the 16-bit command (LD*) is utilized, CPU will
determine it as “Program Error”, and the red “ERROR” indicator on the MPU panel will
be blinking.
ProgramExample
If the content of counter C10 is equal to K200, Y10=ON.
When the content of D200 is smaller or equal to K–30, and that X1=ON, Y11=ON and
retain.
If the content of C200 is smaller than K678,493 or when M3=ON, M50=ON.
LD= K200 C10
DLD> K678493 C200
M3
Y10
LD> D200 K-30X1
SET Y11
M50
API Applicable models
ES EP EH232~ 238
D AND*
The Series Connection Contact Type Comparison AND*
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1 S2 Note: *: =, >, <, <>, ≦, ≧
Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (5 STEPS) AND* Continuous
execution - -
32-bit command (9 STEPS) DAND* Continuous
execution - -
Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Data source device 1 : Data source device 2
Compare the contents of and of . To take API 232 “AND=” as an example, if the comparison result is “=” , the contact is in continuity, and if it is “≠” , the
contact is in discontinuity.
Command AND*is the comparison command that connect to contact in series.
API No. 16 -bit command
32 -bit command
Continuity condition
Discontinuity condition
232 AND= DAND= = ≠ 233 AND> DAND> > ≦ 234 AND< DAND< < ≧ 236 AND<> DAND<> ≠ = 237 AND<= DAND<= ≦ > 238 AND>= DAND>= ≧ <
10 Application Commands API 215-246
DVP-PLC Application Manual 10-6
When the left most bit, MSB (the 16-bit command: b15, the 32-bit command: b31),
from and is 1, this comparison value will be viewed as a negative value for comparison.
If the 32-bit length counter (C200~C254) is put into this command for comparison, be
sure to use the 32-bit command (DAND*). Or if the 16-bit command (AND*) is
utilized, CPU will determine it as “Program Error”, and the red “ERROR” indicator on
the MPU panel will be blinking.
ProgramExample
If X0=ON and that the current value of counter C10 equals K200, Y10=ON.
If X1=OFF and that the content of register D0 not equal to K–10, Y11=ON and retain.
If X2=ON and that the contents of the 32-bit registers D11 and D0 are smaller than
K678,493, M50=ON.
AND= K200 C10
DAND> K678493 D10
M3
Y10
AND<> K-10 D0 SET Y11
M50X2
X1
X0
API Applicable models
ES EP EH240~ 246
D OR*
The Parallel Connection Contact Type Comparison OR*
Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1 S2 Note: *: =, >, <, <>, ≦, ≧
Refer to each model specification for usage range.
16-bit command (5 STEPS) OR*
Continuous execution - -
32-bit command (9 STEPS) DOR*
Continuous execution - -
Flag: None
CommandExplanation
: Data source device 1. : Data source device 2.
Compare the contents of and of . Take API 240 (OR=) as an example, if the comparison result is “=”, the contact is in continuity, and if it is “≠”, the contact is in
discontinuity.
Command OR*is the comparison command that connect to contact in parallel.
10 Application Commands API 215-246
DVP-PLC Application Manual
10-7
API No. 16 -bit command
32 -bit command
Continuity condition
Discontinuity condition
240 OR= DOR= = ≠ 241 OR> DOR> > ≦ 242 OR< DOR< < ≧ 244 OR<> DOR<> ≠ = 245 OR<= DOR<= S1 ≦ S1 > 246 OR>= DOR>= S1 ≧ S1 <
When the left most bit, MSB (the 16-bit command: b15, the 32-bit command: b31),
from and is 1, this comparison value will be viewed as a negative value for comparison.
If the 32-bit length counter (C200~C254) is put into this command for comparison, be
sure to use the 32-bit command (DOR*). Or if the 16-bit command (OR*) is utilized,
CPU will determine it as “Program Error” , and the red “ERROR” indicator on the MPU
panel will be blinking.
ProgramExample
If X1=ON, or that the current value of counter C10 is equal to K200, Y0=ON.
If both X2 and M30 are “ON”, or if the contents of the 32-bit registers D101 and D100
are greater or equal to K100,000, M60=ON.
OR= K200 C10
DOR> D100 K100000
Y0
X2
X1
M30M60
=